JP2022060475A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.

SOLUTION: In a game machine, an electric generator winning hole is opened by winning a normal pattern winning lottery, and entry of game balls into the electric generator winning hole is permitted. A V winning hole is opened with entry of game balls into the electric generator winning hole as an opportunity, and a jackpot game is executed with entry of game balls into the V winning hole as an opportunity. The jackpot game is executed at an interval between openings of the electric generator winning hole when the electric generator winning hole is opened a plurality of times in a normal pattern winning game. In winning of a normal pattern winning lottery, a number with repeated symbols for suggesting the minimum expectation opening suggestion of the electric generator winning hole in a normal pattern winning game is displayed on a pattern display part 341. When the number of the minimum expectation opening times suggested by the pattern display part 341 is larger than the actual number of opening times of the electric generator winning hole, a revival performance is executed in ending of a jackpot game.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

As a pachinko gaming machine, there is a pachinko gaming machine in which a game ball is inserted into a starting port to perform a big hit lottery and a special symbol variable game for notifying the lottery result. In this type of pachinko gaming machine, when a jackpot lottery is won, a jackpot game that enables acquisition of a large number of gaming balls is executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-213044

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of attention and interest in the game to improve the player's motivation to play.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention and interest in a game and improving the player's motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first allowable state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means (the third electric accessory means) based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is established when the game ball enters the second entrance (384). The third game execution means (41) executed by controlling 391) and
Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area (317) set in the game board (31), it is determined whether or not to execute the first game, and it is determined that the first game is executed. In this case, the first game determining means (41) for determining the number of times the first switching game is executed (for example, 1 to 7 times) to be executed in the first game, and
The first switching game number suggesting means (51, 341) that suggests the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game determined by the first game determining means (41), and
The first game determined by the first game determining means (41) rather than the number of times the first switched game is executed in the first game suggested by the first switching game number suggesting means (51, 341). Notification effect execution means (51, 341) for executing a notification effect for notifying that the number of times the first switching game is executed in the game is large, and
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. It is characterized in that the third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games.

The perspective view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows the main part of the right side region in the game board shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a main part of the right side region of the game board shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the electric utility winning device along the X1-X1 cutting line of FIG. The figure for demonstrating the electric duty winning door of the electric duty winning apparatus of FIG. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device along the X2-X2 cutting line of FIG. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device along the X3-X3 cutting line of FIG. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device along the X4-X4 cutting line of FIG. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the X5-X5 cutting line of FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing pattern of the electric service winning door in the electric service winning device. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. A time chart showing an example of the relationship between the opening / closing timing of the electric winning door and the opening / closing timing of the variable winning door. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the performance information display device of a main control device schematically. The figure which shows the display example in the performance display monitor of a performance information display device. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of through-gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 22. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a hold command setting process executed in the through-gate process of FIG. 23. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a normal game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 25. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of data setting processing executed in the normal game control processing of FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a fluctuation start process executed in the normal game control process of FIG. 26. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game control process per normal figure executed in the main process of FIG. 25. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game control process per normal figure executed in the main process of FIG. 25. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a small hit game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 25. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a small hit game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 25. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 25. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 25. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 25. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the base information which is updated by the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a general-purpose game effect processing executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the voice lamp control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the voice lamp control device. The figure for demonstrating an example of the variable winning door of the variable winning apparatus of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the variable winning door of FIG. 47. The figure which shows another example (variant example 1) of a variable winning door. The figure for demonstrating the operation of the variable winning door of FIG. 49. The figure for demonstrating another example (modification example 2) of a variable winning apparatus. The figure for demonstrating another example (modification example 3) of a variable winning apparatus. The figure for demonstrating another example (modification example 4) of a variable winning apparatus. A time chart for explaining an opening / closing pattern of a variable winning door of the variable winning device of FIG. 53. It is a figure which shows an example of the time chart which shows the relationship between the game per hit figure executed by the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention, a small hit game and a big hit game. The figure which shows the screen transition example from the ending screen in the symbol display part in the ending of a jackpot game. The figure which shows the screen transition example for explaining the resurrection effect performed in the ending effect in a jackpot game. The figure which shows an example of the type distribution table per ordinary figure used in the main control device. The figure which shows an example of the relationship between the opening / closing pattern of the electric role winning opening / closing door of the electric role winning opening / closing door in a game per ordinary figure, and the opening interval of the electric role winning opening / closing door. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a fluctuation start process executed in the normal game control process of FIG. 26. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game control process per normal figure executed in the main process of FIG. 25. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game control process per normal figure executed in the main process of FIG. 25. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42. The figure which shows an example of the relationship between the type per normal figure and the combination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the symbol display part in a normal figure game. The figure which shows an example of the fluctuation stop screen in the symbol display part in a normal figure game. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game effect processing executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening interval of the electric winning combination opening / closing door of the electric winning combination winning device in the game per game executed by the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention and the big hit game is shown. figure. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 25. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 25. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 25. The figure which shows the modification of the time chart which shows the relationship between the opening interval of the electric service winning opening / closing door, and the jackpot game. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening interval of the electric winning combination opening / closing door of the electric winning combination winning device in the game per game executed by the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention and the big hit game is shown. figure. The figure which shows an example of the relationship between the opening / closing pattern of the electric role winning opening / closing door of the electric role winning opening / closing door in a game per ordinary figure, and the opening interval of the electric role winning opening / closing door. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening and closing pattern of the electric role winning door in the electric role winning device in the game per game executed by the gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the relationship between the opening / closing pattern of the electric role winning opening / closing door of the electric role winning opening / closing door in the game per ordinary figure, and the opening type of the electric role winning opening / closing door.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for the purpose of understanding the present invention. Further, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 46.

[Rough configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-back, left-right, and up-down expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-back direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine provided with a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided on an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other machines such as a spinning machine (slot machine), an arrange ball gaming machine, and a Jiyan ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine.

[Structure of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 13) that switches an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later according to the presence or absence of a pressing operation. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is an operation executed when the player performs an operation on the operation button 20 in a predetermined specific period, for example, when the effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 4). It is operated to execute button effects.

The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position of the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable to provide a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation of the touch key by a player. Further, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 is reflected in the operation button effect or the like in the normal drawing game effect.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a gaming ball from the gaming ball launching mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the firing handle 22 is operated by the player, the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that, for example, one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec. ..

The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a row. It is used to guide the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used to store the game balls that have become surplus in the upper plate 23.

The panel 25 is colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speaker 26 is a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and executes an audio output effect for outputting audio. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect in a normal drawing game effect or the like depending on a blinking mode such as a lighting color, lighting or extinguishing.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launch mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, the description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplification of the illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a through gate 317, an out opening 318, a variable display unit 34, a defined passage 35 (route defining means), and a main display. A section 36, an electric service winning device 37, a V winning device 38, and a variable winning device 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game ball that has not entered the general winning opening 313 is discharged from the out opening 318.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is formed on the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for launching the game ball supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, and the gaming ball is launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 to the gaming board 31. The game ball launch mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for launching a game ball by using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313 is provided in the lower center and directly under the through gate 317, and a game ball launched into the left area of the game board 31 and passing through the through gate 317 can enter. be. The general winning opening 313 and the out opening 318 are formed with openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. A general winning sensor 313a (see FIG. 13) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 313 is provided on the back side of the game board 31. Further, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313 and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 13).

The general winning sensor 313a and the out-ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 13) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of these sensors 313a and 318a are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls according to the detection result of the general winning sensor 313a. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of a game ball by the general winning sensor 313a may be referred to as winning. Similarly, the detection of the entry of a game ball by the electric service winning sensor 37a, the V winning sensor 38a, the normal winning sensor 38b, and the variable winning sensor 39a, which will be described later, may be referred to as winning. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 13). The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of launched game balls launched on the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and is provided directly above the general winning opening 313. The through gate 317 has a gate passage sensor 317a (see FIG. 13) that can individually detect a passing game ball. In the game board 31, a game ball launched in the left area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317. Then, when it is detected by the gate passage sensor 317a that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317, a lottery per drawing is used to determine whether or not to open the electric service winning opening 376 of the electric service winning device 37 described later. Is executed.

The general winning sensor 313a, the gate passing sensor 317a, and the out-ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 13) are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the entry of a game ball by another detection method. It may be any sensor.

The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visibly arranged through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the decorative symbol is varied and displayed according to the lottery result in the lottery per drawing performed by the main control unit 331 according to the passage of the game ball to the through gate 317. , And various things such as the normal drawing game effect that is executed in association with the variable display of the decorative pattern are executed. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by, for example, scrolling a plurality of types of decorative symbols with numbers "1" to "7" in order in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, a sub-design such as another character or a design may be displayed between the decorative symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-designs, and there are seven types of decorative symbols "1" to "7".

In the gaming machine 10, in the normal symbol game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the decorative symbols is stopped after the lapse of the preset variation display time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341. To. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the decorative symbols change along a preset variation direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of decorative symbols stops in order. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

When the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is completed, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which decorative symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of effective lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative symbol clearly indicates the lottery result in the lottery per drawing by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is "winning", a state in which three decorative symbols of the same type are lined up on the effective line is displayed, and it is clearly shown that the drawing is a hit. In addition, when the lottery result is "win", the type per normal figure is sorted into one of 1 to 7 per normal figure (see FIG. 15 (B)), but the type per normal figure is an effective line. It is specified by the combination of decorative patterns in. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "hit" and the type of normal figure is sorted to "1 per normal figure", the state in which the symbol combinations of "111" are lined up on the valid line is displayed. To. Similarly, "2 per Fuzu" is "222", "3 per Fuzu" is "333", "4 per Fuzu" is "444", and "5 per Fuzu" is "555", "Fuzu". In the case of "hit 6", "666" is displayed, and in the case of "normal figure 7", the state in which the symbol combinations of "777" are lined up on the effective line is displayed. On the other hand, when the lottery result is "out of reach", a state in which combinations of different decorative symbols are lined up on the effective line (for example, "323" (out of reach) or "723" (out of reach)) is displayed. ..

Further, in the normal drawing game, the normal drawing game effect is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 while the decorative symbol is variablely displayed as described above. The Fuzu game production suggests or clearly indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the Fuzu per lottery will be a win.

Further, the symbol display unit 341 urges the player to launch a game ball into, for example, the right side region of the game board 31 in a game per drawing in which the electric service winning opening 376 of the electric service winning device 37 described later is opened. An image is displayed, and an image showing that a game ball has been inserted into the electric service winning opening 376 of the electric service winning device 37, which will be described later, is displayed. In addition, when a game ball is inserted into the electric service winning opening 376, a special figure as to whether or not to execute a small hit game in which the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385 of the V winning device 38 described later are opened is executed. Although the lottery is executed, the lottery result of the lottery per special figure may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Further, in the small hit game in which the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385 of the V winning device 38 described later are opened, the symbol display unit 341 is, for example, a player who launches a game ball into the right region of the game board 31. Is displayed, and an image showing that the game ball has been inserted into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38, which will be described later, is displayed. Even in the small hit game, the lottery result of the special figure hit lottery may be continuously displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Further, in the jackpot game in which the variable winning opening 394 of the variable winning device 39 described later is opened, for example, an opening effect indicating that the jackpot game is started and a plurality of round games are executed on the symbol display unit 341. The opening / closing execution mode effect and the jackpot game effect including the ending effect indicating that the jackpot game is ended are displayed. Further, in the opening effect, the type of the jackpot game (8R jackpot game or 16R jackpot game), that is, the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning opening 394 may be displayed. Further, in the ending effect, after the end of the jackpot game, an image that clearly or suggests that the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed because the normal drawing hit is being executed, or the normal drawing. An image indicating or suggesting that the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is not opened or closed because the winning is completed may be displayed.

The defined passage 35 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 34 in the game board 31, and defines the movement path of the game ball launched in the right area of the game board 31 on the same path. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the defined passage 35 is integrally formed in a crank shape, for example, by using synthetic resin or the like. Of course, the defined passage 35 may be composed of a plurality of members. The entrance of the regulation passage 35 is arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31, and all the game balls launched in the right area of the game board 31 are introduced into the regulation passage 35, and the regulation passage 35 is moved toward the out port 354. do. Further, the defined passage 35 is provided with an opening for electric service winning, an opening for V winning 352, and an opening for variable winning 353. The electric service winning opening 351 allows the electric service winning door 371 to move in the front-rear direction D1 in the electric service winning device 37 described later, and the electric service winning door 371 is rearward in the game per game (first game). By opening the door when it is moved to, the game ball is allowed to enter the electric service winning opening 376 in the electric service winning device 37 (see FIG. 7B). The V-winning opening 352 allows the V-winning door 381 to move in the front-rear direction D1 in the V-winning device 38 described later, and the V-winning door 381 is moved backward in the small hit game (second game). By opening to, the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385 of the V winning device 38 are allowed to enter the game ball (see FIGS. 9B and 10B). The variable winning opening 353 allows the variable winning door 391 to move in the front-rear direction D1 in the variable winning device 39 described later, and when the variable winning door 391 is moved backward in the jackpot game (third game). When opened, the variable winning device 39 allows the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 394 (see FIG. 12B). That is, the electric service winning device 37, the V winning device 38, and the variable winning device 39 are arranged along the movement path of the game ball in the defined passage 35 in this order. That is, the electric service winning opening 376, the V winning opening 384, and the variable winning opening 394 are defined in the order of priority in which the game ball 99 is entered. As a result, the normal hit game, the small hit game, and the big hit game are executed with priority in this order, so that the big hit game that can acquire a large amount of game balls is easily executed. The details of this point will be described later. When the game balls 99 are launched into the right region of the game board 31 with the same strength (stroke), the moving speeds of the game balls 99 are made uniform. As a result, the time from the launch of the game ball 99 to the arrival at the electric service winning opening 351, the time to reach the V winning opening 352, and the time to reach the variable winning opening 353 are achieved. Be homogenized. As a result, the game ball 99 is launched into the right side region of the game board 31 with the same strength (stroke), and the time until the ball is entered into the electric service winning opening 376 of the electric service winning device 37 described later, V described later. The time until the ball is entered into the V winning opening 384 of the winning device 38 and the time until the ball is entered into the variable winning opening 394 of the variable winning device 39 described later are made uniform among the game balls 99. As a result, it becomes possible to equalize (fix) the execution time of the game per game in which the electric service winning port 376 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened, and the V winning port 384 of the V winning device 38 is opened. It becomes possible to equalize (fix) the execution time of the small hit game to be performed, and equalize (fix) the execution time of the game per normal figure in which the variable winning opening 394 of the variable winning device 39 is opened. Will be possible. Therefore, as will be described later, when the jackpot game is executed in the opening interval of the electric winning combination door 371 of the electric winning combination winning device 37 in the normal drawing game (see FIG. 18), the jackpot game is ended within the opening interval. Will be possible.

Further, the game ball 99 moving in the specified passage 35 is used in the electric winning opening 376 of the electric winning device 37 in the electric opening / closing game of the normal drawing game, and in the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game. By being able to enter the variable winning opening 394 of the variable winning device 39 in the jackpot game, the player can open and close the electric service simply by continuing to hit the game ball 99 in the right area of the game board 31. A game cycle in which a game, a small hit game, and a big hit game are executed in a series in this order can be executed.

The arrangement order of the electric service winning device 37, the V winning device 38, and the variable winning device 39 is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, and is, for example, upstream along the movement path of the game ball in the defined passage 35. From the side, it may be in another order such as the variable winning device 39, the V winning device 38, and the electric service winning device 37. Further, one or two of the electric service winning device 37, the V winning device 38, and the variable winning device 39 may be arranged in a region different from the specified passage 35. The game ball that did not pass through any of the electric service winning opening 351 and the V winning opening 352 and the variable winning opening 353 is discharged from the out port 354 to the back side of the game board 31 and is an out ball. It is guided to a position that can be detected by the sensor 318a.

The main display unit 36 is arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31, and includes a normal symbol display unit 361, a normal symbol game hold number display unit 362, and a special symbol display unit 363. The main display unit 36 may be arranged at the lower left or lower right of the game board 31.

The ordinary symbol display unit 361 clearly indicates the lottery result in the ordinary symbol lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 317. In the lottery per drawing, whether or not to operate the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37, that is, to open the electric service winning opening 351 of the specified passage 35 to play a game to the electric service winning section 372 described later. It is determined whether or not the ball is allowed to enter. The ordinary symbol display unit 361 includes a 7-segment LED display, and the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary figure is clearly indicated by a number. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is "hit", any one of "1" to "7" is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 according to the type per drawing. Then, as will be described later, the number displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times the electric winning combination winning opening 376 is opened in the normal winning game match (see FIGS. 15B and 15C). , The number displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 corresponds to the maximum number of times that the jackpot game is executed by one normal symbol hit. The details of this point will be described later. On the other hand, when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is "missing", a number other than "1" to "7", that is, any of "0", "8" and "9" is displayed ( See FIG. 15). The normal symbol display unit 361 may be configured by another display including an LED lamp group or the like instead of the 7-segment LED display. Further, the lottery result in the lottery per drawing may be displayed by other symbols such as alphabets and symbols in addition to the numbers.

The normal symbol game hold number display unit 362 displays the hold number N of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361 caused by the passage of the game ball to the through gate 317. The normal game hold number display unit 362 includes four LED lamps arranged in a row, and the hold number N is displayed according to the number of lighting of the LED lamps. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of holds N is 4, but for example, when the number of holds N is 0, all four LED lamps are turned off, and when the number of holds N is 1, one LED lamp is turned off. It is lit (3 LED lamps are turned off), 2 LED lamps are turned on when the number of holds is 2, (2 LED lamps are turned off), and 3 when the number of holds N is 3. One LED lamp is turned on (one LED lamp is turned off), and when the hold number N is 4, all four LED lamps are turned on. It should be noted that the normal figure game hold number display unit 362 may be configured by another display including a 7-segment LED display or the like instead of the four LED lamps.

The special symbol display unit 363 clearly indicates the lottery result in the special drawing per lottery executed when the game ball is won in the electric service winning opening 376 (see FIGS. 6 and 7) of the electric service winning device 37. In the special drawing per lottery, whether or not to execute the small hit game that operates the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38, that is, the game to the V winning section 382 by opening the V winning opening 352 of the specified passage 35. It is determined whether or not the ball is allowed to enter. In the present embodiment, it is not determined whether or not the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is operated is executed in the special drawing per lottery, and the jackpot game is transferred to the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38. It is executed based on the entry of the game ball 99.

The special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment LED display, and the lottery result in the lottery per special symbol is clearly indicated by a number. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the special symbol lottery is "small hit", the special symbol display unit 363 is assigned to the special symbol display unit 363 according to the jackpot type counter C5 (see FIG. 14). 3 ”or“ 7 ”is displayed. Specifically, "3" is displayed when the jackpot type is 8R jackpot, and "7" is displayed when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot. In addition, when the lottery result in the lottery per special figure is "missing", the numbers other than "3" and "7", that is, "0", "1", "2", "4", "5" , "6", "8" and "9" are displayed (see FIG. 17 (E)). The special symbol display unit 363 may be configured by another display including an LED lamp group or the like instead of the 7-segment LED display. Further, the lottery result in the special symbol lottery may be displayed by other symbols such as alphabets and symbols in addition to the numbers, and may be clearly indicated on the symbol display unit 341 in addition to the special symbol display unit 363. Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type is executed with the winning of the game ball 99 into the electric role winning opening 376 (see FIGS. 6 and 7) of the electric role winning device 37 in the game per game. However, the distribution of the big hit type may be executed with the winning of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game.

The electric service winning device 37 is operated when the game per game (first game) is executed because the lottery result in the lottery per game is a win. In the game per game in which the electric role winning device 37 is operated, the electric role winning opening 376 is opened and closed by the electric role winning door 371 described later in the electric role opening / closing game (first switching game). The game ball 99 can be entered, and an opportunity to operate the V winning device 38 is given. In this embodiment, in addition to the game ball 99 being inserted into the electric service winning opening 376, the special figure hit is executed based on the game ball 99 being inserted into the electric service winning opening 376. When the lottery result in the lottery is a small hit, the small hit game in which the V winning device 38 is operated is executed (see FIG. 17 (C)). Then, when the V winning device 38 is operated, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is operated by inserting the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 described later is executed, and the player has a large number of game balls. You will be given the opportunity to earn 99. That is, when the electric role opening / closing game is started in the normal figure hitting game, the three games of the electric role opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game of the normal figure hitting game are executed as one game cycle in this order. .. Further, in the game per normal figure, the electric function opening / closing game is executed 1 to 7 times according to the types A to G per normal figure to be distributed when the lottery result in the lottery per normal figure is a hit (Fig.). 15 (B)), when the electric combination opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times (any of 2 to 7 times), each electric combination opening / closing game is executed via the opening interval. That is, when the electric role opening / closing game is executed multiple times, by ending the big hit game within the interval between openings, the game is performed multiple times according to the number of electric role opening / closing games for one game per normal figure. The cycle is runnable. As a result, when the electric role opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to execute a plurality of big hit games according to the number of times of the electric combination opening / closing game for one game per normal figure.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the electric service winning device 37 includes an electric service winning door 371 (first electric accessory means) and an electric service winning unit 372.

As shown in FIGS. 7 (A) and 7 (B), the electric service winning door 371 opens and closes the electric service winning opening 351 of the specified passage 35 in the electric service opening / closing game of the game per normal drawing, and opens and closes the electric service winning opening 351. A state in which the entry of the game ball 99 into the winning section 372 is restricted (first restricted state) and a state in which the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric service winning section 372 is permitted (first allowable state). Switch. Specifically, the electric service winning door 371 is restricted from entering the game ball 99 into the electric service winning unit 372 by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. It is possible to move in the front-rear direction D1 between the standby position (see FIG. 7 (A)) and the operating position (see FIG. 7 (B)) where the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the electric winning unit 372. be. Then, when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is a hit, the electric service winning door 371 has a standby position and an operating position in an opening / closing pattern (see FIGS. 15B and 16) according to the type per drawing. Moved to and from. As a result, in the game per game, the electric combination opening / closing game is executed a number of times (any one of 1 to 7 times) according to the type of game per game.

Here, the details of the opening / closing pattern will be described later, but in the electric service opening / closing game, the electric service winning door 371 is moved from the standby position to the operating position, and is returned to the standby position after a predetermined time has elapsed (first predetermined condition). For example, when the game balls 99 are continuously launched into the right area of the game board 31, at least one game ball 99 wins the electric service. It is considered to be the time when the ball can enter the part 372. Specifically, the operating time of the electric service winning door 371 is set to a time equal to or longer than the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball 99, for example, set to 0.6 seconds or more and 20 seconds or less, preferably. It is set to 1 second or more and 10 seconds or less, more preferably 2 seconds or more and 5 seconds or less, and is set in a relatively short time. When the electric service winning door 371 is operated a plurality of times in one game per game, the operating times of the electric service winning door 371 each time are set to be the same or substantially the same. Further, even in the plurality of opening / closing patterns, the operating time of the electric winning combination door 371 is set to be the same or substantially the same. That is, the operating time of the electric service winning door 371 is fixed regardless of the opening / closing pattern type and opening / closing timing.

In this way, by setting the operating time of the electric service winning door 371 to be equal to or longer than the firing interval of the game ball 99, at least one game ball 99 is launched when the game ball 99 is launched in the right region of the game board 31. Is moved to a position where it can pass through the electric service winning opening 351 and is entered into the electric service winning unit 372. As a result, the small hit game in which the V winning device 38 is activated when the game ball 99 enters the electric winning slot 376 of the electric winning section 372, which will be described later, causes the game ball 99 to enter the electric winning slot 376. It is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of so-called puncture, which is not executed because the ball is not entered. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the inconvenience that the small hit game is not executed and, by extension, the big hit game is not executed. In addition, the condition that the electric service winning door 371 is moved from the standby position to the operating position and then returned to the standby position is that a predetermined time has elapsed, which is necessary for opening and closing the electric service winning door 371 in a game per game. The time (operating time) is fixed. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to fixing or equalizing the time required for a series of game cycles of the electric winning door 371 in the normal game, opening and closing of the electric winning door 371, and the small hit game and the big hit game. As a result, it is possible to end the big hit game within the interval between the opening of the electric winning door 371 in the normal game, and to end the big hit game at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric winning door 371. become.

By the way, between the end of the big hit game and the start of the opening of the next electric role winning door 371, none of the electric role opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game is executed, and the game board 31 Even if the game ball 99 is launched in the area on the right side of the door, the prize ball cannot be expected to be paid out. Therefore, the player makes a stop to stop the launch of the game ball 99, or increases the holding number N of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol due to the passage of the game ball 99 to the through gate 317, or the game ball to the general winning opening 313. It is assumed that the game ball 99 is launched in the left area of the game board 31 in anticipation of paying out the prize ball by entering 99 balls. However, if a stop or left strike is performed during a normal game, when the electric role winning door 371 is activated by the start of the next electric role opening game, the right side area of the game board 31 is reached. When the launch of the game ball 99 is delayed, or the game ball 99 cannot reach the right area of the game board 31 due to jamming or poor launch, the game ball 99 enters the electric winning door 376. There is a concern that the electric service winning door 371 will return without being balled and the electric service opening / closing game will end. Then, when the electric role opening / closing game is completed without the game ball 99 being inserted into the electric role winning opening 376, the small hit game is not executed because the special drawing hit lottery is not performed, and as a result, the big hit game is performed. Will not be executed. Therefore, if the player makes a stop or a left-handed strike during a period in which none of the electric role opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game is being executed during the normal game, the player can originally acquire the game in the big hit game. You will not be able to acquire the game ball 99 that you should have.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game can be ended at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric winning door 371, the player can stop or left at the timing when the prize ball can not be paid out by right-handed hitting. Can be suppressed. Therefore, in the electric role opening / closing game, the occurrence of the situation where the big hit game is not executed due to the occurrence of the situation where the game ball 99 does not enter the electric role winning opening 376 is suppressed, and the game ball that should have been originally acquired in the big hit game. You can increase your chances of getting 99.

In this embodiment, the opening / closing of the electric winning door 371 in the game per game is moved from the standby position to the operating position and then returned to the standby position after a predetermined time has elapsed, but before the predetermined time has elapsed. Also, when a predetermined number of game balls 99 are inserted into the electric service winning opening 376, the game may be returned to the standby position. In this case, since the opening and closing of the electric role winning door 371 in the game per normal figure is completed before the lapse of the predetermined time, the time required for the game cycle is the time required for the game cycle to win the electric role in the game per normal figure. It will be shorter than when the opening and closing of the door 371 is completed. Therefore, since the time required for the game cycle is shortened, it is possible to end the big hit game within the opening interval of the electric winning door 371 in the game per game.

As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the electric service winning door 371 has a plurality of guide portions 373 that define the movement path of the game ball 99. The plurality of guide portions 373 are arranged in a staggered manner along the left-right direction D3 in the recesses 374 provided on the front side of the electric service winning door 371. Therefore, in the electric service winning door 371, the game ball 99 moved from the right side to the electric service winning door 371 is moved to the left while moving in the front-rear direction D1. That is, since the game ball 99 passing through the electric service winning door 371 is moved to the left while meandering, the moving distance is increased as compared with the case where the game ball 99 is linearly moved to the left. As a result, in the electric service winning door 371, the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed, so that the residence time of the game ball 99 is increased. The plurality of guide portions 373 are formed so that the residence time at the electric service winning door 371 is equal to or longer than the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball 99 by appropriately setting the number, shape, and the like. The door. Specifically, for example, the residence time of the game ball 99 at the electric service winning door 371 is set to 1 time or more and 5 times or less, preferably 1 time or more and 3 times or less of the firing interval of the game ball 99. Set. As a result, when the game balls 99 are continuously launched into the right region of the game board 31, at least one game ball 99 can be maintained in a state of moving on the electric winning combination door 371. As a result, at least one game ball 99 wins the electric service when the game ball 99 is launched in the right area of the game board 31 at any timing regardless of the opening / closing timing of the electric service winning door 371. The ball is entered into the part 372. As a result, the small hit game in which the V winning device 38 is activated when the game ball 99 enters the electric winning slot 376 of the electric winning section 372, which will be described later, causes the game ball 99 to enter the electric winning slot 376. It is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of so-called puncture, which is not executed because the ball is not entered. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the inconvenience that the small hit game is not executed and, by extension, the big hit game is not executed.

Further, when the electric service winning door 371 is formed by resin molding, the plurality of guide portions 373 can be integrally built. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the plurality of guide portions 373.

The configuration for delaying the movement of the game ball 99 at the electric service winning door 371 is not limited to the configuration in which a plurality of guide portions 373 are arranged in a staggered pattern. For example, the electric service winning door 371 is provided with a meandering groove to increase the moving distance, and the electric service winning door 371 is provided with a plurality of concave portions or convex portions in a matrix shape to increase the moving resistance. The movement speed of the game ball 99 may be reduced by allowing the game ball 99 to move.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to allow at least one game ball 99 to enter the electric service winning unit 372 when the electric service winning door 371 is operated, the operating time of the electric service winning door 371 is the firing interval of the game balls 99. In addition to being set as described above, the electric service winning door 371 is provided with a plurality of guide portions 373 that delay the movement of the game ball 99, but at least one game ball 99 is electrified when the electric service winning door 371 is operated. As long as the ball can be entered into the winning combination 372, the operating time of the electric winning combination door 371 may be set to be less than the firing interval of the game ball 99, or the plurality of guide portions 373 of the winning combination door 371 may be set. It may be omitted and the game ball 99 may be moved linearly.

As shown in FIG. 8 (C), when the game ball 99 is moving through the electric service winning door 371, the electric service winning door 371 is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 7 (A)) to the operating position (FIG. 7 (B)). )), The game ball 99 of the electric winning door 371 cannot be moved backward by the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball 99 whose movement in the backward direction is restricted falls from the electric service winning door 371. On the other hand, when the electric service winning door 371 is moved to the operating position, the electric service winning opening 351 is opened. As a result, when the electric service winning door 371 is moved backward from the standby position to the operating position, the game ball 99 passing through the electric service winning door 371 passes through the electric service winning opening 351 to be described later. The ball is entered into the electric winning slot 376 of the winning section 372. In addition, when the game ball 99 that has fallen from the electric service winning door 371 is entered into the electric service winning opening 376 because the game ball 99 of the electric service winning door 371 is restricted from moving in the backward direction, the electric service winning door 371 is restricted. The timing at which the game balls 99 moving on the door 371 fall is made uniform among the game balls 99. As a result, the time from the start of operation of the electric service winning door 371 until the game ball 99 on the electric service winning door 371 is entered into the electric service winning opening 376 is made uniform, so that the electric service winning door The time during which the electric service winning sensor 37a, which will be described later, detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric service winning opening 376 after the operation of the 371 is started can be made uniform by the operation of the electric service winning door 371 each time. As a result, the start timing of the small hit game that can be executed when the game ball 99 enters the electric service winning opening 376 can be made uniform with respect to the operation of the electric service winning door 371 each time. Then, the start timing of the big hit game in which the variable winning device 39, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 described later in the small hit game, can be made uniform. The end timing of the jackpot game can be made uniform. Therefore, it is possible to end the big hit game in the interval between the opening of the electric winning door 371 in the normal game.

By the way, when the electric service winning door 371 is not provided with means for delaying the movement of the game balls 99 such as a plurality of guide portions 373, if the residence time of the game balls 99 at the electric service winning door 371 is short, the electric service There may be a state in which the game ball 99 is moving on the electric service winning door 371 at the timing when the winning door 371 is opened, or a state in which the game ball 99 is not moving. That is, when the game ball 99 moving through the electric service winning door 371 falls and enters the electric service winning opening 376 when the electric service winning door 371 is opened, it moves from the upstream side of the electric service winning door 371. The game ball 99 may be entered into the electric winning door 376. In these cases, since the moving distance of the game ball 99 required from the time when the electric service winning door 371 is opened to the time when the ball is entered into the electric service winning door 376 is different, the electric service winning door 371 starts to open. The time until the game ball 99 enters the 376 is different. As a result, when the small hit game is executed based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric role winning opening 376 in the game per normal figure, the small hit when the operation start of the electric role winning door 371 is used as a reference. Non-uniformity occurs in the start timing of the game. Such non-uniformity induces non-uniformity not only in the start timing but also in the end timing of the big hit game that is started based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game. do. As a result, in the case of a normal hit game in which the electric service winning door 371 is opened a plurality of times, it is assumed that the big hit game will not be completed by the next opening start of the electric service winning door 371.

On the other hand, by providing the electric service winning door 371 with a plurality of guide portions 373 as described above, at least one game ball 99 moves on the electric service winning door 371 when the electric service winning door 371 is opened. When the state is maintained, the game ball 99 that moves the electric role winning door 371 falls from the electric role winning door 371 because the game ball 99 of the electric role winning door 371 is restricted from moving backward. The ball is entered into the electric service winning opening 376. Then, when the game ball 99 that has fallen from the electric service winning door 371 is entered into the electric service winning opening 376 due to the restriction of the backward movement of the game ball 99 of the electric service winning door 371, the electric service winning is won. The timing at which the game ball 99 on the door 371 falls from the electric winning combination door 371 is made uniform among the game balls 99. As a result, the time from the start of the operation of the electric service winning door 371 to the time when the ball is entered into the electric service winning opening 376 can be made uniform. The timing at which the winning sensor 37a detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric winning combination opening 376 can be made uniform by the operation of the electric winning combination door 371 each time. As a result, the start timing of the small hit game that can be executed when the game ball 99 enters the electric service winning opening 376 can be made uniform with respect to the operation of the electric service winning door 371 each time, and the small hit game can be executed. The start timing of the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 described later, can be made uniform, and the end timing of the jackpot game can be set. Can be made uniform. Therefore, it is possible to end the big hit game in the interval between the opening of the electric service winning door 371 in the game per game in which the electric service winning door 371 is opened a plurality of times.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the electric service winning unit 372 is provided directly below the electric service winning opening 351 and the electric service winning door 371 of the specified passage 35. The electric service winning unit 372 has an upper opening 375, an electric service winning opening 376 (first ball entry port), and an electric service winning sensor 37a. The upper opening 375 allows the game ball 99 to enter the electric service winning portion 372 passing through the electric service winning opening 351. The electric service winning opening 376 communicates with the upper opening 375, and the game ball 99 that has passed through the electric service winning opening 351 and the upper opening 375 is inserted. That is, in the electric service winning opening 376, the electric service winning opening 351 is opened by moving the electric service winning door 371 to the operating position (FIG. 7 (B)), so that the electric service winning opening 351 is opened. And the game ball 99 that has passed through the upper opening 375 is entered. Further, when the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric service winning opening 376, a lottery for each special figure is executed. In the special drawing per lottery, it is determined with a predetermined probability (299/300 (see FIG. 17C) in this embodiment) that the small hit game for operating the V winning device 38 is executed, and in the special drawing per lottery. When it is decided that the small hit game is executed, the big hit type for executing the big hit game in which a large amount of game balls 99 can be acquired by the operation of the variable winning device 39 is also determined. Further, when the game balls 99 are inserted into the electric service winning opening 376, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls 99 are paid out. In addition, since the right to draw a lottery per special figure is not reserved unlike the right to draw a lottery per ordinary figure, a plurality of game balls 99 win the electric role in the operation of the electric role winning door 371 once in the game per ordinary figure. Even when the ball is entered into the mouth 376, the number of lottery per special figure is one.

The electric service winning sensor 37a is provided in a passage for discharging the game ball 99 that has passed through the electric service winning port 376 to the back side of the game board 31, and detects that the game ball 99 has passed through the electric service winning port 376. The electric service winning sensor 37a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 (see FIG. 13), and the detection result of the electric service winning sensor 37a is input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls 99 according to the detection result of the electric service winning sensor 37a. The electric role winning flag indicating that the game ball 99 has entered the electric role winning opening 376 is set to on, and the electric role winning command is set. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a power winning command to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp that the game ball 99 has entered the electric service winning opening 376, and the player can know that the game ball 99 has entered the electric service winning opening 376 in the symbol display unit 341. It becomes possible to execute the effect of notifying.

Here, the electric service winning opening 376 is provided at a position where the game ball 99 moving in the specified passage 35 can enter. On the other hand, the game ball 99 moving in the defined passage 35 moves on the same route. Therefore, the game balls 99 launched to the right side region of the game board 31 with a constant strength (stroke) have uniform moving speeds with each other. As a result, when the game ball 99 is launched into the right area of the game board 31 with a certain strength in the game per game, the game ball 99 can enter the electric role winning opening 376 from the launch of the game ball 99. The time to reach the door 371 is equalized. Therefore, when the electric role winning opening 376 is opened in the game per game, it is unexpected from the time when the game ball 99 is launched until the game ball 99 is moved to a position where the electric role winning opening 376 can be entered. It is possible to prevent it from taking a long time. As a result, in the game per game, the game ball 99 is not inserted into the electric winning slot 376, that is, the occurrence of a so-called puncture is effectively prevented, so that the situation where the small hit game is not executed is effectively prevented. Will be done. As a result, the occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game is not executed can be effectively prevented, and the occurrence of disadvantages can be prevented if the player cannot obtain the prize ball that the player can originally obtain by executing the jackpot game. Further, in addition to equalizing the time from the launch of the game ball 99 to the arrival of the game ball 99 at the electric service winning door 371 that can enter the electric service winning opening 376, as described above, the electric service winning is won. By providing the door 371 with a plurality of guide portions 373, when the game ball 99 is launched with a certain strength, the electric service winning door 371 is started to operate, and then the electric service winning sensor 37a described later is used to perform the electric service winning opening 376. By making it possible to equalize the timing at which the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric role winning door 371 is performed by the operation of the electric role winning door 371 each time, the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric role winning opening 376 is detected from the launch of the game ball 99. The time to be set can be made uniform by the operation of the electric service winning door 371 each time. As a result, the start timing of the small hit game can be made uniform with respect to the operation of the electric winning door 371 each time, and further, the start timing and the ending timing of the big hit game can be made uniform, so that there are a plurality of electric winning doors 371. It is possible to end the big hit game in the interval between the opening of the electric winning prize door 371 in the game per game that is opened once.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the V winning device 38 operates when the game ball 99 is won in the electric winning slot 376 of the electric winning device 37 and the lottery result in the special drawing lottery is a small hit. Will be done. When the V winning device 38 is activated, a small hit game (second game) in which the game ball 99 can enter the V winning opening 384, which will be described later, is executed, and an opportunity to operate the variable winning device 39 is given. To. The V winning device 38 includes a V winning door 381 (second electric accessory means) and a V winning unit 382.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the V winning door 381 opens and closes the V winning opening 352 of the specified passage 35, and the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning portion 382 is restricted (second). The restricted state) and the state in which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning unit 382 (second allowable state) are switched. Specifically, the V winning door 381 is a standby position in which the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning portion 382 is restricted by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. (See FIGS. 9 (A) and 10 (A)) and an operating position (see FIGS. 9 (B) and 10 (B)) at which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning unit 382. It is possible to move in the front-back direction D1 between them. Then, the V winning door 381 moves from the standby position to the operating position when the game ball 99 is won in the electric winning opening 376 of the electric winning device 37 and a small hit is won in the special drawing lottery. After the lapse of time (second predetermined condition), the unit returns to the standby position. The operating time from the start of operation of the V winning door 381 to the return to the standby position (opening time of the V winning opening 352) is, for example, the game ball 99 is continuously launched into the right region of the game board 31. If so, it is set as the time during which at least one game ball 99 can enter the V winning unit 382. Specifically, the operating time of the V winning door 381 is set to a time equal to or longer than the firing interval of the game ball 99 (for example, 0.6 seconds), for example, the firing interval of the game ball 99 (for example, 0.6 seconds) or more. The time is set, preferably 1 times or more and 30 times or less (for example, 0.6 seconds or more and 18 seconds or less) of the firing interval of the game ball 99, and more preferably 2 times or more and 20 times or less (for example, 1) of the firing interval. It is set to .2 seconds or more and 12 seconds or less), and more preferably 3 times or more and 10 times or less (for example, 1.8 seconds or more and 6 seconds or less) the firing interval of the game ball 99. As a result, by continuously launching the normal game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31 in the small hit game, the game ball 99 is surely entered into the V winning opening 384, as long as the normal launch is performed. Playability that does not cause a flat tire is given.

In this way, by setting the operating time of the V winning door 381 to be equal to or longer than the firing interval of the game ball 99, at least one game is played when the game ball 99 is continuously launched into the right region of the game board 31. The ball 99 is moved to a position where it can pass through the V winning opening 352, and is entered into the V winning portion 382. As a result, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is activated when the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384 of the V winning section 382, which will be described later, does not allow the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 384. It is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of so-called punctures that are not executed in. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the inconvenience that the jackpot game is not executed. Further, since the condition that the V winning door 381 is moved from the standby position to the operating position and then returned to the standby position is the elapse of a predetermined time, the time (operating time) required for the small hit game is fixed. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to fixing or equalizing the time required for a series of game cycles of the electric winning door 371 in the normal game, opening and closing of the electric winning door 371, and the small hit game and the big hit game. As a result, it is possible to end the big hit game within the interval between the opening of the electric winning door 371 in the normal game, and to end the big hit game at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric winning door 371. become.

In addition, if the jackpot game can be ended at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric winning door 371, the player will stop or left at the timing when the prize ball can not be paid out by right-handed as described above. It is possible to suppress hitting, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game is not executed due to the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball 99 does not enter the electric role winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game, and it can be originally acquired in the big hit game. It is possible to increase the possibility of acquiring the game ball 99 that should have been.

In the present embodiment, the V winning doors 381 are moved from the standby position to the operating position and then returned to the standby position after a predetermined time has elapsed, but even before the predetermined time has elapsed, a predetermined number of V winning doors 384 have been inserted. When the game ball 99 is entered, it may be returned to the standby position. In this case, since the small hit game ends before the lapse of the predetermined time, the time required for the game cycle is shorter than the case where the small hit game ends with the lapse of the predetermined time. Therefore, since the time required for the game cycle is shortened, it is possible to end the big hit game within the opening interval of the electric winning combination door 371 in the game per game.

Further, the operating time of the V winning door 381 may be set to be less than the firing interval of the game ball 99. In this case, it is possible to impart a game property in which a so-called puncture occurs, in which the big hit game is not executed because the game ball 99 is not inserted into the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game. Then, by adjusting the operating time of the V winning door 381 to be less than the firing interval of the game ball 99, the probability of the game ball 99 entering the V winning opening 384 can be adjusted, so that the occurrence rate of a flat tire can also be adjusted. As a result, the playability can be adjusted according to the puncture occurrence rate. The probability of the game ball 99 entering the V winning opening 384 is set to, for example, 1% or more and 95% or less, preferably 20% or more and 90% or less, and more preferably 50% or more and 80% or less. To.

The V winning portion 382 is provided directly below the V winning opening 352 and the V winning door 381 of the specified passage 35. The V winning unit 382 has an upper opening 383, a V winning opening 384 ((special) second winning opening), a normal winning opening 385 (normally the second winning opening), a switching unit 386, a V winning sensor 38a, and a normal winning sensor. It has 38b. The upper opening 383 allows the game ball 99 to enter the V winning portion 382 passing through the V winning opening 352. The V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385 communicate with the upper opening 383, and the game ball 99 that has passed through the V winning opening 352 and the upper opening 383 can enter. That is, in the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385, the V winning opening 352 is opened by moving the V winning door 381 to the operating position (see FIGS. 9B and 10B). Then, the game ball 99 that has passed through the V winning opening 352 and the upper opening 383 is entered. Further, the V winning opening 384 provides an opportunity to execute a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is activated when the game ball 99 passes. Then, when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384, the big hit is determined when the game ball 99 is entered into the electric winning opening 376 of the electric winning combination device 37 after the small hit game is completed. The jackpot game corresponding to the type is executed. The normal winning opening 385 is adjacent to the V winning opening 384 and is provided on the upstream side in the moving direction of the game ball 99. Further, when the game balls 99 are inserted into the V winning opening 384 or the normal winning opening 385, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls 99 are paid out.

The switching unit 386 switches between a state in which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning opening 384 and a state in which the game ball 99 is restricted from entering the V winning opening 384. The switching unit 386 has a standby position for allowing the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 384 and a V winning opening 384 by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. It is movable to and from an operating position that restricts the entry of the game ball 99. The switching unit 386 is moved from the standby position to the operating position, for example, triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384, thereby limiting the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384, which is normal. The game ball 99 is guided to the winning opening 385. That is, the switching unit 386 plays a role of inserting the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 in preference to the normal winning opening 385. When the switching unit 386 is in a position allowing the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 384 in order to allow the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 384 with priority over the normal winning opening 385. A closing portion that normally closes the winning opening 385 may be provided at the front end portion of the switching portion 386. Further, the switching unit 386 is returned to the standby position when, for example, the V winning door 381 is moved from the operating position to the standby position and the V winning opening 352 is closed.

In this way, when the game ball 99 is continuously launched into the right area of the game board 31, the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384 with priority over the normal winning opening 385 by the operation of the switching unit 386. Therefore, the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384 with a high probability (100% or approximately 100%), and the big hit game is executed because the game ball 99 is not entered into the V winning opening 384 as described above. It is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of so-called punctures that do not occur.

The probability of entering the V winning opening 384 does not have to be 100% or approximately 100%, and may be a predetermined probability lower than 100% by a certain probability. The predetermined probability is, for example, 1% to 95%, preferably 20% to 90%, and more preferably 50% to 80%. The predetermined probability can be adjusted, for example, by controlling the operation of the switching unit 386 at regular intervals or at a predetermined pattern in a state where the V winning door 381 is open, and the operating time and operating pattern of the V winning door 381. It can also be adjusted by.

The V winning sensor 38a is provided in a passage for discharging the game ball 99 that has passed through the V winning opening 384 to the back side of the game board 31, and detects that the game ball 99 has passed through the V winning opening 384. The normal winning sensor 38b is provided in a passage for discharging the game ball 99 that has passed through the normal winning opening 385 to the back side of the game board 31, and detects that the game ball 99 has passed through the normal winning opening 385. The V winning sensor 38a and the normal winning sensor 38b are electrically connected to the main control unit 331 (see FIG. 13), and the detection results of the V winning sensor 38a and the normal winning sensor 38b are input to the main control unit 331. To. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) causes the payout control device 7 to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls 99 according to the detection results of the V winning sensor 38a and the normal winning sensor 38b. To send. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) sets the V winning flag indicating that the game ball 99 has won in the V winning opening 384 when the game ball 99 is detected by the V winning sensor 38a, and also turns on the V winning flag. A V winning command for notifying that the game ball 99 has won is set in the V winning opening 384. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) sets a normal winning flag indicating that the game ball 99 has won in the normal winning opening 385 when the game ball 99 is detected by the normal winning sensor 38b. Then, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a V winning command to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384, and the symbol display unit 341 notifies the player that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384. It becomes possible to execute the production.

Here, the V winning opening 384 is provided at a position where the game ball 99 moving in the specified passage 35 can enter. On the other hand, as described above, when the game balls 99 moving in the defined passage 35 are launched with a certain strength because they move on the same path, the moving speeds of the game balls 99 are made uniform among the game balls 99. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is launched into the right area of the game board 31 with a certain strength in the small hit game, the time from the launch of the game ball 99 to the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 is made uniform. Will be done. As a result, when the V winning opening 384 is opened in the small hit game, it is unexpectedly long from the launch of the game ball 99 to the movement of the game ball 99 to a position where the ball can enter the V winning opening 384. It is possible to prevent it from taking time. As a result, in the small hit game, the so-called puncture, in which the game ball 99 is not inserted into the V winning opening 384, is effectively prevented. Therefore, by effectively preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game is not executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage if the player cannot obtain the prize ball that the player can originally obtain by executing the jackpot game.

Further, by equalizing the time from the launch of the game ball 99 to the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384, a predetermined time has elapsed since the V winning door 381 was moved from the standby position to the operating position. Even before, even if a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined number of game balls 99 are returned to the standby position when a predetermined number of game balls 99 are entered in the V winning opening 384, the end timing of the small hit game is set to the end timing of each electric service winning door 371. Is homogenized from the start of operation. Therefore, in the small hit game, the start timing of the big hit game executed when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384 can be made uniform, and the end timing of the big hit game can be made uniform. As a result, when the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed a plurality of times in the game per game, the big hit game can be completed within the interval between the opening of the electric service winning door 371.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the variable winning device 39 operates when a small hit is won in a special drawing winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38. Will be done. When the variable winning device 39 is operated, a jackpot game (second game) in which the game ball 99 can be entered into the variable winning opening 394, which will be described later, is executed. The jackpot game is a game including an open / close execution mode in which a round game (second switching game) is executed a plurality of times (8 times or 16 times in this embodiment) that gives the player an opportunity to acquire a large amount of game balls 99. (See FIG. 18). The variable winning device 39 includes a variable winning door 391 (third electric accessory means) and a variable winning unit 392.

As shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the variable winning door 391 opens and closes the variable winning opening 353 of the defined passage 35, and the entry of the game ball 99 into the variable winning section 392 is restricted. The state in which the game ball 99 is to be entered (third restricted state) and the state in which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the variable winning unit 392 (third allowable state) are switched. Specifically, the variable winning door 391 is a standby position in which the entry of the game ball 99 into the variable winning portion 392 is restricted by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. (See FIG. 12A) and the operating position (see FIG. 12B) where the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the variable winning unit 392 can be moved in the front-rear direction D1. Then, when the game ball 99 wins the V winning opening 384, the variable winning door 391 is moved between the standby position and the operating position as many times as the number of times according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 17D). The condition for the variable winning door 391 to be moved from the standby position to the operating position and then returned to the standby position (third predetermined condition) is the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) (variable winning door). The operating time of 391 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, or the upper limit number (10) of game balls 99 enters the variable winning opening 394 described later.

Here, the maximum opening time (operating time of the variable winning door 391) of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) is the minimum required for the variable winning opening 394 to enter the maximum number of game balls 99. Set to less than an hour. Specifically, the maximum opening time is set to be, for example, a time (for example, 6 seconds) obtained by multiplying the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball 99 by the upper limit number (for example, 10 pieces), and the game ball 99. It is preferable that the firing interval is set to 0.5 times or more and 1 times or less the time obtained by multiplying the upper limit number, and more preferably 0.75 times or more and 0.95 times or less.

In this way, the maximum opening time (operating time of the variable winning door 391) of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) is required to allow the maximum number of game balls 99 to enter the variable winning opening 394. By setting it to the minimum time or less, the variable winning opening 394 is usually closed with the lapse of the maximum opening time before the upper limit number of game balls 99 are entered into the variable winning opening 394. As a result, the time required for the round game in the jackpot game described later can be made uniform by matching the maximum opening time, and further, the time required for the jackpot game can be made uniform or fixed. Therefore, it becomes easy to end the big hit game within the interval between the opening of the electric winning door 371 in the normal game. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the opening interval of the electric winning combination door 371 in the normal drawing game from ending and starting the normal drawing game during the execution of the big hit game. As a result, in the small hit game, a situation occurs in which the small hit game is not executed because the big hit game is executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the electric service winning opening 376 in the normal game. Occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game is not executed because the winning of the V winning opening 384 is invalidated because the jackpot game is being executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be inserted into the variable winning opening 394 due to the opening of the electric winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game.

In particular, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) is set to be equal to or less than the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the game ball 99 by the upper limit number, and preferably the upper limit is set to the firing interval of the game ball 99. By setting it to 0.5 times or more and 1 times or less, more preferably 0.75 times or more and 0.95 times or less of the time multiplied by the number, the above-mentioned disadvantage is more reliably given to the player. Can be suppressed. Further, while preventing the number of game balls 99 entered into the variable winning opening 394 within the maximum opening time from being significantly reduced with respect to the upper limit, the lapse of the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 394 is used as an opportunity. You can end the round game. As a result, while sufficiently securing the profit given to the player in the jackpot game, the time required for the round game, and by extension, the time required for the jackpot game is made uniform, so that the electric winning door in the normal game is more reliable. The jackpot game can be completed within the opening interval of 371.

Further, by setting the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 to be equal to or less than the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the game ball 99 by the upper limit number, the time required for the big hit game is made uniform or fixed. It can contribute to the opening and closing of the electric winning door 371 in the game, and to fixing or equalizing the time required for a series of game cycles of the small hit game and the big hit game. As a result, it is possible to end the big hit game within the interval between the opening of the electric winning door 371 in the normal game, and to end the big hit game at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric winning door 371. become.

In the present embodiment, the variable winning door 391 is returned to the standby position after the maximum opening time has elapsed after the variable winning door 391 is moved from the standby position to the operating position, or when the maximum number of game balls 99 are entered into the variable winning opening 394. However, the variable winning door 391 may be returned after the lapse of the maximum opening time regardless of the entry of the maximum number of game balls 99 into the variable winning opening 394. In this case, since the time required for the jackpot game does not depend on the time until the maximum number of game balls 99 are entered into the variable winning opening 394, the time required for the jackpot game can be easily fixed. As a result, it is easy to end the big hit game within the interval between the opening of the electric winning door 371 in the normal game, and to end the big hit game at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric winning door 371. become. In addition, when the variable winning door 391 is returned after the lapse of the maximum opening time regardless of the entry of the upper limit number of game balls 99 into the variable winning opening 394, the upper limit number (for example, 10) of the game balls 99 is entered. The maximum opening time is set to the time when the ball is not balled.

In addition, if the jackpot game can be ended at a timing closer to the opening start timing of the next electric winning door 371, the player will stop or left at the timing when the prize ball can not be paid out by right-handed as described above. It is possible to suppress hitting, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game is not executed due to the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball 99 does not enter the electric role winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game, and it can be originally acquired in the big hit game. It is possible to increase the possibility of acquiring the game ball 99 that should have been.

The variable winning section 392 is provided directly below the variable winning opening 353 and the variable winning door 391 of the defined passage 35. The variable winning unit 392 has an upper opening 393, a variable winning opening 394 (third winning opening), and a variable winning sensor 39a. The upper opening 393 allows the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning portion 392 passing through the variable winning opening 353. The variable winning opening 394 communicates with the upper opening 393, and the game ball 99 that has passed through the variable winning opening 353 and the upper opening 393 is inserted. That is, in the variable winning opening 394, the variable winning opening 353 is opened by moving the variable winning door 391 to the operating position (FIG. 12 (B)), so that the variable winning opening 353 and the upper opening 393 are opened. The game ball 99 that has passed through is entered. Further, when the game balls 99 are inserted into the variable winning opening 394, a predetermined number (for example, eight) of the game balls 99 are paid out.

The variable winning sensor 39a is provided in a passage for discharging the game ball 99 that has passed through the variable winning opening 394 to the back side of the game board 31, and detects that the game ball 99 has passed through the variable winning opening 394. The variable winning opening 394 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 (see FIG. 13), and the detection result of the variable winning opening 394 is input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls 99 according to the detection result in the variable winning opening 394, and is variable. A variable winning flag indicating that the game ball 99 has won is set to the winning opening 394, and a variable winning command is set. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a variable winning command to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning opening 394, and the symbol display unit 341 has the game ball 99 that has won the variable winning opening 394 in the round game of the jackpot game. It is possible to display the number and display the number (number of balls) of the game balls 99 acquired in the jackpot game.

The electric service winning sensor 37a, the V winning sensor 38a, the normal winning sensor 38b, and the variable winning sensor 39a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but the winning of a game ball is individually detected by another detection method. It may be any sensor capable of.

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is one that can acquire a large amount of gaming balls by inserting the gaming balls into a variable winning opening opened in a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. In this type of game, it is generally possible to insert a game ball into a variable winning opening through a plurality of routes by a game nail placed on the game board. However, when the game ball can enter the variable winning opening through multiple routes, the variable winning ball is launched after the game ball is launched depending on the state of the game nail placed on the game board and the firing strength of the game ball. Since the time until the game ball is put into the mouth is non-uniform, the time required for the jackpot game is non-uniform. In addition, when a game ball can enter a variable winning opening in a plurality of routes, a game ball moving in a route different from the multiple routes becomes a waste ball that is not entered in the variable winning opening, which is wasteful. Not only is the time required for the jackpot game uneven due to the generation of balls, but also the number of difference balls in the jackpot game is reduced, which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10, the game ball 99 launched in the right region of the game board 31 is moved by the specified passage 35 in the same path, so that the game ball 99 is moved by the game board 31 with a constant strength (stroke). When launching into the area on the right side of the above, the moving speeds of the game balls 99 moving in the specified passage 35 are made uniform, and the game balls move in the specified passage 35 at uniform intervals. Since the variable winning opening 394 is provided at a position where a game ball moving in the specified passage 35 can enter, when the game ball 99 is launched in the right side region, the game ball 99 is launched in the round game of the jackpot game. The time from when the game ball 99 is entered into the variable winning opening 394 is made uniform, and the generation of wasted balls is prevented. Therefore, as described above, the end condition (third predetermined condition) of the round game of the jackpot game is that the maximum opening time (for example, 5 seconds) of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) has elapsed, and the variable winning opening 394. If any of the upper limit number (10) of the game balls 99 is satisfied, the variable winning opening is set by moving the game balls 99 along the same route by the specified passage 35. Since the game ball 99 is uniformly inserted into the 353 (variable winning opening 394), the time required for the round game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the jackpot game can be made uniform. As a result, when the game per game is executed, the time required for the game cycle of the game for opening and closing the electric game, the game for small hits, and the game for big hits is equalized, so that the electric role winning door 371 is opened. It becomes easy to end the jackpot game within the interval. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the opening interval of the electric winning combination door 371 from ending during the execution of the jackpot game and the execution of the normal winning game from being started. Therefore, in the normal game, a situation occurs in which the small hit game is not executed because the big hit game is executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the electric winning box 376, and V in the small hit game. Occurrence of a situation where the jackpot game is not executed because the winning of the V winning opening 384 is invalidated because the jackpot game is being executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the winning opening 384. It is possible to suppress the disadvantage to the player, such as the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the variable winning opening 394 due to the opening of the electric winning combination winning opening 376 in the role opening / closing game.

In particular, in the gaming machine 10, the electric function winning device 37 and the V winning device 38 are arranged at positions where the game ball 99 moving in the specified passage 35 can enter, and the electric function winning device 37 in the game per game is used. The operating time of the winning combination door 371 and the operating time of the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game are fixed. As a result, it becomes easier to equalize the time required for the game cycle of the electric function opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game of the normal drawing game. Therefore, since it becomes easier to end the jackpot game within the opening interval of the electric service winning door 371, it is possible to more reliably suppress the disadvantage to the player.

Further, when the variable winning opening 394 is opened by moving the variable winning door 391 provided in the defined passage 35 to the operating position, the variable winning opening 394 is moved to reach the position where the ball can enter the variable winning opening 394. All of the game balls 99 that have been played can be entered into the variable winning opening 394. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that may occur when the game ball 99 can enter the variable winning opening 394 in a plurality of routes, that is, a waste ball that is not entered into the variable winning opening 394. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to waste balls that are not entered into the variable winning opening 394, for example, reduction of the number of difference balls.

Further, when the electric service winning door 371 or the V winning door 381 provided in the specified passage 35 is moved to the operating position, the electric service winning opening 376, or the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385 are opened. All of the game balls 99 that have moved through the passage 35 and reached the positions where the electric service winning opening 376 or the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385 can be entered are all the electric service winning opening 376, or the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 384. The ball can be entered into the winning opening 385. Therefore, an inconvenience that may occur when the game ball 99 can be entered into the electric service winning opening 376, or the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385 by a plurality of routes, that is, the electric service winning opening 376, or It is possible to prevent the generation of waste balls that are not entered in the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to waste balls that are not entered into the electric service winning opening 376, the V winning opening 384, and the normal winning opening 385, for example, the reduction of the number of difference balls.

In the gaming machine 10, the electric service winning device 37, the V winning device 38, and the variable winning device 39 are provided in the right area of the gaming board 31, and the winning openings 376, 384, 394 of these devices 37 to 39 are used for playing games. A game ball 99 that is launched into the right side area of the board 31 and moves in the specified passage 35 can enter the ball. On the other hand, the through gate 317, which gives an opportunity for the electric service winning device 37 to be activated (the game is executed per normal figure), allows the game ball 99 launched in the left region of the game board 31 to pass through. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, it is necessary to perform a left-handed strike to operate the electric service winning device 37 and a right-handed strike to operate the V winning device 38 and the variable winning device 39. That is, it is disadvantageous to the player until the right to execute the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is operated (to be exact, the right to execute the game per normal figure in which the electric winning device 37 is operated) is obtained. While it is necessary to hit left in the state, it is necessary to hit right in the state that is advantageous to the player after the right is obtained. As a result, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a game property in which left-handed and right-handed are used properly depending on whether the player is in a disadvantageous state or an advantageous state.

It is also conceivable to provide the game board 31 with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor and the radio wave sensor are provided, for example, around the through gate 317 and the variable winning opening 394. The magnet sensor and the radio wave sensor are electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection results of the magnet sensor and the radio wave sensor are input to the main control unit 331. Thereby, when an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the through gate 317 or the variable winning opening 394 is performed by using a magnet or a radio wave, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing a ball game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out the ball game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of balls to be paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the electric power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the electric power to the control device and the driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a lottery per figure as a transition lottery to a state in which the game per game set in advance is executed. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 41 has a built-in ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. Further, a general winning sensor 313a, a gate passing sensor 317a, an electric service winning sensor 37a, a V winning sensor 38a, a normal winning sensor 38b, a variable winning sensor 39a, and the like are connected to the input / output I / F 42. Then, the MPU 41 has a general winning opening 313, a through gate 317, an electric function winning opening 376, a V winning opening 384, a normal winning opening 385, and a variable based on the detection signals from the sensors 313a, 317a, 37a, 38a, 38b, 39a. It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning opening 394. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to a voice lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, a power supply control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 gives the voice lamp control device 5 a variation pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, a normal figure game start command, a normal figure hit game start command, a small hit game start command, a V winning command, and a big hit game start command. Outputs commands such as round game start command, variable winning interval start command, ending start command, and jackpot game end command.

The fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the normal symbol fluctuation display time (normal symbol fluctuation time on the normal symbol display unit 361) and the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery, and is a lottery per normal symbol. If the lottery result in is a hit, the information about the type of hit is included. The variation pattern command is the variation start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later, based on the information stored in the normal map reservation storage area 412b (see FIG. 14), which will be described later, when the symbol variation display by the main display unit 36 is started. It is set in step S1707 or S1709 in. The fluctuation pattern command may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of only the fluctuation display time of the normal map. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the lottery per drawing and the type per drawing is set as a command different from the fluctuation pattern command.

When the number of holds N stored in the hold storage area 412b (see FIG. 14), which will be described later, increases, the hold command is a lottery result, a fluctuation pattern, and a number of holds in the lottery per normal figure for the increased hold. This is a command for notifying N to the voice lamp control device 5. The hold command is set in the hold command setting process in step S1205 in the through gate process of FIG. 23, which will be described later, based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b, which will be described later, when the number of holds N increases. (See FIG. 24 below).

The shift command notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that when the number of holdings decreases, the winning / failing information indicating the lottery result in the lottery per drawing in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 has shifted. It is a command. The shift command is set in step S1604 in the data setting process of FIG. 27, which will be described later.

The normal figure game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the normal figure game is started, in which the lottery result in the normal figure per lottery is notified by the normal symbol display unit 361. The normal map game start command is set in step S1508 in the normal map game control process of FIG. 26, which will be described later.

The game per game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game per game in which the electric service winning device 37 is activated is started. The game start command per normal figure is set in step S1803 of the game control process per normal figure in FIG. 29, which will be described later.

The small hit game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the small hit game in which the V winning device 38 is operated is started. The small hit game start command is set in step S1902 in the small hit game control process of FIG. 31, which will be described later.

The V winning command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game ball 99 has won a prize in the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38. The V winning command is set in step S1917 in the small hit game control process of FIG. 32, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is activated is started. The jackpot game start command is set in step S2008 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 33, which will be described later.

The round game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the round number information indicating the start of each round game and the round number of the round game in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. .. The round game start command is set in step S2018 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 33, which will be described later. In the voice lamp control device 5, it can be grasped that the opening of the jackpot game is ended and the open / close execution mode is started by the round game start command, but the opening end command is issued at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command. It may be set, or the open / close execution mode start command may be set when the open / close execution mode starts. Further, apart from the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5.

The variable winning interval start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the variable winning interval, which is between round games in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game, is started. The variable winning interval start command is set in step S2032 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 34, which will be described later.

The ending start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is started, that is, the opening / closing execution mode is terminated. The ending start command is set in step S2035 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 34, which will be described later.

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is finished. The jackpot game end command is set in step S2047 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 35, which will be described later.

Although commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, their description will be omitted.

Further, the main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 2 msec), and the MPU 41 has a main timer interrupt described later each time a rising edge (or falling edge) of the clock signal occurs. It is assumed that the embedded process is started and executed. The oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply the operation clock of the control main body in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used to set a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 14, a storage area used by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a lottery per normal figure, a lottery per special figure, a setting of a normal figure variation display time, and the like will be described. .. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a and the normal figure reservation storage area 412b of the RAM 412 to set the normal figure lottery, the special figure lottery, the normal figure fluctuation display time, and the like. Run.

The lottery counter 412a includes a random number counter C1 per figure used for the lottery per figure to determine whether or not to operate the electric winning combination device 37, and a type counter per normal figure used to determine the type per figure. When determining the fluctuation display time (variation pattern) in the normal symbol display unit 361 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 36, the C2, the normal diagram deviation reach random number counter C3 used when determining the normal diagram deviation type. Includes the normal map variation type counter CS used for. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 per normal figure used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C1 per normal figure. Further, the lottery counter 412a determines the random number counter C4 per special figure used for the special drawing per lottery when the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric winning opening 376 of the electric winning device 37, and the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C5 used at the time of the operation and the random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C4 per special figure are included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply abbreviated as counters.

Then, the counters C1 to C5, CS, CIN1 and CIN2 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and after reaching a preset maximum value, the counter returns to 0. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C5, CS, CIN1 and CIN2, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when setting the lottery per normal figure, the lottery per special figure and the fluctuation display time (setting of the fluctuation pattern command). To.

The normal drawing hold storage area 412b includes a first hold area RE1, a second hold area RE2, a third hold area RE3, a fourth hold area RE4, an execution area AE, and a hold number storage area NA. Then, the lottery result in the lottery per normal figure is determined based on the values of various counters stored in the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4, and the normal symbol display unit 361 displays the normal symbol and stops. A normal game is executed to notify the lottery result in the lottery per figure.

When the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317, the random number counter C1 per normal figure, the type counter C2 per normal figure, the reach random number counter C3 out of the normal figure, and the variable type counter for the normal figure stored in the RAM 412 are used. The information corresponding to the CS is acquired as the winning / failing information used in the lottery per drawing, and is stored in any of the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4. The process of acquiring the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the random number counter C1 per normal figure, the type counter C2 per normal figure, and the reach random number counter C3 out of the normal figure, the normal figure variation type counter CS is the first reserved area RE1 to 4th. It is stored in one of the hold areas RE4.

Therefore, in addition to the lottery result of the lottery for the normal figure game executed based on the hit / miss information stored in the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4, the variable display on the normal symbol display unit 361. It is possible to determine in advance the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) (variation pattern of the symbol variation display displayed by the symbol display unit 341).

Specifically, when the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317, the hit / fail information is vacant in the order of priority of the first reserved area RE1, the second reserved area RE2, the third reserved area RE3, and the fourth reserved area RE4. Stored in the area. In the hold number storage area NA, the number of hold areas in which the hit / fail information is stored among the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4 is stored as the hold number N.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, the through gate 317 has a maximum of 4 hit / fail information as the passing history of the gaming ball 99 by a total of four storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4. It is possible to hold up to one.

The execution area AE is a storage used to move the hit / fail information stored in the first reserved area RE1 when the symbol variation display in the normal symbol display unit 361 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 36 is started. It is an area.

Then, at the start of one normal map game, the MPU 41 determines the lottery result in the normal map lottery based on the numerical information stored as the hit / miss information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the pass / fail information of the first hold area RE1 is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second hold area RE2 shifts to the first hold area RE1 and shifts to the third hold area RE3. The stored hit / fail information is shifted to the second holding area RE2, and the hit / miss information stored in the fourth holding area RE4 is shifted to the third holding area RE3.

The random number counter C1 per normal figure is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 199. In particular, when the random number counter C1 per normal figure makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 per normal figure at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C1 per normal figure. The random number initial value counter CIN1 per normal figure is a loop counter updated within the same range (0 to 199) as the random number counter C1 per normal figure. The random number counter C1 per normal figure is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gate 317. As shown in FIG. 15A, in the gaming machine 10, the random number counter C1 for the normal figure stored in the hold storage area 412b is stored in the normal figure hit / miss table stored in the normal figure hit / miss table storage area in the ROM 411. Whether the value is correct or not is judged. In the example shown in FIG. 15A, the value of the random number that wins per figure is 0 out of 0 to 299, and 1 to 299 is out of the range. That is, the probability of hitting a normal figure is 1/300.

The type counter C2 per normal figure is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 199. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gate 317. In the gaming machine 10, the pachinko / pachislot type counter C2 value stored in the hold storage area 412b is based on the pachinko / pachislot type distribution table stored in the per-figure type distribution table storage area in the ROM 411. Is judged.

Here, FIG. 15B is a diagram showing an example of a classification table for each type of ordinary figure. In the example shown in FIG. 15B, seven types, A to G, are set for each type of drawing. FIG. 15C is a diagram showing the relationship between the lottery result per normal figure and the display content on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing pattern of the electric service winning door 371 in the electric service winning device 37. In the example shown in FIG. 16, seven opening / closing patterns 1 to 7 are set as opening / closing patterns.

As shown in FIGS. 15B, 15C, and 16A, the per-figure type counter C2 is selected and shaken when the value of the per-figure type counter C2 is 0 to 59 out of 0 to 199. The fraction is 30%. When the type per normal figure is A per normal figure, the number 1 is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. In the normal figure hit A, a game per normal figure in which the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 1 is executed. In the opening / closing pattern 1, the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened / closed once, and the electric service opening / closing game is executed once. That is, in the normal symbol A, the number stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed) are both 1, and these match.

B per normal figure is selected when the value of the type counter C2 per normal figure is 60 to 99 out of 0 to 199, and the distribution rate is 20%. When the type per normal figure is B per normal figure, the number 2 is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. In the normal figure hit B, a game per normal figure in which the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 2 is executed. In the opening / closing pattern 2, the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened / closed twice via one opening interval, and the electric service opening / closing game is executed twice. That is, in the normal symbol B, the number stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times of opening and closing the electric combination winning door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric combination opening / closing game) are both 2, and these match.

C per normal figure is selected when the value of the type counter C2 per normal figure is 100 to 129 out of 0 to 199, and the distribution rate is 15%. When the type per normal figure is C per normal figure, the number 3 is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. In the normal figure per C, a game per normal figure in which the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 3 is executed. In the opening / closing pattern 3, the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened / closed three times via the two opening intervals, and the electric service opening / closing game is executed three times. That is, in C per normal figure, the number stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times of opening and closing the electric combination winning door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric combination opening / closing game) are both 3, and these match.

The per-figure D is selected when the value of the per-figure type counter C2 is 130 to 154 out of 0 to 199, and the distribution rate is 12.5%. When the type per normal figure is D per normal figure, the number 4 is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. In the normal figure per D, a game per normal figure in which the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 4 is executed. In the opening / closing pattern 4, the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened / closed four times via three opening intervals, and the electric service opening / closing game is executed four times. That is, in the normal symbol D, the number stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed) are both 4, and these match.

E per normal figure is selected when the value of the type counter C2 per normal figure is 155 to 174 out of 0 to 199, and the distribution rate is 10%. When the type per normal figure is E per normal figure, the number 5 is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. In the normal figure hit E, a game per normal figure in which the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 5 is executed. In the opening / closing pattern 5, the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened / closed 5 times via the opening interval of 4 times, and the electric service opening / closing game is executed 5 times. That is, in the normal symbol E, the number stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed) are both 5, and these match.

F per normal figure is selected when the value of the type counter C2 per normal figure is 175 to 189 out of 0 to 199, and the distribution rate is 7.5%. When the type per normal figure is F per normal figure, the number 6 is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. In the normal figure per F, a game per normal figure in which the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 6 is executed. In the opening / closing pattern 6, the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened / closed 6 times via the opening interval of 5 times, and the electric service opening / closing game is executed 6 times. That is, in the normal symbol F, the number stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times of opening and closing the electric combination winning door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric combination opening / closing game) are both 6, and these match.

G per normal figure is selected when the value of the type counter C2 per normal figure is 190 to 199 out of 0 to 199, and the distribution rate is 5%. When the type per normal figure is G per normal figure, the number 7 is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. In the normal figure per G, a game per normal figure in which the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 7 is executed. In the opening / closing pattern 7, the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened / closed 7 times via the opening interval of 6 times, and the electric service opening / closing game is executed 7 times. That is, in the normal symbol G, the number stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 and the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed) are both 7, and these match.

The opening interval is set to be the same or substantially the same for each opening interval when the electric winning combination winning door 371 is operated a plurality of times in one game per game. Further, the opening interval is set to be the same or substantially the same even among the plurality of opening / closing patterns, that is, the opening interval is set to a fixed time regardless of the opening / closing pattern type.

In this way, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win, the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed as many times as the number of times according to the type per normal figure (the electric role opening and closing game is executed). , A number matching the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed) is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 as a lottery result in the lottery per drawing. In other words, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win, the number stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 is the number of times the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed in the game per ordinary figure (electric role opening and closing game). The number of executions of) will be shown. As a result, the player can directly and easily open / close the electric service winning door 371 (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed) in the game per normal figure based on the number stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361. Can be grasped. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily predict whether or not the electric function opening / closing game of the normal game will be executed after the big hit game is completed, so that the degree of attention and interest in the game will be improved, and the game of the normal figure will be played after the big hit game is completed. Since it can be easily predicted that the game ball 99 needs to be inserted into the electric service winning opening 376 of the electric service winning device 37 when the electric service opening / closing game is executed, the game ball is inserted into the electric service winning opening 376. Since the 99 is not inserted, the disadvantage that the jackpot game is not executed is more reliably prevented. In addition, when the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary figure is a hit in the ordinary symbol display unit 361, the number corresponding to the number of times of opening and closing of the electric role winning door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening and closing game) is the lottery per ordinary figure. Although it is displayed as the lottery result in, the lottery result in the lottery per map is not limited to numbers, but if the content reflects (corresponds) the lottery result in the lottery per map, alphabets, symbols, etc. It may be the display content of.

If the lottery result in the lottery per figure is out of order, the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 will not be opened or closed (the game per normal figure will not be executed), and the main display will be displayed. In the ordinary symbol display unit 361 of the unit 36, the numbers 0, 8 or 9 are stopped and displayed.

Then, in the MPU 41, the lottery results in the lottery per figure are "A per figure" and "A" based on the values of the random number counter C1 per figure and the type counter C2 per figure stored in the execution area AE. Judgment whether it is "B per figure", "C per normal figure", "D per normal figure", "E per normal figure", "F per normal figure", "G per normal figure" or "off". do.

In addition, instead of displaying the number indicating the lottery result in the lottery per figure on the ordinary symbol display unit 361, the lottery result in the lottery per figure may be displayed by alphabets, symbols and the like. ..

Returning to the description of FIG. 14, the out-of-specification reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. The out-of-order reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317.

In the gaming machine 10, the out-of-normal reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is out of order. Specifically, due to the deviation type table stored in the deviation type table storage area in ROM 411, the front / rear deviation reach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the reach is also generated. The value of the out-of-line reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of outliers, that is, the last stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and the reach is not generated, and the reach is not generated. ..

Here, FIG. 15 (D) is a diagram showing an example of an outlier type table. In the example shown in FIG. 15 (D), the value of the random number that is out of front and back is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that is reach other than front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that is completely out of line is 39. ~ 238. In addition, when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is a hit, the MPU 41 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 which is out of the ordinary figure.

Here, the reach is a decorative symbol indicating that the lottery result in the regular lottery is a hit between the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. It is a fluctuating state that is expected to be a combination of symbols. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the effective line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. Further, while the reach of the symbol display unit 341 is in a fluctuating state, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, and a game in which the player's operation on the operation button 20 is reflected in the effect. Person participation type operation effect processing and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, reduced or enlarged, and displayed during the execution of these effect processes.

The normal figure variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 199. Specifically, the normal symbol variation type counter CS determines the variable pattern type of the variation display of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 according to the lottery result in the common map per lottery. It is a thing. Further, the fluctuation pattern type is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 has a high-speed fluctuation effect (basic effect, non-reach effect), a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, and a special reach based on the variation pattern type. Rough variable game production type such as production is determined. The normal figure variation type counter CS is updated once every time the main process described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the normal figure variation type counter CS is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gate 317.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the normal map fluctuation display time based on the normal map fluctuation type counter CS and the preset fluctuation pattern table. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of the fluctuation pattern with reference to the fluctuation pattern table per normal chart or the fluctuation pattern table out of the normal chart stored in advance in the fluctuation pattern table storage area of the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 17 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table per normal figure, and FIG. 17 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table out of the normal figure. The type of fluctuation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (B).

As shown in FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (B), in the fluctuation pattern table per normal chart and the fluctuation pattern table out of the normal chart, fluctuation patterns are associated in advance according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of the normal chart. There is. Then, the MPU 41 refers to the fluctuation pattern table per normal map when the lottery result in the lottery per map is "win", and the fluctuation pattern table out of the normal map when the lottery result is "off". Specify the type of pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 (A), in the fluctuation pattern table per normal map, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS. .. When the variation pattern "01" is selected here, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach effect pattern in which the variation display time is 30 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 determines the normal reach effect pattern. Is executed (see FIG. 45). The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect. When the variation pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern in which the variation display time is 60 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 determines the super reach effect. The pattern is executed (see Figure 45). The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern having the longest variation display time of 90s as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display unit 341 determines the special reach effect pattern. The effect pattern is executed (see FIG. 45). The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 17 (B), in the deviation pattern table, each stop type (reach before and after, reach other than front and rear, complete deviation) at the time of deviation determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation pattern is defined in. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of disconnection is front / rear deviation reach or non-front / rear deviation reach, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS. Will be done. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is completely deviated, either the fluctuation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the variation display time is 7 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. A non-reach effect pattern is executed in unit 341 (see FIG. 45). When the variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the variation display time is 10 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. A non-reach effect pattern is executed in unit 341 (see FIG. 45).

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the normal reach effect executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "01", a plurality of types of normal reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and any of them is selected. The normal reach production is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, as the super reach effect executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "02", a plurality of types of super reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and a selection is made from among them. One of the super reach productions that have been done is performed. The super reach production is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach production, and the probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is higher than the normal reach production is higher than the special reach production. It is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation degree) of winning a figure is low.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, as a special reach effect executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "03", a plurality of types of special reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and a selection is made from among them. One of the special reach productions that have been done is performed. The special reach effect is a reach effect having a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is an effect developed from, for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach effect is executed when it is suggested to the player that the probability (expectation degree) of winning a normal figure is higher than that of the normal reach effect or the special reach effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of complete deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "04", the variation display is disengaged and the variation pattern is stopped with a pattern without a notice effect such as displaying a character, a message, or the like. The display is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the variation display at the time of complete deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", the variation display is accompanied by a notice effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed, and the variation display is stopped at the pattern. Is executed. Further, in the case of the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", the player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as the advance notice effect.

It should be noted that the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern includes an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a one-shot operation effect in which the one-shot operation is reflected in the effect, and an operation button 20 by the player. A player participation type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which the continuous hit operation is reflected in the effect, and a long press operation effect in which the long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the normal symbol display unit 361 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 36, the MPU 41 issues a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary map. Input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the MPU 41 outputs a variation pattern command in which an alphabet indicating the type per drawing is added in front of the variation patterns "01" to "03". For example, in the MPU 41, when the type per normal figure is "A per normal figure", the variation pattern command "A" indicating the type per normal figure is added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Any one of "A01" to "A03" is input to the voice lamp control device 5. Similarly, the MPU 41 uses the fluctuation pattern commands "B01" to "B03" when it is B per normal figure, and the fluctuation pattern commands "C01" to "C03" when it is C per normal figure. The fluctuation pattern commands "D01" to "D03" are used when the hit is D, the fluctuation pattern commands "E01" to "E03" are used when the hit is E, and the fluctuation is changed when the hit is F. The pattern commands "F01" to "F03" are input to the voice lamp control device 5, and the fluctuation pattern commands "G01" to "G03" are input to the voice lamp control device 5 when the per-figure is G.

Further, the MPU 41 is a variation pattern command "H" in which "H" is added in front of the variation patterns "01" to "05" when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is "off". Output any one of "H01" to "H05". As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result in the lottery per drawing based on the fluctuation pattern command, and is based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the voice from the speaker 26 according to the fluctuation display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn it off.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 determines the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the fluctuation display in the symbol display unit 341 based on the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation pattern table. Processing will be executed. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute a lottery per drawing. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes as the variation mode.

Returning to the description of FIG. 14, the random number counter C4 per special figure is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 299, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 299. The random number counter C4 per special figure is periodically updated, and is stored in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball 99 wins in the electric service winning opening 376 of the electric service winning device 37. In particular, when the random number counter C4 per special figure makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per special figure. The random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure is a loop counter updated within the same range (0 to 299) as the random number counter C4 per special figure. In the random number counter C4 per special figure, 0 out of random numbers 0 to 299 is out of order, and 1 to 299 is a small hit. That is, the small hit probability is 299/300, and the small hit is approximately 100%. On the other hand, unlike the conventional gaming machine, the random number counter C4 per special figure is not set with a random number value at which the lottery result is a big hit, and the lottery result is always either a small hit or a miss. Therefore, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 39 is operated based on the special drawing hit lottery is not executed. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is a small hit based on the value of the random number counter C4 for the special figure stored in the RAM 412 at a predetermined timing, and if it is a small hit, the V winning device 38 is operated.

In the random number counter C4 per special figure, the random number value (0 in the present embodiment) that is out of order may be eliminated and changed so that all the random number values are small hits. That is, when a lottery for a special figure is performed based on the random number counter C4 for a special figure, a 100% small hit may be won. Further, when the game ball 99 enters the electric service winning opening 376 of the electric service winning device 37, the right to execute the small hit game without performing the special figure winning lottery based on the random number counter C4 per special figure is generated. You may let it.

The jackpot type counter C5 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value 39. The jackpot type counter C5 is periodically updated and stored in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball 99 wins in the electric service winning opening 376 of the electric service winning device 37. The jackpot type counter C5 may be stored in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball 99 wins in the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38. Further, in the jackpot type counter C5, 0 to 19 of the random numbers 0 to 39 are 8R jackpots, and 20 to 39 are 16R jackpots. That is, the distribution ratio between the 8R jackpot and the 16R jackpot is 1: 1. Here, the 8R jackpot is a small hit in which the round game is executed eight times in the open / close execution mode as the jackpot game executed by winning the game ball 99 in the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38. The 16R jackpot is a small hit in which the round game is executed 16 times in the open / close execution mode.

The distribution ratio between the 8R jackpot and the 16R jackpot is not limited to 1; 1 and may be another ratio. Further, the jackpot type may include one or more small hits of other rounds such as 2R jackpot and 5R jackpot in place of or in addition to at least one of 8R jackpot and 16R jackpot. Of course, only one jackpot type, for example, 8R jackpot or 16R jackpot may be set.

Here, FIG. 18 is an example of the relationship between the opening / closing timing of the electric function winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 in the normal game and the opening / closing timing of the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39 in the big hit game. It is a time chart showing. Note that FIG. 18 shows an example in which the electric function winning door 371 is opened and closed a plurality of times as shown in B to G (opening and closing patterns 2 to 7 (see FIGS. 15B and 16)) per normal drawing. There is. Further, the jackpot game includes an opening / closing execution mode and an ending in which a round game in which the variable winning door 391 is opened is executed a plurality of times.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the lottery result in the normal drawing per lottery executed by the passage of the game ball 99 to the through gate 317 is a normal drawing, the electric role winning device 37 is used as a normal drawing game. By opening and closing the electric role winning door 371, the electric role opening / closing game in which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the electric role winning opening 376 is executed at least once, and in the electric role opening / closing game, the electric role winning opening 376 is executed. On condition that when the game ball 99 is entered, the lottery result in the special drawing hit lottery becomes a small hit, the small hit game in which the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed is executed after the end of the electric service opening / closing game. .. Then, in the small hit game, the V winning door 381 is opened and closed to allow the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 384, and when the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 384, the small hit game After the end, the jackpot game is executed. That is, in the game machine 10, if the lottery result in the lottery per drawing performed by the passage of the game ball 99 to the through gate 317 is a win, the electric role opening / closing game is triggered by the start of the electric role opening / closing game. The winning game and the jackpot game can be executed as a series of game cycles in this order. Then, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is BG per normal figure in which the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed a plurality of times, by the time the next electric service opening / closing game is started. If the jackpot game can be ended, the game cycle can be executed again with the start of the electric door opening / closing game as a trigger. That is, in the game machine 10, in one game per game executed by winning the lottery result in the lottery per game, the profit cycle corresponding to the number of times of opening and closing of the electric service winning door 371 is As a result of the repeated execution, it becomes possible to repeatedly execute the big hit game of the number of times corresponding to the number of times of opening and closing of the electric winning combination door 371 in the game of normal drawing. Moreover, in the gaming machine 10, the operating time of the electric winning door 371 in the opening / closing execution game of the normal game and the operating time of the V winning door 381 in the small hit game are set to be relatively short as described above. Therefore, in the game cycle, the time required for the opening / closing execution game and the small hit game of the normal drawing game is relatively short, and the big hit game can be repeatedly executed at short intervals.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed a plurality of times in B to G per the normal figure, the interval time between the opening of the electric role winning door 371 (by the electric role winning door 371 in the game per the normal figure). The time during which entry to the electric winning slot 376 is restricted) is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game. In other words, the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game is set to be equal to or less than the time of the opening interval, and the jackpot game is set to end in the opening interval. Here, the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game is the opening time, the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game is the opening time, and all round games are variable in the 16R jackpot. Total time of round games (maximum opening time x 16), interval time between round games, and ending in the case of full opening that ends with the passage of the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) without The total time of the time. Specifically, the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game is also affected by the theoretical maximum time of the small hit game executed before the jackpot game in the open interval, but is substantially the same as the time of the open interval or the open interval, for example. The time is set to 0.85 times or more and 0.99 times or less, more preferably 0.85 times or more and 0.95 times or less the time of the opening interval. Will be done. By setting the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 in the round game in such a range, even if the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed in the opening interval, the next electric power is transmitted. By operating the winning combination door 371, it becomes possible to end the jackpot game by the time the electric role opening / closing game is started.

In this embodiment, the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) is opened once in each round game of the jackpot game (8R jackpot game and 16R jackpot game), and the maximum opening time is the same. It is set to the time. Therefore, the ease of entering the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 394 in each round game (time required for each round game) is defined to be the same or substantially the same. Of course, the maximum opening time of one or more round games may be different from that of other round games, or the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) may be opened multiple times in one or more round games. good. That is, the ease of entering the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 394 in one or more round games (time required for the round game) is reduced by the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 394 in other round games. The ease of entering the ball (time required for a round game) may be set differently.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the opening interval time is preferably set to be equal to or greater than the total time of the theoretical maximum time of the small hit game and the theoretical maximum time of the big hit game. In other words, the theoretical maximum time of the big hit game is preferably set to be equal to or less than the time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the small hit game from the time of the interval between openings. Specifically, the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game is set to be substantially the same as the remaining time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the small hit game from the time of the opening interval, or less than or equal to the time of the opening interval, preferably the opening interval. It is set to 0.8 times or more and 1 times or less of the interval time, and preferably 0.9 times or more and 1 times or less. By setting the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 in the round game in such a range, even if the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed in the opening interval, the next electric power is transmitted. By the operation of the winning combination door 371, the big hit game can be surely ended by the time the electric combination opening / closing game is started.

When the electric service winning door 371 is operated a plurality of times in one game per game, the opening intervals of the electric service winning door 371 are all set to the same or substantially the same time. Further, even in the plurality of opening / closing patterns, the opening interval of the electric service winning door 371 is set to the same or substantially the same time. That is, the opening interval of the electric service winning door 371 is fixed at the same or substantially the same time regardless of the opening / closing pattern type and opening / closing timing.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the theoretical maximum time of the small hit game is a predetermined time predetermined as a time in which the gaming ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning unit 382 as described above. However, when at least one of the opening and the ending is performed in the small hit game, the value obtained by adding the predetermined time to the time required for the opening and the ending is the theoretical maximum time of the small hit game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, as described above, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 in the round game is set to be equal to or less than the minimum time required for the upper limit number of gaming balls 99 to enter the variable winning opening 394. However, it is also conceivable to set the time during which the maximum number of game balls 99 to the variable winning opening 394 exceeds the theoretical minimum time during which the ball can be entered. Specifically, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) in the round game is, for example, the upper limit number (for example, 10) for the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball. It is set to be more than the multiplied time (for example, 6 seconds), preferably more than 1 times and 1.5 times or less of the theoretical minimum time, and more preferably 1.1 times or more and 1.3 times or less.

When the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) in the round game is set to a time exceeding the theoretical minimum time that the maximum number of game balls 99 to the variable winning opening 394 can enter. There is a high possibility that the round game will be completed by the maximum number of game balls 99 being inserted into the variable winning opening 394 before the maximum opening time elapses. When the round game is terminated by the maximum number of game balls 99 being inserted into the variable winning opening 394 before the maximum opening time elapses, the time required for the round game is rounded due to the elapse of the maximum opening time. Since the game is shorter than when the game is completed, the time required for the jackpot game can also be shortened. Therefore, since the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, it is possible to easily end the big hit game at the interval between the opening and closing of the electric winning combination door 371 (the electric winning opening / closing game). Therefore, when the electric function opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times as a game per normal figure, it is easily possible to execute the big hit game a plurality of times.

In addition, by ending the jackpot game at the interval between the opening and closing of the electric role winning door 371 (electrical role opening and closing game), the interval between the opening and closing of the electric role winning door 371 (electrical role opening and closing game) during the execution of the big hit game can be set. It is possible to prevent the execution of the electric function opening / closing game in the normal drawing game from being started during the execution of the jackpot game after the end. As a result, in the small hit game, a situation occurs in which the small hit game is not executed because the big hit game is executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the electric service winning opening 376 in the normal game. Occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game is not executed because the winning of the V winning opening 384 is invalidated because the jackpot game is being executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be inserted into the variable winning opening 394 due to the opening of the electric winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game.

Further, if the round game is terminated by the upper limit number of game balls being inserted into the variable winning opening 394 before the maximum opening time elapses, the gaming ball 99 to be entered into the variable winning opening 394 in the round game. The number of is larger than when the round game is completed due to the passage of the maximum opening time. Therefore, the player can acquire the maximum number of game balls 99 in the round game, and the number of game balls 99 that can be acquired in the jackpot game increases. As a result, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player that may occur when the round game is ended due to the passage of the maximum opening time, that is, the decrease in the number of game balls 99 that can be acquired, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

Further, the maximum opening time is set to exceed the time obtained by multiplying, for example, the firing interval of the game ball 99 (for example, 0.6 seconds) by the upper limit number (for example, 10), and preferably the upper limit is set for the firing interval of the game ball 99. When the time is set to more than 1 times and 1.5 times or less, more preferably 1.1 times or more and 1.3 times or less, the maximum number of game balls is inserted in the variable winning opening 394. When the round game is ended by being hit by a ball, it is possible to prevent the time required for the round game from being significantly shorter than the maximum opening time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for the jackpot game from being significantly shortened. Therefore, when the electric role opening / closing game is executed multiple times in the normal figure hitting game, the electric role opening / closing game is next after the jackpot game is completed. The blank period that occurs before the start can be shortened.

By the way, when the blank period becomes long, it is assumed that the player stops the launch of the game ball 99 in order to prevent the number of owned game balls from decreasing due to the launch of the game ball 99. If a stop strike is performed in the blank period until the electric role opening / closing game is started, the launch of the game ball 99 is delayed with respect to the start of the electric role opening / closing game, and the electric role opening / closing game becomes the electric role winning opening 376. A situation may occur in which the game ball 99 is not entered, and as a result, the jackpot game in which a large amount of the game ball 99 can be acquired is not executed. On the other hand, by shortening the blank period, it is possible to suppress the stoppage in the blank period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball 99 is not inserted into the electric service winning opening 376 in the electric service opening / closing game due to the delay in launching the game ball 99, so that the occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game is not executed can be suppressed.

Here, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is A per figure, the game per pass is executed in which the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed once. Then, on condition that the game ball 99 enters the electric service winning opening 376 in the game per game by opening and closing the electric service winning door 371 once and the lottery result in the special drawing lottery is won. The small hit game is executed after the electric role opening / closing game is completed by opening / closing the electric role winning door 371, and the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed on condition that the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game. Is executed. That is, in the normal figure hit A in which one electric role opening / closing game is executed by opening / closing the electric role winning door 371 once, the number of times the electric role winning door 371 is opened / closed (electricity) after the end of the game per normal figure. One small hit game and a big hit game can be executed corresponding to the number of times the combination opening / closing game is executed.

On the other hand, when the lottery result in the lottery per normal figure is other than A per normal figure, that is, B to G per normal figure, the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed multiple times, so that the game is played multiple times per normal figure. An electric service opening / closing game is executed. Then, in the B to G per normal figure in which the electric role opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times, the small hit game and the big hit game triggered by the opening / closing of the electric role winning door 371 other than the final electric role opening / closing game are hit by the normal figure. It is executed during the opening interval of the electric winning door 371 of the game. That is, in the normal figure hit BG, the small hit game and the big hit game are executed during the execution of the normal figure hit game, and the small hit game triggered by the opening and closing of the electric role winning door 371 in the final electric role opening and closing game. And the jackpot game is executed after the end of the game per game, as in the case of A per game. That is, in the case of B to G per normal figure, a plurality of times corresponding to the number of times of opening and closing of the electric service winning door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric service opening / closing game) including the opening interval of the electric service winning door 371. Small hit games and big hit games can be performed. Further, as described above, in the normal figure hit A, one small hit game and a big hit game can be executed after the end of the normal figure hit game. That is, in any of A to G per Fuzu, the opening and closing of the electric service winning door 371 is performed for one game per Fuzu that is executed based on the result of the lottery per Fuzu. The small hit game and the big hit game can be executed the number of times corresponding to the number of times (the number of times the electric function opening / closing game is executed). Then, in the game machine 10, the electric service opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times by opening / closing the electric service winning door 371 a plurality of times. Therefore, a gaming machine having a novel game property is provided in which a jackpot game can be executed a plurality of times at short intervals by one hit of a normal figure. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention and interest in the game and improve the player's motivation to play.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the small hit game and the big hit game can be executed the number of times corresponding to the number of times of opening and closing of the electric function winning door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric function opening / closing game) in the game per game. On the other hand, in A to G per Fuzu, the electric winning doors are in the order of G per Fuzu, F per Fuzu, E per Fuzu, D per Fuzu, C per Fuzu, B per Fuzu, and A per Fuzu. The number of times of opening and closing of 371 (the number of times of executing the electric function opening and closing game) is large. Therefore, in A to G per Fuzu, it is expected in the order of G per Fuzu, F per Fuzu, E per Fuzu, D per Fuzu, C per Fuzu, B per Fuzu, and A per Fuzu. The number of jackpot games is large, and the expected value of the game ball 99 is also high. As a result, the player can proceed with the game while expecting to win the game per game with a larger number of opening and closing of the electric service winning door 371, so that the interest of the game is improved. Then, in the gaming machine 10, the distribution rate decreases in the order of G per pachinko machine, F per pachinko machine, E per pachinko machine, D per pachinko machine, C per pachinko machine, B per pachinko machine, and A per pachinko machine. (See FIG. 15 (B)). That is, as the type of hitting the normal figure, the number of expected big hit games is large, and it is difficult to select the hit type of the normal figure, which is advantageous to the player. In this way, by making it difficult for the player to be selected as the hit is advantageous to the player, the joy of winning the type of hit that is difficult to be selected is increased, and the interest of the game is further improved.

Further, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win, the number stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 has a correlation with the type per figure (see FIGS. 15B and 15C). ). Therefore, the player can grasp the type per normal figure (the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed)) by the number stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361. Then, by being able to grasp the number of times the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed (the number of times the electric role opening and closing game is executed) in the game per game, it is possible to grasp the maximum number of times the jackpot game is expected to be acquired in large quantities. Will be. As a result, by adding a playability that allows the player to grasp the maximum number of times the jackpot game, which is expected to acquire a large amount of game balls 99, can be executed, the degree of attention and interest in the game is further increased, and the player's motivation to play is further increased. It will be possible to improve. Furthermore, for example, by predicting whether or not the electric role opening / closing game in which the electric role winning door 371 is opened in the normal figure hit game is executed after the big hit game is completed, the degree of attention and interest in the game is improved, and the big hit. When the electric role opening / closing game is executed after the game is completed, it can be predicted that the game ball 99 needs to be inserted into the electric role winning opening 376, so that the game ball 99 is not entered into the electric role winning opening 376. This can prevent the disadvantage that the jackpot game is not executed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the opening interval time of the electric winning door 371 is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the big hit game, and is equal to or longer than the total time of the theoretical maximum time of the small hit game and the theoretical maximum time of the big hit game. Is set to. Therefore, even if all the round games in the big hit game are ended as fully open, it is possible to end not only the small hit game but also the big hit game in the opening interval of the electric winning door 371. .. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the electric service winning door 371 from opening and closing after the opening interval of the electric service winning door 371 ends during the execution of the jackpot game. As a result, in the small hit game, a situation occurs in which the small hit game is not executed because the big hit game is executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the electric service winning opening 376 in the normal game. Occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game is not executed because the winning of the V winning opening 384 is invalidated because the jackpot game is being executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be inserted into the variable winning opening 394 due to the opening of the electric winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game.

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is a machine in which the probability of a jackpot game lottery after a jackpot game executed by a probabilistic jackpot or the like is high. Further, as a conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that facilitates the entry of a gaming ball into an electric winning slot by supporting an electric accessory member after a big hit game. In such a conventional gaming machine, the probability of a jackpot lottery after a jackpot game becomes high, and the time is shortened so that the gaming ball can easily enter the electric winning slot. It is expected that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot in a relatively short time, and the jackpot game will be executed.

However, with conventional gaming machines, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed in a relatively short time, but even with a high probability jackpot lottery, it takes a large number of lottery times to reach the jackpot, and the jackpot It may take a long time to play a game, so-called hamari. Further, even if it is easy to enter the game ball into the electric service winning opening, it is possible that the number of game balls may decrease during the hamari between big hit games. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, even in a state advantageous to the player such as a probabilistic jackpot, the player may be stressed, which causes a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, two types of jackpot lottery tables, a jackpot lottery table for the non-probability change state (normal state) and a jackpot lottery table for the probability change state, are required to realize the probability change state. .. In addition, as a normal symbol lottery table for the normal symbol lottery for activating the electric accessory member in order to realize the time saving mode, a non-time saving normal drawing per drawing table and a time saving normal drawing per table are used. Two types of lottery tables are required. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine is disadvantageous in terms of storage capacity because it requires a large number of lottery tables, and further, the processing load is large because both the big hit determination process and the normal figure hit determination process are required. ..

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric service opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times by opening / closing the electric service winning door 371 a plurality of times. Even if it is executed, the next jackpot game is executed at relatively short intervals as described above. Further, the start timing of the jackpot game is started at a uniform timing from the end of the electric service opening / closing game. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines, so-called hobbies do not occur, and jackpot games are repeated at uniform intervals, which may give stress to the player when it is in an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are two types of lottery tables, a winning / failing table for normal figures and a winning / failing table for special figures, and the game can be progressed by a smaller number of lottery tables than the conventional gaming machines. Therefore, not only is it advantageous in terms of storage capacity, but also the processing burden on the lottery is small.

Here, FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the game machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, ball ejection performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, in the game information storage area 412d, as game information, "number of out balls", "number of general winning opening payout balls", "number of electric service winning opening payout balls", "V number of winning opening payout balls" , "Number of regular winning lots paid out", "Variable winning lots payouts", "Base information", "Continuous bonus ratio information" and "Character ratio information" are stored. Of these game information, "base information", "continuous bonus ratio information", and "feature ratio information" correspond to game information (performance information) related to ball ejection performance.

The "number of out balls" is the state in which the normal game in which the lottery result in the lottery per game is executed is executed (the game in which the game is not executed, the small hit game, or the big hit game is not executed). ) Is the total number of game balls fired on the game board 31. This "number of out balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting the out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 22 described later. The "number of out balls" is cleared to 0 balls when the "number of out balls" reaches 60,000 balls (step S2104: Yes) in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36 described later (step S2108). ..

The "general winning opening payout number" is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the general winning opening 313 in the normal game state. This "number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening" is a prize ball command in step S1402 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command to make the payout control device 7 pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize in the general prize opening 313 in the setting process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out by this prize. do.

The "number of balls to be paid out from the electric service winning slot" is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for the winning to the electric service winning slot 376 in the game per game in which the electric service winning device 37 is operated. This "number of balls to be paid out from the electric service winning opening" is set in step S1402 in the main process of FIG. In the prize ball command setting process, when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize to the electric service winning opening 376, the number of balls to be paid out by this prize is added. Update to the specified value.

The "number of payout balls of the V winning opening" is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the winning of the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game in which the V winning opening device 38 is operated. This "number of balls to be paid out of the V winning opening" is set as the prize ball command setting in step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25, which will be described later, when the winning of the V winning opening 384 is detected by the V winning sensor 38a in the small hit game. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize in the V prize opening 384 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out by this prize. ..

The “number of balls to be paid out from the normal winning opening” is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for the winning to the normal winning opening 385 in the small hit game in which the V winning device 38 is operated. This "number of payout balls of the normal winning opening" is set as the prize ball command setting in step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25, which will be described later, when the winning of the normal winning opening 385 is detected by the normal winning sensor 38b in the small hit game. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize in the normal prize opening 385 in the processing, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out by this prize. ..

The "variable winning slot payout number" is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the variable winning slot 394 in the jackpot game in which the variable winning slot 39 is operated. This "variable winning slot payout number" is the prize ball command setting process in step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25, which will be described later, when the variable winning slot 394 is detected by the variable winning sensor 39a in the jackpot game. When setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize in the variable winning opening 394, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out by the current prize.

The "base information" is information about the "base" which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal game state, and this "base" is the "general winning opening payout ball" for the "out number of balls" in the normal game state. It is the ratio of "number". When the "base" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "base" = 100 x "number of balls paid out from general winning openings" / "number of balls out". "Base information" includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36, which will be described later (steps S2105 and S2106). Specifically, the "base" when the latest out ball number reaches 60,000 balls is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous out ball number reaches 60,000 balls is It is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, respectively, as the 60,000-ball base B2 two times before. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, the current base BL is calculated as the current base BL (step S2103), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes "current base BL", "previous 60,000 ball base B1" and "previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are history. However, you may leave the 60,000 ball base for the past three times or more as a history. Further, the "base information" may include the cumulative base from the time when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present.

"Continuous prize ratio information" is based on winning to all winning openings (general winning opening 313, electric service winning opening 376, V winning opening 384, normal winning opening 385 and variable winning opening 394) for which prize balls are paid out. This is information on the "continuous bonus ratio", which is the ratio of the number of variable winning slot payouts to the total number of payouts. When the "continuous bonus ratio" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "continuous bonus ratio" = 100 x "variable winning lot payout number" / "total payout number". The "continuous accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in step S2109 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "continuous bonus ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous bonus ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present. It should be noted that the "continuous bonus ratio information" is executed for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of times per figure (for example, 100 times), and for a certain number of lottery per figure (for example, 1000 times) in the game state of the game. It may be a continuous bonus ratio to a certain number of out balls (for example, a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "continuous bonus ratio information" may include both the cumulative continuous bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio over a certain number of periods.

"Character ratio information" is the total of winnings to all winning openings (general winning opening 313, electric service winning opening 376, V winning opening 384, normal winning opening 385 and variable winning opening 394) for which prize balls are paid out. Information on the "feature ratio", which is the ratio of the total number of payouts to the number of payouts, the number of payouts from the electric service winning lots, the number of payouts from the V winning lots, the number of payouts from the normal winning lots, and the number of payouts from the variable winning lots. Is. Expressing the "feature ratio" with a mathematical formula, "feature ratio" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out for electric role winning lots" + "number of balls paid out for V winning lots" + "number of balls paid out for normal winning lots" + "variable" Number of winning lots paid out ") /" Total number of payouts ". The “accessory ratio information” is updated, for example, in step S2109 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "feature ratio information" is stored as the cumulative bonus ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present. In addition, the "feature ratio information" is for a certain period (for example, a certain number of times per normal figure (for example, 100 times), and a certain number of lottery per normal figure (for example, 1000 times) in the normal figure game state is executed. It may be the ratio of the bonus to the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "combination ratio information" may include both the cumulative bonus ratio and the bonus ratio over a certain period of time.

Here, FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A of the main control device 4. As shown in FIG. 20, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43 and a performance display switch 44.

The performance display monitor 43 displays "base information" in the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a position that can be visually recognized when the inner frame 12 is expanded (see FIG. 3). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality of (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. It may be provided in. It is also conceivable to display "base information" using the main display unit 36.

The 7-segment displays 431 to 434 can display the numbers "0" to "9" and the alphabets "A" to "F". In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when the alphabet "B" is displayed, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "8" and "8." is displayed, and the alphabet "D" is displayed. When displaying, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "0" and "0." is displayed. Further, when displaying any of the alphabets "A" to "F", it is conceivable to light the dots to clearly indicate that the alphabet is an alphabet.

In the performance display monitor 43, the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are identification segments in which the "base type" is displayed by an abbreviation, and the right two 7-segment displays are displayed. The display 433 and 434 are ratio segments on which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation "BL" of the current base BL is "8.", "L" in the two left 7-segment displays 431 and 432 which are the identification segments. Is displayed as, and the base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" on the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434 which are ratio segments. That is, on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, "8.", "L", "3", and "1" are displayed in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 collectively switches the power on / off of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by a pressing operation, and is in a position where it is easy to operate when the inner frame 12 is expanded. Provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the operation of turning on the power to the performance display switch 44 is performed, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the power is turned off for the performance display switch 44, the energization of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. .. The performance display switch 44 may be provided in addition to the main control device 4.

Here, FIG. 21A is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 21A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are in the off state, so that the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 21 (B) to 21 (D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, as "base information", the current base BL → the previous 60,000. The ball base B1 → the previous 60,000 ball base B2 → the current base BL are looped in this order, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in FIG. 21 (B), the current base BL is 28%, and in the example shown in FIG. 21 (C), the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, which is shown in FIG. 21 (D). In the example shown in, it is shown that the 60,000 ball base B2 is 32% two times before. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

A program required to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a program that calculates the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and the current base on the performance display monitor 43. A program for displaying BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in order at regular time intervals is stored in a ROM provided in the main control device 4 separately from the ROM 411 of the MPU 41. As a result, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. Further, a program necessary for displaying "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

Further, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of the "base information" or in addition to the "base information", it is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as "continuous character ratio information" and "character ratio information". Other performance information may be displayed.

Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 13, the sub control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and a symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. Execute the effect display.

[Voice lamp control device 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a built-in ROM 511 and RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in the normal-figure variable game production, the normal-figure per-figure game production, and the lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The voice lamp control device 5 commands the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4 by executing the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51. (Control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the voice output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing the normal figure variation game effect and the normal figure per game effect, which will be described later. ..

The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, a fluctuation pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, a normal figure game start command, a normal figure hit game start command, a small hit game start command, a V winning command, and a big hit game start Commands such as a command, a round game start command, a variable winning interval start command, an ending start command, and a jackpot game end command are input. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 outputs a display fluctuation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. Another embodiment is also conceivable in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, another embodiment may be considered in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both the functions of the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

Further, the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the voice output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. Further, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the sound are output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control the sound output effect, the lamp effect depending on the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 is input from the main control device 4 and executes a predetermined arithmetic process based on a command. Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 has a stop symbol combination of decorative symbols, a variation display time, a variation type (see FIG. 45), and an effect pattern type (see FIG. 46) based on the variation pattern command. ) Is determined, a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (see step S2506 in the normal diagram game effect processing in FIG. 44), and the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is started. .. At this time, when the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, the symbol display unit 341 displays a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and a voice lamp control device 5 and a symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Bidirectional communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built-in. Further, the display control device 6 also has a built-in other circuit such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 has a plurality of types of images such as variable symbols such as decorative symbols used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, advance notice effect images, reach effect images, normal figure hit effect images, and out-of-image effect images. It is remembered. The image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image and a moving image. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variation pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type and display timing of the image to be used, but also the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and the effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a built-in ROM 711 and RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the input / output I / F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out the game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and has a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not the game ball is paid out. It is provided with a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball rental device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the set amount and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal indicating that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to obtain a predetermined number of game balls. It will be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to the card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium having an IC chip built-in. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated to launch the game ball stored in the upper plate 23 on the launch rail 321. Supply on. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. And fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal whose ON / OFF is switched at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 increases the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22. Adjust the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotationally operated state, and the game is prevented in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22. Further, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with a thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the emission control device 8, and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 91 is ON.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means to be charged by the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information of the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period.

Further, when it is determined that the power supply is cut off, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like interrupt the control during execution and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 41. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed by a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a power failure. Execute NMI interrupt processing and so on. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like will be omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 22, in step S1101, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining the detection state of the sensor connected to the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines the detection state of the general winning sensor 313a, the electric service winning sensor 37a, the V winning sensor 38a, the normal winning sensor 38b, the variable winning sensor 39a, the gate passing sensor 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the like. When the entry of the game ball is detected, the information is stored in the RAM 412 as the winning detection information. Further, when the out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 updates the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d by adding 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. do. The number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d is cleared to 0 when the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is calculated by reaching 60,000 balls (step S2108 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36). reference).

<Step S1102>
Next, in step S1102, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counter CIN1 per normal figure and the random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counter CIN1 per normal figure and the random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is used. Clear to 0.

<Step S1103>
Subsequently, in step S1103, the MPU 41 updates the random number counter C1 per normal figure, the type counter C2 per normal figure, the reach random number counter C3 out of the normal figure, the random number counter C4 per special figure, and the jackpot type counter C5. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to each of the counter values of the normal figure per random number counter C1, the normal figure type counter C2, the normal figure off reach random number counter C3, the special figure per random number counter C4, and the jackpot type counter C5. Then, when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0.

<Step S1104>
Next, in step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the time counter. Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time counter when the time counter is set in the RAM 412. In the present embodiment, as time counters, a variable display time counter (step S1706 in FIG. 28), a winning door time counter for electric power (see step S1807 in FIG. 29), an interval time counter between openings (see step S1820 in FIG. 30), and an interval time counter. V winning door opening time counter (see step S1909 in FIG. 31), opening time counter (see step S2010 in FIG. 33), variable winning door opening time counter (see step S2017 in FIG. 33), variable winning interval time counter (see FIG. 34). Step S2031), ending time counter (see step S2034 in FIG. 34), and the like are set.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 executes a through-gate process of drawing whether or not to operate the electric service winning device 37 based on the normal hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE of the normal figure reservation storage area 412b. .. The details of the through gate processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

<Step S1106>
After that, in step S1106, the MPU 41 executes the launch control process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and the launch ball is launched on the condition that the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. Is a process to enable. Further, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when it is detected by the touch sensor 21a that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is effective.

[Through gate processing]
Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the through gate processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 22. Hereinafter, the through gate process will be described with reference to FIG. 23.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317. Here, when the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S1201: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1202, and when the game ball has not passed through the through gate 317 (step S1201: No). The through gate process is terminated.

<Steps S1202 and S1203>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, when the hold number N is the maximum hold number (step S1202: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate process. On the other hand, when the hold number N is not the maximum hold number (step S1202: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the hold number N (step S1203), and shifts the process to step S1204.

<Step S1204>
In step S1204, the MPU 41 has the values of the random number counter C1 per normal figure, the type counter C2 per normal figure, and the random number counter C3 out of the normal figure updated in step S1103 of FIG. 22, and the normal number counter updated in step S1412 of FIG. The figure variation type counter CS is acquired, and the value thereof is stored in the first free hold area (Nth hold area REN) of the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4 of the normal figure hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 obtains the hit / miss information before the hit / miss information for the first hold acquired in step S1204 becomes the hit / miss determination target of the normal figure in the variation start processing (S1507, FIG. 28 in FIG. 26) described later. The contents are confirmed, and the hold command setting process for setting the hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. The details of the hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

[Pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1205 in the through gate process of FIG. 23. It should be noted that the hold command includes information such as the lottery result (per or out of the normal figure) in the lottery per normal figure, the fluctuation pattern, and the number N of the hold. Hereinafter, the hold command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NA of the normal figure hold storage area 412b, and reads the value of the random number counter C1 per normal figure stored in the Nth hold area REN ( Step S1301).

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 reads a normal figure hit / fail table (see FIG. 15A), and based on the normal figure hit / fail table, the value of the random number counter C1 per normal figure read from the RAM 412 in step S1301. Executes a hit / fail determination as to whether or not is a value corresponding to a hit. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the value of the random number counter C1 per normal figure read from the RAM 412 is a value corresponding to a hit (step S1302: Yes), the process shifts to step S1303 and the process is hit. If it is determined that the value does not correspond (step S1302: No), the process proceeds to step S1305.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the normal figure per type counter C2 and the normal figure variation type counter CS from the RAM 412. For example, when the pass / fail information is stored in the third hold area RE3 in step S1204 in the through gate process of FIG. The counter value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS is read out. Of the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4 of the normal figure hold storage area 412b, the hold area in which the pass / fail information is stored in step S1204 in the through gate process of FIG. 23 is stored in the hold number storage area NA. It can be determined by the value of the pending number N.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 is based on the value of the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA, the value of the normal figure per type counter C2 read in step S1303, and the value of the normal figure variation type counter CS. And set the normal map variation type to the hold command. As described above, since the hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1301, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the hold command can refer to the hold number N included in the hold command. , It is possible to recognize which hold area of the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4 corresponds to the pass / fail information stored in the hold command.

<Steps S1305 and S1306>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 reads the values of the out-of-normal reach random number counter C3 and the normal map variation type counter CS from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 determines the out-of-reach type and the out-of-figure variation type based on the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA, the out-of-figure reach random number counter C3 read in step S1303, and the out-of-figure variation type counter CS. Set to the hold command (step S1306).

The hold command set in the hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. 25, which will be described later. It is erased after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with the command. Further, the content of the hold command described here is only an example, and if the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command, the content is not limited to the one described here. For example, it is possible that some or all of the information on the pending command may be included in another command.

[Main processing of main control device 4]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described. In the main process, the main control process for the progress of the normal figure game, the normal figure hit game, the small hit game, and the big hit game is executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1401 to S1409 are executed as periodic processes of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processes of steps S1410 to S1412 are executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1401 to S1409 to the next cycle. To.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1401, the MPU 41 transfers output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 22 or the previous main process to a control device such as a sub control unit 332 or a peripheral control unit 140. Executes external output processing to be sent to. For example, in RAM412, a variable pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, a normal figure game start command, a normal figure hit game start command, a small hit game start command, a V winning command, a big hit game start command, a round game start command, and a variable winning interval. If a command such as a start command, an ending start command, or a jackpot game end command is set, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, when the prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1402 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 has won a prize in the general winning opening 313, the electric service winning opening 376, the V winning opening 384, the normal winning opening 385, and the variable winning opening 394 based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. Judge whether or not. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. At this time, the MPU 41 pays out the number of general winning opening payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when a winning is generated in the general winning opening 313 in the normal game state. Update to the value obtained by adding the number of balls. Further, in the game per game, the MPU 41 determines the number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when a winning is generated in the electric winning slot 376. Update to the value obtained by adding the number of payout balls. Further, in the small hit game, when a prize is generated in the V winning slot 384 or the normal winning slot 385, the number of V winning slot payout balls or the normal winning slot payout number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out by this prize. Further, in the jackpot game, when a prize is generated in the variable winning opening 394, the MPU 41 determines the number of variable winning opening payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and the number of payout balls due to this winning. Update to the added value.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 executes a fuzu game control process for controlling the fuzu game. The details of the Fuzu game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. In the Fuzu game control process, a lottery for each Fuzu is executed, and the contents of the Fuzu hold storage area 412b are updated. At the same time, a variation pattern command required for symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set.

<Step S1404>
In step S1404, the MPU 41 executes a game control process per game that controls the operation of the electric winning combination winning device 37 in the game per game. The details of the game control process per drawing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

<Step S1405>
In step S1405, the MPU 41 executes a small hit game control process that controls the operation of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game. The details of the small hit game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process that controls the operation of the variable winning device 39 in the jackpot game. The details of the jackpot game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the main display unit 36 (see FIGS. 4 to 6). For example, the MPU 41 controls the normal figure game hold number display unit 362 according to the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA (see FIG. 14) of the normal figure hold storage area 412b. Specifically, when the hold number N is 4, all four LED lamps of the hold display unit 362 are controlled to light up, and when the hold number N is 3, the four LED lamps of the hold display unit 362 are controlled. Control is performed to turn off the remaining one LED lamp while turning on three of the LED lamps, and when the number of hold N is 2, two LED lamps out of the four LED lamps of the hold display unit 362 are turned on. Control is performed to turn off the remaining two LED lamps while turning them on, and when the number of holds N is 1, one of the four LED lamps of the hold display unit 362 is turned on while the remaining three are turned on. Control is performed to turn off one LED lamp, and when the hold number N is 0, control is performed to turn off all four LED lamps of the hold display unit 362. As a result, the player can know the number of holdings of the right of variable display in the normal symbol display unit 361 based on the lottery per drawing.

Further, the MPU 41 controls the special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36. Specifically, the MPU 41 has a random number counter C4 per special figure and a jackpot type counter C5 (FIG. 17 (C)) when it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the electric service winning opening 376 of the electric service winning device 37. And, the number corresponding to the value of FIG. 17 (D) is displayed on the special symbol display unit 363. Specifically, the MPU 41 has a number 3 when the jackpot type is an 8R jackpot, a number 7 when the jackpot type is a 16R jackpot, and a number other than the numbers 3 and 7 when the jackpot type is off. That is, 0, 1, 2, 4 to 6, 8 or 9 is displayed on the special symbol display unit 363 (see FIG. 17 (E)).

It should be noted that the control of the main display unit 36 on the normal symbol display unit 361 is executed in the normal map game control process of FIGS. 26 to 28, which will be described later.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes the specific performance information update process in the game information. In the present embodiment, the base information, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio are updated as the specific performance information. The details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

<Step S1409>
In step S1409, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in the specific performance information update process of step S1408 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. The details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41.

<Step S1410>
In step S1410, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1410: Yes), the process shifts to step S1401 and each process after S1401 described above is executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1410: No), the execution timing of the next main process is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process arrives. During the remaining time until it is reached, steps S1410 to S1412 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1410: Yes).

<Steps S1411 and S1412>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counter CIN1 per normal figure and the random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counter CIN1 per normal figure and the random number initial value counter CIN2 per special figure, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is concerned. To 0. Further, in step S1412, the MPU 41 updates the normal map variation type counter CS. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the normal figure variation type counter CS, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

[Public game control process]
In the normal map game control process, a process for advancing the normal map game that clearly indicates the lottery result in the normal map lottery performed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317 is executed. Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal drawing game control process executed in step S1403 in the main process of FIG. 25. Hereinafter, the normal drawing game control process will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal drawing game executing flag is set to ON. The normal figure game executing flag is a flag indicating that the normal figure game is being executed, that is, the normal symbol is changing in the normal symbol display unit 361, and is a step in the change start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. It is set to on in S1711. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509 when the normal map game execution flag is set to on (step S1501: Yes), and when the normal map game execution flag is set to off (step S1501:). No), the process proceeds to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
In step S1502, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game execution flag is set to ON. The flag for executing the game per normal figure is that the game per normal figure is being executed, which allows the game ball 99 to enter the electric service winning opening 376 by opening and closing the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37. This is a flag indicating that the flag is set to ON in step S1802 in the game control process per game in FIG. 29, which will be described later. When the MPU 41 is set to turn on the game executing flag per normal map (step S1502: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the game control process for the normal map, and the game executing flag per normal map is set to off. In the case (step S1502: No), the process proceeds to step S1503. That is, the Fuzu game is not executed during the execution of the Fuzu hit game.

<Step S1503>
In step S1503, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small hit game executing flag is set to ON. The small hit game executing flag indicates that the small hit game in which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning opening 384 by opening and closing the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38 is being executed. It is a flag and is set to ON in step S1903 in the small hit game control process of FIG. 31 described later. When the small hit game in progress flag is set to on (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the normal figure game control process, and when the small hit game in progress flag is set to off (step S1503: Yes). Step S1503: No), the process proceeds to step S1504. That is, the normal drawing game is not executed during the execution of the small hit game.

<Step S1504>
In step S1504, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game executing flag is set to ON. The jackpot game executing flag indicates that a jackpot game is being executed in which the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39 is opened and closed a plurality of times to allow the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning opening 394. It is a flag and is set to ON in step S2007 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 33, which will be described later. The MPU 41 ends the normal figure game control process when the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on (step S1504: Yes), and ends the jackpot game in progress flag when the jackpot game in progress flag is set to off (step S1504). : No), the process proceeds to step S1505. That is, the Fuzu game is not executed during the execution of the jackpot game.

<Step S1505>
When all of the normal figure game execution flag, the normal figure hit game execution flag, the small hit game execution flag, the big hit game execution flag, and the normal figure game start flag are set to off (steps S1501 to S1504). No) in all, that is, if none of the Fuzu game, the Fuzu hit game, the small hit game, and the big hit game is executed, and the Fuzu hit game is not scheduled to start, the MPU 41 is put on hold. It is determined whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA of the storage area 412b is 0 (step S1505). The MPU 41 ends the normal drawing game control process when the hold number N is 0 (step S1505: Yes), and shifts the process to step S1506 when the hold number N is not 0 (step S1505: No). ..

<Steps S1506 to S1508>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the data of the hit / miss information stored in the hold storage area 412b, and further causes the normal symbol display unit 361 and the symbol display unit 341 to execute the variation display based on the hit / miss information. (Step S1507). The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27, and the details of the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 28. Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal map game start command in the RAM 412 (step S1508), and ends the normal map game control process. The normal map game start command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the normal figure game variation effect is started in the symbol display unit 341 and the like.

<Step S1509>
When the normal symbol game execution flag is set to on (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 has a variable display time since the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 is started. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (step S1509), if the variable display time has elapsed (step S1509: Yes), the process is shifted to step S1510, and if the variable display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1510. (Step S1509: No), the normal figure game control process is terminated.

<Step S1510>
When the variation display time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361 started in step S1708 of the variation start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. The normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the lottery per lottery corresponding to the normal figure game is stopped and displayed (step S1510). For example, in the MPU 41, when the result of the lottery per normal figure is a hit, the numbers 1 to 7 according to the type per normal figure are displayed as normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361. Further, when the lottery result in the lottery per normal figure is out of order, any number 0, 8 or 9 is displayed as a normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361. As a result, the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is clearly shown on the normal symbol display unit 361, and the player can know the result of the lottery per drawing.

<Steps S1511 to S1513>
In step S1511, the MPU 41 sets the normal map game in-run flag to off, and further determines whether or not the normal map hit flag is set to on (step S1512). Here, the normal symbol hit flag is a flag indicating that the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361 stopped and displayed in step S1510 is a hit, and will be described later. In step S1703 in the fluctuation start processing of FIG. 28, it is set to ON at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol. When the normal figure hit flag is set to on (step S1512: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal figure hit game start flag on (step S1513), and ends the normal figure game control process. It is a flag to start the game per normal figure, and is referred to when it is determined whether or not to start the game per normal figure in step S1801 in the game control process per normal figure described later. On the other hand, when the normal figure hit flag is set to off (step S1512: No), that is, when the lottery result in the normal figure hit lottery is out of order, the MPU 41 ends the normal figure game control process.

[Data setting process]
In the data setting process, the setting process related to the hit / miss information in the hold storage area 412b is executed when the game per game is started. Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of FIG. 26. Hereinafter, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 27.

<Steps S1601 and S1602>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1601, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA, and moves the hit / fail information from the first hold area RE1 to the execution area AE (step S1602). ).

<Step S1603>
In step S1603, the MPU 41 shifts the hit / fail information of the second reserved area RE2 to the fourth reserved area RE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, the MPU 41 moves the hit / fail information of the second hold area RE2 to the first hold area RE1, moves the hit / miss information of the third hold area RE3 to the second hold area RE2, and moves the hit / miss information of the fourth hold area RE4. The information is moved to the third holding area RE3.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets a shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the pass / fail information of the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4 has shifted, and ends the data setting process. Then, the shift command set in step S1604 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 will be changed.

[Variation start processing]
In the variation start process, the process is executed in order to cause the normal symbol display unit 361 and the symbol display unit 341 to execute the variation display based on the hit / miss information stored in the execution area AE of the hold storage area 412b. Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1507 of FIG. 26. Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

<Steps S1701 and S1702>
As shown in FIG. 28, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines the result of the lottery per drawing based on the winning / failing information moved to the execution area AE and the winning / failing table (see FIG. 15A). A hit / fail determination is made, and it is further determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination is a hit (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 per normal figure included as the hit / miss information is 0 corresponding to the hit. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1703 when the result of the pass / fail determination is a hit (step S1702: Yes), and when the result of the pass / fail determination is not a hit but a miss (step S1702: No), the process is performed in step S1706. Move to.

<Steps S1703 to S1705>
When the result of the hit / fail determination is a hit (step S1702: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal figure hit flag to on (step S1703). The normal figure hit flag determines whether or not to start the normal figure hit game when the normal symbol being displayed in the fluctuation display on the normal symbol display unit 361 is stopped and displayed in step S1510 of the normal figure game control process of FIG. 26. It is a flag for determination, and is referred to in step S1512 in the normal drawing game control process. Then, the MPU 41 determines the normal figure hit type based on the value of the normal figure hit type counter included in the hit / miss information (step S1704), and the electric power of the electric function winning device 37 according to the normal figure hit type (opening / closing pattern). The opening / closing number counter indicating the remaining number of opening / closing times of the winning combination door 371 is set in the RAM 412 (step S1705). Specifically, the MPU 41 has a value of the open / close number counter set to 1 when it is A per normal figure, a value of the open / close number counter set to 2 when it is B per normal figure, and C per normal figure. In this case, the value of the open / close counter is set to 3, the value of the open / close counter is set to 4 when the value is D per normal figure, and the value of the open / close counter is set to 5 when the value is E per normal figure. If it is a hit F, the value of the open / close number counter is set to 6, and if it is a hit G, the value of the open / close count counter is set to 7.

<Step S1706>
In step S1706, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern and a variation display time counter that defines the variation display time of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display unit 361 and the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 corresponding to the variation pattern of the normal symbol game. Set. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation display time determined based on the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation pattern table per normal map (see FIG. 17A) as the fluctuation pattern, and corresponds to the fluctuation display time. Set the variable display time counter.

<Step S1707>
In step S1707, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command in the RAM 412 including the variation pattern specified in step S1703 and the variation pattern identified in step S1706. As a result, in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is a hit, the MPU 41 is "A01" in which any of "A" to "G" indicating the type of hitting the normal figure is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". -"A03", "B01"-"B03" ... Any one of "G01"-"G03" is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command.

<Step S1708>
When the result of the hit / fail determination is not a hit but a miss (step S1702: No), the MPU 41 is a normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361 and a decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal figure game. A fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation display time counter that define the fluctuation display time of the above are set (step S1708). Specifically, the MPU 41 is determined based on the normal map variation type counter CS, the value of the normal map deviation reach random number counter (normal map deviation type), and the normal map deviation pattern table (see FIG. 17B). The variable display time to be displayed is set as a variable pattern, and the variable display time counter corresponding to the variable display time is set.

<Step S1709>
In step S1709, the MPU 41 sets the RAM 412 with a variation pattern command including the fact that the lottery result in the lottery per drawing for the normal map game is out of order and the variation pattern specified in step S1708. As a result, in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is out of order, the MPU 41 is any one of "H01" to "H05" in which "H" indicating that the change is out of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "05" is added. Is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is out of order, the MPU 41 includes information on whether the lottery result is out of front / back, reach out of front / back, reach other than out of front / back, or complete out of order in the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. Further, the MPU 41 sets the normal map game executing flag to ON (step S1711), and ends the fluctuation start process. The flag during the normal map game display is referred to in step S1501 in the normal map game control process of FIG. 26 in order to determine whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the main display unit 36.

[Game control processing per normal figure]
In the game control process for a normal figure, a process for advancing the game for a normal figure, which is executed when the lottery result of the lottery for the normal figure is a hit, is executed. In the game per game, when the lottery result in the special drawing lottery executed by operating the electric role winning device 37 and inserting the game ball 99 into the electric role winning opening 376 is a small hit. The right to execute the small hit game after the end of the normal hit game is granted. Here, FIGS. 29 and 30 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure executed in step S1404 in the main process of FIG. 25. Hereinafter, the game control process per normal drawing will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 29, in step S1801, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game start flag per normal figure, which is set to be on in step S1513 of FIG. 26, is set to on. The game start flag per normal figure is a flag to start the game per normal figure in which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the electric service winning opening 376 by opening the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37. Is. When the game ball 99 enters the electric service winning opening 376, the small hit game that gives an opportunity to start the big hit game that is expected to acquire a large amount of the game ball 99 is executed. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1802 when the game start flag per normal figure is set to on (step S1801: Yes), and when the game start flag per normal figure is set to off (step S1801: Yes). S1801: No), the process shifts to step S1809 of FIG.

<Steps S1802 to S1804>
When the game start flag per normal figure is set to on (step S1801: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the game execution flag per normal figure to on (step S1802) and sets the game start command per normal figure. (Step S1803), the normal map hit start flag set on in step S1513 of the normal map game control process of FIG. 26 is set to off (step S1804). The game execution flag per normal figure is a flag indicating that the game per normal figure is being executed, and in step S1502 in the normal figure game control process of FIG. 26 and step S1809 of the game control process per normal figure. Referenced. The game start command per normal figure is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game per normal figure is started, and is an external output of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the process. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 or the like to execute the game per-figure effect for the per-figure game.

<Steps S1805 and S1806>
In step S1805, the MPU 41 starts the electric service opening / closing game by opening the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37, and further sets the flag for opening the electric service winning door to ON (step S1806). The electric service winning door opening flag is a flag indicating that the electric service winning door 371 is open, and is used to determine whether there is a possibility of closing the electric service winning door 371. It is referred to in step S1810 of the game control process.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
In step S1807, the MPU 41 sets an electric service winning door opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the electric service winning door 371. Then, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the open / close number counter indicating the remaining open / close number of the electric service winning door 371 set in step S1705 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 28 (step S1808), and plays the game per normal figure. finish.

<Step S1809>
As shown in FIG. 30, when the normal map hit start flag is set to off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 is set to on in step S1802 in the normal map per game control process, and the normal map is set to on. It is determined whether or not the per-game executing flag indicating that the winning game is being executed is set to ON (step S1809). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1810 when the game executing flag per map is set to on (step S1809: Yes), and turns off the game executing flag per map (step). S1809: No), the game control process per game is terminated.

<Step S1810>
In step S1810, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric service winning door opening flag set to be on in step S1806 in the game control process per map is set to on. When the electric service winning door opening flag is set to on (step S1810: Yes), the process shifts to step S1811, and when the electric service winning door opening flag is set to off (step S1810: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1823.

<Step S1811>
When the electric service winning door opening flag is set to on (step S1810: Yes), the value of the electric service winning door opening time counter set in step S1807 in the game control process per normal figure of the MPU 41 is set. It is determined whether or not it is 0, that is, whether or not it is the timing to close the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 (step S1811). When the value of the electric service winning door opening time counter is 0 (step S1811: Yes), the process shifts to step S1812, and when the value of the electric service winning door opening time counter is not 0 (step S1811: No), the corresponding The game control process per normal figure is terminated.

<Steps S1812 and S1813>
When the value of the electric service winning door opening time counter is 0 (step S1811: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the timing to close the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37, so that the electric service winning door 371 is opened. By closing the door, the electric service opening / closing game is terminated (step S1812), and the electric service winning door opening flag is set to off (step S1813). That is, the execution time of the electric service opening / closing game is fixed to a fixed time defined by the electric service winning door opening time counter. This can contribute to equalizing the time required for a series of game cycles in which the electric service opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game are executed in this order.

<Step S1814>
In step S1814, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric service winning flag is set to ON. The electric service winning flag is a flag indicating that a prize has been generated in the electric service winning opening 376 of the electric service winning device 37. For example, in the prize ball command setting process of step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25, the electric service winning flag is used. It is set to on when setting the prize ball command for winning the mouth 376. When the electric role winning flag is set to on (step S1814: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1815, and when the electric role winning flag is set to off (step S1814: No), the process To step S1819.

<Steps S1815 and S1816>
When the electric service winning flag is set to ON (step S1814: Yes), the MPU 41 acquires the value of the random number counter C4 per special figure and the value of the jackpot type counter C5 (step S1815), and the hit / miss table for the special figure. Based on (see FIG. 17C), it is determined whether or not the lottery result in the special drawing lottery is a small hit (step S1816). Here, the MPU 41 acquires the value of the jackpot type counter C5 in addition to the value of the random number counter C4 per special figure in step S1815. That is, the jackpot type is determined when the electric service winning flag is set to ON (step S1814: Yes), that is, when the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric service winning opening 376. However, the value of the jackpot type counter C5 may be acquired when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game. That is, the jackpot type may be determined when the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384.

Then, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1817 when the lottery result in the special drawing lottery is a small hit (step S1816: Yes), and when the lottery result in the special drawing lottery is not a small hit (out of place). (If there is) (step S1816: No), the game control process per normal figure is terminated without executing the small hit game by opening / closing the electric service winning door 371 (electric service opening / closing game).

<Steps S1817 and S1818>
When the lottery result in the special figure hit lottery is a small hit (step S1816: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the small hit game start flag on (step S1817) and sets the electric role winning flag off (step S1817). S1818). That is, if there is a game ball 99 entering the electric role winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game in the game per normal figure, and the lottery result in the lottery per special figure is a small hit, the electric role opening / closing game The small hit game starts immediately after the end of. As a result, the start timing of the small hit game based on the start of the electric function opening / closing game (game cycle) can be advanced as much as possible, so that the time required for the entire game cycle can be shortened. Therefore, as a result of being able to bring the end timing of the jackpot game executed at the end of the game cycle closer to the start timing of the game cycle, it is possible to end the jackpot game within the opening interval between the electric service opening / closing games.

In this embodiment, when it is confirmed that the game ball 99 has been inserted into the electric service winning opening 376 when the electric service winning door 371 is closed (at the end of the electric service opening / closing game), the small hit game is played. Although it is executed, the electric role opening / closing game may be ended and the small hit game may be started at the stage when it is confirmed that the game ball 99 has been inserted into the electric role winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game. .. Further, as a condition for executing the small hit game triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric service winning opening 376, it may be added that the big hit game is not executed. That is, the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric winning combination winning opening 376 during the execution of the big hit game may be invalidated, and the execution of the small hit game may be restricted.

<Step S1819>
In step S1819, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the open / close number counter indicating the remaining number of open / close times of the electric service winning door 371 set in step S1705 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 28 is 0, that is, the game per normal figure. Judge whether it is the end timing of. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1822 when the value of the open / close counter is 0 (step S1819: Yes), and shifts the process to step S1820 when the value of the open / close counter is not 0 (step S1819: No). do.

<Steps S1820 and S1821>
When the value of the open / close number counter is not 0 (step S1819: No), the MPU 41 sets an interval time counter between openings indicating the time from closing the electric service winning door 371 to opening the next electric service winning door 371. At the same time as setting (step S1820), the flag during the opening interval indicating that it is the interval (closing period) until the electric service winning door 371 is opened is set to on (step S1821), and the game control process per normal figure is set. To finish.

<Step S1822>
When the value of the open / close number counter is 0 (step S1819: Yes), the MPU 41 does not need to execute the electric function opening / closing game by opening / closing the electric service winning door 371 as a game per normal figure. The flag for playing a game per game, which indicates that the game is being played, is set to off (step S1822), and the game control process for the game per game is terminated.

<Step S1823>
When the electric service winning door opening flag is set to off (step S1810: No), the MPU 41 sets the opening interval flag set to on in step S1821 of the game control process for the normal figure to on. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step S1823). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1824 when the open interval flag is set to on (step S1823: Yes), and when the open interval flag is set to off (step S1823: No). , Ends the game control process per game.

<Step S1824>
When the flag during the opening interval is set to on (step S1823: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates the time until the electric service winning door 371 is opened, and is set in step S1820 of the game control process per normal figure. It is determined whether or not the value of the interval time counter between open doors is 0. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the electric service opening / closing game by opening the electric service winning door 371. When the value of the interval time counter between openings is 0 (step S1824: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1805 of FIG. 29 and opens the electric service winning door 371 to start the electric function opening / closing game. The process is executed (steps S1805 to S1808). On the other hand, when the value of the interval time counter between openings is not 0 (step S1824: No), the MPU 41 ends the game control process per normal figure.

[Small hit game control process]
In the small hit game control process, when the lottery result in the special figure hit lottery executed when a prize is generated in the electric role winning opening 376 of the electric role winning device 37 in the normal figure hit game is a small hit. The process of advancing the small hit game to be executed is executed. In the small hit game, the V winning device 38 is operated, and the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384, so that the right to execute the big hit game after the end of the small hit game is granted. Here, FIGS. 31 and 32 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the small hit game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. 25. Hereinafter, the small hit game control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 31, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small hit game start flag set to be turned on in step S1817 of the normal game per game control process of FIG. 30 is set to on. The small hit game start flag is a flag indicating that the small hit game in which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning opening 384 is started by opening and closing the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38. .. When the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 39 is operated is executed, and it is expected that a large amount of game balls will be acquired. Then, when the small hit game start flag is set to on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1902, and when the small hit game start flag is set to off (step S1901:). No), the process proceeds to step S1911 of FIG.

<Steps S1902 to S1904>
When the small hit game start flag is set to on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a small hit game start command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the small hit game is started (step S1901: Yes). S1902), the small hit game executing flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set to on (step S1903), and the small hit game start flag is set to off (step S1904). The small hit game start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41.

<Steps S1905 to S1908>
In step S1905, the MPU 41 determines the jackpot type based on the value of the jackpot type counter C5 acquired in step S1815 of the game control process per map of FIG. 30 and the jackpot type distribution table (see FIG. 17 (D)). do. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot type is an 8R jackpot (step S1906), and if it is an 8R jackpot (step S1906: Yes), the 8R jackpot flag is set to on (step S1907), and the 8R jackpot is set. If not (step S1906: No), the 16R jackpot flag is set to on because it can be determined that the jackpot type is 16R jackpot (step S1908).

<Steps S1909 and S1910>
In step S1909, the MPU 41 opens the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38 to start the small hit game (step S1909), and further sets a V winning door opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the V winning door 381. (Step S1910), the small hit game control process is terminated.

<Step S1911>
As shown in FIG. 32, in step S1911, whether or not the small hit game executing flag set to be on in step S1903 of the small hit game control process is set to on, that is, the small hit game is set. Determine if it is running. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1912 when the small hit game executing flag is set to on (step S1911: Yes), and when the V winning door opening flag is set to off (step S1911: Yes). S1911: No), the small hit game control process is terminated.

<Step S1912>
In step S1912, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game standby flag set to be turned on in step S1916, which will be described later in the small hit game control process, is set to on. The jackpot game standby flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in the execution standby state in a situation where it is confirmed that the jackpot game is to be executed. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1919 when the jackpot game waiting flag is set to on (step S1912: Yes), and processes when the jackpot game waiting flag is set to off (step S1912: No). To step S1913.

<Step S1913>
In step S1913, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set to ON. The V winning flag is a flag indicating that a winning has occurred in the V winning opening 384. For example, in the prize ball command setting process of step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25, the winning ball command setting for winning the V winning opening 384 is performed. It is set to on when you do. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1914 when the V winning flag is set to on (step S1913: Yes), and steps the process when the V winning flag is set to off (step S1912: No). Move to S1919.

<Steps S1914-S1918>
When the V winning flag is set to ON (step S1913: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 384 from a standby position that allows the gaming ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 384. The switching unit 386 of the V winning device 38 is moved to an operating position that restricts entry (step S1914). That is, the MPU 41 restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 at the stage when the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 is confirmed. Then, by restricting the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384, the game ball 99 that has entered the V winning portion 382 will be entered into the normal winning opening 385. Further, the MPU 41 waits for the execution of the jackpot game on condition that the jackpot game executing flag set to be ON in step S2007 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 33 is not set to ON (step S1915: No). The jackpot game standby flag indicating the state is set to on (step S1916), and the V winning command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that a winning has occurred in the V winning opening 384 is set (step S1917). Further, the V winning flag is set to off (step S1918). The V winning command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41.

In this embodiment, when it is confirmed that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384 during the execution of the small hit game (while the V winning door 381 is open), the big hit game is executed. The right to execute a big hit is generated by the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 on condition that there is no such ball. In other words, if it is confirmed that the game ball 99 has been inserted into the V winning opening 384 and the jackpot game is executed, the generation of the right to execute the jackpot game is restricted, for example. When the big hit game is being executed at the start of the small hit game, by making the switching unit 386 stand by in the standby position, the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 384 is restricted, and the right to execute the big hit game is generated. You may not let it. That is, the right to execute the big hit game may be generated on the condition that the big hit game is completed by the start of the small hit game (when the V winning opening 384 is opened). Further, it may be confirmed whether or not the big hit game is executed at the end of the small hit game, and if the big hit game is not executed, the right to execute the big hit game may not be generated. That is, the right to execute the big hit game may be generated on the condition that the big hit game is completed by the end of the small hit game (when the V winning opening 384 is closed).

On the other hand, when the jackpot game executing flag is set to ON (step S1915: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1918. That is, in the game machine 10, even if the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38, if the jackpot game is being executed, the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384. The right to execute the jackpot game based on the ball entry is not generated, and the jackpot game is not executed even if the game ball is entered into the game ball 99 in the V winning opening 384. Therefore, in the game machine 10, if the big hit game is not completed within the opening interval of the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37, the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game. May be invalidated. Then, when the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game is invalidated, the big hit game that could be executed at the interval between openings is not executed, and the player has one big hit. You will not be able to acquire the game ball 99 that you should be able to acquire in the game.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, the right-handed gaming ball 99 is guided to the variable winning opening 353 (electrical winning device 37) by the specified passage 35 by the same route, and the gaming ball 99 is the variable winning opening. The time until reaching the unit 353 is made uniform, and the interval between the opening of the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is set to be equal to or more than the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game. As a result, as long as the game ball 99 is continuously launched into the right area of the game board 31 from the start of the jackpot game, the jackpot game can be ended within the interval between openings. As a result, it is possible to prevent the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game from being invalidated, and to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage that the big hit game is not executed at the interval between openings.

<Step S1919>
In step S1919, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the V winning door opening time counter set in step S1910 of the small hit game control process is 0. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to close the V winning door 381. When the value of the V winning door opening time counter is 0 (step S1919: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1920, and when the value of the V winning door opening time counter is not 0 (step S1919: No), The small hit game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1920 to S1922>
When the value of the V winning door opening time counter is 0 (step S1919: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the V winning door 381 to end the small hit game (step S1920), and the game ball to the V winning opening 384. The switching unit 386 of the V winning device 38 is moved from the operating position that restricts the entry of the 99 to the standby position that allows the gaming ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 384 (step S1921), and the small hit game is being executed. The flag is set to off (step S1922). That is, the execution time of the small hit game is fixed to a fixed time defined by the V winning door opening time counter. This can contribute to equalizing the time required for a series of game cycles in which the electric service opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game are executed in this order.

<Steps S1923 to S1925>
In step S1923, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game standby flag set on in step S1916 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game to be executed is waiting to be executed when a prize is generated in the V winning opening 384. Then, when the jackpot game standby flag is set to ON (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag for starting the jackpot game to ON (step S1924), and controls the small hit game. End the process. That is, when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game, the big hit game is started immediately after the small hit game is completed. As a result, the start timing of the jackpot game based on the start of the electric function opening / closing game (game cycle) can be advanced as much as possible, so that the time required for the entire game cycle can be shortened. Therefore, as a result of being able to bring the end timing of the jackpot game executed at the end of the game cycle closer to the start timing of the game cycle, it is possible to end the jackpot game within the opening interval between the electric service opening / closing games.

On the other hand, in the MPU 41, when the big hit game standby flag is set to off at the time of ending the small hit game (step S1923: No), the big hit game start flag is set to on because it is not necessary to execute the big hit game. Without doing so, the jackpot type flag (8R jackpot flag or 16R jackpot flag) set on in step S1907 or S1908 is set to off (step S1925), and the small hit game control process is terminated.

[Big hit game control process]
In the big hit game control process, a process of advancing the big hit game, which is executed when a prize is generated in the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game, is executed. In the jackpot game, the variable winning device 39 is operated, and the game ball 99 is opened to the variable winning opening 394 so that the game ball 99 can be entered. The round game is executed a plurality of times, so that a large amount of the game ball 99 can be acquired. .. Here, FIGS. 33 to 35 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. 25. Hereinafter, the small hit game control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 33, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the big hit game start flag set to be on in step S1924 in the small hit game control process of FIG. 32 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to start the jackpot game. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2002 when the jackpot game start flag is set to on (step S2001: Yes), and processes when the jackpot game start flag is set to off (step S2001: No). To step S2011.

<Steps S2002 to S2004>
When the jackpot game start flag is set to on (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 has whether or not the 8R jackpot flag set to be turned on in step S1907 of the small hit game control process of FIG. 31 is set to on. (Step S2002). Then, the MPU 41 executes eight round games in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game when the 8R jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2002: Yes), that is, when the jackpot type is 8R jackpot. The value of the round number counter is set to 8 (step S2003). On the other hand, when the 8R jackpot flag is set to off (step S2002: No), it can be determined that the jackpot type is 16R jackpot, so that 16 round games are executed in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. The value of the round number counter is set to 16 (step S2004).

<Steps S2005-S2010>
In step S2005, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag referred to in step S2001 to off, and further sets the jackpot type flag (8R jackpot flag or 16R jackpot flag) to off (step S2006). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed to on (step S2007), and notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started. Is set (step S2008). The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41. Further, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that it is the opening of the jackpot game to on (step S2009), sets the opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S2010), and ends the jackpot game. do.

<Step S2011>
When the jackpot game start flag is set to off (step S2001: No), whether or not the MPU 41 is set to turn on the jackpot game executing flag set to be on in step S2007 of the jackpot game control process. Is determined (step S2011). When the jackpot game executing flag is set to on (step S2011: Yes), the process shifts to step S2012, and when the jackpot game executing flag is set to off (step S2011: No), the jackpot game is executed. The game control process is terminated.

<Step S2012>
When the jackpot game executing flag is set to on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag set to be turned on in step S2009 of the jackpot game control process is set to on. That is, it is determined whether or not the opening of the jackpot game is being executed (step S2012). When the opening flag is set to on (step S2012: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2013, and when the opening flag is set to off (step S2012: No), the process is performed in step S2020 in FIG. 34. Move to.

<Step S2013>
When the opening flag is set to on (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the opening time counter set in step S2010 of the jackpot game control process is 0, that is, ends the opening. Then, it is determined whether or not to start the open / close execution mode (step S2013). When the value of the opening time counter is 0 (step S2013: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2014, and when the value of the opening time counter is not 0 (step S2013: No), the jackpot game control process is performed. finish.

<Steps S2014 to S2919>
When the value of the opening time counter is 0 (step S2013: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to off (step S2014), opens the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39, and starts the round game. (Step S2015). As a result, the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the variable winning opening 394, and an opportunity to acquire a large amount of the game ball 99 is given. Then, the MPU 41 sets the variable winning door opening flag indicating that the variable winning door 391 is open to the variable winning device 39 to be turned on (step S2016), and the variable winning door 391 indicates the remaining opening time of the variable winning door 391. The door opening time counter is set (step S2017). Here, the variable winning door 391 is closed by the passage of the maximum opening time defined by the variable winning door opening time counter and the entry of the maximum number (for example, 10) of the game balls 99 into the variable winning opening 394. .. The value of the variable winning door opening time counter set in step S2017 is, for example, the time (for example, 6 seconds) obtained by multiplying the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball 99 by the upper limit number (for example, 10). It is set to the following. Therefore, before the maximum number of game balls 99 are entered into the variable winning opening 394, the variable winning opening 394 can be closed with the lapse of the maximum opening time. This makes it possible to equalize the time required for the round game in the jackpot game by matching it with the maximum opening time, and further to equalize or fix the time required for the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to equalize or fix the time required for the game cycle in which the electric function opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game are executed in this order. As a result, when the electric combination opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times in one normal drawing game, it becomes easy to end the big hit game within the opening interval between the electric combination opening / closing games of the normal drawing game. .. As a result, when the electric combination opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times in one normal drawing game, it is possible to execute the big hit game a number of times corresponding to the number of executions of the electric combination opening / closing game.

Further, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the round game in the open / close execution mode is started (step S2018), and in step S2003 or step S2004 of the jackpot game control process. 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be set (step S2019), and the jackpot game control is terminated. The round game start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41.

<Step S2020>
As shown in FIG. 34, in step S2020, the MPU 41 has whether or not the variable winning door opening flag set to be turned on in step S2016 of FIG. 33 in the jackpot game control process is set to on, that is, a round. It is determined whether or not the variable winning door 391 is open during the execution of the game. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2021 when the variable winning door opening flag is set to on (step S2020: Yes), and when the variable winning door opening flag is set to off (step S2020: Yes). No), the process proceeds to step S2037 in FIG.

<Step S2021>
When the variable winning door opening flag is set to on (step S2020: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning flag indicating that a winning has occurred in the variable winning opening 394 is set to on, that is, whether or not the variable winning flag is set to on. It is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the variable winning opening 394 (step S2021). The variable winning flag is set to on, for example, in the prize ball command setting process of step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25, when the prize ball command for winning the variable winning opening 394 is set. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2022 when the variable winning flag is set to on (step S2021: Yes), and steps the process when the variable winning flag is set to off (step S2021: No). Move to S2026.

<Steps S2022 and S2023>
When the variable winning flag is set to on (step S2021: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the variable winning counter indicating the number of winnings in the variable winning opening 394 (step S2022), and turns off the variable winning flag. (Step S2023).

<Steps S2024 and S2025>
In step S2024, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the variable winning counter added in step S2021 is 10. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to close the variable winning door 391 due to the entry of the upper limit number of game balls 99. When the value of the variable winning counter is 10 (step S2024: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts the value of the variable winning door opening time counter to 0 (step S2025), and shifts the process to step S2027. On the other hand, when the value of the variable winning counter is not 10 (step S2024: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2026.

<Step S2026>
When the value of the variable winning counter is not 10 (step S2024: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the variable winning door opening time counter is 0 (step S2026). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to close the variable winning door 391 when the maximum opening time is reached. When the value of the variable winning door opening time counter is 0 (step S2026: Yes), the process shifts to step S2027, and when the value of the variable winning door opening time counter is not 0 (step S2026: No), the jackpot game End the control process.

<Steps S2027 and S2028>
When the value of the variable winning counter is 10 (step S2024: Yes) or the value of the variable winning door opening time counter is 0 (step S2026: Yes), the MPU 41 is the timing to close the variable winning door 391. Therefore, the variable winning door 391 is closed to end the round game (step S2027), and the variable winning door opening flag is set to off (step S2028). That is, in the round game, when either the elapse of a predetermined period (maximum opening time) specified by the variable winning door opening time counter or the maximum number of gaming balls 99 entering the variable winning opening 394 is satisfied. It ends when the variable winning door 391 is closed. Then, as described above, the predetermined time (maximum opening time) specified by the variable winning door opening time counter is multiplied by the upper limit number (for example, 10) of the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball 99. By setting the time (for example, 6 seconds) or less, it is possible to close the variable winning opening 394 by the lapse of the maximum opening time before the maximum number of game balls 99 are entered into the variable winning opening 394. Therefore, the time required for the round game in the jackpot game is made uniform to the maximum opening time or a time close to the maximum opening time, and further, the time required for the jackpot game can be made uniform or fixed.

<Step S2029>
In step S2029, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the round number counter set in step S2003 or S2004 is 0. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the open / close execution mode by determining whether or not there is a round game to be executed in the open / close execution mode. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2033 when the value of the round number counter is 0 (step S2029: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2030 when the value of the round number counter is not 0 (step S2029: No). do.

<Steps S2030 to S2032>
When the value of the round number counter is not 0 (step S2029: No), it can be determined that there is a round game to be executed in the open / close execution mode. The variable winning interval flag indicating that the variable winning door 391 is waiting to be opened is set to on (step S2030), and the variable winning interval indicating the time until the variable winning door 391 is opened is set. The time counter is set (step S2031). Then, the MPU 41 sets a variable winning interval start command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the variable winning interval is started (step S2032), and ends the jackpot game control process. The variable winning interval start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41.

<Steps S2033-S2036>
When the value of the round number counter is 0 (step S2029: Yes), it can be determined that there is no round game to be executed in the open / close execution mode (it is the timing to end the open / close execution mode), so that the MPU 41 is a big hit. The ending start flag indicating that the ending is started in the game is set to on (step S2033), and the ending time counter indicating the remaining time of the ending is set (step S2034). Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the ending is to be started (step S2035), and the jackpot flag (8R jackpot flag or 16R jackpot flag) set to be turned on in step S1906 or S1907. ) Is set to off (step S2036), and the jackpot game control process is terminated. The ending start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41.

<Step S2037>
As shown in FIG. 35, when the variable winning door opening flag is set to off (step S2020: No), the MPU 41 is set to turn on the variable winning interval flag set to be on in step S2030. It is determined whether or not it is present (step S2037). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning door 391 is closed and is in the open standby state. When the variable winning interval flag is set to on (step S2037: Yes), the process shifts to step S2038, and when the variable winning interval flag is set to off (step S2037: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S2039.

<Step S2038>
In step S2038, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning interval time counter set in step S2031 is 0, that is, whether or not it is the timing to open the variable winning door 391. When the variable winning interval time counter is 0 (step S2038: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the opening timing of the variable winning door 391. Therefore, the process shifts to step S2015 of FIG. 33, and the variable winning door 391 is moved to the variable winning door 391. The opening process is executed (steps S2015 to S2019). On the other hand, when the variable winning interval time counter is not 0 (step S2038: No), the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S2039>
When the variable winning interval flag is set to off (step S2037: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the ending start flag set to be on in step S2033 is set to on, that is, the ending in the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to start (step S2039). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2040 when the ending start flag is set to on (step S2039: Yes), and steps the process when the ending start flag is set to off (step S2039: No). Move to S2043.

<Steps S2040 to S2042>
When the ending start flag is set to on (step S2039: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the ending flag indicating that the ending is in progress to on (step S2040), and the ending time counter indicating the remaining time of the ending. Is set (step S2041). Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending start flag to off (step S2042), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2043>
When the ending start flag is set to off (step S2039: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending flag set to be on in step S2040 is set to on, that is, the ending is executed in the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not it is (step S2043). When the ending flag is set to on (step S2043: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2044, and when the ending flag is set to off (step S2043: No), the jackpot game End the control process.

<Step S2044>
When the ending flag is set to on (step S2043: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the ending time counter set in step S2041 is 0, that is, at the end timing of the ending (big hit game). It is determined whether or not there is (step S2044). When the value of the ending time counter is 0 (step S2044: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2045, and when the value of the ending time counter is not 0 (step S2044: No), the jackpot game control process is performed. finish.

<Steps S2045-S2047>
When the value of the ending time counter is 0 (step S2044: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the end timing of the ending (big hit game), so that the ending flag set to be on in step S2040 is set to off. (Step S2045), and the jackpot game executing flag set on in step S2011 is set to off (step S2046). Then, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is finished (step S2047), and ends the jackpot game control process. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41.

As described above, in the jackpot game control process, a jackpot game consisting of an opening, a plurality of round games, and an ending is executed, and the opening and ending times are fixed to a fixed time defined by a time counter. Further, in each round game, as described above, the predetermined time (maximum opening time) specified by the variable winning door opening time counter is set to the upper limit number (for example, 10) at the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball 99. ) Is set to be less than or equal to the time (for example, 6 seconds), so that the time required for the round game is equalized to the maximum opening time or a time close to the maximum opening time. Therefore, since the time required for the jackpot game is equalized for each jackpot type, when the electric role opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times in one normal figure per game, between the electric role opening / closing games of the normal figure per game. It becomes easy to end the jackpot game within the opening interval. As a result, when the electric combination opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times in one normal drawing game, it is possible to execute the big hit game a number of times corresponding to the number of executions of the electric combination opening / closing game.

[Performance information update processing]
Here, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1408 in the main process of FIG. 25. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36. Hereinafter, the specific performance information update process will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

<Steps S2101 to S2103>
As shown in FIG. 36, the MPU 41 reads out the number of various payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2101), and further, the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Read out (step S2102). Here, the number of various payout balls is the number of payout balls required for updating the base information, etc. And the number of variable winning lots paid out is applicable. Then, the MPU 41 calculates the current base BL based on the read-out number of general winning opening payout balls and the number of out balls, and overwrites and updates the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step). S2103) (see FIG. 37). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × the number of payout balls / the number of out balls.

<Step S2104>
In step S2104, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of out balls read in step S2102 has reached 60,000 balls, and if the number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S2104: Yes), the process is performed in step S2105. If the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 (step S2104: No), the process proceeds to step S2109.

<Steps S2105 to S2109>
When the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls (step S2104: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S2105 and S2106). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 37 (A) and 37 (B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base (step S2105) in the base information, and steps S2103. The current base BL updated in is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S2106), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S2107). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of out balls (step S2108), updates the specific performance information other than the base information (step S2109), and ends the specific performance information update process.

[Performance display monitor display control processing]
Here, FIGS. 38 to 41 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1409 of the main process of FIG. 25. Hereinafter, the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 38, in step S2201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S2206 described later or step S2230 in FIG. 41. When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2208 of FIG. 39, and when the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S2201: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2202.

<Step S2202>
When the BL display flag is set to off (step S2201: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B1 display flag is set to on (step S2202). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S2212 of FIG. 39, which will be described later. When the B1 display flag is set to on (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2217 in FIG. 40, and when the B1 display flag is set to off (step S2202: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2203.

<Step S2203>
When the B1 display flag is set to off (step S2202: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B2 display flag is set to on (step S2203). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is displayed two times before on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S2221 of FIG. 40, which will be described later. When the B2 display flag is set to on (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2226 of FIG. 41, and when the B2 display flag is set to off (step S2203: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2204.

<Step S2204>
When the B2 display flag is set to off (step S2203: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S2204). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S2204: Yes), the process shifts to step S2205, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from off to on (step S2204: No), the corresponding End the display control process.

<Steps S2205 to S2207>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S2204: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S2205). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 37 (B), the current base BL is 0%. "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating the existence are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display in-progress flag to ON (step S2206), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2207), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S2201: Yes), as shown in FIG. 39, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S2207 of FIG. 38 (step). S2208), it is determined whether or not the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2209). The MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2210 when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2209: Yes), and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2209: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2214.

<Steps S2210 to S2213>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2209: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S2210), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2211). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), "8." and "1" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 33%. , "3", "3" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 37 (B), the previous 60,000 balls "8.", "1", "2", and "9" indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S2212), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2213), and sets the B1 display time counter. End the display control process.

<Step S2214>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2209: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2214). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2214: Yes), the process shifts to step S2215, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S2214: No), the corresponding End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2214: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, thereby indicating the current base BL. And the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S2215 and S2216>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2214: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S2215) and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step). S2216), the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S2217 and S2218>
When the B1 display flag is set to on (step S2202: Yes), as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S2213 of FIG. 39 (step). S2217), it is determined whether or not the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2218). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2219 when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2218: Yes), and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2218: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2223.

<Steps S2219 to S2222>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2218: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S2219), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000 ball base B2 included in the information two times before (step S2220). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), "8." and "2" indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 before the previous time is 32%. , "3", "2" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 37 (B), 60,000 balls are used two times before. "8.", "2", "3", and "3" indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to on (step S2221), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to a fixed time for displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 two times before (step S2222). , The display control process is terminated.

<Step S2223>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2218: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2223). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2223: Yes), the process shifts to step S2224, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S2223: No), the corresponding End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2223: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S2224 and S2225>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2223: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S2224) and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step). S2225), the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S2226 and S2227>
When the B2 display flag is set to on (step S2203: Yes), as shown in FIG. 41, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S2222 of FIG. 40 (step). S2226), it is determined whether or not the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2227). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2228 when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2227: Yes), and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2227: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2232.

<Steps S2228 to S2231>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2227: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S2228), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2229). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 37 (B), the current base BL is 0%. "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating the existence are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display in-progress flag to ON (step S2230), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2231), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Step S2232>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2227: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2232). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2232: Yes), the process shifts to step S2233, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S2232: No), the corresponding End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2322: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the 60,000-ball base B2 is used two times before. The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S2233 and S2234>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2232: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S2233) and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step). S2234), the display control process is terminated.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46. The voice lamp control device 5 controls the operation of the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the symbol display unit 341 according to the command transmitted from the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and performs a process for executing a normal drawing game effect or the like. Will be done.

In addition, it is considered as another embodiment that a part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the lighting unit 27, startup processing at the time of starting up the voice lamp control device 5, NMI interruption processing at the time of a power failure, and the like. The description of those processes will be omitted.

[Secondary timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a periodic process having a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 includes a counter update process (step S2301), a command determination process (step S2302), a normal figure game effect process (step S2303), and a normal figure game effect process (step S2303). Step S2304), the small hit game effect process (step S2305), and the big hit game effect process (step S2306) are executed.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2301), the MPU 51 executes a process of updating various counters such as an effect pattern type counter and a fluctuation display counter. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the game start command per normal figure received from the main control device 4, for example, the effect type counter is a loop that loops between 0 and 109. It is a counter. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This fluctuation display counter is for measuring the fluctuation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the initial value of the fluctuation display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining fluctuation display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is in progress, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 is completed, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2302), a command received from the main control unit 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2302 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42.

<Step S2401>
As shown in FIG. 43, in step S2401, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2402. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2401: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2401, and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it becomes a processing target, for example, in the processing work storage area. It will be remembered.

<Steps S2402 and S2403>
In step S2402, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern command. The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the time of the normal map game, that is, the variation time of the main symbol on the symbol display unit 341, and is set in step S1707 or S1709 in the variation start process of FIG. 28. Here, when the MPU 51 is a fluctuation pattern command (step S2402: Yes), the information included in the fluctuation pattern, for example, the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result in the lottery per drawing are stored in the RAM (step). S2403), the command determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2402: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2404.

<Steps S2404 and S2405>
In step S2404, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a normal drawing game start command. The normal map game start command is a command indicating to start the normal map game, and is set by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in step S1508 in the normal map game control process of FIG. 26 as described above. Here, when the received command is a normal figure game start command (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal figure game effect start flag to turn on (step S2405) to start the normal figure game effect, and the command is concerned. The judgment process is terminated. On the other hand, when the received command is not the normal map game start command (step S2404: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2406.

<Steps S2406 and S2407>
In step S2406, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a game start command per normal figure. The command to start the game per normal figure is a command indicating to start the game per normal figure, and is set by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in step S1803 in the game control process per normal figure in FIG. 29 as described above. .. Here, when the received command is a game start command per normal figure (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the game effect start flag per normal figure to start the game effect per normal figure on (step S2407). , Ends the command determination process. On the other hand, when the received command is not a game start command per normal figure (step S2406: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2408.

<Steps S2408 and S2409>
In step S2408, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a small hit game start command. The small hit game start command is a command indicating to start the small hit game, and is set by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in step S1902 in the small hit game control process of FIG. 31 as described above. Here, when the received command is a small hit game start command (step S2408: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the small hit game effect start flag for starting the small hit game effect to on (step S2409), and sets the command. The judgment process is terminated. On the other hand, when the received command is not the small hit game start command (step S2408: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2410.

<Steps S2410 and S2411>
In step S2410, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a V winning command. The V winning command is a command indicating that a winning has occurred in the V winning opening 384, and is set in step S1917 in the small hit game control process of FIG. 32 by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, when the received command is a V winning command (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the V winning flag indicating that the V winning has occurred to on (step S2411), and ends the command determination process. do. On the other hand, when the received command is not a V winning command (step S2410: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2412.

<Steps S2412 and S2413>
In step S2412, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in step S2008 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 33 as described above. Here, when the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2412: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag for starting the jackpot game effect to on (step S2413), and performs the command determination process. finish. On the other hand, when the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2412: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2414.

<Steps S2414 and S2415>
In step S2414, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command indicates that the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39 is opened in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game to start the round game in which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the variable winning opening 394. It is a command and is set by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in step S2018 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 33 as described above. Here, when the received command is a round game start command (step S2414: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to turn on (step S2415) to start the round game effect, and performs the command determination process. finish. On the other hand, when the received command is not the round game start command (step S2414: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2416.

<Steps S2416 and S2417>
In step S2416, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a variable winning interval start command. The variable winning interval start command is a command indicating to start an interval between round games (variable winning interval), and as described above, in step S2032 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 34 by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Set. Here, when the received command is a variable winning interval start command (step S2416: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the variable winning interval effect start flag for starting the variable winning interval effect to on (step S2417), and sets the command. The judgment process is terminated. On the other hand, when the received command is not the variable winning interval start command (step S2416: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2418.

<Steps S2418 and S2419>
In step S2418, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending of the jackpot game, and is set by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in step S2035 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 34 as described above. Here, when the received command is the ending start command (step S2418: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag for starting the ending effect to on (step S2419), and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, when the received command is not the ending start command (step S2418: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2420.

<Steps S2420 and S2421>
In step S2420, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is terminated, and is set by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in step S2047 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 35 as described above. Here, when the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag for ending the jackpot game effect to on (step S2421), and performs the command determination process. finish. On the other hand, when the received command is not the jackpot game end command (step S2420: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2422.

<Step S2422>
In step S2422, the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination process.

[Public game production processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 42, in the normal figure game effect process (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt process, in the normal figure game that notifies the lottery result in the normal figure lottery, the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, and the illumination. A process is performed in which a unit 27 or the like is made to execute a game effect per illuminations. The normal map game effect is determined and started when the normal map game effect start flag set to be on in step S2405 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to on. Here, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal drawing game effect processing executed in step S2303 of the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. Hereinafter, the normal drawing game production process will be described with reference to FIG. 44.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 44, in step S2501, whether or not the MPU 51 is set to turn on the normal figure game effect start flag set to be on in step S2405 in the command determination process of FIG. 43, that is, the normal figure game. Determine if it is time to start the production. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2502 when the normal map game effect start flag is set to on (step S2501: Yes), and when the normal map game effect start flag is set to off (step S2501: Yes). No), the normal figure game production process is terminated.

<Steps S2502 and S2503>
When the normal game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 reads out the content of the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 512 in step S2403 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 (step S2502). ). The MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a variation type table (see FIG. 45) and an effect type table (see FIGS. 46A to 46C) stored in ROM 511 in advance, and a value of the effect type counter. Based on the above, the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 and the effect type (effect pattern) are determined (step S2503).

The combination of decorative symbols is determined according to the type of common figure when the lottery result in the lottery per normal figure is a win. For example, the combination of decorative symbols is "111" when the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened / closed once (the electric service opening / closing game is executed once). If the winning door 371 is opened and closed twice (the electric role opening and closing game is executed twice), it is "222", and the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed three times (the electric role opening and closing game is executed three times). ) "333" if it is C per normal figure, "444" if it is D per normal figure that the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed four times (the electric role opening and closing game is executed four times), If the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed 5 times (the electric role opening and closing game is executed 5 times), it is "555", and the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed 6 times (the electric role opening and closing game is 6 times). If it is F per normal figure (executed times), it is "666", and if it is G per normal figure that the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed 7 times (the electric role opening and closing game is executed 7 times), it is "777". ". That is, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win, the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is the number of doublets and the electric role of the electric winning device 37 in the game per ordinary figure. It matches the number of times the winning door 371 is opened and closed (the number of times the electric function opening and closing game is executed). Therefore, the player does not need to confirm the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is used to determine the type of normal symbol, that is, the electric power in the game per normal symbol. It is possible to know the number of times the electric role winning door 371 of the winning combination winning device 37 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric role opening / closing game is executed). As a result, the player can enjoy what number the decorative symbol is in the reach state when the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and in particular, the decorative symbol with a large number is in the reach state. In the case of, it is possible to enjoy whether the decorative symbol in the reach state is stopped and displayed with doublets that clearly indicate that it is a normal figure.

In this way, by using the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed as doublet numbers corresponding to the number of times the electric function winning door 371 is opened and closed (the number of times the electric function opening and closing game is executed), the player can use the symbol display unit 341. Since the lottery result in the lottery per doublet can be grasped, the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to the symbol display unit 341. Further, the symbol display unit 341 is arranged so as to be easier to see than the ordinary symbol display unit 361 in which the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary symbol is clearly shown. Therefore, the player pays attention to the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, as compared with the case of paying attention to the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 361. The number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed can be easily grasped. In addition, since the number of times of opening and closing of the electric role winning door 371 in the game per normal figure can be easily grasped, the number of times of opening and closing of the remaining electric role winning door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening and closing game) when the big hit game is executed. ), It is possible to easily predict whether or not the electric winning door 371 will be opened and closed in the normal game after the end of the big hit game. Then, if the opening / closing of the electric role winning door 371 (execution of the electric role opening / closing game) is scheduled to be executed after the end of the big hit game, it is necessary to insert the game ball 99 into the electric role winning opening 376. I can understand that there is. As a result, when the timing at which the electric service winning door 371 is opened is reached, it is possible to prevent the launch of the game ball 99 from being delayed or left-handed, so that the game ball 99 is placed in the electric service winning opening 376. By not entering the ball, it is possible to more easily prevent the occurrence of the disadvantage that the small hit game and eventually the big hit game is not executed.

In this embodiment, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win, the combination of decorative symbols (numbers of doublets) that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 and the electric role winning in the game per door are won. The number of times the electric service winning door 371 of the device 37 is opened and closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed) is the same, but the number of doublets and the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed). Does not have to match. In this case, even if the combination of decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is doublet, it is possible to set a large number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed). can. For example, it is conceivable to match the number of doublets, which is a combination of decorative symbols when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is a hit, with the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing of the electric winning door 371. That is, "111" is any of A to G per normal figure in which the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed (the number of times the electric service opening and closing game is executed) is one or more, and "222" is the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed. (Number of executions of electric role opening / closing game) is any of B to G per figure of 2 times or more, and "333" is the number of times of opening / closing of electric role winning door 371 (number of times of execution of electric role opening / closing game) is 3 times or more. One of C to G per normal figure, "444" is any of D to G per normal figure in which the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed (the number of times the electric service opening and closing game is executed) is 4 times or more, and "555" is The number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed) is 5 or more. It is considered that F or G per normal figure (number of executions) of 6 times or more, and "777" corresponds to G per normal figure in which the number of times of opening and closing of the electric role winning door 371 (number of times of execution of the electric role opening / closing game) is 7 times. Will be.

Here, FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 45, in the variation type table, the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command and the contents of the variation display time are defined. For example, the variation pattern command "A01" in which the lottery result in the lottery per map is "A per map" and the variation pattern is "01" includes the variation type "normal reach effect pattern" and the variation display time "30s". Are associated with each other. In addition, the variation pattern command "B02" in which the lottery result in the lottery per map is "B per map" and the variation pattern is "02" has a variation display time "60s" and a variation type "super reach effect pattern". Is associated with, and the lottery result in the lottery per figure is "G per figure" and the variation pattern is "03". The variation pattern command "G03" has a variation type "special reach effect pattern". And the variable display time "90s" are associated with each other. Furthermore, the variation type "non-reach effect pattern" and the variation display time "7s" correspond to the variation pattern command "H04" in which the lottery result in the lottery per map is "off" and the variation pattern is "04". The variation pattern command "H05", which is attached and the lottery result in the lottery per map is "off" and the variation pattern is "05", has the variation type "non-reach effect pattern" and the variation display time "10s". "Is associated with it.

Further, FIGS. 46 (A) to 46 (C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The effect pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 46 (A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table referred to when the final individual effect type in the normal figure variable game effect is a normal reach effect, and FIG. 46 (B) is a normal figure variable game. It is a super reach effect pattern type selection table referred to when the final individual effect type in the effect is a super reach effect, and FIG. 46 (C) shows that the final individual effect type in the normal figure variable game effect is a special reach effect. It is a special reach effect pattern type selection table referred to in some cases.

In this embodiment, the case where there are five types of effect patterns corresponding to each of the variable types will be described as an example, but the number of types of effect patterns may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 46, the effect pattern type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 46 (A), "effect pattern X1" to "effect pattern X1" to "effect pattern X1" correspond to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result in the lottery per drawing. "X5" is defined. In the present embodiment, the lottery results in the lottery per figure are divided into four groups: A to D per figure, E and F per figure, G per figure, and out of order. The effect pattern type corresponding to the value of the effect pattern type counter is set for each effect. It should be noted that the effect pattern type may be set individually according to the value of the effect pattern type counter for each lottery result without grouping the lottery results in the lottery per drawing. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 sets the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result in the lottery per drawing. Select from the effect pattern type selection table. Here, the effect patterns X1 to the effect pattern X5 included in the normal reach effect pattern type selection table are, for example, an effect in which the normal reach effect in which the decorative symbol is in the reach state is executed after the high-speed fluctuation effect in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed is completed. , The final individual production type is a normal reach production.

Further, in the super reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 46 (B), “effect pattern Y1” to “effect pattern Y1” to “effect pattern Y1” to “effect pattern Y1” to “effect pattern Y1” to correspond to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result in the lottery per drawing. The production pattern Y5 ”is defined. In the present embodiment, the lottery results in the lottery per figure are divided into four groups: A to D per figure, E and F per figure, G per figure, and out of order. The effect pattern type corresponding to the value of the effect pattern type counter is set for each effect. It should be noted that the effect pattern type may be set individually according to the value of the effect pattern type counter for each lottery result without grouping the lottery results in the lottery per drawing. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 sets the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result in the lottery per drawing. Select from the super reach effect pattern type selection table. Here, for the effect patterns Y1 to Y5 included in the super reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and the final individual effect type is expected to be higher than the normal reach effect. It is a production that develops into a super reach production with a high degree and a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The super reach effect pattern type selection table may include a super reach effect pattern effect that develops into a super reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect without going through the normal reach effect.

Further, in the special reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 46 (C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z1" to correspond to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result in the lottery per drawing. The production pattern Z5 ”is defined. In the present embodiment, the lottery results in the lottery per figure are divided into four groups: A to D per figure, E and F per figure, G per figure, and out of order. The effect pattern type corresponding to the value of the effect pattern type counter is set for each effect. It should be noted that the effect pattern type may be set individually according to the value of the effect pattern type counter for each lottery result without grouping the lottery results in the lottery per drawing. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 sets the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result in the lottery per drawing. Select from the special reach effect pattern type selection table. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z5 included in the special reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed, and the normal reach effect and the super are further as the final individual effect type. It is a production that develops into a special reach production that has a higher expectation per normal figure than the reach production and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The special reach effect pattern type selection table includes a special reach effect pattern that develops into a special reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect or the normal reach effect, without going through at least one of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect. You may.

<Steps S2504 and S2505>
Returning to the description of FIG. 44, in step S2404, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command is set as the variation display time counter. The variation display time is determined according to the information contained in the variation pattern command. The variation display time counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2301 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42, and whether or not the MPU 51 is displaying the symbol variation based on the variation display time counter. , It is possible to determine the remaining time of the variable display time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display time counter becomes 0. Then, the MPU 51 sets a display variation pattern command indicating the symbol combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed and the variation type (effect pattern type) in the RAM 512 (step S2505).

<Steps S2506 to S2508>
In step S2506, the display fluctuation pattern command set in step S2505 is output to the display control device 6. The ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a decorative pattern and an effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type. Specifically, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until the preset variable display time elapses in the symbol display unit 341, and a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed. The fluctuation of the decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed in order. On the other hand, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute various effects corresponding to the contents of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command during the variation display of the decorative pattern (step). S2507). Then, the MPU 51 sets the normal map game effect start flag to off (step S2508), and ends the normal map game effect process.

[Game production processing per normal figure]
Returning to the description of FIG. 42, in the normal-figure game effect processing (step S2304) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like are made to execute the per-figure game effect in the normal-figure game. Processing is done. As a game effect per normal figure, for example, when the electric role winning door 371 is opened, the game ball 99 is launched into the right area of the game board 31 and the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric role winning opening 376 of the electric role winning device 37. There is a production that encourages the player to make the ball. The game effect per normal figure is determined and started when the game effect start flag per normal figure set to be turned on in step S2407 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to on. In addition, in the game production process per normal figure, when the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric role winning opening 376, an image showing that the game ball 99 is entered into the electric role winning opening 376 may be displayed. Conceivable. Further, when displaying an image showing that the game ball 99 has been entered in the electric service winning opening 376, an image showing the remaining number of times that the electric service winning door 371 is opened (the electric service opening / closing game is executed) is displayed. It is also possible to display them at the same time. When the remaining number of times that the electric service winning door 371 is opened (the electric service opening / closing game is executed) is 0, it is conceivable to display an image indicating that the electric service winning door 371 is finally opened. It is also conceivable to determine the interval effect to be executed during the interval in case the jackpot game ends before the interval between the opening of the electric service winning door 371 ends.

[Small hit game production processing]
In the small hit game effect process (step S2005) of the sub-timer interrupt process, a process of causing the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like to execute the small hit game effect is performed in the small hit game. Examples of the small hit game effect include an effect of launching a game ball 99 in the right region of the game board 31 and urging the player to insert the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38. The small hit game effect is determined and started when the small hit game effect start flag set to ON in step S2409 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to ON. Further, in the small hit game effect, for example, when the V winning flag set to be ON in step S2411 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to ON, the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384. It is also conceivable to display an image showing that.

[Big hit game production process]
In the jackpot game effect process (step S2006) of the sub-timer interrupt process, a process of causing the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like to execute the jackpot game effect is performed in the jackpot game. The jackpot game production includes, for example, an opening production, a round game production, a variable winning interval production, an ending production, and the like. The jackpot game effect is determined and started when the jackpot game effect start flag set to ON in step S2413 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to ON. The jackpot game effect start flag is set to off when the opening effect is started.

The opening effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot game starts. For example, the game is to launch the game ball 99 in the right area of the game board 31 and insert the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 394 of the variable winning device 39. Includes directing to encourage people. The opening production will start after the jackpot game production is decided. Further, in the opening effect, for example, an image showing the number of big hit games executed after the game per game is started is displayed.

The round game effect is an effect indicating that the variable winning opening 394 is open. The round game effect is started when the round game start flag set to be on in step S2415 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to on. The round game start flag is set to off when the round game effect is started. Further, in the round game production, for example, an image showing the current number of rounds, an image showing the number of game balls entered into the variable winning opening 394 in the round game, an image showing the number of balls released in the jackpot game, and the general drawing. An image showing the cumulative number of balls released from the start of the winning game is displayed.

The variable winning interval effect is an effect indicating that the interval is between round games. The variable winning interval effect is started when the variable winning interval start flag set to be on in step S2417 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to on. The variable winning interval start flag is set to off when the variable winning interval effect is started. It is also conceivable to omit the variable winning interval effect and continue to execute the round game effect in the variable winning interval.

The ending effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot game is finished. It is started when the ending start flag set to be on in step S2419 in the command determination process of FIG. 43 is set to on. The ending start flag is set to off when the ending effect is started. Further, in the ending effect, for example, an image showing the number of game balls acquired by entering the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 394 in the jackpot game, an image showing the cumulative number of balls ejected from the start of the game per normal figure, and the like. An image showing the number of jackpot games executed since the start of the game per game is displayed. Further, in the ending effect, after the jackpot game is completed, an image that clearly or suggests that the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed because the game per game is being executed, or a normal game. An image indicating or suggesting that the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is not opened or closed because the game per figure is completed may be displayed.

As described above, based on the fact that the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win, the electric role opening / closing game of the game per normal figure is executed, and the game ball 99 to the electric role winning opening 376 of the electric role winning device 37. A small hit game is executed based on the fact that the lottery result in the special figure hit lottery executed with the entry of the ball is a small hit, and the game ball to the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game. A jackpot game is executed in which the player can acquire a large number of game balls based on 99 balls. That is, based on the fact that the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win, a game cycle in which the electric role opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game of the game per normal figure is executed in this order can be executed. Then, in the present embodiment, when the electric service opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times by opening / closing the electric service winning door 371 a plurality of times, until the next game cycle is started. On condition that the previous game cycle is completed, that is, before the execution of the electric role opening / closing game of the normal game per game in the next game cycle is started (the electric role winning door 371 in the game per normal figure). The game cycle can be executed multiple times on condition that the jackpot game of the previous game cycle is completed (within the interval between open doors), and as a result, one game per game per game can be performed. On the other hand, it is possible to execute a jackpot game multiple times.

Then, in the gaming machine 10, the maximum opening time (operating time of the variable winning door 391) of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) of the specified passage 35 is such that the variable winning opening 394 has an upper limit of the number of gaming balls 99. It is set to be less than the minimum time required to enter the ball. Therefore, usually, before the maximum number of game balls 99 are entered into the variable winning opening 394, the variable winning opening 394 is closed with the lapse of the maximum opening time. As a result, the time required for the round game in the jackpot game can be fixed or equalized to the maximum opening time or close to the maximum opening time, and further, the time required for the jackpot game can be fixed or equalized. .. In this way, by making it possible to fix or equalize the time required for one game cycle, it is possible to end the previous game cycle by the time the execution of the next game cycle is started. As a result, before the start of the electric role opening / closing game of the normal game per game in the next game cycle (within the opening interval of the electric role winning door 371 in the normal game per game), the big hit game of the previous game cycle is performed. Can be terminated.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in the electric role opening / closing game of the game per normal figure, the electric role winning opening 351 (electric role winning opening 376) is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time (maximum opening time) to open / close the electric role. The time required for the game is fixed, and similarly, the time required for the small hit game by closing the V winning opening 352 (V winning opening 384) after a predetermined time (maximum opening time) elapses in the small hit game. Is fixed. In this way, by fixing each of the time required for the electric function opening / closing game and the small hit game, it is possible to reduce the variation in the time required for the game cycle, so that the time required for the game cycle can be reduced more reliably in the next game cycle. It is possible to end the jackpot game of the previous game cycle before the electric service opening / closing game is started (within the interval between the opening of the electric service winning door 371 in the game per game).

In addition, in the game machine 10, since the game ball 99 launched in the right side area of the game board 31 is moved by the specified passage 35 in the same path, the game ball 99 is moved to the right side of the game board 31 with a constant strength (stroke). When launching into the area, the moving speeds of the game balls 99 moving in the specified passage 35 are made uniform, and the game balls move in the specified passage 35 at the uniform intervals. Since the variable winning opening 394 is provided at a position where a game ball moving in the specified passage 35 can enter, when the game ball 99 is launched in the right side region, the game ball 99 is launched in the round game of the jackpot game. The time from when the game ball 99 is entered into the variable winning opening 394 is equalized. Therefore, as described above, the conditions for ending the round game of the jackpot game are the elapse of the maximum opening time (for example, 5 seconds) of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) and the upper limit number (10) to the variable winning opening 394. If any of the entry balls of the game balls 99 is satisfied, the time required for the round game in the jackpot game can be reduced by moving the game balls 99 along the same route according to the specified passage 35. Further, it is possible to reliably equalize the maximum opening time or a time close to the maximum opening time, and further, it becomes possible to equalize the time required for the jackpot game. This makes it possible to fix or equalize the time required for one game cycle, so that the previous game cycle can be completed before the execution of the next game cycle is started. As a result, before the start of the electric role opening / closing game of the normal game per game in the next game cycle (within the opening interval of the electric role winning door 371 in the normal game per game), the big hit game of the previous game cycle is performed. Can be terminated.

In this way, before the start of the electric role opening / closing game of the normal game per game in the next game cycle (within the opening interval of the electric role winning door 371 in the normal game per game), the big hit game of the previous game cycle. By being able to terminate, when the electric role opening / closing game is executed multiple times by opening / closing the electric role winning door 371 multiple times, once for each normal figure. It is possible to execute multiple jackpot games for the game per door.

Furthermore, it is possible to end the jackpot game of the previous game cycle before the opening / closing game of the electric role in the next game cycle is started (within the interval between the opening of the electric role winning door 371 in the game per normal figure). , A situation occurs in which the small hit game is not executed because the big hit game is executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the electric role winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game of the normal figure hit game. In the winning game, the jackpot game is not executed because the winning of the V winning opening 384 is invalidated because the jackpot game is executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 384. Suppresses the disadvantage to the player, such as the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be inserted into the variable winning opening 394 due to the opening of the electric winning slot 376 in the electric role opening / closing game. can.

Further, the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is provided with a plurality of guide portions 373 that delay the movement of the game ball 99 and increase the residence time of the game ball 99 at the electric service winning door 371. There is. As a result, when the game balls 99 are continuously launched into the right region of the game board 31, at least one game ball 99 can be maintained in a state of moving on the electric winning combination door 371. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is launched in the right area of the game board 31, at least one game ball 99 is placed in the electric service winning opening 376 regardless of the opening / closing timing of the electric service winning door 371. Since the ball is entered, it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of a so-called puncture, in which the small hit game in which the V winning device 38 is operated is not executed when the game ball 99 enters the electric service winning opening 376. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the inconvenience that the small hit game is not executed and, by extension, the big hit game is not executed. When the game is to be executed, it becomes easy to execute the expected maximum number of jackpot games for one game per normal figure for one game per normal figure.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, a defined passage 35 that defines a moving path of the game ball 99 launched in the right side region of the gaming board 31 is provided, and the gaming ball 99 that moves in the defined passage 35 is a game per game. It is possible to enter the electric role winning opening 376 of the electric role winning device 37 in the electric role opening / closing game, the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game, and the variable winning opening 394 of the variable winning device 39 in the big hit game. Is. Therefore, the player simply continues to hit the game ball 99 in the right area of the game board 31 from the start of the normal game, and the electric role opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game are performed in this order. It becomes possible to execute the game cycle to be executed.

In this embodiment, even when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38, the right to execute the jackpot game is not generated when the jackpot game is being executed. However, when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38, the current jackpot game may be stopped and a new jackpot game may be started, or the right to execute the jackpot game may be granted. It may be put on hold and the held jackpot game may be executed after the end of the running jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening / closing pattern of the electric winning combination door 371 in the game per normal figure in B to G per normal figure, all the intervals are the same time (see FIG. 15), but all the intervals are the same. The time of one or more intervals may be different from the other intervals without time.

Further, when the lottery result in the ordinary winning lottery is a winning, the winning type of the ordinary drawing may be such that the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed a plurality of times for all the ordinary winning figures.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric winning combination winning opening 376 in the game per game, a small hit is made by a special figure hit lottery based on the special figure hit / miss table (see FIG. 17 (C)). When it is decided whether or not the game is executed (whether or not to open the V winning opening 384), but the lottery per special figure is omitted and the game ball 99 is entered in the electric service winning opening 376. The small hit game may be executed.

[Other embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as that of the gaming machine 10 described in the above-mentioned first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment described above and the other embodiments described below.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, by opening the variable winning door in the round game of the jackpot game, when the game ball 99 moving in the specified passage 35 reaches the variable winning opening 353, the variable winning opening 394 is opened. The conditions for ending the round game after the ball is entered are that the maximum opening time (for example, 5 seconds) of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) has elapsed, and the maximum number of games for the variable winning opening 394 (for example, 10). The case where it is set when any of the incoming balls of the ball 99 is satisfied has been described.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening (variable winning opening) as a condition for ending the round game of the jackpot game is a short time, for example, less than or equal to the firing interval of the gaming ball (0. It is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is set to (06 seconds to 0.6 seconds). As a result, as a condition for ending the round game, the maximum opening time is always established before the maximum number of game balls entering the variable winning opening is detected. Therefore, the variable winning opening is determined by the maximum number of game balls. Is not closed, and the round game is terminated by the lapse of the maximum opening time regardless of the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the variable winning opening. That is, in the present embodiment, each round game is completed in a so-called full open due to the passage of the maximum opening time set to a short time, so that the time required for each round game is the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening. Is fixed to. As a result, the time required for the big hit game is fixed by fixing the opening time and the ending time, so that the electric winning door of the electric winning device is opened multiple times in one game per normal drawing (multiple times electric). When the winning combination opening / closing game is executed), it becomes easy to set to end the jackpot game in the opening interval of the electric winning combination door, and it becomes possible to surely end the jackpot game in the opening interval.

Further, in the present embodiment, a retention means for retaining a certain number of game balls in a region capable of passing through the variable winning opening in a jackpot game is provided, and the retention means is retained when the variable winning opening is opened. It is also different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the game ball is inserted into the variable winning opening. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable winning opening is opened once in the round game, a certain number of game balls retained in the retention means are entered into the variable winning opening. As a result, even when each round game is completed by full opening, it is possible to insert a certain number of game balls into the variable winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that can occur when each round game is completed by full opening, that is, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player is reduced due to the decrease in the number of game balls that can be entered into the variable winning opening. can. Further, in each round game, the variable winning opening may be opened a plurality of times. In this case, the number of game balls retained by opening the variable winning opening once in each round game is set to be less than the upper limit. For example, the number of game balls retained by opening one variable winning opening in each round game is set to be less than the value obtained by dividing the upper limit by the number of opening of the variable winning opening in each round game. Will be done.

Although the retention means is clear from the following description, the retention means is not limited to the means for retaining the game ball in a stopped state, and the game is played by, for example, increasing the moving distance or reducing the moving speed. It also includes means of delaying the movement of the sphere.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 54, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. However, FIGS. 49 to 54 are views showing a modification of the present embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 47 (A) and 47 (B), in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39 is a groove portion that defines a moving path of the gaming ball 99 as a retention means. 395 is provided. The groove portion 395 meanders in the front-rear direction D1. Therefore, in the variable winning door 391, the game ball 99 moved from the left side to the variable winning door 391 is moved toward the right while moving in the front-rear direction D1. That is, since the game ball 99 passing through the variable winning door 391 is moved to the right while meandering, the moving distance is increased as compared with the case where the game ball 99 is linearly moved to the right. Here, the total length of the groove portion 395 (moving distance of the game ball 99 in the variable winning door 391) is set to a length that allows a certain number of game balls 99 to be retained. The fixed number is, for example, 7 to 10, and is set to 9 in the present embodiment. In this case, assuming that the firing interval of the game ball 99 is 0.6 seconds, the total length of the groove portion 395 is set to a time during which the game ball 99 can be retained for 5.4 seconds or more and less than 6 seconds. Further, the groove portion 395 can be integrally formed when the variable winning door 391 is formed by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the groove portion 395 in the variable winning door 391.

In the jackpot game, the retaining means for retaining a certain number of game balls 99 in the area where the variable winning opening 353 can pass is not limited to the meandering groove portion 395. For example, as the retention means, the variable winning door 391 is provided with a plurality of concave portions or convex portions arranged in a scattered point shape such as a matrix shape to increase the movement resistance and reduce the movement speed of the game ball 99. It may be a means for retaining a certain number of game balls 99 in the variable winning door 391. Further, the retention means is provided on the upstream side of the variable winning door 391 and the variable winning door 391 by devising a plurality of recesses provided in the variable winning door 391 that can hold the game ball 99, the shape of the variable winning door 391, the control form, and the like. It may be a means for retaining a certain number of game balls 99, or a means for holding a certain number of game balls 99 in or near the variable winning door 391 by magnetic force or electromagnetic force. A part of the modification of the retention means will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 54.

As shown in FIG. 47 (B), the game board 31 is formed with a penetrating portion 396 that allows the variable winning door 391 to move above the variable winning opening 394. The penetration portion 396 allows the game ball 99 to move in the front-rear direction D1 in the groove portion 395 of the variable winning door 391 when the variable winning door 391 is in the standby position. Further, the game board 31 is provided with an interference portion 397 so as to close the upper portion on the rear side of the penetration portion 396 above the variable winning door 391. When the variable winning door 391 is moved from the standby position to the operating position, the interference unit 397 restricts the movement of the game ball 99 in the groove portion 395 so that the game ball 99 retained in the groove portion 395 can be moved from the variable winning door 391. It has the role of dropping.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A) and 48 (B), when the game ball 99 is moving through the variable winning door 391, the variable winning door 391 is in the standby position (see FIG. 47 (B)). ) To the operating position (see FIG. 48 (B)), the game ball 99 of the variable winning door 391 interferes with the interference portion 397 fixed to the game board 31, and is more than the interference portion 397. Cannot move backwards. Therefore, the game ball 99 whose movement in the backward direction is restricted falls from the variable winning door 391. On the other hand, the variable winning opening 353 is opened by moving the variable winning door 391 to the operating position. As a result, when the variable winning door 391 is moved backward from the standby position to the operating position, the game ball 99 staying in the variable winning door 391 is transferred to the electric service winning section 372 via the variable winning opening 353. The ball is entered.

The variable winning door 391 is operated in each round game of the jackpot game, and the operating time (maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394)) is, for example, the firing interval of the game ball 99 (for example). It is fixedly set to 0.6 seconds or less, and is preferably fixed to any time in the range of 0.1 times or more and 1 times or less (0.06 seconds or more and 0.6 seconds or less) of the firing interval, for example. Is fixed at any time in the range of 0.2 times or more and 0.8 times or less (0.12 seconds or more and 0.48 seconds or less). That is, the operating time of the variable winning door 391 is such that it is difficult for the game ball 99 moving upstream of the game ball 99 staying in the variable winning door 391 to pass through the variable winning opening 353, or at most one game. The time is set for the ball 99 to pass through the variable winning opening 353. As a result, in each round of the jackpot game, the number of game balls 99 passing through the variable winning opening 353 (the number of game balls 99 entered into the variable winning opening 394) is set to a fixed number or substantially a fixed number. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) as a condition for ending the round game of the jackpot game is a short time, for example, the firing interval of the game ball 99 or less (0.06). It is set to (seconds to 0.6 seconds). As a result, as a condition for ending the round game, the lapse of the maximum opening time is always established before the entry of the maximum number of game balls 99 into the variable winning opening 394 is detected. The variable winning opening 353 is not closed, and the round game is terminated by the lapse of the maximum opening time regardless of the number of playing balls 99 of the maximum number of playing balls 99 in the variable winning opening 394. That is, in the present embodiment, each round game is completed in a so-called full open by the lapse of the maximum opening time set to a short time. As a result, the time required for each round game is fixed to the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 353, and as a result, the time required for the jackpot game is fixed, so that the electric role can be opened and closed in the game per game. It is easily possible to equalize or fix the time of the game cycle in which the game, the small hit, and the big hit game are executed in this order. Therefore, when the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened a plurality of times in one game per normal figure and the electric role opening / closing game is executed multiple times, the opening of the electric role winning door 371 is performed. The setting for ending the jackpot game in the interval becomes easy, and it becomes possible to surely end the jackpot game in the opening interval. Therefore, in the normal game, a situation occurs in which the small hit game is not executed because the big hit game is executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the electric service winning opening 376, and V in the small hit game. Occurrence of a situation where the jackpot game is not executed because the winning of the V winning opening 384 is invalidated because the jackpot game is being executed even though the game ball 99 has entered the winning opening 384. It is possible to suppress the disadvantage to the player, such as the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the variable winning opening 394 due to the opening of the electric winning combination winning opening 376 in the role opening / closing game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 353 is provided with a meandering groove 395 (retention means) for retaining a certain number of game balls 99 in a region where the variable winning opening 353 can be entered in the jackpot game. When opened, a certain number of game balls 99 staying in the groove 395 are entered into the variable winning opening 394. As a result, even when each round game is ended by full opening, it is possible to insert a certain number of game balls into the variable winning opening 394. Therefore, the disadvantage that can occur when each round game is completed by full opening, that is, the number of game balls 99 that can be entered into the variable winning opening 394 is reduced, so that the number of game balls 99 that can be acquired by the player is reduced. Can be prevented.

By the way, when the jackpot game is ended within the opening interval, the electric role winning door 371 of the next electric role winning device 37 is opened by the end of the opening interval until the electric role opening / closing game is started. In the meantime, there is a blank period in which none of the electric service winning door 371, the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38, and the variable winning device 39 is operated. Similarly, a blank period occurs even after the execution of the 8R jackpot game in which the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is small. In this case, even if the game ball 99 is launched in the right area of the game board 31, the electric winning slot 376 of the electric winning device 37, the V winning opening 384 and the normal winning opening 385 of the V winning device 38, and the variable winning opening No game ball 99 can be expected to enter any of the 394. Therefore, the player makes a stop to stop the launch of the game ball 99, or increases the holding number N of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol due to the passage of the game ball 99 to the through gate 317, or the game ball to the general winning opening 313. It is assumed that the game ball 99 is launched in the left area of the game board 31 in anticipation of paying out the prize ball by entering 99 balls.

However, when the player makes a stop or left strike in the blank period, and then the electric service winning opening 376 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened to start the electric service opening / closing game. When the electric service winning door 371 is activated by the start of the next electric service opening / closing game, the game board 31 is delayed in launching the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31, or is jammed or has a poor launch. Due to a situation in which the game ball 99 cannot reach the area on the right side of the door, the electric role winning door 371 returns without the game ball 99 being inserted into the electric role winning opening 376, and the electric role opening / closing game is started. There is concern that it will end. Then, when the electric role opening / closing game is completed without the game ball 99 being inserted into the electric role winning opening 376, the small hit game is not executed because the special drawing hit lottery is not performed, and as a result, the big hit game is performed. Will not be executed. Therefore, the player can originally acquire the game in the big hit game if he / she makes a stop or left hit in the blank period in which none of the electric role opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game is executed during the normal game. You will not be able to acquire the game ball 99 that you should have been.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the blank period is used to execute a right-handed strong request effect that urges the player to continuously hit the game ball 99 into the right-hand area of the game board 31. Can be considered. In this case, it is preferable that the right-handed strong demand effect is executed as a more intense right-handed demand effect than the normal right-handed demand effect, for example, the right-handed demand effect executed at the start of the game per normal figure. As a result, when the player makes a stop shot during the blank period and the electric service winning opening 376 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened next time, the game ball 99 cannot be launched in time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball 99 is not entered in the electric service winning opening 376 and the small hit game and thus the big hit game is not executed.

In addition, when it is confirmed that the player is making a stop during the blank period, it may be disadvantageous for the player to make a stop, and a situation may occur in which the small hit game and the big hit game are not executed. It is also conceivable to stop the stop striking due to the nature and execute a stop striking warning effect to encourage the game ball 99 to strike right. In this case, it is preferable to execute the stop-hit warning effect as a more intense effect than the right-handed strong request effect in the blank period. As a result, the importance of launching the game ball 99 is further strengthened to the player when the player is making a stop strike even though the right-handed strong request effect is being executed in the blank period. Since it is possible to notify the game ball 99, it is possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball 99 is not launched in time, the game ball 99 is not inserted into the electric service winning opening 376, and the small hit game and eventually the big hit game is not executed.

Whether or not the player is making a stop during the blank period is determined by, for example, whether or not the touch sensor 21a of the launch handle 22 detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 or whether or not the launch handle 22 is touched. It can be determined by whether or not it is detected that the firing is stopped by the ball stop switch 21b of 22.

In addition, instead of one or both of the right-handed strong request effect and the warning effect, or in addition to those effects, the electric role winning opening 376 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened next to open and close the electric role. It is also conceivable to perform a time effect that suggests or clearly indicates the remaining time until the start. As the time effect, for example, a timer effect that displays the remaining time until the electric role opening / closing game is started, and a countdown effect that counts down to the start timing of the electric role opening / closing game can be considered. When the time effect is executed in this way, it becomes easier to grasp the start timing of the electric function opening / closing game, so that it is possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of a delay in launching the game ball 99.

Here, as described above, as a retaining means for retaining a certain number of game balls 99 in the area where the variable winning opening 353 can pass in the jackpot game, the game balls 99 provided in the variable winning door 391 can be held. A certain number of game balls 99 are retained on the upstream side of the variable winning door 391 or on the variable winning door 391 by devising the shape and control form of the variable winning door 391 (variation example 1). 2 and 3), means for holding a certain number of game balls 99 by magnetic force or electromagnetic force (modification example 4) can be considered. Hereinafter, these modifications 1 to 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 54.

<Modification 1>
As shown in FIG. 49, the retaining means of the first modification is a plurality of recesses 398 provided in the variable winning door 391 that can hold the game ball 99. In this embodiment, the number of recesses is nine. The plurality of recesses 398 have a triangular cross section, and are grooves extending in the front-rear direction D1 on the front side of the variable winning door 391. Further, the plurality of recesses 398 are continuously arranged in the left-right direction D3, and are formed in a staircase shape as a whole. The leftmost (upstream) recess 398 of the plurality of recesses 398 has a higher ability to hold the game ball 99 than the other recesses 398. Specifically, the leftmost (upstream side) recess 398 is deeper than the other recesses 398, and the ability to hold the game ball 99 is enhanced. This is a game in which the game ball 99 that has reached the variable winning door 391 is held in the leftmost (upstream side) recess 398 under the condition that the game ball 99 is held in a plurality of recesses 398 as described later. By colliding with the ball 99, the game balls 99 of the plurality of recesses 398 are sequentially moved to the recesses 398 on the right side (downstream side), but the impact received by the game balls 99 held in the recesses 398 on the leftmost side (upstream side). Is the largest, so the holding force is set larger than that of the other recesses 398. Further, from the viewpoint of the magnitude of the impact received by the game ball 99 held in the recess 398, it is conceivable that the holding force is made smaller as the recess 398 on the right side (downstream side) is used.

As shown in FIG. 50 (A), the game ball 99 that has moved toward the variable winning door 391 from the left side (upstream side) of the specified passage 35 reaches the variable winning door 391 vigorously, but first the variable winning door The game ball 99 that reaches 391 has a high ability to hold the game ball 99 in the recess 398 on the leftmost side (upstream side), so that the momentum is greatly attenuated. As a result, the game ball 99 that first reaches the variable winning door 391 is held in the leftmost (upstream side) recess 398.

As shown in FIG. 50 (B), the game ball 99 that then reaches the variable winning door 391 collides with the game ball 99 held in the concave portion 398 on the leftmost side (upstream side). As a result, the game ball 99 held in the leftmost (upstream) recess 398 is moved to the rightmost (downstream) recess 398, and a new game ball 99 is moved to the leftmost (upstream) recess 398. Is retained. Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 50 (C) to 50 (F), the game ball 99 newly reaching the variable winning door 391 collides with the game ball 99 held in the concave portion 398 on the leftmost side (upstream side). By doing so, the game ball 99 is moved to the recess 398 on the right side (downstream side) in a chain reaction. Finally, as shown in FIG. 50 (G), the game ball 99 is held in all the recesses 398, and when the new game ball 99 reaches the variable winning door 391 in this state, the rightmost side (downstream). The game ball 99 in the recess 398 on the side) is pushed out, and the game ball 99 is moved toward the out port 354. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is launched into the right area of the game board 31 toward the specified passage 35, a certain number (9 in this embodiment) of the game balls 99 are placed in the plurality of recesses 398 of the variable winning door 391. Stayed. Therefore, as in the case of providing the meandering groove portion 395 in the variable winning door 391, even if each round game is completed by full opening, a certain number of game balls can be entered into the variable winning opening 394. It will be possible.

The plurality of recesses 398 do not have to have a triangular cross section, and may have a semicircular, semi-elliptical, square, or other polygonal groove. Further, as long as the game ball 99 can be held in the variable winning door 391, other configurations can be adopted, not limited to the recess.

<Modification 2>
As shown in FIGS. 51 (A) to 51 (C), the retention means of the modified example 2 passes through the variable winning opening 353 of the defined passage 35 in the jackpot game according to the control state of the variable winning door 391. By switching between a state in which a certain number of game balls 99 can be retained in a possible area and a state in which the game balls 99 retained in the variable winning opening 353 can pass through, the state is constant in each round game of the jackpot game. A number of game balls 99 can enter the variable winning opening 394.

The variable winning door 391 has a base portion 391A that allows the movement of the game ball 99 and a limiting portion 391B that restricts the movement of the game ball 99, and is rotatable about the rotation shaft 391C. The base portion 391A has a plate shape capable of closing the variable winning opening opening 353. The limiting portion 391B extends downward from the tip of the base portion 391A. Therefore, the variable winning door 391 has a substantially L-shaped shape.

The variable winning door 391 rotates clockwise and counterclockwise in FIGS. 51 (A) to 51 (C) by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41 at a predetermined timing of the jackpot game. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 51 (A), in the variable winning door 391, except for the jackpot game, the base portion 391A closes the variable winning opening 353 of the specified passage 35, passes through the specified passage 35, and the variable winning door 391. Allows the game ball 99 to move toward the out port 354 when it reaches.

On the other hand, the variable winning door 391 is shown in FIG. 51 (B) from the standby position where the base portion 391A shown in FIG. 51 (A) closes the variable winning opening 353 at the first timing of the predetermined timing of the jackpot game. It is rotated clockwise to the first operating position shown in. In the first operating position, the base portion 391A is located above the standby position, and the limiting portion 391B blocks the defined passage 35 near the upstream side of the variable winning opening 353 to limit the movement of the game ball 99. It is a position to do.

Further, the variable winning door 391 is shown in FIG. 51 (C) from the first operating position in which the limiting portion 391B shown in FIG. 51 (B) restricts the movement of the game ball 99 at the second timing of the predetermined timing of the jackpot game. ) Is rotated counterclockwise to the second operating position. The second operating position is a position where the variable winning opening 353 is opened to the extent that the game ball 99 can pass through, and the base portion 391A is inclined downward to the left. When there is a variable winning door 391 at this second operating position, the game ball 99 that has passed through the variable winning opening 353 is guided to the left by the variable winning door 391.

Here, in the second modification, the variable winning portion 392 passes through the variable winning opening 353 and is guided to the left side by the base portion 391A when the variable winning door 391 is in the second operating position. Is arranged to the left of the tip of the variable winning door 391 in the second operating position so that the ball can enter. That is, the variable winning portion 392 is arranged at a position shifted from the lower side of the variable winning opening 353 to the left side, not below the variable winning opening 353 of the defined passage 35. Further, the variable winning unit 392 has an upper opening 393 that allows the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning opening 394, and is guided toward the upper opening 393 by the variable winning door 391 at the second operating position. It has a stopper portion 392A that prevents the game ball 99 from exceeding the variable winning portion 392. Therefore, when the variable winning door 391 is rotated from the first operating position to the second operating position, the game ball 99 whose movement is restricted by the limiting portion 391B due to the variable winning door 391 being in the first operating position is variable. When the winning opening 353 is opened, the game ball 99 is guided through the variable winning opening 353 to the variable winning opening 394 of the variable winning portion 392 by the base portion 391A. As a result, a certain number of game balls 99 whose movement is restricted at the first operating position are entered into the variable winning opening 394.

Further, the variable winning door 391 is shown in FIG. 51 (A) from the second operating position in which the variable winning opening 353 shown in FIG. 51 (C) is opened at the third timing of the predetermined timing of the jackpot game. The variable winning opening 353 shown is rotated clockwise to a waiting position where it is closed.

In the second modification, when the game ball 99 is launched into the right area of the game board 31 toward the specified passage 35, the movement of a certain number of game balls 99 is variable when the variable winning door 391 is in the first operating position. It is retained by being restricted by the door 391. On the other hand, when the variable winning door 391 is in the second operating position, a certain number of game balls 99 whose movement is restricted in the first operating position are entered into the variable winning opening 394. Therefore, as in the case of providing the meandering groove portion 395 in the variable winning door 391, even if each round game is completed by full opening, a certain number of game balls can be entered into the variable winning opening 394. It will be possible.

<Modification 3>
As shown in FIG. 52, the retaining means of the modified example 3 has the variable winning opening 353 of the specified passage 35 in the jackpot game according to the control state of the variable winning door 391, similarly to the retaining means of the modified example 2. By switching between a state in which a certain number of game balls 99 can be retained in a passable area and a state in which the game balls 99 retained in the variable winning opening 353 can pass, in each round game of the jackpot game. A certain number of game balls 99 can enter the variable winning opening 394.

The variable winning door 391 is rotatable about the rotation shaft 391D. Further, the variable winning door 391 has a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction in FIGS. 52 (A) to 52 (C) by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41 at a predetermined timing of the jackpot game. Is rotated to.

As shown in FIG. 52 (A), in the variable winning door 391, except for the jackpot game, the base portion 391A closes the variable winning opening 353 of the specified passage 35, passes through the specified passage 35, and the variable winning door 391. Allows the game ball 99 to move toward the out port 354 when it reaches.

On the other hand, the variable winning door 391 is the first timing shown in FIG. 52 (B) from the standby position for closing the variable winning opening 353 shown in FIG. 52 (A) at the first timing of the predetermined timing of the jackpot game. It is rotated counterclockwise to the operating position. The first operating position is a position where the tip of the variable winning door 391 is located above the standby position and the movement of the game ball 99 is restricted by blocking the specified passage 35 above the variable winning opening 353. be.

Further, the variable winning door 391 is the second operating position shown in FIG. 52 (C) from the first operating position that restricts the movement of the game ball 99 shown in FIG. 52 (B) at the second timing of the predetermined timing of the jackpot game. 2 Rotated clockwise to the operating position. The second operating position is a position where the variable winning opening 353 is opened to the extent that the game ball 99 can pass through, and the base portion 391A is inclined downward to the right. When there is a variable winning door 391 at this second operating position, the game ball 99 that has passed through the variable winning opening 353 is guided to the right by the variable winning door 391.

Here, in the modified example 3, when the variable winning door 391 is in the second operating position, the variable winning portion 392 passes through the variable winning opening 353 and is guided to the right side by the variable winning door 391. The 99 is arranged to the right of the tip of the variable winning door 391 in the second operating position so that the ball can enter. That is, the variable winning portion 392 is arranged at a position shifted from the lower side to the right side of the variable winning opening 353, not below the variable winning opening 353 of the defined passage 35. Further, the variable winning unit 392 has an upper opening 393 that allows the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning opening 394, and is guided toward the upper opening 393 by the variable winning door 391 at the second operating position. It has a stopper portion 392A that prevents the game ball 99 from exceeding the variable winning portion 392. Therefore, when the variable winning door 391 is rotated from the first operating position to the second operating position, the game ball 99 whose movement is restricted by the variable winning door 391 due to the variable winning door 391 being in the first operating position is When the variable winning opening 353 is opened, the game ball 99 is guided through the variable winning opening 353 to the variable winning opening 394 of the variable winning section 392 by the variable winning door 391. As a result, a certain number of game balls 99 whose movement is restricted at the first operating position are entered into the variable winning opening 394.

Further, the variable winning door 391 is shown in FIG. 52 (A) from the second operating position in which the variable winning opening 353 shown in FIG. 52 (C) is opened at the third timing of the predetermined timing of the jackpot game. The variable winning opening 353 shown is rotated counterclockwise to the waiting position where it is closed.

In the third modification, when the game ball 99 is launched into the right area of the game board 31 toward the specified passage 35, the movement of a certain number of game balls 99 is variable when the variable winning door 391 is in the first operating position. It is retained by being restricted by the door 391. On the other hand, when the variable winning door 391 is in the second operating position, a certain number of game balls 99 whose movement is restricted in the first operating position are entered into the variable winning opening 394. Therefore, as in the case of providing the meandering groove portion 395 in the variable winning door 391, even if each round game is completed by full opening, a certain number of game balls can be entered into the variable winning opening 394. It will be possible.

<Modification example 4>
As shown in FIGS. 53 (A) to 53 (C), the retention means of the modified example 4 holds a certain number of game balls 99 by an electromagnetic force generator 399 that generates an electromagnetic force. The electromagnetic force generator 399 is arranged above the region corresponding to the variable winning device 39 in the defined passage 35. The electromagnetic force generator 399 includes, for example, an electromagnet including a solenoid, and by switching between a state in which power is supplied to the solenoid and a state in which power is not supplied, an electromagnetic force that exerts an attractive force on the game ball 99 is generated. The state can be switched between the state and the state where no electromagnetic force is generated.

As shown in FIG. 53 (A), when the state in which the electromagnetic force is not generated by the electromagnetic force generator 399 is continued (the electromagnet is continuously turned off), it is launched into the right region of the game board 31 and the specified passage 35 is used. The game ball 99 moves on the variable winning door 391. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), in a state where the electromagnetic force is generated by the electromagnetic force generator 399 (the electromagnet is on), the electromagnetic force acts on the game ball 99, so that the specified passage 35 is provided. When the game ball 99 moves and reaches the variable winning door 391, the game ball 99 is held in the area corresponding to the variable winning door 391 in the specified passage 35, and a certain time elapses after the electromagnetic force is generated. A certain number of game balls 99 are held. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of game balls 99 held in the area corresponding to the variable winning door 391 of the defined passage 35 is five. In this case, assuming that the firing interval of the game ball 99 is 0.6 seconds, about 3 seconds (0.6 seconds x 5 pieces) elapses, so that the area corresponding to the variable winning door 391 of the specified passage 35 is reached. The maximum number of game balls 99 is held.

Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), the case where the game ball 99 is held by the electromagnetic force generator 399 (the electromagnet is continuously turned on) is switched to the state where the electromagnetic force is not generated (the electromagnet is turned off). , A certain number of game balls 99 held in the electromagnetic force generator 399 fall downward. At this time, when the variable winning opening 353 is opened by operating the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39, the game ball 99 held by the electromagnetic force generator 399 is the variable winning opening. The ball is entered into 394. That is, in the present embodiment, by controlling the timing of generating the electromagnetic force by the electromagnetic force generator 399 and the timing of operating the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39, a certain number of game balls 99 in the jackpot game Can be retained, and the retained game ball 99 can be entered into the variable winning opening 394.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, in the jackpot game, the variable winning door 391 is operated at regular intervals for a predetermined time, so that the variable winning opening 353 is operated at regular intervals for a predetermined time. Be released. On the other hand, in the electromagnetic force generator 399, the electromagnet is turned on for a certain period of time from a predetermined timing before the variable winning opening 353 is opened, so that the game ball 99 that has reached the variable winning door 391 is reached for a certain period of time. Electromagnetic force is applied. The predetermined timing at which the electromagnet is turned on is the maximum number of game balls in the area corresponding to the variable winning door 391 of the specified passage 35, rather than the operation start timing of the variable winning door 391 (the opening timing of the variable winning opening 353). It is the timing before the time when 99 is held (for example, 3 to 5 seconds). Further, the timing at which the electromagnet is turned off coincides with, for example, the operation start timing of the variable winning door 391. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 held in the electromagnetic force generator 399 from starting to fall after the variable winning opening 353 is closed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball 99 cannot pass through the variable winning opening 353 and the game ball 99 cannot enter the variable winning opening 394. Further, the operation end timing of the variable winning door 391 (the closing timing of the variable winning opening 353) is such that the game ball 99 held by the electromagnetic force generator 399 can pass through the variable winning opening 353 from the operation start timing. It is the timing when the minimum time has passed. As a result, while the variable winning opening 353 is open, the variable winning opening 353 can be passed through the game ball 99 held by the electromagnetic force generator 399, and the variable winning opening 394 can be played. The ball 99 can be inserted.

The operation end timing of the variable winning door 391 (the closing timing of the variable winning opening 353) is preferably set to a timing at which, for example, a time equal to or less than the firing interval of the game ball 99 elapses from the operation start timing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99, which is not held by the electromagnetic force generator 399, from passing through the variable winning opening 353 and entering the variable winning opening 394. On the contrary, in order to allow the game ball 99 not held in the electromagnetic force generator 399 to pass through the variable winning opening 353 and enter the variable winning opening 394, the operation of the variable winning door 391 is terminated. The timing may be set to a timing at which a time exceeding the firing interval of the game ball 99 elapses from the operation start timing.

The opening timing of the variable winning door 391 does not have to completely match the timing at which the electromagnet is turned off, and the game ball 99 that falls when the electromagnet is turned off passes through the variable winning opening 353. It may be set within a range in which the ball can enter the variable winning opening 394, and may be slightly earlier or slightly later than the timing at which the electromagnet is turned off, and may be a timing that substantially coincides with the timing at which the electromagnet is turned off.

In the modified example 4, when the game ball 99 is launched into the right region of the game board 31 toward the specified passage 35 in the jackpot game, it is defined by the electromagnetic force generated by turning on the electromagnet of the electromagnetic force generator 399. The maximum number (fixed number) of game balls 99 is held in the area corresponding to the variable winning door 391 of the passage 35. Then, a certain number of game balls 99 held by the electromagnetic force generator 399 pass through the variable winning opening 353 and win a variable prize when the electromagnet is turned off and the variable winning door 391 is operated for a certain period of time. The ball is entered into the mouth 394. Therefore, even if each round game is ended by full opening, it is possible to insert a certain number of game balls into the variable winning opening 394.

The electromagnetic force generator 399 does not necessarily have to be provided along the upper side of the specified passage 35, and may be provided, for example, on the back side of the variable winning door 391. Further, by incorporating a solenoid into the variable winning door 391 and configuring the variable winning door 391 as an electromagnetic force generator 399, the game ball 99 is retained in the variable winning door 391 by the electromagnetic force acted on by the variable winning door 391. It is also good.

Further, instead of the electromagnetic force generator 399, it is conceivable to adopt a movable magnet as a retention means. For example, by arranging a magnet so as to be movable between an operating position in which the game ball 99 is retained by applying a magnetic force to the game ball 99 and a standby position in which the magnetic force is not applied to the game ball 99, it is variable in a jackpot game. It is also conceivable to allow a certain number of game balls 99 in an area that can pass through the winning opening 353.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first embodiment can be made to the extent applicable.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the opening interval of the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 in the game per drawing in which the electric service opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times is not limited to the opening / closing pattern type and the opening / closing timing. The case where the doors are fixed at the same time or substantially the same time has been described.

Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win, in the doublet game, the opening / closing of the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 in the game per doublet. The combination of numbers (doublet) that matches the number of times (the number of times the door opening / closing game is executed) is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, so that the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal drawing game. The case where the number of times of opening and closing of the electric winning door 371, which is executed in the game per doublet, is clearly indicated so as to be easy for the player to grasp by the symbol combination of the above.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a plurality of times are set as an interval between the opening of the electric service winning door of the electric service winning device in the game per game in which the electric service opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times. Specifically, in the example shown in the present embodiment, as the opening interval, a normal interval set at the same time as the first embodiment described above and a long interval set at a time longer than the normal interval are used. Two types are set. In addition, as the opening / closing pattern of the electric winning door, which is determined according to the type of normal drawing, an opening / closing pattern consisting of a normal interval, an opening / closing pattern consisting of a long interval, and an opening / closing pattern in which a normal interval and a long interval are mixed are set. ing. When a plurality of times are set as the interval between openings, the length and number of set times and the form of the opening / closing pattern can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win, the number of times of opening and closing of the electric winning door in the game per normal figure is clearly or suggested in the symbol display unit. During the game, a notification effect is announced to the player that the number of times the electric service winning door is actually opened and closed is larger than the number of times the electric service winning door is opened and closed, which is suggested in the game. Will be executed. This notification effect is during the execution of the game cycle in which the electric function opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game are executed in this order, and the period during which the game cycle in the open interval is not executed. Performed in at least one. Specifically, in the example shown in the present embodiment, in the notification effect, when the opening interval of the electric winning door 371 is a long interval, the ending time of the jackpot game is set longer, and as a revival effect in the ending effect. Will be executed. Of course, the execution timing of the notification effect in the game cycle is not limited to the ending of the big hit game, and it may be executed in the opening effect or the open / close execution mode effect of the big hit game. It is also conceivable to execute it after the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening of the V winning device is detected). Further, the notification effect may be executed regardless of the execution timing, regardless of whether the normal interval or the long interval is selected. Further, the notification effect may be executed when the interval between openings is one type or three or more types.

In the present embodiment, since a plurality of times are set as the intervals between openings, it is possible to impart various playability by using a plurality of intervals between openings having different times. For example, as described above, it is possible to execute a notification effect such as a resurrection effect using a long interval. Further, in the present embodiment, the player is notified that the number of times of opening and closing of the electric function winning door actually executed in the game per normal figure is larger than the number of times of opening and closing of the electric role winning door suggested in the game. The production is performed during the game per door. Therefore, the player can recognize that when the notification effect is executed in the game per game, the actual number of times the door is opened and closed is larger than the number of times the electric service winning door is opened and closed suggested in the game. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game per game while expecting that the notification effect is executed in the game per game. Then, when the notification effect is executed in the game per hobby, it can be recognized that the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game) is larger than the number of times recognized in the game. The interest of the game in the game per figure is improved.

Further, when two or more types of jackpot games (16R jackpot game, 8R jackpot game) having different number of round games (theoretical maximum time) are included as the jackpot game types as in the first embodiment described above, a plurality of games having different times. By setting a normal interval set at the same time as in the first embodiment described above and a short interval shorter than the normal interval as the opening interval, the opening interval is selected when the short interval is selected. It is also possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending within. For example, the short interval is set longer than the total time of the theoretical maximum time of the small hit game and the theoretical maximum time of the 8R big hit game, while the normal interval is set to the theoretical maximum time of the small hit game and the theoretical maximum time of the 16R big hit game. By setting it shorter than the total time of, for example, in the short interval as in the fifth embodiment described later, the 16R jackpot cannot be completed by the start of the next electric role opening / closing game, and the next electric role opening / closing game can be completed. It is possible to impart a game property in which a puncture occurs in which the jackpot game triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric service winning opening 376 is not executed. That is, the combination of the jackpot type and the interval type between openings determines whether or not the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game is executed, and as a result, the privilege (prize ball) that the player can obtain is obtained. Not only the jackpot type, but also the playability that depends on the opening interval type (opening / closing pattern type) is given.

Further, when the short interval is, for example, the time required for the jackpot game is less than or equal to the specified time, the jackpot game can be ended in the short interval, and when the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the specified time, the jackpot game cannot be ended in the short interval. It is also possible to set it to. In this case, whether or not the jackpot game triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric role winning opening 376 in the next electric role opening / closing game depends on the time required for the big hit game, and as a result. , The privilege (prize ball) that can be acquired by the player depends not only on the type of jackpot but also on the time required for the jackpot game. The short interval is a big hit until the start of the small hit game or until the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 is detected when the time required for the big hit game is less than the specified time. When the game can be ended and the time required for the big hit game exceeds the specified time, the big hit game is finished until the start of the small hit game or until the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 is detected. You may set it to a time when it cannot be done.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 66, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 55 is a time chart showing the relationship between the normal game per game executed by the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the small hit game, and the big hit game. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of an ending image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending of the jackpot game. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition for explaining the revival effect executed in the ending effect in the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 55 (A), in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the electric service winning opening / closing door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened / closed. In the case of a game per game that is executed only once (A1 per game (see Fig. 58) described later), the game per game is completed by executing the game that opens and closes the electric role by opening and closing the electric role winning opening / closing door 371. Will be done. Then, the small hit game is executed when the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric service winning opening 376 in the electric service opening / closing game, and the game ball 99 is entered into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game. If it is done, a jackpot game is executed. In the jackpot game, an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect are executed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), as the ending effect of the jackpot game that is executed triggered by the game per game in which the electric function opening / closing game is executed only once, the game per game has already ended. , After the end of the jackpot game, an end confirmation effect is executed to clearly indicate that the electric function opening / closing game of the normal figure hit game is not executed. In the end confirmation effect, an image such as a character image (character image of "END" or "end" in the illustrated example) indicating that the electric function opening / closing game is not executed is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Moves to the ending screen. As a result, the player can recognize that the game per hit is completed and that the electric service opening / closing game is not executed after the end of the jackpot. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 56A, an image showing the number of jackpot games executed based on the execution of the electric role opening / closing game of the game per normal figure on the end explicit ending screen (“number of jackpots 1”). Other images such as an image of "times") and an image showing the total number of game balls (balls) obtained in the jackpot game (image of "1280 balls") are displayed. Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the symbol display unit 341 displays an image prompting the player to hit the game ball 99 in the left area of the game board 31 from the end explicit ending screen. Moves to the request screen.

Similarly, in the case of a game per game in which the electric role opening / closing game in which the electric role winning opening / closing door 371 is opened / closed is executed multiple times (a normal figure hit other than A1 described later (see FIG. 58)), the normal figure As the ending effect of the jackpot game that is executed triggered by the last electric role opening / closing game that is executed in the hit game, there is an end confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the electric role opening / closing game of the normal figure hit game is not executed after the end of the jackpot game. It is executed, and after the end of the jackpot game, the screen shifts to the left-handed request screen in which an image prompting the player to perform left-handed is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (B) and 55 (C), in the case of a game per game in which the electric function opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times, other electric machines other than the last electric service opening / closing game in the game per game are performed. The small hit game and the big hit game are executed with the combination opening / closing game as an opportunity, and the next electric combination opening / closing game is executed via the opening interval after the electric combination opening / closing game. The small hit game and the big hit game in this case are executed in the opening interval between the opening and closing of the electric winning combination door 371 (during the execution of the electric combination opening and closing game). Even in the jackpot game executed in the opening interval, the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending effect are executed. Then, in the present embodiment, two types of intervals, a normal interval and a long interval, in which the times are different from each other, are included as the intervals between openings.

The normal interval is the same as the open interval in the first embodiment described above, and is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the big hit game, preferably the theoretical maximum time of the small hit game and the theoretical maximum time of the big hit game. It is set to be longer than the total time, and the jackpot game is set to end in the interval between openings. When the normal interval is executed as the interval between openings, the ending time of the jackpot game is set to the normal time (corresponding to the ending time of the jackpot game of the first embodiment described above).

As shown in FIG. 56 (B), as the ending effect when the ending time of the jackpot game is the normal time, the game per hit is being executed, and after the end of the jackpot game, the electric role of the game per hit is played. A continuous confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the opening / closing game is executed is executed. In the continuation confirmation effect, an image such as a character image (character image of "continuation" in the illustrated example) that clearly indicates that the electric function opening / closing game is executed is displayed on the continuation ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341. It is transferred without directing. As a result, the player can recognize that the electric service opening / closing game is executed after the end of the jackpot. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 56B, an image showing the number of jackpot games executed based on the execution of the electric role opening / closing game of the game per normal figure on the continuous ending screen (“1 jackpot number”). (Image), an image showing the total number of game balls (balls) obtained in the jackpot game (image of "1280 balls"), and an image showing the remaining number of times the electric service is opened and closed ("the electric service opening door is later"). Other images such as "I'll open it twice") are displayed. Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the symbol display unit 341 displays an image prompting the player to continuously launch the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31 from the continuous ending screen. Moves to the request screen.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (B) and 55 (C), the long interval is set to a longer time than the normal interval. The time difference between the long interval and the normal interval is set, for example, 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less of the normal interval, preferably 0.25 times or more and 4 times or less of the normal interval, and more preferably the normal interval. It is set to 0.5 times or more and 3 times or less. By setting the time difference between the long interval and the normal interval in such a range, it is suggested that the electric function opening / closing game of the normal game is not executed at the ending after the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game. After that, it becomes possible to execute the revival effect described later, which clearly indicates that the next electric service opening / closing game will be executed, within the interval between openings. When a long interval is executed as an interval between openings, the ending time of the jackpot game is set to a long time longer than the normal time. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), as the ending effect when the ending time of the jackpot game is longer than the normal, the revival continuation effect including the revival effect described later is executed. Therefore, the ending time as a long time is set to be longer than the time required to execute the revival effect, for example, it is set to the added time obtained by adding the time required to execute the revival effect to the normal time. Specifically, the time difference between the ending time of the long time and the ending time of the normal time is set to, for example, 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less of the ending time of the normal time, preferably 0.25 times the normal interval. It is set to 4 times or more, more preferably 0.5 times or more and 3 times or less of the normal interval. By setting the ending time as a long time in such a range, it is suggested that the electric function opening / closing game of the normal game is not executed in the ending after the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game. It is possible to execute the revival effect, which will be described later, in the ending effect, which clearly indicates that the next electric service opening / closing game will be executed.

In the revival continuation effect, the revival effect is executed. In the revival effect, for example, after the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. From the end suggestion ending screen that suggests (what you are doing), after the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 57 (B), the electric function opening / closing game of the normal figure hit game is executed (the normal figure hit game continues It is transferred to the revival continuation ending screen in which an image such as a character image (character image of "continue" or "still ..." in the illustrated example) is displayed. In this way, the revival effect of shifting from the end suggestion ending screen that suggests that the game per hobby is finished to the revival continuation ending screen that clearly indicates that the game per hobby is continuing is executed. By doing so, the player's joy will be enjoyed by shifting from the disappointment caused by shifting to the end suggestion ending screen to the resurrection continuation ending screen where the continuation of the game per normal figure is confirmed, that is, by executing the resurrection effect. As it grows larger, the interest of the game is further improved.

By the way, since the small hit game is executed triggered by the electric role opening / closing game of the normal drawing game, and the big hit game is executed triggered by the small hit game, the player's interest is in the electric role opening / closing game and the small hit game. In comparison, jackpot games tend to be lower. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a revival effect as a notification effect can be executed as an ending effect of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the jackpot game by executing the revival effect in the jackpot game in which the player's interest tends to be low.

Here, the timing for shifting from the end suggestion ending screen to the revival continuation ending screen is set, for example, at the timing when a time of more than 0.8 times and 1.2 times or less of the time corresponding to the ending time of the short time has elapsed. .. By shifting to the resurrection continuation ending screen at such a timing (by executing the resurrection effect), the timing of transitioning to the resurrection continuation ending screen is the timing when the time corresponding to the short time elapses. , The player can intuitively predict the timing when the revival effect is executed. Therefore, when the revival continuation ending screen is displayed, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether the revival effect is executed at that timing while predicting the timing when the time corresponding to the short time elapses. Can be done. Further, a plurality of timings at which the revival effect is executed may be set. In that case, it is difficult to predict when the revival effect will be executed. Therefore, by executing the revival effect at an unexpected timing, unexpected playability is given and the interest of the game is improved. As a plurality of timings, for example, at least one of a period of 0.1 times or more and 0.8 times or less of the ending time of the short time and a period of 1.2 times or more and 2 times or less of the ending time of the short time. including. For example, the revival effect is executed at the timing of 0.1 times or more and 0.8 times or less of the ending time of the short time, that is, at an unexpected timing relatively early after the transition to the end suggestion ending screen. By starting the revival production, unexpected playability is given. In addition, since the revival effect is executed at the timing of more than 1.2 times and less than 2 times the ending time of the short time, the revival effect can be performed even if a relatively long time has passed since the transition to the end suggestion ending screen. By making the player feel uncomfortable that the revival production is started at an unexpected timing that the player thinks that it will not be executed, and that the left-handed request screen that should be transferred when the electric role opening / closing game is not executed is not transferred. , Surprising playability is given.

The end suggestion ending screen may be the same as the end explicit ending screen (see FIG. 56 (A)). Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the symbol display unit 341 shifts from the continuous ending screen to the right-handed request screen in which an image prompting the player to continue right-handed is displayed.

Further, in FIG. 57, the revival effect is executed by shifting from the end suggestion ending screen to the revival continuation ending screen. For example, when the revival effect is transferred from the end suggestion ending screen to the left-handed request screen (FIG. 56 (A)) and then to the revival continuation ending screen, a false suggestion that is disadvantageous to the player is made. It is not preferable to become. On the contrary, if the player is requested to hit the left and then to the right due to a false suggestion, not only is unnecessary waste ball due to the left hit, but also if the player immediately hits the right after the left hit, the ball is jammed. There is a concern that a flat tire may occur in which the game ball 99 is not inserted into the electric role winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game due to the occurrence of a launch failure or a launch delay. From these points of view, it is not preferable to shift the revival effect from the end suggestion ending screen to the left-handed request screen (FIG. 56 (A)) and then to the revival continuation ending screen. It may be executed by shifting from the end suggestion ending screen to the left-handed request screen (FIG. 56 (A)) and then shifting to the resurrection continuation ending screen. In this case, by shifting to the left-handed request screen, it is more strongly suggested that the electric role opening / closing game of the normal figure hit game is not executed after the end of the jackpot game, so the revival effect was executed. Since the joy of the player in the case is increased, the interest of the game is improved. The transition to the left-handed request screen in such a screen transition example is executed as a part of the ending effect, but the left-handed request screen may be executed after the ending effect is completed. In this case, the left-handed request screen may be executed. From the left-handed request screen, the revival continuation effect corresponding to the revival continuation ending screen of the ending effect is executed separately from the ending effect. That is, the revival effect may be executed as a part of the ending effect, or after the end of the ending effect (after the end of the jackpot game), the remaining time of the opening interval until the electric function opening / closing game is started. It may be executed as an effect different from the ending effect. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the blank period of the opening interval until the electric service opening / closing game is started. Further, in the blank period, none of the electric function opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game of the normal game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the blank period of the game by executing the revival effect.

Further, the end suggestion ending screen may display, for example, an image suggesting or clearly indicating that the revival effect is executed, in addition to the image displayed on the end explicit ending screen. That is, in the ending effect (resurrection continuation effect) in which the resurrection effect is executed, the effect suggesting or clearly indicating that the resurrection effect is executed may be executed before the execution of the resurrection effect. Of course, even when the revival effect is not executed, a fake effect suggesting that the revival effect is executed even when the ending time is normal time (the interval between openings is the normal interval) may be executed. That is, an image suggesting that the revival effect is executed may be displayed on the end explicit ending screen. As a result, even if the end explicit ending screen is the same screen as the end suggestion ending screen, the ending screen state by suggesting or clearly indicating that the revival effect is executed on the ending screen. The expectation that the revival production will be carried out will be raised, and the interest in the progress of the ending of the jackpot game will be improved.

As the effect suggesting that the revival effect is executed, for example, a character image reminiscent of the electric role opening / closing game such as "right-handed" or "continue" characters, and the degree of expectation that the revival effect will be executed. It is conceivable to display a suggestion image such as an image showing the above on the end suggestion ending screen. The suggested image in this case is unclear as compared with the image (for example, the character image of "continuation") that clearly indicates that the electric function opening / closing game is executed, which is displayed on the continuation ending screen (see FIG. 56 (B)). It is conceivable to display the image in various modes (for example, an image such as translucent, light color, gray, etc.). Further, the suggested image may be displayed as a still image or a moving image. When the suggested image is displayed as a moving image, the suggested image may be, for example, a moving image in which the shade changes, a moving image in which a display state and a non-display state are repeated, a moving image in which the suggested image size is enlarged or reduced, and the like.

On the other hand, as effects that clearly indicate that the revival effect will be executed, there are effects such as character images that clearly indicate that the electric role opening / closing game will be executed, rare character images that have a low appearance rate in the Fuzu game effect, and rainbow colors. It is conceivable to display an explicit image such as an image on the end suggestion ending screen.

Further, the effect suggesting or clearly indicating that the revival effect is executed may be executed as an operation request effect for urging the player to operate the operation button 20. That is, an operation request image such as an operation button image imitating the operation button 20 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 20 is displayed on the end suggestion ending screen, and the ending time is triggered by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player. The revival effect may be executed when is a long time (the interval between openings is a long interval), while the revival effect may not be executed when the ending time is a normal time (interval between openings is a normal interval). .. In addition, a plurality of types of operation request images are prepared as operation request images, and depending on the type of the operation request image, the degree of expectation that the revival effect is executed is suggested, or it is clearly indicated that the revival effect is executed. You may do so. As the plurality of types of operation request images, for example, those having different colors, sizes, patterns, effect sizes and colors, etc. of the operation button images can be considered.

Here, FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of a classification table for each type used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the opening / closing pattern of the electric service winning opening / closing door 371 of the electric service winning opening / closing door 371 and the opening interval of the electric service winning opening / closing door 371 in the game per game.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, when the lottery result per normal figure is a hit, the types per normal figure are A1 per normal figure, B1 and B2 per normal figure, C1 to C3 per normal figure, and D1 per normal figure. There are 28 pieces of ~ D4, E1 to E5 per normal figure, F1 to F6 per normal figure, and G1 to G7 per normal figure. Further, in the game per figure, the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened and closed in an opening / closing pattern corresponding to the type of the ordinary figure, and the electric role opening / closing game is performed the number of times according to the opening / closing of the electric role winning door 371. Will be executed.

For example, in the normal drawing per A1, in the normal drawing per game, the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 1A. In the opening / closing pattern 1A, the electric service opening / closing game is executed once by opening / closing the electric service winning door 371 once in the game per game, and one small hit game and one big hit game can be executed. The opening / closing pattern 1A is the same as the opening / closing pattern 1 in the first embodiment described above. Further, in A1 per normal figure, since the electric role opening / closing game is executed once in the game per normal figure, the end is shifted to the end explicit ending screen as the ending effect when the big hit game is executed as described above. The final effect is executed, and after the jackpot game (ending effect) is completed, the screen shifts to the right-handed request screen (see FIG. 56 (A)).

In B1 per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened and closed in the opening / closing pattern 2A in the game per normal figure, and in B2 per normal figure, the electric function winning device 37 is opened / closed in the opening / closing pattern 2B in the game per normal figure. The winning combination door 371 is opened and closed. In the opening / closing patterns 2A and 2B, the electric function winning door 371 is opened / closed twice through one opening interval in the game per normal figure, so that the electric role opening / closing game is executed twice, and the maximum number of times is two small. Hit games and jackpot games are feasible.

Further, the one-time opening interval of the opening / closing pattern 2A is a normal interval. Therefore, in B1 per normal figure, when the big hit game is executed in the first open interval that is shifted by the end of the first electric service opening / closing game, a continuous confirmation effect is executed as an ending effect (FIG. 56). (B)). In addition, when the jackpot game is executed triggered by the second electric role opening / closing game, the end confirmation effect is executed as the ending effect, and after the end of the jackpot game (ending effect), the screen shifts to the right-handed request screen ( See FIG. 56 (A)).

On the other hand, the one-time opening interval of the opening / closing pattern 2B is a long interval. Therefore, in B2 per normal figure, when the big hit game is executed in the first open interval that is shifted by the end of the first electric service opening / closing game, the revival continuation effect is executed as the ending effect (FIG. 57). reference). In addition, when the jackpot game is executed triggered by the second electric role opening / closing game, the end confirmation effect is executed as the ending effect, and after the end of the jackpot game (ending effect), the screen shifts to the right-handed request screen ( See FIG. 56 (A)).

In C1 per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 3A in the game per normal figure, and in C2 per normal figure, the electric function winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 3B in the game per normal figure. The winning combination door 371 is opened and closed, and in the C3 per drawing, the winning door 371 of the electric winning device 37 is opened and closed in the opening / closing pattern 3C in the game per drawing. In the opening / closing patterns 3A to 3C, the electric function winning door 371 is opened / closed three times via the two opening intervals in the game per normal figure, so that the electric role opening / closing game is executed three times, and the maximum number of times is three small. Hit games and jackpot games are feasible.

As for the two opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 3A, both the first opening interval and the second opening interval are normal intervals. Therefore, in 3A per normal figure, when the big hit game is executed in the interval between the first and second opening, which is shifted by the end of the first and second electric service opening / closing games, the continuous confirmation effect is performed as the ending effect. It is executed (see FIG. 56 (B)). In addition, when the jackpot game is executed triggered by the third electric role opening / closing game, the end confirmation effect is executed as the ending effect, and after the end of the jackpot game (ending effect), the screen shifts to the right-handed request screen ( See FIG. 56 (A)).

As for the two opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 3B, the first opening interval is a normal interval and the second opening interval is a long interval. Therefore, in 3B per normal figure, when the big hit game is executed in the first opening interval that is shifted by the end of the first electric service opening / closing game, a continuous confirmation effect is executed as an ending effect (FIG. 56). See (B)). Further, when the jackpot game is executed in the second opening interval that is shifted by the end of the second electric service opening / closing game, the revival continuation effect is executed as the ending effect (see FIG. 57). In addition, when the jackpot game is executed triggered by the third electric role opening / closing game, the end confirmation effect is executed as the ending effect, and after the end of the jackpot game (ending effect), the screen shifts to the right-handed request screen ( See FIG. 56 (A)).

As for the two opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 3C, both the first and second opening intervals are long intervals. Therefore, in 3C per normal figure, if the jackpot game is executed in the interval between the first and second opening, which is shifted by the end of the first and second electric service opening / closing games, the revival continuous effect is performed as the ending effect. It is executed (see FIG. 57). In addition, when the jackpot game is executed triggered by the third electric role opening / closing game, the end confirmation effect is executed as the ending effect, and after the end of the jackpot game (ending effect), the screen shifts to the right-handed request screen ( See FIG. 56 (A)).

In D1 per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 4A in the game per normal figure, and in D2 per normal figure, the electric function winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 4B in the game per normal figure. The winning combination door 371 is opened and closed. The electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed. In the opening / closing patterns 4A to 4D, the electric function winning door 371 is opened / closed four times via the three opening intervals in the game per normal figure, so that the electric role opening / closing game is executed four times, and the maximum of four small times. Hit games and jackpot games are feasible.

As for the three opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 4A, all the opening intervals from the first to the third are normal intervals. As for the three opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 4B, the first and second opening intervals are normal intervals, and the third opening interval is a long interval. As for the three opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 4C, the first opening interval is a normal interval, and the second and third opening intervals are long intervals. As for the three opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 4D, all the opening intervals from the first to the third are long intervals.

In E1 per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 5A in the game per normal figure, and in E2 per normal figure, the electric function winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 5B in the game per normal figure. The winning combination door 371 is opened and closed. The electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed, and the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 5E in the game per normal figure in the game per game. In the opening / closing patterns 5A to 5E, the electric function winning door 371 is opened / closed 5 times through the opening interval of 4 times in the game per normal figure, so that the electric role opening / closing game is executed 5 times, and the maximum 5 times is small. Hit games and jackpot games are feasible.

As for the four opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 5A, all the opening intervals from the first to the fourth are normal intervals. As for the four opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 5B, the first to third opening intervals are normal intervals, and the fourth opening interval is a long interval. As for the four opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 5C, the first and second opening intervals are normal intervals, and the third and fourth opening intervals are long intervals. As for the fourth opening interval of the opening / closing pattern 5D, the first opening interval is a normal interval, and the first to third opening intervals are long intervals. As for the four opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 5E, all the opening intervals from the first to the fourth are long intervals.

In F1 per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 6A in the game per normal figure, and in F2 per normal figure, the electric function winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 6B in the game per normal figure. The winning combination door 371 is opened and closed, the electric winning door 371 of the electric winning combination device 37 is opened and closed by the opening and closing pattern 6C in the game per normal figure in F3 per normal figure, and the opening and closing pattern 6D in the game per normal drawing in F4 per normal figure. The electric winning door 371 of the electric winning device 37 is opened and closed, and the electric winning door 371 of the electric winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 6E in the game per normal drawing in F5 per normal drawing. In the game per normal figure, the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 6F. In the opening / closing patterns 6A to 6F, the electric function winning door 371 is opened / closed 6 times via the opening interval of 5 times in the game per normal figure, so that the electric role opening / closing game is executed 6 times, and the maximum 6 times is small. Hit games and jackpot games are feasible.

As for the five opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 6A, all the opening intervals from the first to the fifth are normal intervals. As for the five opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 6B, the first to fourth opening intervals are normal intervals, and the fifth opening intervals are long intervals. As for the five opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 6C, the first to third opening intervals are normal intervals, and the fourth and fifth opening intervals are long intervals. As for the five opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 6D, the first and second opening intervals are normal intervals, and the third to fifth opening intervals are long intervals. As for the five opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 6E, the first opening interval is a normal interval, and the second to fifth opening intervals are long intervals. As for the five opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 6F, all the opening intervals from the first to the fifth are long intervals.

In the G1 per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 7A in the game per normal figure, and in the G2 per normal figure, the electric function winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 7B in the game per normal figure. The winning combination door 371 is opened and closed, the electric winning door 371 of the electric winning combination device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 7C in the game per normal drawing in G3 per normal figure, and the opening / closing pattern 7D in the game per normal drawing in G4 per normal drawing. The electric winning door 371 of the electric winning device 37 is opened and closed, and the electric winning door 371 of the electric winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 7E in the game per normal drawing in the game per normal drawing. In the game per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 7F, and in the game per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern 7G in the game per normal figure. It is opened and closed. In the opening / closing patterns 7A to 7G, the electric function winning door 371 is opened / closed 7 times via the opening interval of 6 times in the game per normal figure, so that the electric role opening / closing game is executed 7 times, and the maximum is 7 small times. Hit games and jackpot games are feasible.

As for the six opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 7A, all the opening intervals from the first to the sixth are normal intervals. As for the six opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 7B, the first to fifth opening intervals are normal intervals, and the sixth opening interval is a long interval. As for the six opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 7C, the first to fourth opening intervals are normal intervals, and the fifth and sixth opening intervals are long intervals. As for the six opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 7D, the first to third opening intervals are normal intervals, and the fourth to sixth opening intervals are long intervals. As for the six opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 7E, the first and second opening intervals are normal intervals, and the third to sixth opening intervals are long intervals. As for the six opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 7F, the first opening interval is a normal interval, and the second to sixth opening intervals are long intervals. As for the six opening intervals of the opening / closing pattern 7G, all the opening intervals from the first to the sixth are long intervals.

Also, in D1 to D4 per Fuzu, E1 to E5 per Fuzu, F1 to F6 per Fuzu, and G1 to G7 per Fuzu, the open interval is a continuous confirmed production as the ending effect of the jackpot game at the normal interval. (See FIG. 56 (B)) is executed, and a revival continuation effect is executed as an ending effect of the jackpot game at a long interval (see FIG. 57). In addition, when the jackpot game is executed triggered by the final electric role opening / closing game, the end confirmation effect is executed as the ending effect, and after the end of the jackpot game (ending effect), the screen shifts to the right-handed request screen (Fig.). 56 (A)).

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the total distribution rate of G1 to G7 per figure in which the number of times of opening and closing of the electric service winning door 371 is 7 times, and the number of times of opening and closing of the electric service winning door 371 is F1 to F6 per figure of 6 times. Total distribution rate, total distribution rate of E1 to E5 per figure with 5 times of opening and closing of the electric winning door 371, total distribution of D1 to D4 per 4 times of opening and closing of the electric winning door 371 Distribution rate, total distribution rate of C1 to C3 per figure with 3 times of opening and closing of the electric service winning door 371, total distribution rate of B1 and B2 per table with 2 times of opening and closing of the electric service winning door 371 , And the distribution rate of A1 per normal figure in which the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed decreases in this order. In other words, as the type of per-figure, the number of times the electric role opening / closing game is executed in the per-figure game is large (the number of expected jackpot games is large), and it is difficult to select the per-figure that is advantageous to the player. There is. In this way, by making it difficult for the player to be selected as the hit is advantageous to the player, the joy of winning the type of hit that is difficult to be selected is increased, and the interest of the game is further improved.

In addition, when the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed multiple times, B2, C2, C3, D2 to D4, E2 to E5, F2 to F6, G2 to G7 are included in the opening interval. Is more difficult to select than B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1 per normal figure in which the interval between openings is composed of only the normal interval. That is, it is more difficult to select a normal figure hit in which the resurrection effect is executed than in a normal figure hit in which the electric service winning door 371 is opened the same number of times. As a result, the joy when the revival effect is executed is increased, and the fun of the game is further improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the electric combination winning door 371 is opened and closed a plurality of times to execute the electric combination opening / closing game multiple times. Includes two types of open intervals: normal intervals and long intervals, which have different times. Then, a continuous confirmation effect (see FIG. 56 (A)) is executed in the ending effect of the jackpot game executed at the normal interval, and a revival continuous effect including the revival effect is executed in the ending effect of the jackpot game executed at the long interval (Fig.). 57) is executed. That is, by providing a long interval set to a longer time than the normal interval, after executing the end suggestion effect (see FIG. 57 (A)) executed in the same manner as the end confirmation effect in this long interval. Even so, it is possible to execute the revival effect (see FIG. 57 (B)). In particular, when a long interval is executed, a long time longer than the normal time is set as the ending time of the jackpot game, so that the revival effect can be executed as a part of the ending effect of the jackpot game.

Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start processing executed in the normal drawing game control processing of FIG. 26.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 60, in the variation start processing in the present embodiment, between steps S1705 and step S1706 in the variation start processing of the first embodiment described above, the electric service prize corresponding to the type per drawing is awarded. The process of setting the opening / closing pattern of the door 371 (see FIG. 59) is executed (step S2601). As described above, in the present embodiment, as the opening interval, in addition to the normal interval similar to the opening interval of the first embodiment described above, a long interval set to a time longer than this normal interval is included. .. Therefore, by setting the opening / closing pattern of the electric winning door 371 in the game per game in the fluctuation start process, it is possible to distinguish between the normal interval and the long interval in the game per game, and the interval between openings can be executed. It becomes possible to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the type.

Here, FIGS. 61 and 62 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure executed in the main process of FIG. 25.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the game control process for hitting a normal figure in the present embodiment, when the electric role winning open / close door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 in the game per normal figure is closed (end the electric role opening / closing game). (Step S1811: Yes), the value of the open / close number counter is 0 after executing a predetermined process (steps S1812 to S1818) in the same manner as the game control process per game in the first embodiment described above. If not (step S1819: No), the process related to the open interval shown in steps S2801 to S2807 of FIG. 62 is executed, and the open interval flag is executed as in the game control process per normal figure in the first embodiment described above. Is set to on to end the game control process per game.

<Steps S2801 to S2803>
As shown in FIG. 62, in step S2801, the MPU 41 acquires the value of the open / close number counter indicating the remaining number of times of opening / closing of the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37, and in step S2601 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 60. The opening / closing pattern of the electric service winning door 371 set in is read out (step S2802). Then, the MPU 41 specifies the type of the opening interval this time based on the value of the opening / closing number counter acquired in step S2801 and the opening / closing pattern of the electric service winning door 371 read out in step S2803 (step S2803).

<Step S2804 to Step S2807>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the open interval specified in step S2803 is a normal interval (step S2804). When the type of the interval between openings is a normal interval (step S2804: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a value corresponding to the normal interval in the interval time counter between openings (step S2805). On the other hand, the MPU 41 sets a value corresponding to the long interval in the open interval time counter when the type of the open interval is not the normal interval (step S2804: No), that is, when the type of the open interval is the long interval. (Step S2806). Next, the MPU 41 sets an open interval type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the open interval type set in step S2805 or S2806 (step S2807). The open interval type command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether the opening interval type of the electric service winning door 371 is a normal interval or a long interval based on the opening interval type command, so that the jackpot game can be played in the opening interval. When executed, it is possible to determine either normal time or long time as the ending time of the jackpot game, and it is possible to determine whether to execute the continuous confirmation effect or the revival continuous effect as the ending effect. ..

Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the MPU 51 has received the command (step S2401: Yes), it is used as a determination target in the command determination process of the first embodiment described above. In addition to the command, the open interval type command is the determination target, and when the open interval type command is received, a predetermined process is executed (steps S2901 to S2903).

<Step S2901 to Step S2903>
The MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is an open interval type command (step S2901). The open interval type command is a command indicating whether the open interval is a normal interval or a long interval, and is set in step S2807 in the game control process per normal drawing in FIG. 62. When the received command is an open interval type command (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 specifies the open interval type based on the open interval type command, sets the specified open interval type, and sets the specified open interval type (step S2901: Yes). Step S2902), the interval setting flag between open spaces is set to on (step S2903). The opening interval type set in step S2902 and the opening interval setting flag set on in step S2903 are referred to when determining the ending effect of the jackpot game in the jackpot game effect processing of FIG. 66, which will be described later.

Here, FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the type of hitting a normal figure and the combination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game.

By the way, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win, the number of times the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 in the game per doublet is opened and closed in the doublet game. By stopping and displaying the combination of numbers (doublet) that matches (the number of times the electric function opening / closing game is executed) on the symbol display unit 341, the display content on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal diagram game is used to hit the normal figure. The case where the number of times of opening and closing of the electric winning door 371 executed in the game is clearly indicated so that the player can easily grasp it has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of times the electric function winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric function opening / closing game is executed) in the game per normal figure and the number stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are doublet. Although the numbers do not match, the numbers of doublets of the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the regular game when the lottery result in the regular lottery is a win are the doublet numbers. It matches (corresponds) with the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing of the electric function winning door 371 expected in the winning game (minimum expected number of times of execution of the electric role opening and closing game). That is, the minimum expected number of times can be grasped from the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game. (Number of executions). In addition, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is to open / close the electric winning door 371 (execution of the electric role opening / closing game) more than the minimum expected number of times in the game per normal figure, the minimum expected number of times is used. The first revival effect is executed in the jackpot game that is executed triggered by the opening and closing of the final electric service winning door 371 (execution of the electric service opening / closing game).

As shown in FIG. 64, in the normal figure game (A1 per normal figure) in which the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed once (the electric role opening / closing game is executed once), the symbol is displayed in the normal figure game. The combination of the stop symbols in the unit 341 is "111".

In the game per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed twice (the game of opening and closing the electric role is executed twice). The combination of symbols is "111" (B1 per normal figure) or "222" (B2 per normal figure).

In the game per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed three times (the game of opening and closing the electric role is executed three times). The combination of symbols is "111" (C1 per normal figure), "222" (C2 per normal figure) or "333" (C3 per normal figure).

In the game per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed four times (the electric role opening and closing game is executed four times). The combination of symbols is "111" (D1 per normal figure), "222" (D2 per normal figure), "333" (D3 per normal figure) or "444" (D4 per normal figure).

In the game per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed 5 times (the game of opening and closing the electric role is executed 5 times). The combination of symbols is "111" (E1 per normal figure), "222" (E2 per normal figure), "333" (E3 per normal figure), "444" (E4 per normal figure) or "555" (normal figure). Hit E5).

In the game per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed 6 times (the game of opening and closing the electric role is executed 6 times). The combination of symbols is "111" (F1 per normal figure), "222" (F2 per normal figure), "333" (F3 per normal figure), "444" (F4 per normal figure), "555" (F4 per normal figure). Hit F5) or "666" (F6 per normal figure).

In the game per normal figure, the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed 7 times (the game of opening and closing the electric role is executed 7 times). The combination of symbols is "111" (G1 per normal figure), "222" (G2 per normal figure), "333" (G3 per normal figure), "444" (G4 per normal figure), "555" (general figure). Hit G5), "666" (G6 per normal figure) or "777" (G7 per normal figure).

In other words, since the combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal map game is "111", the normal figure hit type is A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1 or G1 per normal figure. When the combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game is "111", the number of times the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed (the number of times the electric role opening and closing game is executed) in the game per normal figure is 1 to 7 times. Is one of. That is, when the combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game is "111", the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed (the electric role opening and closing game is executed) at least once in the game per normal figure. .. That is, the doublet number "1" of the combination of decorative symbols that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game is the minimum expected number of times the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed in the normal figure game (electric role). It matches (corresponds to) "1 time" which is the minimum expected number of times the opening and closing game is executed.

Here, FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation stop screen in the symbol display unit 341 in the normal drawing game. As shown in FIG. 65, when the lottery result in the lottery per doublet is a win, the combination of the stopped symbols in the symbol display unit 341 in the doublet game is sorted into the doublet type of "111". In the case (A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1 or G1 per normal figure), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in doublets arranged in "111" on the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, the player is expected to open and close the electric winning door 371, which is expected in the game per normal figure, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 with doublets arranged in "111". It is possible to know that it is "once", which is (the minimum expected number of times the electric function opening / closing game is executed). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 65, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the character image (minimum expected number of times image) stating "The electric service winning door will be opened once" is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. The minimum expected number of times of opening and closing of the electric function winning door 371 in the game per normal figure (minimum expected number of times of execution of the electric role opening and closing game) is specified or suggested. Even with this, the player can open and close the electric winning door 371 expected in the game per normal figure when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 with doublets arranged in "111". It can be known that the minimum expected number of times (the minimum expected number of times the electric function opening / closing game is executed) is "1 time". Even when doublets other than "111" are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing of the electric winning door 371 expected in the game per normal figure (execution of the electric role opening and closing game). An image that clearly or suggests the minimum expected number of times) is displayed. As a result, the player can expect the lowest expectation of the electric role opening / closing game that is expected in the game per normal figure not only by the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the normal figure game but also by the character image displayed on the symbol display unit 341. You can grasp the number of times. Therefore, even if the player does not know the correspondence between the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the Fuzu game and the minimum expected number of times of the electric role opening / closing game, the electric power in the Fuzu game is based on the character image. You can grasp the minimum expected number of roles opening and closing games.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64, since the combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game is "222", the normal figure hit type is B2, C2, D2, E2, F2 or G2 per normal figure. , When the combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game is "222", the number of times of opening and closing the electric role winning door 371 (number of times of executing the electric role opening and closing game) in the game per normal figure is 2 to 7. One of the times. That is, when the combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game is "222", the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed (the electric role opening and closing game is executed) at least twice in the game per normal figure. .. That is, the doublet number "2" of the combination of decorative symbols that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal game is the minimum expected number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed in the game per game. It matches (corresponds) to "2 times" which is the minimum expected number of times the electric function opening / closing game is executed.

Since the combination of the stop symbols in the symbol display unit 341 in the normal map game is "333", the normal symbol hit type is C3, D3, E3, F3 or G3 per normal figure, so that the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game When the combination of the stop symbols in is "333", the number of times the electric function winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric function opening / closing game is executed) in the game per normal figure is any of 3 to 7 times. That is, when the combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game is "333", the electric role winning door 371 is opened / closed (the electric role opening / closing game is executed) three times or more in the game per normal figure. .. That is, the doublet number "3" of the combination of decorative symbols that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal game is the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing of the electric winning door 371 expected in the game per game. It matches (corresponds to) "3 times", which is the minimum expected number of times the electric function opening / closing game is executed.

Since the combination of the stop symbols in the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game is "444", the normal symbol hit type is D4, E4, F4 or G4 per normal figure, so that the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game When the combination of the stop symbols is "444", the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed) in the game per normal figure is any of 4 to 7 times. That is, when the combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game is "444", the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed (the electric role opening and closing game is executed) four times or more in the game per normal figure. .. That is, the number "4" of the combination of decorative symbols that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal game is the minimum expected number of times the electric winning door 371 is opened and closed in the game per game. It matches (corresponds to) "4 times", which is the minimum expected number of times the electric function opening / closing game is executed.

The combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal map game is "555". Since the normal symbol hit type is E5, F5 or G5 per normal symbol, the stop symbol on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal symbol game When the combination of is "555", the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed) in the game per normal figure is any of 5 to 7 times. That is, when the combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game is "555", the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed (the electric role opening and closing game is executed) five times or more in the game per normal figure. .. That is, the doublet number "5" of the combination of decorative symbols that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal game is the minimum expected number of times the electric winning door 371 is opened and closed in the game per game. It matches (corresponds to) "5 times", which is the minimum expected number of times the electric function opening / closing game is executed.

The combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal symbol game is "666". Since the normal symbol hit type is F6 or G6 per normal symbol, the combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal symbol game. When is "666", the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed) in the game per normal figure is 6 or 7 times. That is, when the combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game is "666", the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed (the electric role opening and closing game is executed) six times or more in the game per normal figure. .. That is, the doublet number "6" of the combination of decorative symbols that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal game is the minimum expected number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed in the game per game. It matches (corresponds to) "6 times", which is the minimum expected number of times the electric function opening / closing game is executed.

The combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal game is "777". Since the type of the normal symbol is only G7 per normal symbol, the combination of the stop symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal game is "777". In the case of "777", it is determined that the number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed) is 7 times per game.

In this way, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win, the number of doublets of the combination of decorative symbols that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the game is the electric doublet in the game. It matches (corresponds to) the minimum expected number of times the winning door 371 is opened and closed (the minimum expected number of times the electric function opening and closing game is executed). In other words, in the Fuzu game, doublets of numbers that are the same as or smaller than the number corresponding to the number of electric role opening / closing games executed in the Fuzu game are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341. The number of doublets displayed as a stop suggests the number of times the electric role opening / closing game is executed in the game per normal figure. Therefore, the player can get doublet numbers in the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game when the lottery result in the normal figure hit lottery is a win. It is possible to recognize the minimum expected number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed (the minimum expected number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed). Further, the combination of decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 suggests the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing of the electric function winning door 371 in the game per ordinary figure (minimum expected number of times of execution of the electric role opening / closing game). By being a combination, unless the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol is "777", from the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the electric role winning door 371 in the game per ordinary figure It is not possible to know exactly the number of times the door is opened and closed (the number of times the electric service opening and closing game is executed). Therefore, the player expects that the electric function opening / closing game will be executed more times than the number of the combination of the decorative symbols in the hobby game in the hobby game, and the player will play various games such as the hobby game. Since you can enjoy the progress, the fun of the game is improved. In addition, since it is a doublet number of the combination of decorative symbols that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game, the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing the electric role winning door 371 in the normal figure game (electric role). The minimum expected number of times the opening / closing game is executed) can be easily recognized.

In particular, as the ending effect of the jackpot game, the revival continuation effect is executed when the opening interval, which is the opening interval of the electric role winning door 371 (during the execution of the electric role opening / closing game), is a long interval as described above. .. Therefore, when the opening / closing of the electric role winning door 371 (execution of the electric role opening / closing game) of the number of times corresponding to the number of the combination of the decorative symbols in the normal figure game is completed as the game per the normal figure, the electric role winning door is concerned. Since it is possible to raise interest in whether or not the revival continuation effect is executed in the ending effect of the jackpot game executed by the opening / closing of 371 (execution of the electric function opening / closing game), the interest of the game is further enhanced. Will be improved.

It should be noted that the notification effect such as the revival continuation effect may be executed in the jackpot game triggered by the minimum expected number of doublet opening / closing games corresponding to the numbers of doublets displayed on the symbol display unit 341. That is, the notification effect may be executed at the interval for the last electric combination opening / closing game of the number of executions of the electric combination opening / closing game in the normal figure hitting game suggested by the symbol display unit 341 in the normal drawing game. As a result, the notification effect is executed in the opening interval between the apparent final electric role opening / closing game suggested in the Fuzu game and the next electric role opening / closing game unknown to the player. Therefore, when the final electric function opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game are executed, the player expects that the notification effect is executed during the execution of the games. You can enjoy the progress. Then, when the notification effect is executed, at least one electric role opening / closing game is executed after the end of the big hit game, and at least one small hit game and a big hit game are executed with this electric role opening / closing game as an opportunity. Since it is possible to grasp what can be done, the fun of the game is improved.

Further, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is not limited to numbers, but may be other symbols such as alphabets and symbols. Even in this case, if the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win, the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game and the electric role winning door 371 in the game per normal figure It is preferable to correspond with the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing (minimum expected number of times of execution of the electric function opening and closing game). For example, when the decorative symbol is an alphabet, when the combination of the decorative symbols is "AAA", the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing the electric role winning door 371 in the game per ordinary figure (minimum number of times of executing the electric role opening and closing game). When the expected number of times (expected number of times) is 1 and the combination of decorative symbols is "BBB", the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing of the electric role winning door 371 in the game per normal figure (minimum expected number of times of execution of the electric role opening and closing game) ) Is twice, and when the combination of decorative symbols is "CCC", the minimum expected number of times the electric role winning door 371 is opened and closed in the game per normal figure (the minimum expected number of times the electric role opening and closing game is executed) is In 3 times, when the combination of decorative symbols is "DDD", the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing of the electric role winning door 371 in the game per normal figure (minimum expected number of times of execution of the electric role opening and closing game) is 4 times. In addition, when the combination of decorative symbols is "EEE", the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing of the electric role winning door 371 in the game per normal figure (minimum expected number of times of execution of the electric role opening and closing game) is 5 times. When the combination of decorative symbols is "FFF", the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing of the electric role winning door 371 in the game per normal figure (minimum expected number of times of execution of the electric role opening and closing game) is 6 times, and the decorative pattern. When the combination of is "GGG", it is conceivable that the number of times of opening and closing (the number of times of executing the electric role opening and closing game) of the electric role winning door 371 in the game per normal figure corresponds to 7 times. In this way, when the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the Fuzu game is a combination of alphabets that corresponds to the minimum expected number of times of the electric role opening / closing game in the Fuzu game, the electric role is compared to the doublet of the number. It is difficult to grasp the minimum expected number of opening and closing games, but compared to the case where the minimum expected number of times is specified by complicated symbols or unfamiliar symbols, the alphabet is the minimum number of electric role opening and closing games as much as you are familiar with. It becomes easy to grasp the expected number of times. Also, in the case of a combination of alphabets, it is difficult to grasp the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game compared to the doublet of numbers, while the minimum expectation of the electric role opening / closing game is compared with complicated symbols and unfamiliar symbols. Since it is easy to grasp the number of times, it is possible to give an appropriate difficulty to grasp the minimum expected number of times of the electric role opening / closing game. This makes it possible to enjoy guessing the minimum expected number of times for the electric service opening / closing game.

In addition, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in doublet on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal figure game, the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing the electric role winning door 371 in the game per normal figure (the number of times the electric role opening / closing game is executed). The image suggesting (minimum expected number of times) may be omitted, and the number of times the electric function winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric function opening / closing game is executed) in the game per doublet may be omitted by displaying other modes. It is also good.

Here, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. In the jackpot game effect processing, the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect, and the ending effect in the jackpot game are determined, and the process of causing the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, and the illumination unit 27 to execute these effects as the jackpot game effect is executed. To.

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 66, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S3001). The jackpot game start flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is started, and is set to ON in step S2413 (see FIG. 43) in the command determination process of FIG. 63 when the jackpot game command is received. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3002 when the jackpot game start flag is set to on (step S3001: Yes), and when the jackpot game start flag is set to off (step S3001: No). The jackpot game production process is completed.

<Steps S3002 and S3003>
In step S3002, the MPU 51 specifies the jackpot type based on the content stored in the RAM 512 in step S2403 (see FIG. 43) in the command determination process of FIG. 63 when the variation pattern command is received. Next, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect and the opening / closing execution mode effect in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type specified in step S3002 (step S3003). For example, when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot, the MPU 51 determines an effect of displaying an image indicating that the 16R jackpot game is started as an opening effect, and a round game for 16 round games as an opening / closing execution mode effect. Determine the production. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is 8R jackpot, the MPU 51 determines an effect of displaying an image indicating that the 8R jackpot game is started as an opening effect, and a round game for eight round games as an opening / closing execution mode effect. Determine the production. Further, in the opening effect, it is conceivable to display an image showing the cumulative number of jackpots in the game per normal figure, regardless of the jackpot type. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode effect, regardless of the jackpot type, an image showing the number of rounds, an image showing the number of completed rounds, and an image showing the number of game balls 99 entering the variable winning opening 394 in the round game. , It is also conceivable to display an image showing the cumulative number of balls to be ejected in the jackpot game, an image showing the cumulative number of balls to be ejected in the jackpot game executed in the game per normal figure, and the like.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the open interval setting flag is set to ON. The opening interval setting flag is a flag indicating that the opening interval is set, that is, whether or not the electric function opening / closing game of the normal drawing game is executed after the end of the big hit game of this time, and is a flag of FIG. 63. It is set to ON in step S2903 in the command determination process. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3005 when the open interval setting flag is set to on (step S3004: Yes), and when the open interval setting flag is set to off (step S3004: No). , The process proceeds to step S3009.

<Steps S3005 to S3008>
When the open interval setting flag is set to on (step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the open interval type is a long interval (step S3005). When the MPU 51 has a long interval (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 51 determines the revival continuation effect (see FIG. 57) as the ending effect (step S3006). On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is not a long interval (step S3005: No), that is, when it is a normal interval, the MPU 51 determines a continuous confirmation effect (see FIG. 56B) as an ending effect (step S3007). Then, when the continuation confirmation effect or the revival continuation effect is determined as the ending effect, the MPU 51 sets the open interval setting flag to off (step S3008).

<Step S3009>
When the open interval setting flag is set to off (step S3004: No), that is, the electric function opening / closing game of the game per game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is the last game in the game per game. In the case of the electric role opening / closing game, the MPU 51 determines the end confirmation effect (see FIG. 56 (A)) as the ending effect (step S3009).

<Steps S3010 to S3012>
In step S3010, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game start flag to off, and further displays the display variation corresponding to the opening effect and the open / close execution mode effect determined in step S3003, and the ending effect determined in steps S3006, S3007, or S3009. The pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3011). As a result, the display control device 6 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect, and the ending effect as an image effect in the jackpot game. Further, the MPU 51 controls the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, and has an opening effect and an opening / closing execution mode effect determined in step S3003, and an audio output effect corresponding to the ending effect determined in steps S3006, S3007, or S3009. And the lamp effect is executed, and the jackpot game effect process is completed.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the electric service winning door 371 is opened and closed a plurality of times by opening and closing the electric service winning door 371 multiple times. Two types of intervals, a normal interval and a long interval, in which the times differ from each other, are included as the opening intervals between the intervals (between the electric service opening and closing games). Then, a continuous confirmation effect (see FIG. 56 (B)) in which the revival effect is not executed in the ending effect of the jackpot game executed at the normal interval is executed, and the revival effect is accompanied by the ending effect of the jackpot game executed at the long interval. The revival continuation effect (see FIG. 57) is executed. That is, by providing a long interval set to a longer time than the normal interval, after executing the end suggestion effect (see FIG. 57 (A)) executed in the same manner as the end confirmation effect in this long interval. Even so, it is possible to execute the revival effect (see FIG. 57 (B)). In particular, when a long interval is executed, a long time longer than the normal time is set as the ending time of the jackpot game, so that the revival effect can be executed as a part of the ending effect of the jackpot game.

In addition, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a win, the number of doublets of the combination of decorative symbols that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the game is the electric character expected in the game. It matches (corresponds to) the minimum expected number of times the winning door 371 is opened and closed (the minimum expected number of times the electric function opening and closing game is executed). Therefore, the player expects the game to be doublet by the number of the doublet of the combination of the decorative symbols that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal game when the lottery result in the lottery is a win. It is possible to know the minimum expected number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the minimum expected number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed). In addition, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is the minimum expected number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed (the minimum expected number of times the electric service opening / closing game is executed) that is expected in the game per game. As a result, unless the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol is "777", the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is the electric role winning door 371 expected in the game per ordinary figure. It is not possible to know the minimum expected number of times of opening and closing (the minimum expected number of times of execution of the electric function opening and closing game). Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the per-figure game while expecting that the electric power opening / closing game is executed more times than the number of the combination of the decorative symbols in the per-figure game. Therefore, the fun of the game is improved.

Then, as the ending effect of the jackpot game, the revival continuation effect is executed when the opening interval, which is the opening interval of the electric role winning door 371 (during the execution of the electric role opening / closing game), is a long interval as described above. .. Therefore, when the opening / closing of the electric role winning door 371 (execution of the electric role opening / closing game) of the number of times corresponding to the number of the combination of the decorative symbols in the normal figure game is completed as the game per the normal figure, the electric role winning door is concerned. Since it is possible to raise interest in whether or not the revival continuation effect is executed in the ending effect of the jackpot game executed by the opening / closing of 371 (execution of the electric function opening / closing game), the interest of the game is further enhanced. Will be improved.

In this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first and second embodiments can be made to the extent applicable.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the electric role opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times, the big hit game is executed in the interval between the opening of the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 in the game per normal figure. , Even if the jackpot game ends in the theoretical maximum time, the case where the jackpot game ends within the interval between open doors has been described. Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) is opened once in each round game of the big hit game (8R big hit game and 16R big hit game). By setting the maximum opening time of the round game to the same time, the ease of entering the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 394 in each round game (time required for each round game) is the same or omitted. The case where they are specified in the same way was explained.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed in the interval between the opening of the electric role winning doors of the electric role winning device in the normal drawing game, the time is set to be shorter than the theoretical maximum time of the big hit game. If the jackpot game ends within the predetermined time, the jackpot game ends at a predetermined timing at which the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game can be executed. The predetermined timing is set between the start timing of the next electric role opening / closing game and the end of the small hit game executed by the next electric role opening / closing game, for example, the next electric role opening / closing game. Start timing (end timing of the interval between openings), start timing of the small hit game executed by the next electric role opening / closing game (end timing of the next electric role opening / closing game), triggering the next electric role opening / closing game It is executed at the timing of entering the game ball into the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game (timing when the passage of the game ball 99 is detected by the V winning sensor 38a) and the next electric service opening / closing game. The end timing of the small hit game can be considered.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is difficult for a specific round game (for example, the final round game) to enter the game ball into the variable winning opening as compared with other round games. In one example of the present embodiment, in a specific round game, a special opening / closing in which a short-time opening / closing (high-speed opening / closing) of the variable winning opening is repeated a plurality of times is performed, so that the variable winning opening is changed to a variable winning opening as compared with other round games. The difficulty of entering the game ball is increasing. In the other round games of the present embodiment, the maximum opening time (variable winning door operating time) of the variable winning opening (variable winning opening) is the variable winning opening, as in the first embodiment described above. It is set to be less than the minimum time required to enter the maximum number of game balls, and the variable winning door is configured to move the game balls linearly along the specified passage when in the standby position. (See FIG. 12). Therefore, in other round games, the time required for the round game is made uniform or fixed. On the other hand, in a specific round game, it is more difficult to enter the game ball into the variable winning opening than in other round games, and unlike other round games, the time required for the round game tends to vary. ing. As a result, in the present embodiment, the time required for the jackpot game depends on the specific round game and variation occurs. Therefore, depending on the time required for the specific round game, there are cases where puncture does not occur and cases where puncture occurs. A certain playability is given.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed in the interval between the opening of the electric role winning doors in the multiple electric role opening / closing games, and when the big hit game is completed by a predetermined timing, the next electric charge is performed. A jackpot game triggered by a role opening / closing game can be executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot game ends at a timing exceeding a predetermined timing, the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game is not executed. When the jackpot game is executed beyond a predetermined timing, for example, the jackpot game is not executed because the entry of the game ball into the electric role winning opening in the electric role opening / closing game is invalidated. Is not executed, or the big hit game is not executed because the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening in the small hit game is invalidated. That is, in the present embodiment, whether or not the jackpot game can be completed by a predetermined timing and whether or not the right to execute the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game can be acquired. The playability that depends on the crab is given. Therefore, whether or not the player can finish the jackpot game by a predetermined timing, for example, in a specific round game in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game, a maximum number of game balls enter within a specified time. The interest in the game is improved because the jackpot game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether or not the game is played.

For special opening and closing, the opening time of the variable winning opening is the same or substantially the same (for example, in the range of 0.9 times or more and 1.1 times or less with respect to the average value (target value)) in each opening and closing of the variable winning opening. It may be opened and closed regularly, or a plurality of types may be set as the opening time of the variable winning opening and the opening and closing may be irregular. In this way, by opening and closing the variable winning opening regularly or irregularly, the player maintains the launch timing of the current game ball and executes a special opening and closing round game, so that the jackpot game is predetermined. It is possible to leave it to the luck to finish by the timing of, and by trying to shorten the time required for the special opening and closing round game by adjusting the launch timing of the game ball, the skill of the player It is also possible to finish the jackpot game by a predetermined timing. As a result, in a jackpot game in which a special opening / closing round game is executed, it is possible to enjoy a jackpot game that tends to be less noticeable due to the launch of a game ball according to the player's taste and skill. Will be improved. In addition, the difficulty of entering the game ball into the variable winning opening in a specific round is that, for example, the number of times the variable winning opening is opened and closed in a specific round game is set to one, and the maximum number of game balls can be entered. The maximum opening time may be increased by setting the maximum opening time shorter than other round games within the range where the ball is possible.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 71, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Note that FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the present embodiment.

Here, FIG. 67 shows the relationship between the opening interval of the electric service winning opening / closing door 371 of the electric service winning opening / closing door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 in the game per game executed by the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment and the jackpot game. It is a figure which shows an example of a time chart.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the gaming ball 99 is inserted into the electric service winning opening 376 in the electric service opening / closing game, it is small. The hit game is executed, and when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game, the big hit game is executed. Then, when the electric combination opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times in the normal drawing game, the second and subsequent jackpot games can be executed on condition that the jackpot game is completed by a predetermined timing as described above. On the other hand, a big hit exceeds a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, the timing of entering the game ball into the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game (the timing when the V winning sensor 38a detects the passage of the game ball 99)). When the game is completed, the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 384 in the small hit game is invalidated, and the next electric role opening / closing game (the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 384) is triggered. The jackpot game is not started.

Here, the time required for the electric service opening / closing game coincides with the operating time of the electric service winning door 371 of the electric service winning device 37 in the electric service opening / closing game, and this operating time Is fixed at a fixed time (predetermined time). Further, the time required for the small hit game coincides with the operating time of the V winning door 381 in the small hit game, as in the first embodiment described above, and this operating time is fixed to a fixed time (predetermined time). Has been done.

Further, when the jackpot game is an 8R jackpot game, the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39 is 1 in all the round games from the 1st round to the 8th round of the open / close execution mode, as in the first embodiment described above. It is opened and closed once. On the other hand, when the jackpot game is a 16R jackpot game, the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39 is opened and closed once in the 1R to 15R round games of the opening / closing execution mode, which is a specific round game in the opening / closing execution mode. In the final 16th round game, special opening and closing is executed in which the variable winning door 391 is opened and closed at high speed multiple times. As a result, in the 16th round game, the difficulty of entering the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 394 is increased as compared with other round games.

Further, in the 1R to 8R round games of the 8R jackpot game and the 1R to 15R round games of the 16R jackpot game, the maximum opening time (variable winning door 391) of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) is performed. (For example, 5 seconds) elapses, and the game ends when any of the conditions for entering the maximum number (for example, 10) of the game balls 99 into the variable winning opening 394 is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time (maximum operating time of the variable winning door 391) of the variable winning opening 353 (variable winning opening 394) is the variable winning opening 394, as in the first embodiment described above. It is set to be less than or equal to the minimum time required for the upper limit number of game balls 99 to be inserted into the ball. In this case, before the maximum number of game balls 99 are entered into the variable winning opening 394, the variable winning opening 394 is closed due to the passage of the maximum opening time, so that the round game of the 1R to 8R of the 8R jackpot game is played. The time required for the 1st to 15th round games of the 16R jackpot game is fixed. Further, the variable winning door 391 is configured so that the game ball 99 can be linearly moved along the defined passage 35 when it is in the standby position, as in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 12 and the like).

On the other hand, in the 16R round game in the 16R jackpot game, the variable winning door 391 is opened and closed a specified number of times (for example, 15 times), and the maximum number (for example, 10) of the game balls 99 is entered into the variable winning opening 394. It ends when any of the conditions of is satisfied. In the 16th round game, the difficulty of entering the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 394 is increased by the special opening and closing of the variable winning door 391 at high speed. Since the probability of entering the game ball 99 by opening and closing the variable winning door 391 each time differs depending on the engagement, etc., if the round game is completed by entering the maximum number of game balls 99, the 16th round game The time required for this is uneven and variations occur.

Further, the opening and closing of the variable winning door 391 each time in the special opening and closing in the 16th round game is set to the same or substantially the same opening time, and the interval between the opening and closing of the variable winning door 391 is the same or substantially the same time. It is set.

The opening time of the variable winning door 391 in each round game of the 16th R is set shorter than the maximum opening time (for example, 5 seconds) of the variable winning door 391 in the other round games of the 1R to 15R, and is 16R. The upper limit number (for example, 10) of game balls 99, which is the end condition of the round game of the eyes, is set to the time when the ball cannot be entered. As a result, it is impossible to end the 16R round game by opening the variable winning door 391 once in the 16R round game. Specifically, the opening time of the variable winning door 391 each time in the 16R round game is the specified number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning door 391, which is the end condition of the 16R round game, and the jackpot game is performed by a predetermined timing. Although it is affected by the probability of termination, for example, it is set to 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 0.06 seconds to 3 seconds) of the firing interval of the game ball 99, preferably 0.2 times or more and 3 times. It is set to the following (for example, 0.12 seconds to 1.8 seconds), and more preferably 0.5 times or more and 2 times or less (for example, 0.3 seconds to 1.2 seconds). By setting the opening / closing time of the variable winning door 391 for each round game of the 16th round in such a range, the variable winning door 391 opens in the round game of the 16th round in relation to the firing interval of the game ball 99 and the like. It becomes possible to adjust the difficulty of entering the game ball 99 when the ball is played.

The interval between the opening of the variable winning door 391 in the 16th round game is set to be about the same as the opening time of the variable winning door 391, for example, 0.1 times or more and 5 times the firing interval of the game ball 99. It is set to the following (for example, 0.06 seconds to 3 seconds), preferably 0.2 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 0.12 seconds to 1.8 seconds), and more preferably 0.5 times or more 2 It is set to double or less (for example, 0.3 seconds to 1.2 seconds). By setting the opening / closing interval of the variable winning door 391 of each round of the 16th round game in such a range, the 16R is related to the opening / closing time of the variable winning door 391 of each round and the firing interval of the game ball 99. It becomes possible to adjust the difficulty of entering the game ball 99 when the variable winning door 391 is opened in the round game of the eyes. Further, when the interval between the opening of the variable winning door 391 in the 16th round game is set to be the same as the opening time of the variable winning door 391, the variable winning door 391 can be opened and closed regularly.

On the other hand, the specified number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning door 391, which is the end condition of the 16th round game, is affected by the opening time of the variable winning door 391, for example, to the variable winning opening 394 set as the end condition. It is set to, for example, 0.2 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 2 times or more and 50 times or less), preferably 0.3 times or more and 3 times or less with respect to the number of times corresponding to the upper limit of the number of balls of the game ball 99. It is set to (for example, 3 times or more and 30 times or less), and more preferably 0.5 times or more and 2 times or less (for example, 5 times or more and 20 times or less). To give a more specific example, if the opening time of the variable winning door 391 each time in the 16th round game is set to 0.8 times the firing interval of the game ball 99, the specified number of times is set to 15 times. Will be done. By setting the specified number of times as the end condition of the 16th round game in such a range, the 16R is related to the opening / closing time of the variable winning door 391 each time, the opening interval, the firing interval of the game ball 99, and the like. It becomes possible to adjust the difficulty of entering the game ball 99 when the variable winning door 391 is opened in the round game of the eyes.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, by increasing the difficulty of entering the variable winning opening 394 in the 16th round game, the game ball 99 can be used in the time required for the 16th round game. It is possible to generate an appropriate variation in relation to the launch timing and the like. As a result, it is possible to generate an appropriate variation in the time required for the jackpot game, and it is possible to generate an appropriate variation in the end timing of the jackpot game. Therefore, pay attention to whether or not the jackpot game can be ended at the timing when the jackpot game triggered by the next electric power opening / closing game can be executed, and in particular, the player is made variable in the 16th round game. Since it is possible to pay attention to the entry status of the game ball 99 into the winning opening 394, the interest of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the variable winning door 391 is opened and closed at high speed in the 16R round game of the opening / closing execution mode in the 16R jackpot game, so that the variable winning opening 394 in the 16R round game is executed. Although the difficulty of entering the ball is increased, special opening and closing may be executed in a round game other than the 16R round game in place of or in addition to the 16R round game. Further, a special opening / closing in which the variable winning door 391 is opened / closed at high speed may be executed in any one round game of the opening / closing execution mode of the 8R jackpot game. Further, the special opening / closing of the variable winning door 391 is not limited to the mode in which the variable winning door 391 is regularly opened / closed, and is variable as described with reference to FIGS. 71 (A) to 71 (C). The winning door 391 may be opened and closed irregularly.

Here, when the small hit game ends in the theoretical maximum time and the big hit game ends in the theoretical maximum time, the latest end timing of the big hit game is the start timing of the next electric service opening / closing game. It is set after that, preferably before the end timing of the small hit game executed when the game ball 99 enters the electric service winning opening 376 in the electric service opening / closing game. In addition, the latest end timing of the jackpot game may be determined according to the stage at which a predetermined timing that enables the execution of the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game is set. .. For example, when the predetermined timing is the start timing of the electric role opening / closing game, the latest end timing of the big hit game is between the end timing of the next electric role opening / closing game and the end timing of the next small hit game. It is set at any time point (for example, the end timing of the next electric service opening / closing game or the end timing of the next small hit game). Further, the predetermined timing is the start timing of the next small hit game and the entry timing of the game ball into the V winning opening 384 in the next small hit game (the timing at which the passage of the game ball 99 is detected by the V winning sensor 38a). ), It is set at the end timing of the next small hit game. In the present embodiment, since the predetermined timing is set to the timing at which the passage of the game ball 99 is detected by the V winning sensor 38a (see FIG. 32), the latest end timing of the big hit game is the end timing of the small hit game. Is set to. Of course, the latest end timing of the big hit game may be set after the end timing of the next small hit game.

In this way, by setting the latest end timing of the jackpot game after the start timing of the next electric role opening / closing game, the jackpot game triggered by the next electric role opening / closing game can be executed or cannot be executed. Cases occur. Therefore, in order to enable the execution of the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game, the playability of how quickly the jackpot game is terminated is given. Further, when the time required for the 1R to 15R round games of the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game is fixed, how is the time required for the final 16R round game of the opening / closing execution mode in the 16R jackpot game? The playability of shortening, that is, how to make the game ball 99 enter the variable winning opening 394 with high probability while the variable winning door 391 is opened and closed at high speed is given. Therefore, the fate of whether or not the next jackpot game can be executed is summarized in the 16th round game executed at the end of the 16R jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to proceed with the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball 99 is inserted into the variable winning opening 394 with a great expectation just before the end of the big hit game, so that the big hit game tends to be less noticeable. The interest of the crab is improved.

Here, FIGS. 68 to 70 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 25.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 68, in the jackpot game control process of the present embodiment, when the variable winning interval time counter is 0 (step S2038: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the opening timing of the variable winning door 391. , It is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining rounds to be executed in the open / close execution mode is 1 (step S3101). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the next round game to be executed is the final round game in the open / close execution mode. When the value of the round number counter is 1 and the next round game to be executed is the final round game in the open / close execution mode (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3102. On the other hand, when the value of the round number counter is not 1 and the next round game to be executed is not the final round game in the open / close execution mode (step S3101: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2015 in FIG. 33. Then, the processing necessary for opening the variable winning door 391 is executed (steps S2015 to S2019).

<Step S3102>
In the MPU 41, when the value of the round number counter is 1 and the next round game to be executed is the final round game in the open / close execution mode (step S3101: Yes), whether or not the 16R jackpot flag is set to ON. (Step S3102). The 16R jackpot flag indicates that the jackpot type is 16R jackpot, and is set to ON in step S1908 (see FIG. 31). When the 16R jackpot flag is set to ON, that is, when the next round game to be executed is the final 16R round game of the 16R jackpot game (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 41 is set to step S3103 in FIG. Migrate processing. On the other hand, when the 16R jackpot flag is set to off, that is, when the next round game to be executed is the final 8R round game of the 8R jackpot game (step S3102: No), the MPU 41 processes the process in step S2030. The process required to open the variable winning door 391 is executed (steps S2015 to S2019).

<Step S3103>
As shown in FIG. 69, when the next round game to be executed is the final 16R round game of the 16R jackpot game (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 41 has whether or not the special opening / closing flag is set to ON. (Step S3103). The special opening / closing flag is a flag indicating that the variable winning door 391 is being opened / closed at high speed a plurality of times in the final 16R round game in the opening / closing execution mode of the 16R jackpot game, and is a flag indicating that the special opening / closing is being executed. Is set in. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3110 when the special open / close flag is set to on (step S3103: Yes), and processes when the special open / close flag is set to off (step S3103: No). To step S3104.

<Steps S3104 to S3106>
When the special open / close flag is set to off (step S3103: No), the MPU 41 sets the special open / close flag to on (step S3104), sets the special open / close count counter (step S3105), and rounds. A game start command is set (step S3106). The special open / close count counter indicates the remaining open / close count of the variable winning door 391 in the 16th round game, and is set to "15" in the present embodiment. As a result, the specified number of times of opening and closing the variable winning door 391, which is one of the end conditions of the 16th round game, is set to 15 times. Further, the round game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the round number information indicating that the 16th round game is started. The round game start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 41.

<Steps S3107 to S3109>
In step S3107, the MPU 41 opens the variable winning door 391 of the variable winning device 39 to start the round game (step S3107), and further indicates that the variable winning door 391 is open to the variable winning device 39. The winning door opening flag is set to on (step S3108), and the variable winning door opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the variable winning door 391 is set (step S3109). In the present embodiment, the variable winning door opening time counter is set as a value corresponding to, for example, 0.5 seconds.

<Step S3110>
When the special opening / closing flag is set to on (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning door opening flag is set to on (step S3110). The variable winning door opening flag is a flag indicating that the variable winning door 391 is being opened, and is set to ON in step S2016 (see FIG. 33). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3112 when the variable winning door opening flag is set to on (step S3110: Yes), and when the variable winning door opening flag is set to off (step S3110: Yes). No), the process proceeds to step S3111.

<Step S3111>
When the variable winning door opening flag is set to off (step S3110: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special open / close interval flag is set to on (step S3111). The special open / close interval flag is a flag indicating that the interval between the opening of the variable winning door 391 in the special opening / closing of the variable winning door 391 (the variable winning door 391 is closed), and is turned on in step S3126 of FIG. 70, which will be described later. Is set to. When the special open / close interval flag is set to ON (step S3111: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the timing to open the variable winning door 391. Therefore, the process shifts to step S3107 to move the variable winning door 391. The opening process is executed (steps S3107 to 3109). On the other hand, when the special open / close interval flag is set to off (step S3111: No), the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S3112>
When the variable winning door opening flag is set to on (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning flag indicating that a winning has occurred in the variable winning opening 394 is set to on, that is, variable. It is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the prize opening 394 (step S3112). The variable winning flag is set to on, for example, in the prize ball command setting process of step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25, when the prize ball command for winning the variable winning opening 394 is set. When the variable winning flag is set to on (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3113, and when the variable winning flag is set to off (step S3112: No), the process is illustrated. The process proceeds to step S3120 of 70.

<Steps S3113 to S3114>
When the variable winning flag is set to on (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the variable winning counter indicating the number of winnings in the variable winning opening 394 (step S3113), and turns off the variable winning flag. (Step S3114).

<Step S3115>
In step S3115, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the variable winning counter added in step S3113 is 10. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the round game due to the entry of the upper limit number of game balls 99. When the value of the variable winning counter is 10 (step S3115: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3116, and when the value of the variable winning counter is not 10 (step S2024: No), the process is performed in the step of FIG. 70. Move to S3120.

<Steps S3116 to S3121>
When the value of the variable winning counter is 10 (step S3115: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the timing to close the variable winning door 391 and end the final 16R round game, so that the round game and opening / closing are performed. Executes the process to end the execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts the value of the special opening time counter to 0 (step S3116), subtracts the value of the special opening number counter to 0 (step S3117), and closes the variable winning door 391 (step S3118). ). The variable winning door opening flag is set to off (step S3120), the value of the round number counter is subtracted to 0 (step S3121), and the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S3122>
As shown in FIG. 70, in step S3122, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the variable winning opening time counter is 0, that is, whether or not it is the timing to close the variable winning door 391 due to the passage of the maximum opening time. to decide. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3123 when the value of the variable winning open time counter is 0 (step S3122: Yes), and when the value of the variable winning open time counter is not 0 (step S3122: No), the jackpot The game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3123 and S3124>
When the value of the variable winning opening time counter is 0 (step S3122: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the timing to close the variable winning door 391 after the lapse of the maximum opening time, so that the variable winning door 391 is closed. (Step S3123), 1 is subtracted from the value of the special open / close count counter (step S3124).

<Steps S3125 and S3126>
In step S3125, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the special open / close count counter is 0, that is, whether or not the final 16R round game is terminated by opening / closing the variable winning door 391 a predetermined number of times. When the value of the special open / close count counter is 0 (step S3125: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3118 of FIG. 69 and executes the process for ending the round game and the open / close execution mode (step S3118). ~ S3121). On the other hand, when the value of the variable winning opening time counter is not 0 (step S3122: No), the MPU 41 has a special opening / closing interval time to specify the closing time of the variable winning door 391 in the special opening / closing in the 16th round game. The counter is set (step S3126), and the jackpot game control process is terminated.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the latest end timing of the jackpot game is set after the start timing of the electric service winning opening 376 in the next electric service opening / closing game, so that the next electric machine can be played. There are cases where the jackpot game triggered by the role opening / closing game is feasible and cases where it is not feasible. Therefore, in order to enable the execution of the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game, the playability of how quickly the jackpot game is terminated is given. Further, when the time required for the 1st to 15th round games of the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game is fixed, how to shorten the time required for the final 16R round game of the opening / closing execution mode, that is, While the variable winning door 391 is opened and closed at high speed, the playability of how to make the game ball 99 enter the variable winning opening 394 with high probability is given. Therefore, in the 16R jackpot game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball 99 is inserted into the variable winning opening 394 during high-speed opening and closing in the final 16R round game. The interest of is improved.

It should be noted that this embodiment can be modified in the same manner as the above-mentioned first to third embodiments to the extent applicable. Further, the round game in which the special opening and closing is performed in the 16R jackpot game is not limited to the final 16R, and may be another round game, or the special opening and closing may be performed in a plurality of round games. Further, the opening / closing pattern of the special opening / closing is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 67, and may be another opening / closing pattern. As another opening / closing pattern in this case, for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 71 (A) to 71 (C) can be considered.

In the opening / closing pattern shown in FIG. 71 (A), in the 16th round game, a special opening / closing is executed in which the variable winning door 391 is opened once in the middle and then the variable winning door 391 is short-opened a plurality of times.

The opening time of the variable winning door 391 in the short opening is set in the same manner as the opening time of the variable winning door 391 in the special opening and closing in which the variable winning door 391 is opened and closed a plurality of times at high speed, for example.

On the other hand, the opening time of the variable winning door 391 at the middle opening is longer than the opening time of the short opening, and shorter than the opening time of the variable winning door 391 other than the 16th round game, as a condition for ending the 16R round game. The upper limit is set to the time when the ball cannot enter the variable winning opening 394. For example, the game ball 99 of 0.1 times or more and 0.9 times or less of the upper limit is set to the time during which the variable winning opening 394 can be entered. Specifically, for example, when the upper limit is 10, the expected number of game balls 99 set from the range of 1 to 9 is set to the time during which the variable winning opening 394 can be entered. Further, the opening time of the variable winning door 391 in the middle opening is set to, for example, 1.5 times or more and 50 times or less, preferably 2 times or more and 30 times the opening time of the variable winning door 391 in the short opening. It is set to the following, and more preferably set to 3 times or more and 20 times or less.

In such an opening / closing pattern, the number of game balls 99 equal to or less than the upper limit is entered in the middle opening, and the remaining number of games obtained by subtracting the number of gaming balls 99 entering the variable winning opening 394 in the middle opening from the upper limit. The playability of how quickly the ball 99 can be entered by opening a plurality of shorts is given.

In the special opening and closing shown in FIG. 71 (B), in the 16th round game, after the variable winning door 391 is opened once in the middle, the variable winning door 391 is short-opened multiple times, and the variable winning door 391 is opened once. A special opening and closing that opens the middle is executed. That is, the middle opening is performed twice, and the short opening is executed a plurality of times between these middle openings. The short opening and the middle opening are the same as the example shown in FIG. 71 (A).

In the special opening and closing shown in FIG. 71 (C), in the 16th round game, the variable winning door 391 is short-opened multiple times, the variable winning door 391 is opened once in the middle, and the variable winning door 391 is short-opened multiple times. Opened. That is, one middle opening is executed between a plurality of short openings. The short opening and the middle opening are the same as the example shown in FIG. 71 (A).

By the way, in the present embodiment, if the jackpot game is not completed by a predetermined timing, the jackpot game is not executed in the next electric role opening / closing game in the normal figure hitting game, so that the jackpot game is not executed after the end of the jackpot game or the next electric role. From the end of the opening / closing game or the end of the small hit game to the start of the next electric role opening / closing game, none of the electric role winning device 37, the V winning device 38, and the variable winning device 39 is operated. A period will occur. Similarly, even when the jackpot game is executed, in the case of the 8R jackpot game, a blank period occurs between the end of the 8R jackpot game and the start of the next electric combination opening / closing game. In such a blank period, none of the electric function winning device 37, the V winning device 38, and the variable winning device 39 is operated even though the game per game is in progress, which is advantageous to the player. In the appearance of 10, no game is in progress. Therefore, there is a concern that the player will have time to spare until the blank period ends, and the interest of the game will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a blank period of a certain time or more occurs, it is conceivable to execute the normal drawing game after the end of the big hit game and after the end of the game that ends late in the next small hit game. Be done. In this way, by effectively utilizing the blank period of the interval to execute the normal drawing game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game during the period when the player's interest in the interval is low.

The fixed time is, for example, a period of 10% or more and 100% or less (for example, 5 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less) of the opening interval of the electric service winning door 371, preferably 20% or more and 100% or less of the opening interval of the electric service winning door 371. % Or less (for example, 10 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less), more preferably 30% or more and 100% or less (for example, 15 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less) of the opening interval of the electric service winning door 371. When there is a blank period of the interval beyond such a range, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for the normal drawing game to be executed in the blank period, and it is possible to prevent the normal drawing game from being continued until after the end of the interval.

Further, when the normal symbol game is executed in the blank period in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol display unit 361 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and further, the normal symbol game before the normal symbol game is executed. Similarly, the symbol display unit 341 executes a variable display effect of the decorative symbol and a normal game game effect accompanying the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, when the normal figure game is executed in the blank period in the normal figure game, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol and the decorative symbol is, for example, more than the above-mentioned fixed period which is the execution condition of the normal symbol game. Selected from a short time. As a result, the normal drawing game can be completed by the time the next electric service opening / closing game is executed. Further, if a blank period of a certain time or longer is left even after executing the Fuzu game, the Fuzu game may be executed a plurality of times according to the length of the blank period. In this case, the blank period can be used more effectively.

In addition, if the lottery result in the lottery per game that triggered the execution of the game in the blank period is a game, the number of times the electric service winning door 371 corresponding to the type of the game is opened and closed ( It is conceivable to add (the number of executions of the electric role opening / closing game) to the number of times of opening / closing (the number of executions of the electric role opening / closing game) of the remaining unexecuted electric role winning doors 371 in the current game per game. In this case, since the number of times the remaining electric role winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric role opening / closing game is executed) in the game per normal figure is increased, the electric role opening / closing game is continuously executed an unexpectedly large number of times. Along with this, it is possible that the electric function opening / closing game is executed a number of times (8 times or more) that is not executed per one normal drawing. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved by the fact that the state advantageous to the player may be continued beyond the profit state obtained by the game per normal figure.

Then, when it is added to the number of times of opening / closing of the remaining electric role winning door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric role opening / closing game) in the current game per game, the number of times of opening / closing of the electric role winning door 371 (execution of the electric role opening / closing game). It is conceivable that the symbol display unit 341 or the like executes an addition explicit effect or an addition suggestion effect that clearly or suggests that the number of times) has been added. For example, it is conceivable to display a character image such as "addition" on the symbol display unit 341. As a result, the player can recognize that the number of times the remaining electric winning doors 371 are opened and closed in the game per game has increased, and the interest of the game is improved. In the addition explicit effect or the addition suggestion effect, the number of times the added electric combination winning door 371 is opened / closed (the number of times the electric combination opening / closing game is executed) may be specified or suggested. For example, it is conceivable to display a character image such as "additional 3 times" on the symbol display unit 341. As a result, the player can recognize not only the increase in the number of times the remaining electric winning door 371 is opened / closed in the game per game, but also the increased number of times the electric service winning door 371 is opened / closed. Is improved.

In addition, if the lottery result in the lottery per game that triggered the execution of the game per game in the blank period is per game, until the profit status based on the current game per game ends. That is, it is conceivable to reserve the right to execute the game per game until all the games such as the game per game, the small hit game, and the big hit game are completed. In this case, the next game per game is executed immediately after the end of the profit state based on the game per game. In other words, after the enjoyment of the previous game per game is completed, it is possible to immediately enjoy the benefit of the game per game immediately without returning the launch of the game ball to the left. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved as in the case where the state advantageous to the player is continued beyond the profit state obtained by the game per normal figure.

In addition, even when the right to execute the game per figure is withheld, the stock explicit effect or the stock suggestion effect that clearly or suggests that the right to execute the game per ordinary figure is withheld is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like. I can think of doing it. For example, it is conceivable to display a character image such as "stock" or a symbol mark on hold on the symbol display unit 341. As a result, the player can recognize that the right to play the game is reserved. In addition, when the game is executed based on the right to execute the reserved game per game, the player is informed that the game per game is started again at the start of the game per game for the reserved portion. It is conceivable that the effect to be specified is executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like. For example, it is conceivable to display a character image such as "restart" or "start of consecutive villas" on the symbol display unit 341. As a result, the player can recognize that the game is started again, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, in both the case of adding the number of times of opening and closing of the electric service winning door 371 (the number of times of executing the electric service opening and closing game) and the case of suspending the right to execute the game per normal figure, the normal figure game during the blank period It is also conceivable to clearly indicate that the electric service opening / closing game will continue to be executed by executing the revival effect on the symbol display unit 341 or the like at the start of the first electric service opening / closing game based on the above. As a result, the player can be delighted by being able to recognize that the profit state is continued or restarted after recognizing that the profit state for the game per normal figure has ended, and the profit state of the game per normal figure has ended. Because it is possible to pay attention to, the interest of the game per normal figure is improved.

In addition, when the blank period is less than a certain time and the normal figure game is not executed, or when the blank period is more than a certain time but the normal figure hold is 0, a specific symbol display unit 341 or the like is used. You may try to perform the production. Of course, if the blank time is longer than a certain period of time, or if there is one or more Fuzu holdings, a specific effect may be performed without executing the Fuzu game, while the Fuzu game is being executed. You may perform a specific effect. By executing a specific effect in the blank period, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period by focusing on the specific effect.

The specific effect is, for example, an effect that is not executed in various games such as a normal figure game or a big hit game, or a rare effect that does not appear frequently in various games (for example, a fixed effect that hits a normal figure in a normal figure game effect). As a result, in a blank period in which the interest of the game is likely to decline, a specific effect that is difficult or not executed other than the blank period is executed, so that it becomes possible to pay more attention to the specific effect. It is possible to further suppress the decline in the interest of the game in.

As a specific effect, for example, in a normal game, an electric opening / closing game of a game per game, a small hit game, and a big hit game, a rare effect (for example, a selection rate of 0.05% or less, preferably 0. 01% or less, more preferably 0.001% or less), or a unique effect (dedicated effect for a blank period) that is not executed.

The rare production (premier production) is the same or similar production as, for example, a fixed production for hitting a normal character in a normal character game or a production for a rare character. When a specific effect is a rare effect in various games such as a hobby game, the symbol display unit 341 is focused on in the blank period because a definite effect with a low appearance frequency and an opportunity to visually recognize a rare character are given in various games. By letting them do so, the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed.

The unique effect is, for example, the time until the next electric role opening / closing game is started (the time until the electric role winning door 371 is opened, or the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric role winning opening 376 in the next electric role opening / closing game. A production including a timer display or a countdown display showing the time until the launch start timing of the game ball 99 that can be made to ball, a production that clearly indicates or suggests the number of remaining electric role opening / closing games in the game per normal figure), operation buttons A player-participation-type mini-game production using 20 or the like can be considered. It should be noted that the effect of clearly indicating or suggesting the remaining number of times of opening and closing the electric role in the game per normal figure and the mini-game effect can be executed as the effect for the rare character.

The specific effect is the time until the next electric service opening / closing game is started (time until the electric service winning door 371 is opened), or the game ball 99 is placed in the electric service winning opening 376 in the next electric service opening / closing game. In the case of a timer display or a countdown display of the time until the launch timing of the game ball 99 that can be entered, the timer display and the like can be focused on in the blank period, so that the game ball in the blank period The timing at which the player can start the next electric role opening / closing game or the timing at which the game ball 99 can be inserted into the electric role winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game while suppressing the deterioration of the interest. By paying attention to the symbol display unit 341 in the blank period, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

Further, when the specific effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the remaining number of unexecuted electric role opening / closing games in the game per hobby, the player can grasp or estimate the remaining number of electric role opening / closing games. Therefore, by paying attention to the symbol display unit 341 in the blank period, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

In addition, when the specific effect is a player-participation type mini-game effect, even if the blank period is long due to the occurrence of punk, it is effective for the player to have time to spare in the blank period. It can be suppressed, and the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed. Further, as the mini-game production, it is conceivable that a point-acquiring type mini-game is executed, and a privilege may be given to the player according to the points acquired by the player. As a privilege in this case, for example, the addition of options when it is possible to customize the production performed in various games such as the normal game and the big hit game, specifically, the music to be output from the speaker during the big hit game (BGM). ) Can be selected, a selectable music (BGM) can be added, and a character to appear in the production executed by the symbol display unit 341 can be selected in various games such as a normal figure game and a big hit game. Addition of characters, addition of selectable costumes when the costumes of characters appearing in various productions can be selected, and the like. If the specific effect is a player-participation-type, point-earning type mini-game effect, the player can be motivated to earn points, so that the player can concentrate more on the mini-game, especially. By granting benefits according to the points earned, it becomes possible to further concentrate on mini-games. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the decline in the interest of the game due to the occurrence of the blank period.

As described above, when a blank period occurs in which none of the electric function winning device 37, the V winning device 38, and the variable winning device 39 is operated in the game per game, at least some player using the symbol display unit 341 is used. By executing a specific effect that attracts the interest of the player, the symbol display unit 341 can be focused on until the blank period ends, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. Further, when the effect of displaying the timer or the countdown is executed, even if the player has stopped launching the game ball 99 due to the blank period, the launch timing of the game ball 99 is set by the timer display or the countdown display. Since it can be grasped, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a so-called puncture in which the game ball 99 is not inserted into the electric service winning opening 376 in the electric service opening / closing game due to the delay in launching the game ball 99.

In addition, the example in which the normal drawing game in the interval is executed when the blank period of the interval in which none of the electric function winning device 37, the V winning device 38, and the variable winning device 39 is operated is equal to or longer than a certain time has been described. , Even if the blank period is less than a certain time, the fuzu game may be executed in the blank period of the interval, and when a specific condition is satisfied, the fuzu game is executed at a timing other than the blank period of the interval. You may. By executing the hobby game at a timing other than the blank period of the interval when a specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to effectively use the interval and provide various information to the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game during the period when the player's interest is low.

As specific conditions, for example, a specific jackpot type (for example, 8R jackpot game or 16R jackpot game) is executed at intervals, and the number of unexecuted electric function opening / closing games in the game per figure is a predetermined number of times. , The number of unexecuted electric service opening / closing games is a predetermined number of times or more, and the number of unexecuted electric service opening / closing games is a predetermined number of times or less. When a specific jackpot type is executed in the interval, the hobby game is executed in the interval, which gives an opportunity to execute the small hit game. Compared to this, it is possible to focus on the jackpot game, which tends to be less interesting to the player, so that the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when the number of unexecuted electric role opening / closing games in the game per normal figure is a predetermined number of times, a predetermined number of times or more, or a predetermined number of times or less, the normal figure game is executed at an interval, so that the unexecuted electric role opening / closing game is performed. It becomes possible to grasp or estimate the number of games. Further, the specific condition may be that a lottery for executing the normal drawing game is performed at intervals and the lottery is won. When the lottery to execute the Fuzu game is won, the Fuzu game is executed in the interval, and it is randomly determined whether or not the Fuzu game is executed in each interval. It is possible to provide a sense of surprise that the regular game is executed. In addition, the specific condition may be that the reservation of the right to perform the Fuzu game includes the Fuzu hit. When the right to execute the Fuzu game includes the Fuzu hit, the Fuzu game is executed in the interval, and when the Fuzu game is executed in the interval, the Fuzu game is played. It can be understood that the reservation of the right to execute includes a hit. As a result, the joy when the Fuzu game is executed at the interval is increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the variable winning door 391, a variable winning door 391 that linearly moves the game ball 99 along the defined passage 35 at the standby position is adopted as in the first embodiment described above. As in the second embodiment, the game ball 99 may be moved along the specified passage 35 by a meandering path in the standby position. In this case, for example, in the 16R jackpot game, a specific round game such as the 16R round game is executed by opening and closing the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38, while other round games such as the 1R to 15R round games are variable. By opening and closing the winning door 391, the time required for the round game in another round game may be fixed. Then, even when a specific round game such as the 16R round game is executed by opening and closing the V winning door 381 of the V winning device 38, the variable winning door 391 is executed as a special opening / closing of any high-speed opening / closing, as in the case of executing the variable winning door 391 as a special opening / closing. It is conceivable that the opening and closing of the V winning door 381 is a special opening and closing. However, in a specific round game by opening and closing the V winning door 381, the expected number of balls to be entered in the specific round game as a whole is set to, for example, 0.3 balls or more and 3 balls or less, preferably 0.5 balls or more and 2 balls. It is set to spheres or less, and more preferably 0.75 spheres or more and 1.5 spheres or less.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first to third embodiments can be made to the extent applicable.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the electric role opening / closing game is executed a plurality of times, the big hit game is executed in the interval between the opening of the electric role winning door 371 of the electric role winning device 37 in the game per normal figure. , Even if the jackpot game ends in the theoretical maximum time, the case where the jackpot game ends within the interval between open doors has been described.

Further, in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed in the interval between the opening of the electric duty winning door of the electric winning combination winning device in the normal drawing game, the time is set to be shorter than the theoretical maximum time of the jackpot game. The case where the jackpot game is completed within the predetermined time to be performed, and the case where the jackpot game is completed by the predetermined timing at which the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game can be executed has been described.

Further, in any of the above-mentioned first and fourth embodiments, when the electric winning combination door 371 is operated a plurality of times in one game per normal figure, the intervals between the opening of each time are all the same or substantially the same. The case where the opening interval is set to be the same or substantially the same even among a plurality of opening / closing patterns and the opening interval is fixed regardless of the opening / closing pattern type has been described.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the jackpot game is completed by a predetermined timing (for example, within the interval between openings) in which the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game is executed when the specified conditions are satisfied. On the other hand, if the specified condition is not satisfied, the jackpot game is not completed by the predetermined timing, and the jackpot game is terminated after the start of the electric service opening / closing game, so-called puncture occurs.

The specified condition is that, for example, when a plurality of jackpot games having different numbers of round games (for example, 8R jackpot game and 16R jackpot game) are set as jackpot games, the jackpot game executed at the open interval is a predetermined jackpot game (for example). For example, it is a 16R jackpot game). Further, the specified condition is that when a plurality of open intervals (for example, a normal interval and a short interval) having different times are set as the open intervals, a predetermined open interval (for example, a short interval) is set between the electric service opening / closing games. It may be executed. Further, the prescribed condition is that when a plurality of jackpot games with different numbers of round games are set as jackpot games and a plurality of open intervals with different times are set as open interval intervals, the jackpot game and the open interval are predetermined. (For example, a combination of a 16R jackpot and a short interval). In one example of the present embodiment, when the 8R jackpot game is executed in the opening interval, the jackpot game ends within the opening interval, and the normal interval similar to that of the first embodiment described above is set between the electric service opening / closing games. When executed, the jackpot game ends within the interval between openings. On the other hand, in one example of the present embodiment, when the 16R jackpot game is executed when the short interval is executed between the electric service opening / closing games, the jackpot game does not end in the opening interval and a puncture occurs.

Further, when the specified condition is that the jackpot game executed at the open interval is a predetermined jackpot game, the number of round games of the predetermined jackpot is a jackpot game other than the predetermined jackpot among the plurality of jackpots. It is also conceivable to set it to twice or less of the number of rounds. For example, it is conceivable that a predetermined jackpot is a 12R jackpot and another jackpot is an 8R jackpot. In general, a 12R jackpot with a large number of round games is more advantageous than an 8R jackpot game. However, if a puncture occurs in the 12R jackpot, the next jackpot will not be executed, so the electric role opening / closing game for the 12R jackpot game in which the puncture occurred and the game ball 99 obtained in the next electric role opening / closing game are 12R minutes. Become. On the other hand, when a puncture does not occur in the 8R jackpot, the electric role opening / closing game for the 8R jackpot game in which the puncture does not occur, and the game ball obtained by the 8R jackpot or the 16R jackpot triggered by the next electric role opening / closing game. 99 is 16R or 20R. In other words, the 8R jackpot may be more advantageous to the player than the 16R jackpot, and as a whole, it is one compared to a predetermined jackpot such as a 12R jackpot, which generally has many game balls 99 obtained in one jackpot game. An 8R jackpot, which has less game balls 99 obtained in a jackpot game, can be given more advantageous playability.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the specified condition is satisfied, the jackpot game is completed by a predetermined timing (for example, within the interval between openings) in which the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game can be executed. On the other hand, if the specified condition is not satisfied, the jackpot game is not completed by the predetermined timing, the jackpot game is terminated after the start of the electric function opening / closing game, and a puncture occurs in which the next jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, depending on whether or not the specified condition is satisfied, the playability is provided in which whether or not the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game can be executed is determined. As a result, whether or not the specified conditions are satisfied, for example, whether or not the next jackpot game can be executed by paying attention to the type of jackpot game, the type of interval between openings, or a combination thereof. Judgment becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the big hit game, which has a lower degree of attention than the electric role opening / closing game and the small hit game, which give an opportunity to execute the big hit game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 72 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening interval of the electric winning combination opening / closing door of the electric winning combination winning device in the normal drawing winning game executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment and the jackpot game. It is a figure which shows. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the opening / closing pattern of the electric winning / closing door of the electric winning / closing device in the game per game and the opening interval of the electric winning / closing door.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the gaming ball 99 is inserted into the electric service winning opening 376 in the electric service opening / closing game, it is small. When the hit game is executed and the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game, the 8R big hit game or the 16R big hit game is executed in the interval between openings. Here, the open interval includes a normal interval and a short interval.

The normal interval is the same as the opening interval of the first embodiment described above. That is, in the normal interval, in both the 8R jackpot game and the 16R jackpot game, the jackpot game ends within the open interval even if the jackpot game ends in the theoretical maximum time. Therefore, in the normal interval, the big hit game can be executed in the next opening / closing interval triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game. In other words, the above-mentioned specified condition is satisfied when the normal interval is executed.

On the other hand, the short interval is set to a shorter time than the normal interval. Specifically, in the short interval, when the 8R jackpot game is completed in the theoretical maximum time, the jackpot game can be completed within the opening / closing interval, and when the 16R jackpot is completed in the theoretical minimum time. The jackpot game is set to an unfinishable time within the opening / closing interval. Therefore, in the short interval, if the 8R jackpot is executed in the short interval, the jackpot game can be executed in the opening / closing interval again next time, triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game, while the 16R jackpot can be executed in the short interval. When is executed, the big hit game is not executed in the opening / closing interval again next time, triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game, and a so-called puncture occurs. That is, when the short interval is executed, the above-mentioned specified condition is satisfied when the 8R jackpot game is executed in this short interval. Further, the short interval is set, for example, 0.5 times or more and 0.95 times or less of the normal interval, preferably 0.55 times or more and 0.9 times or less of the normal interval, and more preferably 0 of the normal interval. It is set to 6.6 times or more and 0.8 times or less. By setting a short interval in such a range, when the 8R jackpot game ends in the theoretical maximum time, the jackpot game can be completed within the opening / closing interval, and the 16R jackpot requires the theoretical minimum time. When it is finished, the jackpot game can be disabled within the opening / closing interval, and the blank period that can occur after the execution of the 8R jackpot game, that is, any of the electric role opening / closing game, the small hit game, and the big hit game is executed. Since the blank period that is not played can be shortened, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the long blank period.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the 8R jackpot game is executed in the opening interval, the jackpot game ends within the opening interval regardless of whether the opening interval is the normal interval or the short interval, and the electric service is performed. When the normal interval is executed between the opening and closing games, the jackpot game ends within the opening interval regardless of whether the 8R jackpot game or the 16R jackpot game is executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the 16R jackpot game is executed when the short interval is executed between the electric service opening / closing games, the jackpot game does not end in the opening interval. That is, in the case of the combination of the short interval and the 16R jackpot, the jackpot game does not end in the open interval. As a result, a puncture occurs in which the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening game is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 73, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, based on the opening / closing pattern associated with the type per normal drawing (see FIG. 58), the electric service prize is awarded. The door 371 is opened and closed. Further, in the case where the electric function opening / closing game is executed multiple times by opening / closing the electric service winning door 371 multiple times, a normal interval or a short interval is executed as an opening interval depending on the opening / closing pattern type. .. For example, in the opening / closing patterns 2A and 2B, the electric function opening / closing game may be executed twice through one opening interval, and a maximum of two jackpot games may be executed. In the opening / closing pattern 2A, a normal interval is executed as one opening interval, and in the opening / closing pattern 2B, a short interval is executed as one opening interval.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern 2A, since the normal interval is executed, regardless of whether the 8R jackpot game or the 16R jackpot game is executed as the jackpot game in the normal interval, the next electric service opening / closing game is used as an opportunity. A jackpot game can be performed. On the other hand, in the opening / closing pattern 2B, since the short interval is executed, when the 8R jackpot game is executed as the jackpot game in the short interval, the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game is executed. However, when the 16R jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game is not executed. That is, in the opening / closing pattern 2B (B2 per normal figure), when the 8R jackpot is executed in the short interval, the right to execute the jackpot game generated by the next electric service opening game can be held, but 16R in the short interval. When the jackpot game is executed, the right to execute one jackpot game is lost. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the number of rounds is small and the 8R jackpot game, which is originally disadvantageous than the 16R jackpot, is executed, it may be more advantageous than the case where the 16R jackpot game is executed. By giving sex, the fun of the game is improved.

Although the details of the other opening / closing patterns are omitted, similarly, the normal interval or the short interval is executed in the pattern shown in FIG. 73 as the opening interval for each opening / closing pattern. Then, when the opening interval is a normal interval, or when the 8R jackpot game is executed in the opening interval, the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game is executed, and the short interval is executed. Only when the 16R jackpot game is executed, a puncture occurs in which the jackpot game triggered by the next electric service opening / closing game is not executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot games obtained and the number of game balls that can be acquired vary depending on the type of the interval between openings, the type of jackpot game executed in the interval between openings, and the combination thereof. Therefore, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to the type of the opening interval, the jackpot game type executed in the opening interval, and the combination thereof, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the opening / closing pattern of the electric function winning door 371 is associated with the type per drawing as in the third embodiment described above, so that the electric service winning door 371 is any one of 1 to 7 times. Although it is opened and closed as many times as the number of times, the number of times of opening and closing of the electric winning door 371 in the case of a normal drawing may be fixed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, when the 8R jackpot game is executed in the normal interval, or when a blank period occurs before the start of the next electric service opening / closing game due to the occurrence of a flat tire or the like. In the same as the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, when the blank period is a predetermined time or more, a normal figure game is executed, and a specific effect such as a countdown display is executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like. You may do so.

In this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first to fourth embodiments can be made to the extent applicable.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the small hit game is executed when the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric service winning opening 376 in the electric service opening / closing game, and the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 is executed in the small hit game. The case where the 8R jackpot game or the 16R jackpot game is executed in the interval between openings when the game ball 99 is inserted into the above is described. Further, in the first embodiment described above, when the opening time (operating time) of the electric service winning door 371 in the electric service opening / closing game continuously launches the game ball 99 into the right region of the game board 31. The case where at least one game ball 99 is set to a time during which the electric service winning unit 372 can be entered, for example, a time equal to or longer than the firing interval of the game ball 99 (for example, 0.6 seconds) has been described.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls expected to enter the electric service winning opening is different as the opening time (operating time) of the electric service winning door in the electric service opening / closing game. Includes opening time. As a result, the difficulty of entering the game ball into the electric role winning opening in the electric role opening / closing game (easiness of entering the ball) is set multiple times depending on the opening time of the electric role winning door in the electric role opening / closing game. In the role opening / closing game, it is possible to generate a case where the game ball is inserted into the electric role winning opening and a case where the game ball is not inserted. Then, when a game ball is inserted into the electric role winning opening in the electric role opening / closing game, the small hit game is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the electric role winning opening, and the big hit game is triggered by the small hit game. Can be executed. On the other hand, in the electric role opening / closing game, when the game ball is not inserted into the electric role winning opening, the small hit game triggered by the electric role opening / closing game is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed, so-called puncture occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the opening time (operating time) of the electric service winning door in the electric service opening / closing game includes a plurality of opening times in which the number of game balls expected to enter the electric service winning opening is different. This makes it possible to impart playability that may cause a flat tire in the electric function opening / closing game. As a result, the player can enjoy the electric role opening / closing game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the electric role winning opening in the electric role opening / closing game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls expected to enter the electric service winning opening is less than one as the opening time (operating time) of the electric service winning door in the electric service opening / closing game. It is preferable to include the opening time which is. In the example of the present embodiment, the number of game balls expected to enter the electric service winning opening is less than one as the opening time (operating time) of the electric service winning door in the electric service opening / closing game. Including the normal opening in which the number of game balls expected to enter the electric role winning opening is one or more, multiple opening times of the electric role winning door in the electric role opening / closing game are set. ing. Here, when the number of game balls expected to enter the electric service winning opening is less than one, the opening time (operating time) of the electric service winning door in the electric service opening / closing game is the electric service opening / closing game. When the opening timing of the electric role winning door and the launch timing of the game ball are in mesh, the game ball is inserted into the electric role winning opening, and the big hit game is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the electric role winning opening. Although it can be executed, if the opening timing of the electric role winning door in the electric role opening / closing game and the launch timing of the game ball do not mesh with each other, the small hit game is executed because the game ball is not inserted into the electric role winning opening. A puncture occurs in which the jackpot game is not executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls expected to enter the electric service winning opening is less than one in the opening time (operating time) of the electric service winning door in the electric service opening / closing game. , The playability that a puncture may occur in the electric function opening / closing game is given. As a result, the player can enjoy the electric role opening / closing game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the electric role winning opening in the electric role opening / closing game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing pattern of an electric winning combination door in an electric winning combination winning device in a game per game executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the opening / closing pattern of the electric winning / closing door of the electric winning / closing door of the electric winning / closing device in the game per game and the opening type of the electric winning / closing door.

As shown in FIG. 74, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, similar to the first embodiment described above, when the gaming ball 99 is inserted into the electric service winning opening 376 in the electric service opening / closing game, it is small. When the winning game is executed and the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 384 of the V winning device 38 in the small hit game, the 8R jackpot game or the 16R jackpot game is executed in the interval between openings. Here, the opening type of the electric function opening / closing door 371 in the electric function opening / closing game includes normal opening and short opening.

In the normal opening, the operating time (opening time) of the electric function winning door 371 is, for example, a game ball in the right area of the game board 31, as in the electric function opening / closing game of the game per normal figure in the first embodiment described above. When 99 is continuously launched, at least one game ball 99 is set to a time during which the electric service winning opening 376 can be entered. Specifically, the operating time (opening time) of the electric service winning door 371 is set to a time equal to or longer than the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball 99, and is, for example, 1 to 30 times the firing interval (for example). For example, it is set to 0.6 seconds or more and 18 seconds or less), preferably 1.5 times or more and 20 times or less (for example, 0.9 seconds or more and 12 seconds or less), and more preferably twice the firing interval. It is set to 10 times or more (for example, 1.2 seconds or more and 6 seconds or less). As described above, when the opening type of the electric service opening / closing door 371 in the electric service opening / closing game is normal opening, at least one game ball is used as long as an appropriate game ball 99 is launched in the electric service opening / closing game. Since 99 can enter the electric service winning opening 376, the small hit game is executed when the game ball 99 enters the electric service winning opening 376, and the big hit game is executed when the small hit game is triggered. obtain.

On the other hand, in the short opening, when the opening time of the electric service winning door 371 is, for example, when the game ball 99 is continuously launched in the right area of the game board 31, the ball is expected to enter the electric service winning opening 376. The time when the number of game balls is less than one is set. For example, the expected number of game balls 99 to enter the electric winning slot 376 in the short opening is set to 0.25 or more and less than one. Specifically, the operating time (opening time) of the electric service winning door 371 is set to a time less than the firing interval of the game ball 99 (for example, 0.6 seconds), for example, 0.25 of the firing interval of the game ball 99. It is set to 2 times or more and less than 1 time (for example, 0.15 seconds or more and less than 0.6 seconds), preferably 0.4 times or more and 0.9 times or less of the firing interval (for example, 0.24 seconds or more and 0.54 seconds or less). Is set to, and more preferably 0.5 times or more and 0.8 times or less (for example, 0.3 seconds or more and 0.48 seconds or less) of the firing interval. In this way, when the opening type of the electric role opening / closing door 371 in the electric role opening / closing game is short opening, the expected number of balls 99 to enter the electric role winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game is 1. Since the number is less than the number, the game ball 99 may or may not be inserted into the electric service winning opening 376 in the electric service opening / closing game. As a result, the small hit game is executed when the game ball 99 enters the electric role winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game, and the big hit game is executed triggered by the small hit game, and the electric role winning. Since the game ball 99 is not inserted into the mouth 376, the small hit game is not executed, and the big hit game triggered by the small hit game is not executed. Will be done. Further, by setting the expected number of game balls 99 to enter the electric service winning opening 376 in the short opening or the operating time (opening time) of the electric service winning door 371 as an example, a flat tire in the electric service opening / closing game is set. The incidence can be adjusted. This makes it possible to set the playability from a wide range from the playability in which a flat tire is likely to occur to the playability in which a flat tire is unlikely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, based on the opening / closing pattern associated with the type per normal drawing (see FIG. 58), the electric service prize is won. The door 371 is opened and closed. In addition, in the case where the electric role opening / closing game is executed multiple times by opening / closing the electric role winning door 371 multiple times, the electric role winning door 371 is normally opened in the electric role opening / closing game according to the opening / closing pattern type. Or it is short-opened. For example, in the opening / closing patterns 2A and 2B, the electric function opening / closing game may be executed twice through one opening interval, and a maximum of two jackpot games may be executed. In the opening / closing pattern 2A, both the first opening in the first electric role opening / closing game and the second opening in the second electric role opening / closing game are normal opening, and in the opening / closing pattern 2B, the first opening is the normal opening and the first opening. 2 Open is a short open.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern 2A, since both the first opening and the second opening are normal opening, usually, both the first electric role opening / closing game and the second electric role opening / closing game are triggered by one normal drawing. Normally, two big hit games are executed for a hit game. On the other hand, in the opening / closing pattern 2B, since the first electric role opening / closing game is normally open, the jackpot game is usually executed triggered by the electric role opening / closing game, and the second electric role opening / closing game is short-opened. Therefore, when the launch timing of the game ball 99 and the opening timing of the electric role winning door 371 mesh with each other and the game ball 99 is inserted into the electric role winning opening 376, the jackpot game is executed and the electric role winning opening 376 is executed. If the game ball 99 is not inserted in the door, the jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, in the opening / closing pattern 2A, the big hit game can be executed once or twice.

Although detailed description will be omitted, the opening / closing patterns 3A to 3C, the opening / closing patterns 4A to 4D, the opening / closing patterns 5A to 5E, the opening / closing patterns 6A to 6F, and the opening / closing patterns 7A to 7G also have the same cases of normal opening. Normally, the jackpot game is executed triggered by the electric role opening / closing game, and the jackpot game triggered by the electric role opening / closing game is not executed in the case of short opening.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls 99 expected to enter the electric service winning opening 376 is less than one as the opening type of the electric service winning door 371 in the electric service opening / closing game. Includes short opening. Therefore, when the electric role opening / closing game has an opening / closing pattern (per normal figure) in which the electric role opening / closing game is short-opening, in the short-opening electric role opening / closing game, the opening timing of the electric role winning door 371 and the launch timing of the game ball 99 When the doors are engaged, a game ball is inserted into the electric winning door 376, a small hit game is executed when the game ball enters the electric winning door 376, and a big hit game is executed with the small hit game as an opportunity. obtain. On the other hand, in the short-opening electric service opening / closing game, if the opening timing of the electric service winning door 371 and the launch timing of the game ball 99 do not mesh with each other, the game ball 99 is not inserted into the electric service winning opening 376, so that a small hit is made. A so-called puncture occurs in which the game is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls 99 expected to enter the electric service winning opening 376 is less than one in the opening type (operating time) of the electric service winning door 371 in the electric service opening / closing game. In this case, the playability that a puncture may occur in the electric service opening / closing game is imparted. As a result, the player can enjoy the electric role opening / closing game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the electric role winning opening 376 in the electric role opening / closing game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the opening types of the electric function opening / closing door 371 in the electric function opening / closing game include normal opening with an expected number of balls entering 1 or more and short opening with an expected number of balls entering less than 1 ball. There are two types of winning games: an electric role opening / closing game in which a puncture may occur due to a short opening, and an electric role opening / closing game in which a puncture does not occur as long as an appropriate game ball is launched due to a normal opening. Types are included. As a result, the incidence of punctures in the electric function opening / closing game in the game per normal figure is reduced as compared with the case where only the short opening is executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged.

In addition, by including normal opening and short opening as the opening types of the electric opening / closing door 371 in the electric function opening / closing game, the puncture occurrence rate is determined by the ratio of the short opening in which puncture may occur in the electric role opening / closing game. different. Therefore, the number of executions of the third game, which is expected in the game per game, is also different. As a result, the number of game balls expected to be acquired by executing the game per normal figure is not only the number of times the electric role opening / closing game is executed in the game per normal figure, but also the ratio of the short opening electric role opening / closing game. And it depends on the occurrence rate of puncture in the electric function opening and closing game of short opening. As a result, the number of game balls expected to be acquired by executing the game per normal figure is given a game property that fluctuates due to a plurality of factors, and the player is punctured in the short-open electric function opening / closing game. Because you can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention not only to whether or not it is, but also to the number of executions of the electric role opening / closing game in the game per normal figure and the ratio of the electric role opening / closing game of short opening in the game per normal figure. , The fun of the game is improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, any opening / closing pattern includes at least one normal opening. Therefore, no matter what opening / closing pattern is selected (no matter what kind of drawing is distributed), normal opening is executed at least once. This guarantees the possibility that at least one big hit game will be executed in one game per game, and prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the big hit game is not executed at all in the game per game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an unnecessary disadvantage, and to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. Further, in any of the opening / closing patterns, the first opening is set to the normal opening. Therefore, no matter what opening / closing pattern is selected (no matter what kind of normal opening is distributed), normal opening, which is unlikely to cause a puncture, is executed as the first opening. As a result, the player can acquire a privilege (a large amount of game balls) by executing the jackpot game that is executed triggered by the first electric role opening / closing game in the normal game, so that the player can acquire the privilege (a large amount of game balls) from the second time onward. It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation when a flat tire occurs in an electric service opening / closing game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the number of game balls expected to enter the electric service winning opening 376 is less than one as the opening time (operating time) of the electric service winning door in the electric service opening / closing game. It includes opening and normal opening where the number of game balls expected to enter the electric service winning opening is one or more, but normal opening may be omitted and only short opening may be used. It may include a plurality of opening times set at different times when the number of game balls expected to enter the winning opening 376 is less than one.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same changes as those in the first to fifth embodiments described above can be made to the extent applicable. For example, also in the present embodiment, the normal figure game may be executed and a specific effect may be executed in the blank period until the next electric role opening / closing game is started, and the electric role winning in the case of hitting the normal figure. The number of times the door 371 is opened and closed may be fixed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls expected to enter the electric service winning opening 376 is less than one as the opening time (operating time) of the electric service winning door in the electric service opening / closing game. The case where the electric function opening / closing game is executed in the opening / closing pattern including the opening has been described, but instead of or in addition to the electric role opening / closing game, as the opening time (operating time) of the V winning door 381 in the small hit game. It is also conceivable that a small hit game is executed by a short opening in which the number of game balls expected to enter the V winning opening 384 is less than one (for example, 0.3 or more and 0.9 or less). Further, as in the 16R round game of the big hit game in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, the opening and closing of the V winning door 381 in the small hit game is repeatedly opened and closed for a very short time, that is, that is, By opening and closing the V winning door 381 at high speed, it is conceivable that the number of game balls expected to enter the V winning opening 384 is less than one.

[Outline of the invention]
Hereinafter, the outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In addition, for the sake of understanding the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, the description may be given with reference numerals, etc., but the invention according to the appendix is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numerals. It's not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means (the third electric accessory means) based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is performed when the game ball enters the second entrance (384). The third game execution means (41) executed by controlling 391) and
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the third game is executed at an interval between the first switching games.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, the first game is executed based on the establishment of the first specific condition, the second game is executed based on the establishment of the second specific condition, and the game is executed based on the establishment of the third specific condition. A third game in which a person can be given a privilege is executed. Here, the second specific condition can be established when the game ball enters the first entrance, and the third specific condition can be established when the game ball enters the second entrance. .. That is, the second specific condition can be satisfied in the first switching game of the first game, and the third specific condition can be satisfied in the second switching game of the second game. Further, the third game is executed in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, when the number of executions of the first switching game is a plurality of times, the first switching game and the second game are as long as the second specific condition and the third specific condition are satisfied according to the number of executions of the first switching game. And the third game is repeatedly executed. That is, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times by the satisfaction of the first specific condition, the third game in which the player can acquire the privilege can be executed according to the number of times the first switching game is executed. A gaming machine having a high level of playability is provided. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention and interest in the game and improve the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix A2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the third game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A2, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the third game. Therefore, for example, when it is decided to execute the maximum number (for example, 16R) of the third switching game as the third game, it is assumed that the maximum time (so-called full open) assumed in all the third switching games is required. Also, it becomes possible to end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and the execution of the first switching game in the first game being started during the execution of the third game. .. As a result, in the first switching game, a situation in which the second specific condition is not satisfied (so-called puncture occurs) even though the game ball enters the first entrance, or the first switching game is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A2, wherein the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or longer than the total time of the theoretical maximum time of the second game and the theoretical maximum time of the third game. ..

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or greater than the total time between the theoretical maximum time of the second game and the theoretical maximum time of the third game. The second game can also be ended at the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, even if the second game is executed before the execution of the third game, it is possible to end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix A4]
A second game determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute the second game based on the game ball being inserted into the first entry port (376) is further provided.
The second specific condition is characterized in that a game ball is inserted into the first ball entry port (376) and the second game determination means (41) determines that the second game is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A3.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A4, the second specific condition for executing the second game, which is switched to the second allowable state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second entrance, is the first entrance. It is determined that the second game is executed by the second game determination means based on the fact that the game ball is inserted into the ball. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the first entrance in the first switching game. In addition, when a game ball is inserted into the first entrance, it is possible to enjoy paying attention to whether the determination result by the second game determination means executes the second game.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A4, wherein the third specific condition is that a gaming ball enters the second entry port (384).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A5, the third specific condition for executing the third game, which is switched to the third permissible state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the third entrance, is the second entrance. A game ball is inserted into the ball. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second entrance in the second switching game.

[Appendix A6]
Further provided with a first game determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area (317) set in the game board (31). ,
The first specific condition is characterized in that the game ball passes through the specific area (317) and is determined by the first game determination means (41) to execute the first game. The gaming machine described in any of the appendices A5.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, the first specific condition in which the first game is executed, which is switched to the first allowable state in which the gaming ball is allowed to enter the first entrance, is that the gaming ball is in a specific area. It is determined that the first game is executed by the first game determination means based on the passage. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area. In addition, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether the determination result by the first game determination means executes the first game.

[Appendix A7]
The first ball entry port (376), the second ball entry port (384), and the third ball entry port (394) can be used by a game ball launched in the right region of the game board (31). It is installed in a suitable position
The gaming machine according to Appendix A6, wherein the specific region (317) is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the left region of the gaming board (31) can pass.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A7, it is necessary to execute a so-called left-handed hitting, in which a gaming ball is launched into the left side region of the gaming board in order to satisfy the first specific condition for executing the first game. Further, when the first specific condition is satisfied, the second specific condition for executing the second game and the third specific condition for executing the third game are satisfied, and the player is given a privilege. In the third game to be obtained, it is necessary to execute a so-called right-handed hit in which the game ball is launched into the right area of the game board in order to allow the game ball to enter the third entrance. That is, the game property of distinguishing between left-handed and right-handed in a game state that is disadvantageous to the player until the first game is executed and a game state in which the first to third games that are advantageous to the player are executed. Is given.

[Appendix A8]
Further provided with a route defining means (35) that defines the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) on the same route.
The third entry port (394) is provided at a position where a gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. The gaming machine described in.

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is one that can acquire a large amount of gaming balls by inserting the gaming balls into a variable winning opening opened in a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. In this type of game, it is generally possible to enter a game ball into a variable winning opening through a plurality of routes. However, when the game ball can enter the variable winning opening through multiple routes, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening becomes uneven. The time required for the jackpot game becomes uneven. In addition, when a game ball can be entered into a variable winning opening through multiple routes, a game ball moving on a route different from the plurality of winning routes becomes a waste ball that is not entered into the variable winning opening. Not only is the time required for the jackpot game uneven due to the generation of this wasted ball, but also the number of difference balls in the jackpot game is reduced, which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the appendix A8, since the gaming ball launched in the predetermined region is moved on the same route by the route defining means, the gaming ball is moved to the predetermined region of the gaming board with a certain strength (stroke). When launching, the moving speeds of the gaming balls moving along the moving path defined by the routing means are made uniform among the gaming balls, and the moving speeds are made uniform along the moving path defined by the routing means. Moving. Since the third entrance is provided at a position where a game ball that moves along a movement path defined by the route defining means can enter, when the game ball is launched into a predetermined area, the third game In the third switching game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the third entrance is made uniform among the game balls, and the generation of wasted balls is prevented. Therefore, as the end condition of the third switching game of the third game, for example, a predetermined time has passed since the third allowable state was set, and the upper limit number or more of the game balls are inserted into the third entrance. When is set, by moving the game ball on the same route by the route defining means, the time required for the third switching game is uniform because the game ball is uniformly entered into the third entrance. As a result, the time required for the third game can be made uniform. As a result, when the first game is executed, the time required for the game cycles of the first game, the second game, and the third game is equalized, so that the third game is ended in the interval between the first switching games. It becomes easy to make it. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and the execution of the first switching game in the first game being started during the execution of the third game. Therefore, in the first game, a situation occurs in which the second game is not executed because the third game is executed even though the game ball enters the first entrance, and the second game is the second. The third game is executed because the entry of the game ball into the second entrance is invalidated because the third game is executed even though the game ball has entered the entrance. Disadvantages are given to the player, such as the occurrence of a situation in which the game is not played, or the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance due to the opening of the first entrance in the first switching game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter the third entrance, the route defining means defines the game ball while it is in the third allowable state. All of the game balls that have moved along the moving path and reached a position where they can enter the third entrance can be entered into the third entrance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that may occur when a game ball can enter the third entrance through a plurality of routes, that is, a waste ball that is not entered into the third entrance. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the wasted balls that are not entered into the third entrance, for example, the reduction of the number of difference balls.

[Appendix A9]
The third entrance (394) is provided below the third electric accessory means (391).
The third electric accessory means (391) is a third opening (353) provided above the third entry port (394) in the route defining means (35). The third restricted position (standby position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into the third entrance (394) by closing the 353) and the third opening (353) by opening the third opening (353). The gaming machine according to Appendix A8, characterized in that it can move between a third allowable position (operating position) that allows the gaming ball to enter the third entrance (394).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9, the entry of the gaming ball into the third entrance is restricted or permitted by moving the third electric accessory means to open and close the third opening provided in the route defining means. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to switch between the third restricted state and the third allowable state by a simple configuration in which a third opening is provided in the route defining means and the third opening is opened and closed by the third electric accessory means. The time required for the third game can be made uniform or fixed, and the above-mentioned disadvantage can be suppressed from being given to the player.

[Appendix A10]
The second entry port (384) is provided at a position where a gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. Or the gaming machine described in Appendix A9.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A10, since the second entrance is provided at a position where the gaming ball moving along the moving path defined by the route defining means can enter, the gaming ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the second game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the second entrance is made uniform. Therefore, as the end condition (second predetermined condition) of the second switching game of the second game, for example, a predetermined time has passed since the second allowable state was set, and more than the maximum number of game balls are inserted into the second entrance. When it is set to be balled or the like, the time required for the second switching game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the second game can be made uniform. This makes it easy to end the second game in the interval between the first switching games when the first game is executed. Therefore, due to the non-uniformity of the execution time of the second game, the interval between the first switching games ends during the execution of the third game executed after the end of the second game, and the third game is in effect. Since it is possible to easily prevent the execution of the first switching game in the first game from being started, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned disadvantage from being given to the player.

Further, the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter the second entrance, and is defined by the route defining means while the second allowable state is set. Since all the game balls that have moved along the moving path and reached the position where they can enter the second entrance can be entered into the second entrance, they can enter the second entrance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to waste balls that are not used. In addition, all of the game balls that have moved along the movement path defined by the route defining means and reached the position where the ball can enter the second entrance can be entered into the second entrance. In the second switching game of the second game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is not inserted into the second entrance (so-called puncture occurrence). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the third game is not executed because the third specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of a flat tire. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage if the player cannot acquire the privilege that the player can originally acquire by executing the third game.

[Appendix A11]
The second ball entry port (384) is provided below the second electric accessory means (381).
The second electric accessory means (381) is a second ball entry port (352) provided above the second ball entry port (384) in the route defining means (35). The second restricted position (standby position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into (384) and the second allowable position (operating position) that allows the game ball to enter the second entry port (384). ), The gaming machine according to Appendix A10, characterized in that it can be moved to and from.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A11, the entry of the gaming ball into the second entrance is restricted or permitted by moving the second electric accessory means to open and close the second opening provided in the route defining means. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to switch between the second restricted state and the second allowable state by a simple configuration in which a second opening is provided in the route defining means and the second opening is opened and closed by the second electric accessory means. The time required for the second game can be made uniform or fixed, and the above-mentioned disadvantage can be suppressed from being given to the player.

[Appendix A12]
The first entry port (376) is provided at a position where a gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A11.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A12, since the first entrance is provided at a position where the gaming ball moving along the moving path defined by the route defining means can enter, the gaming ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the first game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the first entrance is made uniform. Therefore, in the first switching game of the first game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is not inserted into the first entry slot (so-called puncture occurrence). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the second specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of a flat tire, and eventually the third game is not executed because the third specific condition is not satisfied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage if the player cannot acquire the privilege that the player can originally acquire by executing the third game.

[Appendix A13]
The first ball entry port (376) is provided below the first electric accessory means (371).
The first electric accessory means (371) is a first ball entry port (351) provided above the first ball entry port (376) in the route defining means (35). The first restricted position (standby position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into (376) and the first allowable position (operating position) that allows the game ball to enter the first entry port (376). ), The gaming machine according to Appendix A12, characterized in that it can be moved to and from.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A13, the entry of the gaming ball into the first entrance is restricted or permitted by moving the first electric accessory means to open and close the first opening provided in the route defining means. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to switch between the first restricted state and the first allowable state by a simple configuration in which the first opening is provided in the route defining means and the first opening is opened and closed by the first electric accessory means. The time required for the first game can be made uniform or fixed, and the above-mentioned disadvantage can be suppressed from being given to the player.

[Appendix A14]
The first entry port (376) and the second entry port (384) are provided at positions where a game ball moving along the movement path defined by the route defining means (35) can enter. Be,
The gaming balls that move along the movement path defined by the route defining means (35) include the first entry port (376), the second entry port (384), and the third entry port (the third entry port (384). 394) The gaming machine according to Appendix A8, which is provided at a position where the ball can be entered preferentially in the order of 394).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A14, if two or more of the first electric accessory means, the second electric accessory means, and the third electric accessory means are operated in duplicate, the first ball entry port, It is possible to enter a game ball in the order of priority of the second entrance and the third entrance. Therefore, when the first game is executed by the establishment of the first specific condition, the establishment of the second specific condition has the highest priority, and then the establishment of the third specific condition has priority. That is, the winning priority of the game balls of the first entrance, the second entrance, and the third entrance is set with the highest priority given to the execution of the third game. As a result, the player can maximize the benefits obtained by executing the third game.

[Appendix A15]
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games,
The third predetermined condition is that a predetermined time has elapsed since the player was switched to the third allowable state, and in the third allowable state, an upper limit number of game balls are inserted into the third entrance (394). One of the conditions is to be met,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein the predetermined time is set to be equal to or less than the minimum time required for the upper limit number of gaming balls to enter the third entrance (394).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A15, when the third restricted state is switched to the third allowable state in the third switching game, the predetermined time until the third restricted state is switched, that is, the game ball to the third entrance is The maximum permissible ball entry time is set to be equal to or less than the minimum time required for the upper limit number of game balls to enter the third entry port (394). That is, the third restricted state is set by the lapse of a predetermined time (maximum allowable entry time) before the upper limit number of game balls are entered into the third entry opening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper limit number of game balls from being changed from the third allowable state to the third restricted state before the lapse of a predetermined time (maximum allowable entry time) by entering the third entrance. As a result, the execution time of the third switching game can be made uniform, and further, the execution time of the third game can be made uniform, so that it becomes easy to end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and the execution of the first switching game in the first game being started during the execution of the third game. In the 1-switching game, the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entry slot (so-called puncture occurs), or the first switching game is executed and the third entry is made. It is possible to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as a situation in which the game ball cannot be inserted into the mouth.

[Appendix A16]
The predetermined time is described in Appendix A15, wherein the predetermined time is set to be equal to or less than a time (for example, 6 seconds) obtained by multiplying the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of a game ball by the upper limit number (for example, 10 pieces). Game machine.

[Appendix A17]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A16, wherein the predetermined time is set to 0.5 times or more and 1 times or less the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming balls by the upper limit number.

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A17, wherein the predetermined time is set to 0.75 times or more and 0.95 times or less the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming balls by the upper limit number.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A16 to A18, the predetermined time is equal to or less than the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming balls by the upper limit number, for example, 0.5 times or more the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming balls by the upper limit number. It is set to 1 time or less, preferably 0.75 times or more and 0.95 times or less. Therefore, while preventing the number of game balls entering the third entrance within the predetermined time from being significantly smaller than the upper limit, the third switching game is terminated when the predetermined time elapses. Can be made to. As a result, while sufficiently securing the profit given to the player in the third game, the time required for the third switching game, and by extension, the time required for the third game is made uniform, so that the first switching game is more reliably performed. The third game can be completed at the interval between them.

[Appendix A19]
The third predetermined condition is that a predetermined time has elapsed since the player was switched to the third allowable state, and in the third allowable state, an upper limit number of game balls are inserted into the third entrance (394). One of the conditions is to be met,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein the predetermined time is set to a time exceeding the minimum time required for entering the upper limit number of gaming balls into the third entrance (394). ..

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A19, when the third restricted state is switched to the third allowable state in the third switching game, the predetermined time until the third restricted state is switched, that is, the game ball to the third entrance is The maximum permissible ball entry time is set to be longer than the minimum time required to allow the maximum number of game balls to enter the third entry slot. As a result, there is a possibility that the third allowable state can be switched to the third restricted state by the upper limit number of game balls being inserted into the third entrance before the predetermined time (maximum allowable entry time) has elapsed. It gets higher. Then, when the upper limit number of game balls is inserted into the third entrance before the predetermined time (maximum allowable entry time) elapses, the third allowable state can be switched to the third restricted state. Since the time required for the switching game is shorter than in the case where the third restricted state is set due to the passage of a predetermined time (maximum ball entry allowable time), the time required for the third game can also be shortened. Therefore, since the time required for the third game can be shortened, it is possible to easily end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game, it is easily possible to execute the third game a plurality of times.

Further, by ending the third game in the interval between the first switching games, the interval between the first switching games ends during the execution of the third game, and the first game in the first game is executed during the execution of the third game. 1 It is possible to prevent the execution of the switching game from being started. As a result, in the first switching game, a situation in which the second specific condition is not satisfied (so-called puncture occurs) even though the game ball enters the first entrance, or the first switching game is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

Further, when the third restricted state is reached by the upper limit number of game balls being inserted into the third entrance before the predetermined time (maximum allowable entry time) has elapsed, the third in the third switching game. The number of game balls to be entered into the entrance is larger than that in the case where the third restricted state is set due to the passage of a predetermined time (maximum allowable entry time). Therefore, if the privilege given to the player in the third switching game is the payout of the game ball for the entry of the game ball into the third entrance, the player can use the maximum number of game balls in the third switching game. It can be acquired, and the number of game balls that can be acquired in the third game increases. As a result, the disadvantage of the player that may occur when the third allowable state is switched to the third restricted state after the lapse of a predetermined time (maximum allowable ball entry time), that is, the decrease in the privilege (game ball) that can be obtained is suppressed. However, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating.

[Appendix A20]
The appendix A19 is characterized in that the predetermined time is set to a time exceeding the time (for example, 6 seconds) obtained by multiplying the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game balls by the upper limit number (for example, 10 pieces). The described gaming machine.

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A20, wherein the predetermined time is set to be more than 1 times and 1.5 times or less the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming balls by the upper limit number.

[Appendix A22]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A21, wherein the predetermined time is set to 1.1 times or more and 1.3 times or less the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming balls by the upper limit number.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A20 to A22, the predetermined time exceeds the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming ball by the upper limit number, for example, more than one time the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming ball by the upper limit number. It is set to 5 times or less, preferably 1.1 times or more and 1.3 times or less. Therefore, when the upper limit number of game balls is inserted into the third entrance to enter the third restricted state, the time from the third allowable state to the third restricted state is set to a predetermined time. This is to prevent it from becoming significantly shorter than the previous one. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for the third game from being significantly shortened. Therefore, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times in the first game, the first switching game is then completed after the third game is completed. Can shorten the blank period that occurs before the start of.

By the way, when the blank period becomes long, it is assumed that the player stops the launch of the game ball in order to prevent the decrease of the owned game ball due to the launch of the game ball. If a stop strike is performed in the blank period until the first switching game is started, the launch of the game ball is delayed with respect to the start of the first switching game, or the game ball does not arrive at the predetermined area due to the occurrence of a launch failure. In the first switching game, the game ball may not enter the first entrance due to the occurrence of a situation, and as a result, the third game in which the player may be given a privilege may not be executed. On the other hand, by shortening the blank period, it is possible to suppress the stoppage in the blank period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is not inserted into the first entrance in the first switching game due to the delay in launching the game ball, so that the occurrence of the situation in which the third game is not executed can be suppressed.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A19 to Supplementary A22, wherein the interval is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the third game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A23, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the third game. Therefore, for example, when it is decided to execute the maximum number (for example, 16R) of the third switching game as the third game, it is assumed that the maximum time (so-called full open) assumed in all the third switching games is required. Also, it becomes possible to end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and the execution of the first switching game in the first game being started during the execution of the third game. .. As a result, in the first switching game, a situation in which the second specific condition is not satisfied (so-called puncture occurs) even though the game ball enters the first entrance, or the first switching game is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A23, wherein the interval is set to be equal to or greater than the sum of the theoretical maximum time of the second game and the theoretical maximum time of the third game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A24, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or greater than the total time between the theoretical maximum time of the second game and the theoretical maximum time of the third game. The second game can also be ended at the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, even if the second game is executed before the execution of the third game, it is possible to end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix A25]
Further provided with a route defining means (35) that defines the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) on the same route.
The third entry port (394) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is substantially the same as or less than or equal to the interval.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A25, since the gaming ball launched into the predetermined area is moved on the same route defined by the route defining means, the moving of the gaming ball moving along the moving route defined by the route defining means. The speed is made uniform among the gaming balls. Since the third entrance is provided at a position where a game ball that moves along a predetermined route by the route defining means can enter, when the game ball is launched into a predetermined area, the third game of the third game is performed. In the switching game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the third entrance is made uniform among the game balls. Therefore, as the end condition (third predetermined condition) of the third switching game of the third game, for example, a predetermined time has passed since the third allowable state was set, and more than the maximum number of game balls are inserted into the third entrance. When it is set to be balled or the like, the time required for the third switching game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the third game can be made uniform. In particular, when the theoretical maximum time of the third game is substantially the same as or less than the interval, for example, when it is determined to execute the maximum number (for example, 16R) of the third switching game as the third game. Even if the maximum time (so-called full open) assumed in all the third switching games is required, the third game can be completed in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, when the first game is executed, it becomes easy to end the third game in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and the execution of the first switching game in the first game being started during the execution of the third game. In the 1-switching game, the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entry slot (so-called puncture occurs), or the first switching game is executed and the third entry is made. It is possible to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as a situation in which the game ball cannot be inserted into the mouth.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A25, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.8 times or more and 0.99 times or less of the interval.

[Appendix A27]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A26, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.85 times or more and 0.95 times or less of the interval.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A26 and A27, the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.8 times or more and 0.99 times or less, preferably 0.85 times or more and 0.95 times or less, which is shorter than the interval. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the third game can be completed in the interval between the first switching games. As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress the disadvantage from being given to the player.

[Appendix A28]
The games according to the appendices A25 to A27, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.8 times or more and 1 time or less the time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the second game from the interval. Machine.

[Appendix A29]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A28, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.9 times or more and 1 times or less the time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the second game from the interval.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A28 and A29, the theoretical maximum time of the third game is shorter than the remaining time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the second game from the interval, and is 0.85 times or more and 0.95 times the remaining time. It is set to the following, preferably 0.9 times or more and 1 time or less. Therefore, not only the third game but also the second game can be ended at the interval between the first switching games. As a result, even if the second game is executed before the execution of the third game, it is possible to end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix A30]
The second entry port (384) is provided at a position where a gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. The gaming machine described in any of the appendices A29.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A30, since the second entrance is provided at a position where the gaming ball moving along the moving path defined by the route defining means can enter, the gaming ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the second game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the second entrance is made uniform. Therefore, as the end condition (second predetermined condition) of the second switching game of the second game, for example, a predetermined time has passed since the second allowable state was set, and more than the maximum number of game balls are inserted into the second entrance. When it is set to be balled or the like, the time required for the second switching game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the second game can be made uniform. This makes it easy to end the second game in the interval between the first switching games when the first game is executed. Therefore, due to the non-uniformity of the execution time of the second game, the interval between the first switching games ends during the execution of the third game executed after the end of the second game, and the third game is in effect. Since it is possible to easily prevent the execution of the first switching game in the first game from being started, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned disadvantage from being given to the player.

Further, the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter the second entrance, and is defined by the route defining means while the second allowable state is set. Since all the game balls that have moved along the moving path and reached the position where they can enter the second entrance can be entered into the second entrance, they can enter the second entrance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to waste balls that are not used. In addition, all of the game balls that have moved along the movement path defined by the route defining means and reached the position where the ball can enter the second entrance can be entered into the second entrance. In the second switching game of the second game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is not inserted into the second entrance (so-called puncture occurrence). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the third game is not executed because the third specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of a flat tire. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage if the player cannot acquire the privilege that the player can originally acquire by executing the third game.

[Appendix A31]
From the appendix A25, the first ball entry port (376) is provided at a position where a gaming ball moving along a movement path defined by the route defining means (35) can enter. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A29.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A31, since the first entrance is provided at a position where the gaming ball moving along the moving path defined by the route defining means can enter, the gaming ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the first game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the first entrance is made uniform. Therefore, in the first switching game of the first game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is not inserted into the first entry slot (so-called puncture occurrence). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the second specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of a flat tire, and eventually the third game is not executed because the third specific condition is not satisfied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage if the player cannot acquire the privilege that the player can originally acquire by executing the third game.

[Appendix A32]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the first game determination means (41) that determines whether or not to execute the first game by the first game execution means (41) (lottery per drawing), and
The determination result display means (361) for displaying the determination result by the first game determination means (41), and
The display control means (41) for controlling the display content of the determination result display means, and the display control means (41).
Further prepare
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
The display control means (41) is determined by the first game determination means (41) when it is determined by the first game determination means (41) to execute the first game. The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein the determination result display means (361) displays the content reflecting the number of times the game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A32, when the number of times the first switching game is executed is a plurality of times, the first is as long as the second specific condition and the third specific condition are satisfied according to the number of times the first switching game is executed. The switching game, the second game, and the third game are repeatedly executed. That is, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times by the satisfaction of the first specific condition, the third game in which the player can acquire the privilege is executed according to the number of times the first switching game is executed. A gaming machine having a high level of playability is provided. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention and interest in the game and improve the player's willingness to play. Then, the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is determined by the first game determination means, and the determination result by the first game determination means including the execution number is displayed on the determination result display means. Therefore, the player can grasp the determination result by the first game determination means by the determination result display means, and when the determination result is to execute the first game, the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game can be determined. I can grasp it. Then, by grasping the number of times of the first switching game in the first game, it becomes possible to grasp the maximum number of executions of the third game in which the privilege can be acquired. As a result, the new playability is added with the playability that allows the player to grasp the maximum number of times the third game that can obtain the privilege is executed, thereby increasing the attention and interest in the game and increasing the player's motivation to play. It will be possible to improve it further. Further, for example, by predicting whether or not the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the third game, the degree of attention and interest in the game is improved, and after the end of the third game, the first game of the first game is performed. Since it can be predicted that the game ball needs to be inserted into the first entrance when the one-switching game is executed, the third game is executed when the game ball is not inserted into the first entrance. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of not being done.

[Appendix A33]
The display control means (41) causes the determination result display means (361) to display a number that matches the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41). The gaming machine according to Appendix A32, which is a feature.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A33, a number matching the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determining means is displayed on the determination result display means, so that the player can execute the first switching game. Can be grasped directly and easily. As a result, for example, it is possible to easily predict whether or not the first switching game of the first game will be executed after the end of the third game, thereby improving the degree of attention and interest in the game, and the first after the end of the third game. When the first switching game of the game is executed, it can be easily predicted that the game ball needs to be inserted into the first entrance, so that the game ball is not inserted into the first entrance. The occurrence of the disadvantage that the third game is not executed is more reliably prevented.

[Appendix A34]
The symbol display means (341) in which the decorative symbol showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed.
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
The symbol display control means (51) is
The determination result by the first game determination means (41) is displayed, and the determination result is displayed.
Contents that reflect the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41) when it is determined by the first game determination means (41) to execute the first game. The gaming machine according to the appendix A32 or the appendix A33, characterized in that is displayed on the symbol display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A34, the number of times the first switching game is executed in the first game is displayed in the symbol display means in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, in addition to the determination result display means. Therefore, since the player can grasp the determination result in the first game determination means by the symbol display means, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to the symbol display means. Further, in a gaming machine provided with both a determination result display means and a symbol display means, the symbol display means is usually arranged more prominently than the determination result display means. Therefore, as compared with the case of paying attention to the determination result display means, the player can easily predict whether or not the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the third game, for example, and thus the third game. When the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the above, it can be easily predicted that the game ball needs to be inserted into the first entrance. As a result, it is possible to more easily prevent the occurrence of the disadvantage that the third game is not executed because the game ball is not inserted into the first entrance.

[Appendix A35]
The symbol display control means (51) displays the decorative symbol on an effective line set in the symbol display means (341), with numbers matching the number of executions of the first switching game as doublets. The gaming machine according to Appendix A34.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A35, since the number corresponding to the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determining means is displayed as doublet and the decorative symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the player is the first. The number of times the switching game is executed can be grasped more directly and more easily. As a result, when the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the third game, it can be more easily predicted that the game ball needs to be inserted into the first entrance. Since the game ball is not inserted into the entrance, the disadvantage that the third game is not executed is more reliably prevented.

[Appendix A36]
When the symbol display control means (51) variablely displays the decorative symbol in the symbol display control means (51), the symbol display control means (51) determines in the first game determination means (41) in the symbol display control means (51). The gaming machine according to annex A34 or annex A35, which comprises performing a gaming effect that suggests or clearly indicates a result.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A36, in the symbol display means in which the determination result in the first game determination means is displayed by the decorative symbol, the determination result in the first game determination means is suggested or clearly shown during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The game production is executed. As a result, the player can enjoy predicting the possibility that the determination result is to execute the first game by paying attention to the game effect until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Appendix A37]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A32 to Supplementary A36, wherein the selection rate is set lower as the first game has a larger number of executions of the first switching game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A37, the selection rate is set lower as the first switching game has a larger number of executions of the first switching game. On the other hand, as the number of times the first switching game is executed increases, the number of times the third game is executed during the execution of the first game increases, so that the privilege that the player can acquire may increase. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting to obtain a determination result in which the number of times the first switching game is executed is large.

[Appendix A38]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein the first electric accessory means (371) has a delay portion (373) that delays the movement of the gaming ball in the first electric accessory means (371). ..

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A38, a delay portion is provided in the first electric accessory means that restricts or allows the entry of the gaming ball into the first entrance. Therefore, when the game ball moves on the first electric accessory means, the delay portion can secure a long residence time of the game ball on the first electric accessory means. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the game ball will enter the first starting port. As a result, the possibility that the second game is executed is increased by increasing the possibility that the second specific condition that can be satisfied when the game ball enters the first entrance is increased, and further, the possibility that the second game is executed is increased. By increasing the possibility that the third specific condition, which is established when the game ball enters the second entrance, is increased, there is a possibility that the third game, in which the player can be given a privilege, is executed. Is enhanced. In this way, when the first switching game is executed in the first game, it is possible to increase the possibility that the third game, in which the player can be given a privilege, is executed, which is an unnecessary disadvantage for the player. Can be suppressed.

[Appendix A39]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A38, wherein the residence time of the gaming ball in the first electric accessory means (371) is equal to or longer than the firing interval of the gaming ball.

[Appendix A40]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A39, wherein the residence time of the gaming ball in the first electric accessory means (371) is 1 times or more and 5 times or less the firing interval of the gaming ball.

[Appendix A41]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40, wherein the residence time of the gaming ball in the first electric accessory means (371) is 1 times or more and 3 times or less the firing interval of the gaming ball.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A39 to A41, the residence time of the gaming ball in the first electric accessory means is equal to or longer than the firing interval of the gaming ball, for example, 1 to 5 times the firing interval of the gaming ball, preferably the gaming ball. It is 1 times or more and 3 times or less of the firing interval of. Therefore, when the game balls are continuously launched toward the first electric accessory means, the state in which at least one game ball stays on the first electric accessory means is maintained. As a result, when the first electric accessory means is operated in the first switching game, the game ball retained in the first electric accessory means can be entered into the first entrance. The possibility that the second game will be executed is further increased by further increasing the possibility that the second specific condition that can be satisfied when the game ball enters the first entrance is further increased, and as a result, the possibility that the second game is executed is further increased. By further increasing the possibility that the third specific condition, which is established when the game ball enters the second entrance, is further increased, there is a possibility that the third game, in which the player can be given a privilege, will be executed. Is further enhanced. In this way, when the first switching game is executed in the first game, it is possible to further increase the possibility that the third game, in which the player can be given a privilege, is executed, which is unnecessary for the player. It is possible to further suppress the giving of profits.

[Appendix A42]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A38 to Supplementary A41, wherein the delay portion moves the gaming ball in a meandering path in the first electric accessory means (371).

[Appendix A43]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A42, wherein the delay portion (373) has a guide portion that changes the moving direction of the gaming ball in the forward direction or the backward direction.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A42 and A43, the movement of the gaming ball in the first electric accessory means is delayed by the delay portion having a simple configuration, and the time for the gaming ball to stay in the first electric accessory means is lengthened. can do. For example, when the first electric accessory means is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the first electric accessory means by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix A44]
Further provided with a route defining means (35) that defines the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) on the same route.
The first ball entry port (376) is provided at a position where a gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. The gaming machine described in any of the appendices A43.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A44, since the movement path of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is defined to the same route by the route defining means, the moving speed of the gaming ball launched into the predetermined area is made uniform. As a result, it becomes possible to make the game ball exist at a position where the ball can enter the first entrance at an interval substantially corresponding to the firing interval of the game ball, and the movement speed and the movement path of the game ball become uneven. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball does not enter the first ball entry port. As a result, since the occurrence of the situation where the second specific condition or the third specific condition is not satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied is suppressed, the occurrence of the situation where the profit obtained by executing the third game cannot be enjoyed is suppressed. can.

[Appendix A45]
The first ball entry port (376) is provided below the first electric accessory means (371).
The gaming machine according to Appendix A43, wherein the first electric accessory means (371) is provided in the route defining means (35).

[Appendix A46]
The first electric accessory means (371) is a first ball entry port (351) provided above the first ball entry port (376) in the route defining means (35). A first restricted position (standby position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into (376) and a first allowable position (operating position) that allows the game ball to enter the first entry port (376). The gaming machine according to Appendix A45, which is characterized by being movable between.

[Appendix A47]
The first limiting position is a position for closing the first opening (351).
The gaming machine according to Appendix A46, wherein the first permissible position is a position at which the first opening (351) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A45 to the appendix A47, the movement speed of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is defined to the same route by the route defining means, so that the moving speed is made uniform, so that the first electric accessory means It is possible to keep a certain number of game balls at all times. As a result, when the first permissible state is set, the game ball retained in the first electric accessory means can be surely entered into the first ball entry port. Therefore, after the first specific condition is satisfied, the first ball is entered. 2 It is possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the specific condition or the third specific condition is not satisfied, and as a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the profit obtained by executing the third game cannot be enjoyed.

[Appendix A48]
The first ball entry port (376) is provided in the first ball entry portion (372) having a first upper opening.
The first electric accessory means (371) can move in the front-rear direction between the first limiting position that covers the first upper opening and the first allowable position that opens the first upper opening. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A38 to Supplementary A47.

[Appendix A49]
The gaming ball retained in the first electric accessory means (371) is dropped toward the first upper opening when it is moved backward from the first limiting position to the first allowable position. The gaming machine according to the appendix A48, which is characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A48 and the appendix A49, by moving the first electric accessory means from the first restricted position to the first allowable position, the gaming ball moving the first electric accessory means falls and the first The ball is entered into the first ball entry portion through the upper opening, and as a result, the game ball is entered into the first ball entry port. Therefore, it becomes easy to insert the game ball retained in the first electric accessory means into the first entrance, and the first operation time of the first electric accessory means is simply specified. The time of the switching game can be fixed. This can contribute to the fixation of a series of games of the first switching game, the second game, and the third game, and the third game is completed within the interval until the next switching game is executed. Will be easier.

[Appendix A50]
A route defining means (35) that defines the movement route of a game ball launched into a predetermined area (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route, and
The game ball that has moved along the movement path defined by the route defining means (35) is retained at a position where the game ball can enter the third entrance (394) in the third game switching. Retention means (391,395,398,399) and
Further prepare
The appendix A1 is characterized in that the gaming ball retained in the retention means (391, 395, 398, 399) is entered into the third entry port (394) in the third allowable state. Gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A50, a certain number of game balls are retained in the retention means in the third switching game, and when the third allowable state is switched, a certain number of game balls retained in the retention means are entered in the third position. The ball is entered into the ball mouth. Therefore, the time required for the third permissible state may be set in a short time within the range in which a certain number of game balls retained in the retention means can enter the third entrance, and the time required for the third switching game is shortened. It can be fixed in time. This makes it easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed. Further, even if the time required for the third switching game is set to a short time, a certain number of game balls can be entered into the third entrance by providing the retention means, which is required for the third switching game. Preventing the disadvantage of the player that can occur by setting the time to a short time, that is, the decrease in the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player due to the decrease in the number of game balls that can be entered into the third entrance. can.

The retention means is not limited to the means for retaining the game ball in a stopped state, and also includes means for delaying the movement of the game ball by, for example, increasing the movement distance or decreasing the movement speed.

[Appendix A51]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A50, wherein the retaining means (395, 398) retains a gaming ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A51, since the game balls are retained in the third electric accessory means, a certain number of game balls are retained in the third electric accessory means in a short time due to the operation of the third electric accessory means. Can be entered into the third entrance. As a result, the time required for the third switching game can be fixed in a shorter time, and it becomes easier to finish the third game within the interval until the first switching game is executed next.

[Appendix A52]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A51, wherein the staying means (395, 398) is a delay portion for delaying the movement of the gaming ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A52, the gaming ball can be retained in the third electric accessory means by a simple configuration in which a delay portion for delaying the movement of the gaming ball in the third electric accessory means is provided.

[Appendix A53]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A52, wherein the delay portion (395) defines a movement path in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A53, wherein the delay portion (398) moves the gaming ball along a meandering path in the third electric accessory means (391).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A53 and the appendix A54, the gaming ball is retained in the third electric accessory means by a simple configuration in which the movement path of the game ball in the third electric accessory means is defined as a meandering path or the like. Can be done.

[Appendix A55]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A52, wherein the delay portion (398) reduces the moving speed of the gaming ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix A56]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A55, wherein the delay portion (398) is a concave portion or a convex portion provided in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix A57]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A56, wherein the delay portion (398) is a plurality of concave portions or a plurality of convex portions arranged in a scattered pattern in the third electric accessory means (391).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A55 to A57, the gaming ball has a simple configuration in which the moving speed of the gaming ball in the third electric accessory means is reduced by providing a concave portion or a convex portion in the third electric accessory means. Can be retained in the third electric accessory means.

[Appendix A58]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A51, wherein the staying means (398) is such that the third electric accessory means (391) holds a gaming ball.

[Appendix A59]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A58, wherein the staying means (398) is a plurality of grooves arranged side by side in the moving direction of the gaming balls in the third electric accessory means (391).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A58 and A59, the gaming ball is used as the third electric accessory means by a simple configuration in which the third electric accessory means is provided with a plurality of grooves or the like so that the third electric accessory means holds the game ball. It can be retained in a physical means.

[Appendix A60]
The third electric accessory means (391) is provided at the third opening (353) provided above the third entry port (394) in the route defining means (35). A third restricted position (standby position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into (394) and a third allowable position (operating position) that allows the game ball to enter the third entry port (394). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A51 to Supplementary A59, which is characterized by being movable between.

[Appendix A61]
The third limiting position is a position for closing the third opening (353).
The gaming machine according to Appendix A60, wherein the third allowable position is a position at which the third opening (353) is opened.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix A60 and the appendix A61, the movement speed of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is defined to the same route by the route defining means, so that the moving speed is made uniform, so that the third electric accessory means It is possible to retain a certain number of game balls in the retaining means. As a result, when the third permissible state is set, the game ball retained in the third electric accessory means can be reliably entered into the third entrance, so that the player can enter the third switching game. It is possible to more reliably prevent the number of game balls that can be acquired from decreasing.

[Appendix A62]
The third ball entry port (394) is provided in a third ball entry portion (392) having a third upper opening.
The third electric accessory means (391) can move in the front-rear direction between the third limiting position that covers the third upper opening and the third allowable position that opens the third upper opening. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A51 to Supplementary A61.

[Appendix A63]
The gaming ball retained in the third electric accessory means (391) is dropped toward the third upper opening when it is moved backward from the third restricted position to the third allowable position. The gaming machine according to Appendix A62.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A62 and A63, by moving the third electric accessory means from the third restricted position to the third allowable position, the gaming ball moving the third electric accessory means falls and the third The ball is entered into the third entry portion through the upper opening, and as a result, the game ball is entered into the third entry opening. Therefore, it becomes easy to insert the game ball retained in the third electric accessory means into the third entrance, and the third electric accessory means only by defining the operating time of the third electric accessory means. The time of the switching game can be fixed. This can contribute to fixing the time required for the third game, and makes it easy to finish the third game within the interval until the first switching game is executed next.

[Appendix A64]
The staying means (391) is composed of the third electric accessory means (391) and the third game executing means (41).
The third game executing means (41) is a game ball by the third electric accessory means (391) until the third restricted state is switched to the third allowable state in the third switching game. The gaming machine according to Appendix A50, wherein the gaming machine is switched to a third retention state in which movement is restricted and retention is performed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A64, the gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the route defining means is retained by being switched to the third retention state in the third switching game, and the third retention state is changed to the third permissible state. By switching to the state, a certain number of stagnant gaming balls are entered into the third entrance. Therefore, by controlling the switching from the third retention state to the third permissible state, the number of game balls entered into the third entrance can be controlled and the time required for the third switching game can be fixed. As a result, it becomes easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed while ensuring the game value given to the player.

[Appendix A65]
The third entry port (394) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A64, wherein the third electric accessory means (391) blocks the movement path in the third restricted state.

[Appendix A66]
The third electric accessory means (391) has a limiting portion (391B) for limiting the movement of the gaming ball by blocking the moving path in the third restricted state, according to the appendix A65. Gaming machine.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A65 and A66, the time required for the third switching game is fixed by a simple configuration in which the movement path of the gaming ball is blocked by the third electric accessory means, and then the first switching game is executed. It becomes possible to finish the third game within the interval until it is played.

[Appendix A67]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A50, wherein the retaining means (399) is for holding the gaming ball in a predetermined region by applying an electromagnetic force or a magnetic force to the gaming ball.

[Appendix A68]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A67, wherein the retaining means (399) holds a certain number of gaming balls above the third entrance (394).

[Appendix A69]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A67, wherein the staying means (399) causes the third electric accessory means (391) to hold a certain number of gaming balls.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A67 to A69, the time required for the third switching game is fixed by a simple configuration in which the gaming ball is held by using electromagnetic force or magnetic force, and then the first switching game is executed. It becomes possible to finish the third game within the interval up to.

[Appendix A70]
The third switching game is described in any one of Supplementary A50 to Supplementary A69, characterized in that the permissible ball entry time for switching to the third permissible state after being switched to the third permissible state is fixed. Gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A70, the permissible ball entry time for switching to the third permissible state after being switched to the third permissible state in the third switching game of the third game is fixed. Therefore, since the time required for the third switching game is fixed regardless of the number of game balls entering the third entrance, the time required for the third game including the third switching game should be fixed. Will be easier. This makes it easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and the execution of the first switching game in the first game being started during the execution of the third game. Therefore, in the first switching game, a situation in which the second specific condition is not satisfied (so-called puncture occurs) even though the game ball enters the first entrance, or the first switching game is executed, the first 3 It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the ball entrance, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix A71]
The third game includes a plurality of the third switching games.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A70, wherein each of the third switching games has a fixed permissible ball entry time.

[Appendix A72]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A71, wherein each of the third switching games has the permissible ball entry time fixed at the same time.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix A71 and the appendix A72, when the third switching game is executed a plurality of times in the third game, the third switching game is switched to the third allowable state and then the third restricted state. The time is fixed at the same time. Therefore, even when the third switching game is executed a plurality of times in the third game, the time required for each third switching game is fixed, and the time required for the third game can be fixed. As a result, it becomes easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed, and it is possible to appropriately suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix A73]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A70 to A72, wherein the permissible ball entry time is fixed to be equal to or less than the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the gaming ball.

[Appendix A74]
The permissible ball entry time is fixed to any time within the range of 0.1 times or more and 1 times or less (for example, 0.06 seconds or more and 0.6 seconds or less) of the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). The gaming machine according to Appendix A73, which is characterized by the fact that it is used.
Fire interval,

[Appendix A75]
The permissible ball entry time is fixed to any time within the range of 0.2 times or more and 0.8 times or less (for example, 0.12 seconds or more and 0.48 seconds or less) of the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). The gaming machine according to Appendix A74, which is characterized by being made.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A73 to A75, the permissible ball entry time for switching to the third permissible state and then to the third restricted state is less than or equal to the firing interval of the gaming ball, for example, 0.1 times or more and 1 times the firing interval. Hereinafter, it is preferably fixed at any time in the range of 0.2 times or more and 0.8 times or less of the firing interval. By setting the permissible time for entering the ball to be equal to or less than the firing interval of the game ball, the time required for the third switching game is fixed in an extremely short time, and as a result, the third switching game is executed a plurality of times in the third game. Even in this case, the time required for the third game can be fixed in a short time. Therefore, even when the third switching game is executed a plurality of times in the third game, it becomes easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed, and the player It is possible to appropriately suppress giving unnecessary disadvantages to the user.

[Appendix A76]
The second ball entry port includes a special second ball entry port (384) and a normal second ball entry port (385).
In the second permissible state, a special ball entry allowance state that allows a game ball to the special second ball entry port (384) and a special ball entry restriction that limits the game ball to the special second ball entry port (384). A switching unit (386) that switches between states and
The switching unit control means (41) that controls the operation of the switching unit (386), and
The gaming machine according to the appendix A1, further comprising.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A76, by switching the switching unit in the second allowable state, a state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the special second entrance and a state in which the ball is restricted is selected. Therefore, various playability can be imparted by controlling the switching of the switching unit in the second permissible state. For example, the probability of a game ball entering the special second entry port in the second allowance state can be adjusted by the switching pattern of the switching unit (the number of switchings and the time of the special entry allowance state). As a result, the game property that the game ball is surely entered into the special second entrance by launching the normal game ball in the second game, or the game ball into the special second entrance in the second game. It is possible to impart a game property in which a so-called puncture occurs, in which the jackpot game is not executed because the ball is not entered. Then, since the puncture occurrence rate can be adjusted by adjusting the ball entry probability, the playability can be adjusted by the puncture occurrence rate.

Further, as described later, when the third game is executed in the second permissible state, it is also possible to control the switching unit to a state in which the entry of the game ball into the special second entrance is restricted. Is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opportunity for the third game to be executed during the execution of the third game, and thus it is possible to prevent the third game from being started during the execution of the third game.

Further, in the second permissible state, it is also possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the special second entry port when the game ball is entered into the special second entry opening. This makes it possible to adjust the number of game balls entering the special second entrance, for example, while limiting the number of balls entering the special second entrance to one, the remaining game balls Normally, the ball can be entered into the second entrance.

[Appendix A77]
The switching unit control means (41) is switched by the second gaming execution means (41) when a gaming ball is inserted into the special second entrance (385) in the second permissible state. The gaming machine according to Appendix A76, which controls a unit to switch from the special ball entry allowable state to the special ball entry restricted state.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A77, the entry of the game ball into the special second entrance is restricted by the entry of the game ball into the special second entrance. This makes it possible to adjust the number of game balls entering the special second entrance, for example, while limiting the number of balls entering the special second entrance to one, the remaining game balls Normally, the ball can be entered into the second entrance.

[Appendix A78]
The game according to Supplementary A76 or A77, wherein the third specific condition is that a game ball is inserted into the special second entrance in a state where the third game is not executed. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A78, when the third game is executed in the second allowable state, the switching unit may be controlled to a state in which the entry of the gaming ball into the special second entrance is restricted. It is possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opportunity for the third game to be executed during the execution of the third game, and thus it is possible to prevent the third game from being started during the execution of the third game.

[Appendix A79]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A76 to Supplementary A78, wherein the second predetermined condition is that a predetermined time has elapsed after the switching to the second allowable state.

Note: The gaming machine according to A79 is switched to the second restricted state after a predetermined time has elapsed after being switched to the second allowable state. Therefore, depending on the setting of the predetermined time, the probability of the game ball entering the special second entry port in the second allowable state can be adjusted. As a result, the game property that the game ball is surely entered into the special second entrance by launching the normal game ball in the second game, or the game ball into the special second entrance in the second game. It is possible to impart a game property in which a so-called puncture occurs, in which the jackpot game is not executed because the ball is not entered. Then, since the puncture occurrence rate can be adjusted by adjusting the ball entry probability, the playability can be adjusted by the puncture occurrence rate.

[Appendix A80]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A79, wherein the predetermined time is set to a time equal to or longer than a firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of a gaming ball.

[Appendix A81]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A80, wherein the predetermined time is set to 1 time or more and 30 times or less (for example, 0.6 seconds or more and 18 seconds or less) of the firing interval.

[Appendix A82]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A80, wherein the predetermined time is set to be twice or more and 20 times or less (for example, 1.2 seconds or more and 12 seconds or less) of the firing interval.

[Appendix A83]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A80, wherein the predetermined time is set to 3 times or more and 10 times or less (for example, 1.8 seconds or more and 6 seconds or less) of the firing interval.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A80 to the appendix A83, the predetermined time from the switching to the second allowable state to the switching to the second restricted state is equal to or longer than the firing interval of the gaming ball, for example, 1 to 30 times the firing interval. Is set to, preferably 2 times or more and 20 times or less of the firing interval, and more preferably 3 times or more and 10 times or less of the firing interval. As a result, by launching a normal game ball in the second game, the game ball is surely entered into the special second entrance, and as long as the normal launch is performed, puncture does not occur.

[Appendix A84]
Described in any of Supplementary A76 to Supplementary A78, wherein the probability of entering the special second ball entry port (384) in the second allowable state is a predetermined probability lower than 100% by a certain probability. Gaming machine.

[Appendix A85]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A84, wherein the predetermined probability is set to 1% or more and 95% or less.

[Appendix A86]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A84, wherein the predetermined probability is set to 20% or more and 90% or less.

[Appendix A87]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A84, wherein the predetermined probability is set to 50% or more and 80% or less.

In the gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A84 to Supplementary A87, the probability of entering the special second ball entrance in the second allowable state is a predetermined probability lower than 100% by a certain probability, for example, 1% or more and 95% or less. Is set to, preferably 20% or more and 90% or less, and more preferably 50% or more and 80% or less. As a result, it is possible to impart a game property in which a so-called puncture occurs, in which the third game is not executed because the game ball is not inserted into the special second entrance in the second game. Then, since the puncture occurrence rate can be adjusted by adjusting the ball entry probability, the playability can be adjusted by the puncture occurrence rate.

[Appendix B1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
A first game in which the first switching game in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first switching game is switched to the first restricted state is executed one or more times (a game per normal figure). ) By controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, and the first game executing means (41).
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the first restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means (the third electric accessory means) based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is performed when the game ball enters the second entrance (384). The third game execution means (41) executed by controlling 391) and
A route defining means (35) that defines the movement route of a game ball launched into a predetermined area (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route, and
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games,
The third entry port (394) is a gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) is provided at a position where the gaming ball can enter. ..

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is one that can acquire a large amount of gaming balls by inserting the gaming balls into a variable winning opening opened in a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. In this type of game, it is generally possible to enter a game ball into a variable winning opening through a plurality of routes. However, when the game ball can enter the variable winning opening through multiple routes, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening becomes uneven. The time required for the jackpot game becomes uneven. In addition, when a game ball can be entered into a variable winning opening through multiple routes, a game ball moving on a route different from the plurality of winning routes becomes a waste ball that is not entered into the variable winning opening. Not only is the time required for the jackpot game uneven due to the generation of this wasted ball, but also the number of difference balls in the jackpot game is reduced, which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the appendix B1, since the gaming ball launched in the predetermined region is moved by the route defining means on the same route, the gaming ball is moved to the predetermined region of the gaming board with a certain strength (stroke). When launching, the moving speeds of the gaming balls moving along the moving path defined by the routing means are made uniform among the gaming balls, and the moving speeds are made uniform along the moving path defined by the routing means. Moving. Since the third entrance is provided at a position where a game ball that moves along a movement path defined by the route defining means can enter, when the game ball is launched into a predetermined area, the third game In the third switching game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the third entrance is made uniform among the game balls, and the generation of wasted balls is prevented. Therefore, as the end condition of the third switching game of the third game, for example, a predetermined time has passed since the third allowable state was set, and the upper limit number or more of the game balls are inserted into the third entrance. When is set, by moving the game ball on the same route by the route defining means, the time required for the third switching game is uniform because the game ball is uniformly entered into the third entrance. As a result, the time required for the third game can be made uniform. As a result, when the first game is executed, the time required for the game cycles of the first game, the second game, and the third game is equalized, so that the third game is ended in the interval between the first switching games. It becomes easy to make it. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and the execution of the first switching game in the first game being started during the execution of the third game. Therefore, in the first game, a situation occurs in which the second game is not executed because the third game is executed even though the game ball enters the first entrance, and the second game is the second. The third game is executed because the entry of the game ball into the second entrance is invalidated because the third game is executed even though the game ball has entered the entrance. Disadvantages are given to the player, such as the occurrence of a situation in which the game is not played, or the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance due to the opening of the first entrance in the first switching game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter the third entrance, the route defining means defines the game ball while it is in the third allowable state. All of the game balls that have moved along the moving path and reached a position where they can enter the third entrance can be entered into the third entrance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that may occur when a game ball can enter the third entrance through a plurality of routes, that is, a waste ball that is not entered into the third entrance. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the wasted balls that are not entered into the third entrance, for example, the reduction of the number of difference balls.

[Appendix B2]
The third entrance (394) is provided below the third electric accessory means (391).
The third electric accessory means (391) is a third opening (353) provided above the third entry port (394) in the route defining means (35). The third restricted position (standby position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into the third entrance (394) by closing the 353) and the third opening (353) by opening the third opening (353). The gaming machine according to Appendix B 1, wherein the gaming machine can be moved to and from a third allowable position (operating position) at which the gaming ball is allowed to enter the third entrance (394).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, the entry of the gaming ball into the third entrance is restricted or permitted by moving the third electric accessory means to open and close the third opening provided in the route defining means. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to switch between the third restricted state and the third allowable state by a simple configuration in which a third opening is provided in the route defining means and the third opening is opened and closed by the third electric accessory means. The time required for the third game can be made uniform or fixed, and the above-mentioned disadvantage can be suppressed from being given to the player.

[Appendix B3]
The second entry port (384) is provided at a position where a gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. Or the gaming machine described in Appendix B2.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B3, since the second entrance is provided at a position where the gaming ball moving along the moving path defined by the route defining means can enter, the gaming ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the second game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the second entrance is made uniform. Therefore, as the end condition (second predetermined condition) of the second switching game of the second game, for example, a predetermined time must elapse after the second allowable state is set, and a game ball having an upper limit number or more at the second entrance. When it is set that the ball is inserted, the time required for the second switching game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the second game can be made uniform. This makes it easy to end the second game in the interval between the first switching games when the first game is executed. Therefore, due to the non-uniformity of the execution time of the second game, the interval between the first switching games ends during the execution of the third game executed after the end of the second game, and the third game is in effect. Since it is possible to easily prevent the execution of the first switching game in the first game from being started, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned disadvantage from being given to the player.

Further, the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter the second entrance, and is defined by the route defining means while the second allowable state is set. Since all the game balls that have moved along the moving path and reached the position where they can enter the second entrance can be entered into the second entrance, they can enter the second entrance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to waste balls that are not used. In addition, all of the game balls that have moved along the movement path defined by the route defining means and reached the position where the ball can enter the second entrance can be entered into the second entrance. In the second switching game of the second game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is not inserted into the second entrance (so-called puncture occurrence). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the third game is not executed because the third specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of a flat tire. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage if the player cannot acquire the privilege that the player can originally acquire by executing the third game.

[Appendix B4]
The second ball entry port (384) is provided below the second electric accessory means (381).
The second electric accessory means (381) is a second ball entry port (352) provided above the second ball entry port (384) in the route defining means (35). The second restricted position (standby position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into (384) and the second allowable position (operating position) that allows the game ball to enter the second entry port (384). ), The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, characterized in that it can be moved to and from.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, the entry of the gaming ball into the second entrance is restricted or permitted by moving the second electric accessory means to open and close the second opening provided in the route defining means. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to switch between the second restricted state and the second allowable state by a simple configuration in which a second opening is provided in the route defining means and the second opening is opened and closed by the second electric accessory means. The time required for the second game can be made uniform or fixed, and the above-mentioned disadvantage can be suppressed from being given to the player.

[Appendix B5]
The first ball entry port (376) is provided at a position where a gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. The gaming machine described in any of the appendices B4.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B5, since the first entrance is provided at a position where the gaming ball that moves along the moving path defined by the route defining means can enter, the gaming ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the first game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the first entrance is made uniform. Therefore, in the first switching game of the first game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is not inserted into the first entry slot (so-called puncture occurrence). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the second specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of a flat tire, and eventually the third game is not executed because the third specific condition is not satisfied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage if the player cannot acquire the privilege that the player can originally acquire by executing the third game.

[Appendix B6]
The first ball entry port (376) is provided below the first electric accessory means (371).
The first electric accessory means (371) is a first ball entry port (351) provided above the first ball entry port (376) in the route defining means (35). The first restricted position (standby position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into (376) and the first allowable position (operating position) that allows the game ball to enter the first entry port (376). ), The gaming machine according to Appendix B5, characterized in that it can be moved to and from.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B6, the entry of the gaming ball into the first entrance is restricted or permitted by moving the first electric accessory means to open and close the first opening provided in the route defining means. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to switch between the first restricted state and the first allowable state by a simple configuration in which the first opening is provided in the route defining means and the first opening is opened and closed by the first electric accessory means. The time required for the first game can be made uniform or fixed, and the above-mentioned disadvantage can be suppressed from being given to the player.

[Appendix B7]
The first entry port (376) and the second entry port (384) are provided at positions where a game ball moving along the movement path defined by the route defining means (35) can enter. Be,
The gaming ball moving along the movement path can be preferentially entered in the order of the first entry port (376), the second entry port (384), and the third entry port (394). The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is said to be.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B7, if two or more of the first electric accessory means, the second electric accessory means, and the third electric accessory means are operated in duplicate, the first ball entrance port, Pachinko balls can be entered in the order of priority of the second entrance and the third entrance. Therefore, when the first game is executed by the establishment of the first specific condition, the establishment of the second specific condition has the highest priority, and then the establishment of the third specific condition has priority. That is, the winning priority of the game balls of the first entrance, the second entrance, and the third entrance is set with the highest priority given to the execution of the third game. As a result, the player can maximize the benefits obtained by executing the third game.

[Appendix C1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means (the third electric accessory means) based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is performed when the game ball enters the second entrance (384). The third game execution means (41) executed by controlling 391) and
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games,
The third predetermined condition is that a predetermined time has elapsed since the player was switched to the third allowable state, and in the third allowable state, an upper limit number of game balls are inserted into the third entrance (394). One of the conditions is to be met,
The predetermined time is set to be equal to or less than the minimum time required for the upper limit number of gaming balls to enter the third entry port (394).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C1, when the third restricted state is switched to the third allowable state in the third switching game, the predetermined time until the third restricted state is switched, that is, the game ball to the third entrance is The maximum permissible ball entry time is set to be equal to or less than the minimum time required to allow the maximum number of game balls to enter the third entry slot. That is, the third restricted state is set by the lapse of a predetermined time (maximum allowable entry time) before the upper limit number of game balls are entered into the third entry opening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper limit number of game balls from being changed from the third allowable state to the third restricted state before the lapse of a predetermined time (maximum allowable entry time) by entering the third entrance. As a result, the execution time of the third switching game can be made uniform, and further, the execution time of the third game can be made uniform, so that it becomes easy to end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and the execution of the first switching game in the first game being started during the execution of the third game. In the 1-switching game, the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entry slot (so-called puncture occurs), or the first switching game is executed and the third entry is made. It is possible to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as a situation in which the game ball cannot be inserted into the mouth.

[Appendix C2]
The present invention is described in Appendix C1, wherein the predetermined time is set to be equal to or less than a time (for example, 6 seconds) obtained by multiplying the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of a gaming ball by the upper limit number (for example, 10 pieces). Game machine.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C2, wherein the predetermined time is set to 0.5 times or more and 1 times or less the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming balls by the upper limit number.

[Appendix C4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C3, wherein the predetermined time is set to 0.75 times or more and 0.95 times or less the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming balls by the upper limit number.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices C2 to C4, the predetermined time is equal to or less than the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming balls by the upper limit number, for example, 0.5 times or more the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming balls by the upper limit number. It is set to 1 time or less, preferably 0.75 times or more and 0.95 times or less. Therefore, while preventing the number of game balls entering the third entrance within the predetermined time from being significantly smaller than the upper limit, the third switching game is terminated when the predetermined time elapses. Can be made to. As a result, while sufficiently securing the profit given to the player in the third game, the time required for the third switching game, and by extension, the time required for the third game is made uniform, so that the first switching game is more reliably performed. The third game can be completed at the interval between them.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C4, wherein the interval is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the third game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C5, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the third game. Therefore, for example, when it is decided to execute the maximum number (for example, 16R) of the third switching game as the third game, it is assumed that the maximum time (so-called full open) assumed in all the third switching games is required. Also, it becomes possible to end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and the execution of the first switching game in the first game being started during the execution of the third game. .. As a result, in the first switching game, a situation in which the second specific condition is not satisfied (so-called puncture occurs) even though the game ball enters the first entrance, or the first switching game is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix C6]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C5, wherein the interval is set to be equal to or greater than the sum of the theoretical maximum time of the second game and the theoretical maximum time of the third game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C6, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or greater than the total time between the theoretical maximum time of the second game and the theoretical maximum time of the third game. The second game can also be ended at the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, even if the second game is executed before the execution of the third game, it is possible to end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix D1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means (the third electric accessory means) based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is performed when the game ball enters the second entrance (384). The third game execution means (41) executed by controlling 391) and
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games,
The third predetermined condition is that a predetermined time has elapsed since the player was switched to the third allowable state, and in the third allowable state, an upper limit number of game balls are inserted into the third entrance (394). One of the conditions is to be met,
The predetermined time is set to a time exceeding the minimum time required for the upper limit number of gaming balls to enter the third entry port (394).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D1, when the third restricted state is switched to the third allowable state in the third switching game, the predetermined time until the third restricted state is switched, that is, the game ball to the third entrance is The maximum permissible ball entry time is set to exceed the minimum time required for the upper limit number of game balls to enter the third entry slot. As a result, there is a possibility that the third allowable state can be switched to the third restricted state by the upper limit number of game balls being inserted into the third entrance before the predetermined time (maximum allowable entry time) has elapsed. It gets higher. Then, when the upper limit number of game balls is inserted into the third entrance before the predetermined time (maximum allowable entry time) elapses, the third allowable state can be switched to the third restricted state. Since the time required for the switching game is shorter than in the case where the third restricted state is set due to the passage of a predetermined time (maximum ball entry allowable time), the time required for the third game can also be shortened. Therefore, since the time required for the third game can be shortened, it is possible to easily end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game, it is easily possible to execute the third game a plurality of times.

Further, by ending the third game in the interval between the first switching games, the interval between the first switching games ends during the execution of the third game, and the first game in the first game is executed during the execution of the third game. 1 It is possible to prevent the execution of the switching game from being started. As a result, in the first switching game, a situation in which the second specific condition is not satisfied (so-called puncture occurs) even though the game ball enters the first entrance, or the first switching game is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

Further, when the third restricted state is reached by the upper limit number of game balls being inserted into the third entrance before the predetermined time (maximum allowable entry time) has elapsed, the third in the third switching game. The number of game balls to be entered into the entrance is larger than that in the case where the third restricted state is set due to the passage of a predetermined time (maximum allowable entry time). Therefore, if the privilege given to the player in the third switching game is the payout of the game ball for the entry of the game ball into the third entrance, the player can use the maximum number of game balls in the third switching game. It can be acquired, and the number of game balls that can be acquired in the third game increases. As a result, the disadvantage of the player that may occur when the third allowable state is switched to the third restricted state after the lapse of a predetermined time (maximum allowable ball entry time), that is, the decrease in the privilege (game ball) that can be obtained is suppressed. However, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating.

[Appendix D2]
The appendix D1 is characterized in that the predetermined time is set to a time exceeding the time (for example, 6 seconds) obtained by multiplying the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game balls by the upper limit number (for example, 10 pieces). The described gaming machine.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D2, wherein the predetermined time is set to be more than 1 times and 1.5 times or less the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming balls by the upper limit number.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D3, wherein the predetermined time is set to 1.1 times or more and 1.3 times or less the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming balls by the upper limit number.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices D2 to D4, the predetermined time exceeds the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming ball by the upper limit number, for example, more than one time the time obtained by multiplying the firing interval of the gaming ball by the upper limit number. It is set to 5 times or less, preferably 1.1 times or more and 1.3 times or less. Therefore, when the upper limit number of game balls is inserted into the third entrance to switch from the third allowable state to the third restricted state, the time until the third allowable state is switched to the third restricted state. However, it is possible to prevent the time from becoming significantly shorter than the predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for the third game from being significantly shortened. Therefore, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times in the first game, the first switching game is then completed after the third game is completed. Can shorten the blank period that occurs before the start of.

By the way, when the blank period becomes long, it is assumed that the player stops the launch of the game ball in order to prevent the decrease of the owned game ball due to the launch of the game ball. If a stop strike is performed in the blank period until the first switching game is started, the launch of the game ball is delayed with respect to the start of the first switching game, or the game ball does not arrive at the predetermined area due to the occurrence of a launch failure. In the first switching game, the game ball may not enter the first entrance due to the occurrence of a situation, and as a result, the third game in which the player may be given a privilege may not be executed. On the other hand, by shortening the blank period, it is possible to suppress the stoppage in the blank period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is not inserted into the first entrance in the first switching game due to the delay in launching the game ball, so that the occurrence of the situation in which the third game is not executed can be suppressed.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D4, wherein the interval is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the third game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D5, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or longer than the theoretical maximum time of the third game. Therefore, for example, when it is decided to execute the maximum number (for example, 16R) of the third switching game as the third game, it is assumed that the maximum time (so-called full open) assumed in all the third switching games is required. Also, it becomes possible to end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and the execution of the first switching game in the first game being started during the execution of the third game. .. As a result, in the first switching game, a situation in which the second specific condition is not satisfied (so-called puncture occurs) even though the game ball enters the first entrance, or the first switching game is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix D6]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D5, wherein the interval is set to be equal to or greater than the sum of the theoretical maximum time of the second game and the theoretical maximum time of the third game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D6, the interval between the first switching games is set to be equal to or greater than the total time between the theoretical maximum time of the second game and the theoretical maximum time of the third game. The second game can also be ended at the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, even if the second game is executed before the execution of the third game, it is possible to end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix E1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means (the third electric accessory means) based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is performed when the game ball enters the second entrance (384). The third game execution means (41) executed by controlling 391) and
A route defining means (35) that defines the movement route of a game ball launched into a predetermined area (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route, and
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games,
The third entry port (394) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter.
A gaming machine characterized in that the theoretical maximum time of the third game is substantially the same as or less than or equal to the interval.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, since the gaming ball launched into the predetermined area is moved on the same route defined by the route defining means, the moving of the gaming ball moving along the moving route defined by the route defining means. The speed is made uniform among the gaming balls. Since the third entrance is provided at a position where a game ball that moves along a movement path defined by the route defining means can enter, when the game ball is launched into a predetermined area, the third game In the third switching game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the third entrance is made uniform among the game balls. Therefore, as the end condition (third predetermined condition) of the third switching game of the third game, for example, a predetermined time has passed since the third allowable state was set, and more than the maximum number of game balls are inserted into the third entrance. When it is set to be balled or the like, the time required for the third switching game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the third game can be made uniform. In particular, when the theoretical maximum time of the third game is substantially the same as or less than the interval, for example, when it is determined to execute the maximum number (for example, 16R) of the third switching game as the third game. Even if the maximum time (so-called full open) assumed in all the third switching games is required, the third game can be completed in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, when the first game is executed, it becomes easy to end the third game in the interval between the first switching games. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and the execution of the first switching game in the first game being started during the execution of the third game. In the 1-switching game, the second specific condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the first entry slot (so-called puncture occurs), or the first switching game is executed and the third entry is made. It is possible to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as a situation in which the game ball cannot be inserted into the mouth.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.8 times or more and 0.99 times or less of the interval.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E2, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.85 times or more and 0.95 times or less of the interval.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix E2 and Appendix E3, the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.8 times or more and 0.99 times or less, preferably 0.85 times or more and 0.95 times or less, which is shorter than the interval. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the third game can be completed in the interval between the first switching games. As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress the disadvantage from being given to the player.

[Appendix E4]
The games according to the appendices E1 to E3, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.8 times or more and 1 times or less the time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the second game from the interval. Machine.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E4, wherein the theoretical maximum time of the third game is 0.9 times or more and 1 time or less the time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the second game from the interval.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix E4 and Appendix E5, the theoretical maximum time of the third game is shorter than the remaining time obtained by subtracting the theoretical maximum time of the second game from the interval, and is 0.85 times or more and 0.95 times the remaining time. It is set to the following, preferably 0.9 times or more and 1 time or less. Therefore, not only the third game but also the second game can be ended at the interval between the first switching games. As a result, even if the second game is executed before the execution of the third game, it is possible to end the third game at the interval between the first switching games. As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix E6]
The second entry port (384) is provided at a position where a gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. The gaming machine described in any of the appendices E5.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E6, since the second entrance is provided at a position where the gaming ball that moves along the moving path defined by the route defining means can enter, the gaming ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the second game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the second entrance is made uniform. Therefore, as the end condition (second predetermined condition) of the second switching game of the second game, for example, a predetermined time has passed since the second allowable state was set, and more than the maximum number of game balls are inserted into the second entrance. When it is set to be balled or the like, the time required for the second switching game can be made uniform, and as a result, the time required for the second game can be made uniform. This makes it easy to end the second game in the interval between the first switching games when the first game is executed. Therefore, due to the non-uniformity of the execution time of the second game, the interval between the first switching games ends during the execution of the third game executed after the end of the second game, and the third game is in effect. Since it is possible to easily prevent the execution of the first switching game in the first game from being started, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned disadvantage from being given to the player.

Further, the game ball moving along the movement route defined by the route defining means can enter the second entrance, and is defined by the route defining means while the second allowable state is set. Since all the game balls that have moved along the moving path and reached the position where they can enter the second entrance can be entered into the second entrance, they can enter the second entrance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to waste balls that are not used. In addition, all of the game balls that have moved along the movement path defined by the route defining means and reached the position where the ball can enter the second entrance can be entered into the second entrance. In the second switching game of the second game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is not inserted into the second entrance (so-called puncture occurrence). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the third game is not executed because the third specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of a flat tire. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage if the player cannot acquire the privilege that the player can originally acquire by executing the third game.

[Appendix E7]
The first ball entry port (376) is provided at a position where a gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. The gaming machine described in any of the appendices E5.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E7, since the first entrance is provided at a position where the gaming ball moving along the moving path defined by the route defining means can enter, the gaming ball is launched into a predetermined area. In this case, in the second switching game of the first game, the time from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into the first entrance is made uniform. Therefore, in the first switching game of the first game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is not inserted into the first entry slot (so-called puncture occurrence). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the second specific condition is not satisfied due to the occurrence of a flat tire, and eventually the third game is not executed because the third specific condition is not satisfied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage if the player cannot acquire the privilege that the player can originally acquire by executing the third game.

[Appendix F1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the first game determination means (41) that determines whether or not to execute the first game by the first game execution means (41) (lottery per drawing), and
The determination result display means (361) for displaying the determination result by the first game determination means (41), and
The display control means (41) for controlling the display content of the determination result display means, and the display control means (41).
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means (the third electric accessory means) based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is performed when the game ball enters the second entrance (384). The third game execution means (41) executed by controlling 391) and
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games,
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
The display control means (41) is determined by the first game determination means (41) when it is determined by the first game determination means (41) to execute the first game. A gaming machine characterized in that the content reflecting the number of times the game is executed is displayed on the determination result display means (361).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F1, when the number of times the first switching game is executed is a plurality of times, the first is as long as the second specific condition and the third specific condition are satisfied according to the number of times the first switching game is executed. The switching game, the second game, and the third game are repeatedly executed. That is, when the first switching game is executed a plurality of times by the satisfaction of the first specific condition, the third game in which the player can acquire the privilege is executed according to the number of times the first switching game is executed. A gaming machine having a high level of playability is provided. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention and interest in the game and improve the player's motivation to play. Then, the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is determined by the first game determination means, and the determination result by the first game determination means including the execution number is displayed on the determination result display means. Therefore, the player can grasp the determination result by the first game determination means by the determination result display means, and when the determination result is to execute the first game, the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game can be determined. I can grasp it. Then, by grasping the number of times of the first switching game in the first game, it becomes possible to grasp the maximum number of executions of the third game in which the privilege can be acquired. As a result, the new playability is added with the playability that allows the player to grasp the maximum number of times the third game that can obtain the privilege is executed, thereby increasing the attention and interest in the game and increasing the player's motivation to play. It will be possible to improve it further. Further, for example, by predicting whether or not the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the third game, the degree of attention and interest in the game is improved, and after the end of the third game, the first game of the first game is performed. Since it can be predicted that the game ball needs to be inserted into the first entrance when the one-switching game is executed, the third game is executed when the game ball is not inserted into the first entrance. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of not being done.

[Appendix F2]
The display control means (41) causes the determination result display means (361) to display a number that matches the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41). The gaming machine described in Appendix F1 as a feature.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F2, a number matching the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determining means is displayed on the determination result display means, so that the player can execute the first switching game. Can be grasped directly and easily. As a result, for example, it is possible to easily predict whether or not the first switching game of the first game will be executed after the end of the third game, thereby improving the degree of attention and interest in the game, and the first after the end of the third game. When the first switching game of the game is executed, it can be easily predicted that the game ball needs to be inserted into the first entrance, so that the game ball is not inserted into the first entrance. The occurrence of the disadvantage that the third game is not executed is more reliably prevented.

[Appendix F3]
The symbol display means (341) in which the decorative symbol showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed.
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
The symbol display control means (51) is
The determination result by the first game determination means (41) is displayed, and the determination result is displayed.
Contents reflecting the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41) when it is determined by the first game determination means (41) to execute the first game. The gaming machine according to the appendix F1 or the appendix F2, characterized in that is displayed on the symbol display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F3, the number of times the first switching game is executed in the first game is displayed in the symbol display means in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, in addition to the determination result display means. Therefore, since the player can grasp the determination result in the first game determination means by the symbol display means, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to the symbol display means. Further, in a gaming machine provided with both a determination result display means and a symbol display means, the symbol display means is usually arranged more easily than the determination result display means. Therefore, as compared with the case of paying attention to the determination result display means, the player can easily predict whether or not the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the third game, for example, and thus the third game. When the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the above, it can be easily predicted that the game ball needs to be inserted into the first entrance. As a result, it is possible to more easily prevent the occurrence of the disadvantage that the third game is not executed because the game ball is not inserted into the first entrance.

[Appendix F4]
The symbol display control means (51) displays the decorative symbol on an effective line set in the symbol display means (341), with numbers matching the number of executions of the first switching game as doublets. The gaming machine according to the appendix F3, which is characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F4, since the number corresponding to the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determining means is displayed as doublet and the decorative symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the player is the first. The number of times the switching game is executed can be grasped more directly and easily. As a result, when the first switching game of the first game is executed after the end of the third game, it can be more easily predicted that the game ball needs to be inserted into the first entrance. Since the game ball is not inserted into the entrance, the disadvantage that the third game is not executed is more reliably prevented.

[Appendix F5]
When the symbol display control means (51) variablely displays the decorative symbol in the symbol display control means (51), the symbol display control means (51) determines by the first game determination means (41) in the symbol display control means (51). The gaming machine according to annex F3 or annex F4, characterized in that a gaming effect that suggests or clearly indicates a result is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F5, in the symbol display means in which the determination result in the first game determination means is displayed by the decorative symbol, the determination result in the first game determination means is suggested or clearly shown during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The game production is executed. As a result, the player can enjoy predicting the possibility that the determination result is to execute the first game by paying attention to the game effect until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Appendix F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices F1 to F5, wherein the selection rate is set lower as the first switching game is executed more frequently.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F6, the selection rate is set lower as the first switching game has a larger number of executions of the first switching game. On the other hand, as the number of times the first switching game is executed increases, the number of times the third game is executed during the execution of the first game increases, so that the privilege that the player can acquire may increase. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting to obtain a determination result in which the number of times the first switching game is executed is large.

[Appendix G1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means (the third electric accessory means) based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is performed when the game ball enters the second entrance (384). The third game execution means (41) executed by controlling 391) and
Equipped with
The first electric accessory means (371) has a delay portion (373) that delays the movement of the game ball in the first electric accessory means (371).
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the third game is executed at an interval between the first switching games.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G1, a delay portion is provided in the first electric accessory means that restricts or allows the entry of the gaming ball into the first entrance. Therefore, when the game ball moves on the first electric accessory means, the delay portion can secure a long residence time of the game ball on the first electric accessory means. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the game ball will enter the first starting port. As a result, the possibility that the second game is executed is increased by increasing the possibility that the second specific condition that can be satisfied when the game ball enters the first entrance is increased, and further, the possibility that the second game is executed is increased. By increasing the possibility that the third specific condition, which is established when the game ball enters the second entrance, is increased, there is a possibility that the third game, in which the player can be given a privilege, is executed. Is enhanced. In this way, when the first switching game is executed in the first game, it is possible to increase the possibility that the third game, in which the player can be given a privilege, is executed, which is an unnecessary disadvantage for the player. Can be suppressed.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G1, wherein the residence time of the gaming ball in the first electric accessory means (371) is equal to or longer than the firing interval of the gaming ball.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G2, wherein the residence time of the gaming ball in the first electric accessory means (371) is 1 time or more and 5 times or less the firing interval of the gaming ball.

[Appendix G4]
The gaming machine according to the appendix G3, wherein the residence time of the gaming ball in the first electric accessory means (371) is 1 times or more and 3 times or less the firing interval of the gaming ball.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices G2 to G4, the residence time of the gaming ball in the first electric accessory means is equal to or longer than the firing interval of the gaming ball, for example, 1 to 5 times the firing interval of the gaming ball, preferably the gaming ball. It is 1 times or more and 3 times or less of the firing interval of. Therefore, when the game balls are continuously launched toward the first electric accessory means, the state in which at least one game ball stays on the first electric accessory means is maintained. As a result, when the first electric accessory means is operated in the first switching game, the game ball retained in the first electric accessory means can be entered into the first entrance. The possibility that the second game will be executed is further increased by further increasing the possibility that the second specific condition that can be satisfied when the game ball enters the first entrance is further increased, and as a result, the possibility that the second game is executed is further increased. By further increasing the possibility that the third specific condition, which is established when the game ball enters the second entrance, is further increased, there is a possibility that the third game, in which the player can be given a privilege, will be executed. Is further enhanced. In this way, when the first switching game is executed in the first game, it is possible to further increase the possibility that the third game, in which the player can be given a privilege, is executed, which is unnecessary for the player. It is possible to further suppress the giving of profits.

[Appendix G5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices G1 to G4, wherein the delay portion moves the gaming ball in a meandering path in the first electric accessory means (371).

[Appendix G6]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G5, wherein the delay portion (373) has a guide portion that changes the moving direction of the gaming ball in the forward direction or the backward direction.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices G5 and G6, the movement of the gaming ball in the first electric accessory means is delayed by the delay portion having a simple configuration, and the time for the gaming ball to stay in the first electric accessory means is lengthened. can do. For example, when the first electric accessory means is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the first electric accessory means by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix G7]
Further provided with a route defining means (35) that defines the movement route of the game ball launched into a predetermined region (for example, the right region of the game board) on the same route.
The first ball entry port (376) is provided at a position where a gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter. The gaming machine described in any of the appendices G6.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G7, since the movement path of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is defined to the same route by the route defining means, the moving speed of the gaming ball launched into the predetermined area is made uniform. As a result, it becomes possible to make the game ball exist at a position where the ball can enter the first entrance at an interval substantially corresponding to the firing interval of the game ball, and the movement speed and the movement path of the game ball become uneven. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball does not enter the first ball entry port. As a result, since the occurrence of the situation where the second specific condition or the third specific condition is not satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied is suppressed, the occurrence of the situation where the profit obtained by executing the third game cannot be enjoyed is suppressed. can.

[Appendix G8]
The first ball entry port (376) is provided below the first electric accessory means (371).
The gaming machine according to Appendix G7, wherein the first electric accessory means (371) is provided in the route defining means (35).

[Appendix G9]
The first electric accessory means (371) is a first ball entry port (351) provided above the first ball entry port (376) in the route defining means (35). A first restricted position (standby position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into (376) and a first allowable position (operating position) that allows the game ball to enter the first entry port (376). The gaming machine according to Appendix G8, which is characterized by being movable between.

[Appendix G10]
The first limiting position is a position for closing the first opening (351).
The gaming machine according to Appendix G9, wherein the first permissible position is a position at which the first opening (351) is opened.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices G8 to G10, the movement speed of the gaming ball launched into the predetermined area is defined to the same route by the route defining means, so that the moving speed is made uniform, so that the first electric accessory means It is possible to keep a certain number of game balls at all times. As a result, when the first permissible state is set, the game ball retained in the first electric accessory means can be surely entered into the first ball entry port. Therefore, after the first specific condition is satisfied, the first ball is entered. 2 It is possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the specific condition or the third specific condition is not satisfied, and as a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the profit obtained by executing the third game cannot be enjoyed.

[Appendix G11]
The first ball entry port (376) is provided in the first ball entry portion (372) having a first upper opening.
The first electric accessory means (371) can move in the front-rear direction between the first limiting position that covers the first upper opening and the first allowable position that opens the first upper opening. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G1 to G10.

[Appendix G12]
The gaming ball retained in the first electric accessory means (371) is dropped toward the first upper opening when it is moved backward from the first limiting position to the first allowable position. The gaming machine according to the appendix G11.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix G11 and the appendix G12, by moving the first electric accessory means from the first restricted position to the first allowable position, the gaming ball moving the first electric accessory means falls and the first The ball is entered into the first ball entry portion through the upper opening, and as a result, the game ball is entered into the first ball entry port. Therefore, it becomes easy to insert the game ball retained in the first electric accessory means into the first entrance, and the first operation time of the first electric accessory means is simply specified. The time of the switching game can be fixed. This can contribute to the fixation of a series of games of the first switching game, the second game, and the third game, and the third game is completed within the interval until the next switching game is executed. Will be easier.

[Appendix H1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means (the third electric accessory means) based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is performed when the game ball enters the second entrance (384). The third game execution means (41) executed by controlling 391) and
A route defining means (35) that defines the movement route of a game ball launched into a predetermined area (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route, and
Retention means (391, 395, 398, 399) for retaining a game ball that has moved along the movement path at a position where the game ball can enter the third entry port (394) in the third game switching. )When,
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games,
A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball retained in the retaining means (391, 395, 398, 399) is entered into the third entry port (394) in the third allowable state.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H1, a certain number of game balls are retained in the retention means in the third switching game, and when the third allowable state is switched, a certain number of game balls retained in the retention means are inserted in the third position. The ball is entered into the ball mouth. Therefore, it is sufficient to set the time of the third permissible state in a short time within the range in which a certain number of game balls retained in the retention means can enter the third entrance, and the time required for the third switching game is short. It can be fixed in time. This makes it easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed. Further, even if the time required for the third switching game is set to a short time, a certain number of game balls can be entered into the third entrance by providing the retention means, which is required for the third switching game. Preventing the disadvantage of the player that can occur by setting the time to a short time, that is, the decrease in the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player due to the decrease in the number of game balls that can be entered into the third entrance. can.

The retention means is not limited to the means for retaining the game ball in a stopped state, and also includes means for delaying the movement of the game ball by, for example, increasing the movement distance or decreasing the movement speed.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, wherein the retaining means (395, 398) is for retaining a gaming ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

Note: In the gaming machine according to H2, since the gaming balls are retained in the third electric accessory means, a certain number of gaming balls are retained in the third electric accessory means in a short time due to the operation of the third electric accessory means. Can be entered into the third entrance. As a result, the time required for the third switching game can be fixed in a shorter time, and it becomes easier to finish the third game within the interval until the first switching game is executed next.

[Appendix H3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H2, wherein the staying means (395, 398) is a delay portion for delaying the movement of the gaming ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

Note: In the gaming machine according to H3, the gaming ball can be retained in the third electric accessory means by a simple configuration in which a delay portion for delaying the movement of the gaming ball in the third electric accessory means is provided.

[Appendix H4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H3, wherein the delay portion (395) defines a movement path in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H4, wherein the delay portion (398) moves the gaming ball along a meandering path in the third electric accessory means (391).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H4 and the appendix H5, the gaming ball is retained in the third electric accessory means by a simple configuration in which the movement path of the game ball in the third electric accessory means is defined as a meandering path or the like. Can be done.

[Appendix H6]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H3, wherein the delay portion (398) reduces the moving speed of the gaming ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix H7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H6, wherein the delay portion (398) is a concave portion or a convex portion provided in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix H8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H7, wherein the delay portion (398) is a plurality of concave portions or a plurality of convex portions arranged in a scattered pattern in the third electric accessory means (391).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices H6 to H8, the gaming ball has a simple configuration in which the moving speed of the gaming ball in the third electric accessory means is reduced by providing a concave portion or a convex portion in the third electric accessory means. Can be retained in the third electric accessory means.

[Appendix H9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H2, wherein the staying means (398) is such that the third electric accessory means (391) holds a gaming ball.

[Appendix H10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H9, wherein the staying means (398) is a plurality of grooves arranged side by side in the moving direction of the gaming balls in the third electric accessory means (391).

In the gaming machines according to the appendix H9 and the appendix H10, the gaming ball is played by the third electric accessory means by providing a plurality of grooves or the like in the third electric accessory means so that the third electric accessory means holds the gaming ball. It can be retained in a physical means.

[Appendix H11]
The third electric accessory means (391) is provided at the third opening (353) provided above the third entry port (394) in the route defining means (35). A third restricted position (standby position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into (394) and a third allowable position (operating position) that allows the game ball to enter the third entry port (394). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H2 to H10, characterized in that it can be moved between.

[Appendix H12]
The third limiting position is a position for closing the third opening (353).
The gaming machine according to Appendix H11, wherein the third allowable position is a position at which the third opening (353) is opened.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix H11 and the appendix H12, the movement speed of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is defined to the same route by the route defining means, so that the moving speed is made uniform, so that the third electric accessory means It is possible to retain a certain number of game balls in the retaining means. As a result, when the third permissible state is set, the game ball retained in the third electric accessory means can be reliably entered into the third entrance, so that the player can enter the third switching game. It is possible to more reliably prevent the number of game balls that can be acquired from decreasing.

[Appendix H13]
The third ball entry port (394) is provided in a third ball entry portion (392) having a third upper opening.
The third electric accessory means (391) can move in the front-rear direction between the third limiting position that covers the third upper opening and the third allowable position that opens the third upper opening. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H2 to H12.

[Appendix H14]
The gaming ball retained in the third electric accessory means (391) is dropped toward the third upper opening when it is moved backward from the third restricted position to the third allowable position. The gaming machine according to the appendix H13, characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H13 and the appendix H14, by moving the third electric accessory means from the third restricted position to the third allowable position, the gaming ball moving the third electric accessory means falls and the third The ball is entered into the third entry portion through the upper opening, and as a result, the game ball is entered into the third entry opening. Therefore, it becomes easy to insert the game ball retained in the third electric accessory means into the third entrance, and the third electric accessory means only by defining the operating time of the third electric accessory means. The time of the switching game can be fixed. This can contribute to fixing the time required for the third game, and makes it easy to finish the third game within the interval until the first switching game is executed next.

[Appendix H15]
The staying means (391) is composed of the third electric accessory means (391) and the third game executing means (41).
The third game executing means (41) is a game ball by the third electric accessory means (391) until the third restricted state is switched to the third allowable state in the third switching game. The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, wherein the gaming machine is switched to a third retention state in which movement is restricted and retention is performed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H15, the gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the route defining means is retained by being switched to the third retention state in the third switching game, and the third allowable state is changed from the third retention state. By switching to the state, a certain number of stagnant gaming balls are entered into the third entrance. Therefore, by controlling the switching from the third retention state to the third permissible state, the number of game balls entered into the third entrance can be controlled and the time required for the third switching game can be fixed. As a result, it becomes easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed while ensuring the game value given to the player.

[Appendix H16]
The third entry port (394) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter.
The gaming machine according to Appendix H15, wherein the third electric accessory means (391) blocks the movement path in the third restricted state.

[Appendix H17]
The third electric accessory means (391) has a limiting portion (391B) for limiting the movement of a gaming ball by blocking the moving path in the third restricted state. Gaming machine.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices H16 and H17, the time required for the third switching game is fixed by a simple configuration in which the movement path of the gaming ball is blocked by the third electric accessory means, and then the first switching game is executed. It becomes possible to finish the third game within the interval until it is played.

[Appendix H18]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, wherein the retaining means (399) is for holding the gaming ball in a predetermined region by applying an electromagnetic force or a magnetic force to the gaming ball.

[Appendix H19]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H18, wherein the retaining means (399) holds a certain number of gaming balls above the third entrance (394).

[Appendix H20]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H18, wherein the staying means (399) causes the third electric accessory means (391) to hold a certain number of gaming balls.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices H18 to H20, the time required for the third switching game is fixed by a simple configuration in which the gaming ball is held by using electromagnetic force or magnetic force, and then the first switching game is executed. It becomes possible to finish the third game within the interval up to.

[Appendix I1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means (the third electric accessory means) based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is performed when the game ball enters the second entrance (384). The third game execution means (41) executed by controlling 391) and
A route defining means (35) that defines the movement route of a game ball launched into a predetermined area (for example, the right region of the game board) in the same route, and
Retention means (391, 395, 398, 399) for retaining a game ball that has moved along the movement path at a position where the game ball can enter the third entry port (394) in the third game switching. )When,
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games,
The game ball retained in the retention means (391,395,398,399) is entered into the third entry port (394) in the third allowable state.
The third switching game is a gaming machine characterized in that the permissible ball entry time for switching to the third restricted state after being switched to the third permissible state is fixed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, the permissible ball entry time for switching to the third permissible state after being switched to the third permissible state in the third switching game of the third game is fixed. Therefore, since the time required for the third switching game is fixed regardless of the number of game balls entering the third entrance, the time required for the third game including the third switching game should be fixed. Will be easier. This makes it easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interval between the first switching games from ending during the execution of the third game and the execution of the first switching game in the first game being started during the execution of the third game. Therefore, in the first switching game, a situation in which the second specific condition is not satisfied (so-called puncture occurs) even though the game ball enters the first entrance, or the first switching game is executed, the first 3 It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the ball entrance, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix I2]
The third game includes a plurality of the third switching games.
The gaming machine according to Appendix I1, wherein each of the third switching games has a fixed permissible ball entry time.

[Appendix I3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I2, wherein each of the third switching games has the permissible ball entry time fixed at the same time.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix I2 and the appendix I3, when the third switching game is executed a plurality of times in the third game, the third switching game is switched to the third allowable state and then the third restricted state. The time is fixed at the same time. Therefore, even when the third switching game is executed a plurality of times in the third game, the time required for each third switching game is fixed, and the time required for the third game can be fixed. As a result, it becomes easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed, and it is possible to appropriately suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

[Appendix I4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note I1 to Supplementary note I3, wherein the permissible ball entry time is fixed to be equal to or less than the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the gaming ball.

[Appendix I5]
The permissible ball entry time is fixed to any time within the range of 0.1 times or more and 1 times or less (for example, 0.06 seconds or more and 0.6 seconds or less) of the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). The gaming machine according to Appendix I4, which is characterized by the fact that it is used.

[Appendix I6]
The permissible ball entry time is fixed to any time within the range of 0.2 times or more and 0.8 times or less (for example, 0.12 seconds or more and 0.48 seconds or less) of the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). The gaming machine according to Appendix I5, which is characterized by being made.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices I4 to I6, the permissible ball entry time for switching to the third permissible state and then to the third restricted state is less than or equal to the firing interval of the gaming ball, for example, 0.1 times or more and 1 times the firing interval. Hereinafter, it is preferably fixed at any time in the range of 0.2 times or more and 0.8 times or less of the firing interval. By setting the permissible time for entering the ball to be equal to or less than the firing interval of the game ball, the time required for the third switching game is fixed in an extremely short time, and as a result, the third switching game is executed a plurality of times in the third game. Even in this case, the time required for the third game can be fixed in a short time. Therefore, even when the third switching game is executed a plurality of times in the third game, it becomes easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed, and the player It is possible to appropriately suppress giving unnecessary disadvantages to the user.

[Appendix I7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I6, wherein the retention means (395, 398) is for retaining a gaming ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I7, since the game balls are retained in the third electric accessory means, a certain number of game balls are retained in the third electric accessory means in a short time due to the operation of the third electric accessory means. Can be entered into the third entrance. As a result, the time required for the third switching game can be fixed in a shorter time, and it becomes easier to finish the third game within the interval until the first switching game is executed next.

[Appendix I8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I7, wherein the staying means (395, 398) is a delay portion for delaying the movement of the gaming ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I8, the gaming ball can be retained in the third electric accessory means by a simple configuration in which a delay portion for delaying the movement of the gaming ball in the third electric accessory means is provided.

[Appendix I9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I8, wherein the delay portion (395) defines a movement path in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix I10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I9, wherein the delay portion (398) moves the gaming ball along a meandering path in the third electric accessory means (391).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix I9 and the appendix I10, the gaming ball is retained in the third electric accessory means by a simple configuration in which the movement path of the game ball in the third electric accessory means is defined as a meandering path or the like. Can be done.

[Appendix I11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I8, wherein the delay portion (398) reduces the moving speed of the gaming ball in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix I12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I11, wherein the delay portion (398) is a concave portion or a convex portion provided in the third electric accessory means (391).

[Appendix I13]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I12, wherein the delay portion (398) is a plurality of concave portions or a plurality of convex portions arranged in a scattered pattern in the third electric accessory means (391).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices I11 to I13, the gaming ball has a simple configuration in which the moving speed of the gaming ball in the third electric accessory means is reduced by providing a concave portion or a convex portion in the third electric accessory means. Can be retained in the third electric accessory means.

[Appendix I14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I7, wherein the staying means (398) is such that the third electric accessory means (391) holds a gaming ball.

[Appendix I15]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I14, wherein the staying means (398) is a plurality of grooves arranged side by side in the moving direction of the gaming balls in the third electric accessory means (391).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices I14 and I15, the gaming ball is played by the third electric accessory means by providing a plurality of grooves or the like in the third electric accessory means so that the third electric accessory means holds the gaming ball. It can be retained in a physical means.

[Appendix I16]
The third electric accessory means (391) is provided at the third opening (353) provided above the third entry port (394) in the route defining means (35). A third restricted position (standby position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into (394) and a third allowable position (operating position) that allows the game ball to enter the third entry port (394). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I15, characterized in that it can be moved between.

[Appendix I17]
The third limiting position is a position for closing the third opening (353).
The gaming machine according to Appendix I16, wherein the third permissible position is a position at which the third opening (353) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix I16 and the appendix I17, the movement speed of the game ball launched into the predetermined area is defined to the same route by the route defining means, so that the moving speed is made uniform, so that the third electric accessory means It is possible to retain a certain number of game balls in the retaining means. As a result, when the third permissible state is set, the game ball retained in the third electric accessory means can be reliably entered into the third entrance, so that the player can enter the third switching game. It is possible to more reliably prevent the number of game balls that can be acquired from decreasing.

[Appendix I18]
The third ball entry port (394) is provided in a third ball entry portion (392) having a third upper opening.
The third electric accessory means (391) can move in the front-rear direction between the third limiting position that covers the third upper opening and the third allowable position that opens the third upper opening. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I7 to I17.

[Appendix I19]
The gaming ball retained in the third electric accessory means (391) is dropped toward the third upper opening when it is moved backward from the third restricted position to the third allowable position. The gaming machine according to Appendix I18, which comprises the above.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices I18 and I19, by moving the third electric accessory means from the third restricted position to the third allowable position, the gaming ball moving the third electric accessory means falls and the third The ball is entered into the third entry portion through the upper opening, and as a result, the game ball is entered into the third entry opening. Therefore, it becomes easy to insert the game ball retained in the third electric accessory means into the third entrance, and the third electric accessory means only by defining the operating time of the third electric accessory means. The time of the switching game can be fixed. This can contribute to fixing the time required for the third game, and makes it easy to finish the third game within the interval until the first switching game is executed next.

[Appendix I20]
The staying means (391) is composed of the third electric accessory means (391) and the third game executing means (41).
The third game executing means (41) is a game ball by the third electric accessory means (391) until the third restricted state is switched to the third allowable state in the third switching game. The gaming machine according to Appendix I1, wherein the gaming machine is switched to a third retention state in which movement is restricted and retention is performed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I20, the gaming ball moving along the movement path defined by the route defining means is retained by being switched to the third retention state in the third switching game, and the third allowable state is changed from the third retention state. By switching to the state, a certain number of stagnant gaming balls are entered into the third entrance. Therefore, by controlling the switching from the third retention state to the third permissible state, the number of game balls entered into the third entrance can be controlled and the time required for the third switching game can be fixed. As a result, it becomes easy to end the third game within the interval until the next first switching game is executed while ensuring the game value given to the player.

[Appendix I21]
The third entry port (394) is provided at a position where a game ball moving along the movement path defined by the path defining means (35) can enter.
The gaming machine according to Appendix I20, wherein the third electric accessory means (391) blocks the movement path in the third restricted state.

[Appendix I22]
The third electric accessory means (391) has a limiting portion (391B) for limiting the movement of the gaming ball by blocking the moving path in the third restricted state, according to the appendix I21. Gaming machine.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices I21 and I22, the time required for the third switching game is fixed by a simple configuration in which the movement path of the gaming ball is blocked by the third electric accessory means, and then the first switching game is executed. It becomes possible to finish the third game within the interval until it is played.

[Appendix I23]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I1, wherein the retaining means (399) is for holding the gaming ball in a predetermined region by applying an electromagnetic force or a magnetic force to the gaming ball.

[Appendix I24]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I23, wherein the retaining means (399) holds a certain number of gaming balls above the third entrance (394).

[Appendix I25]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I23, wherein the staying means (399) causes the third electric accessory means (391) to hold a certain number of gaming balls.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices I23 to I25, the time required for the third switching game is fixed by a simple configuration in which the gaming ball is held by using electromagnetic force or magnetic force, and then the first switching game is executed. It becomes possible to finish the third game within the interval up to.

[Appendix J1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
A second ball opening including a special second ball opening (384) and a normal second ball opening (385), which are different from the first ball opening (376), capable of entering a game ball.
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
In the second permissible state, a special ball entry allowance state that allows a game ball to the special second ball entry port (384) and a special ball entry restriction that limits the game ball to the special second ball entry port (384). A switching unit (386) that switches between states and
The switching unit control means (41) that controls the operation of the switching unit (386), and
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means, based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is performed when the game ball enters the special second entrance (384). A third game executing means (41) executed by controlling (391), and
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the third game is executed at an interval between the first switching games.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J1, by switching the switching unit in the second permissible state, a state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the special second entrance and a state in which the ball is restricted is selected. Therefore, various playability can be imparted by controlling the switching of the switching unit in the second permissible state. For example, the probability of a game ball entering the special second entry slot in the second allowance state can be adjusted by the switching pattern of the switching unit (the number of switchings and the time of the special entry allowance state). As a result, the game property that the game ball is surely entered into the special second entrance by launching the normal game ball in the second game, or the game ball into the special second entrance in the second game. It is possible to impart a game property in which a so-called puncture occurs, in which the jackpot game is not executed because the ball is not entered. Then, since the puncture occurrence rate can be adjusted by adjusting the ball entry probability, the playability can be adjusted by the puncture occurrence rate.

Further, as described later, when the third game is executed in the second permissible state, it is also possible to control the switching unit to a state in which the entry of the game ball into the special second entrance is restricted. Is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opportunity for the third game to be executed during the execution of the third game, and thus it is possible to prevent the third game from being started during the execution of the third game.

Further, in the second permissible state, it is also possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the special second entry port when the game ball is entered into the special second entry opening. This makes it possible to adjust the number of game balls entering the special second entrance, for example, while limiting the number of balls entering the special second entrance to one, the remaining game balls Normally, the ball can be entered into the second entrance.

[Appendix J2]
The switching unit control means (41) is switched by the second game executing means (41) when a game ball is inserted into the special second entrance (384) in the second permissible state. The gaming machine according to Appendix J1, wherein the unit is controlled to switch from the special ball entry allowable state to the special ball entry restricted state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J2, the entry of the game ball into the special second entry slot is restricted by the entry of the game ball into the special second entry slot. This makes it possible to adjust the number of game balls entering the special second entrance, for example, while limiting the number of balls entering the special second entrance to one, the remaining game balls Normally, the ball can be entered into the second entrance.

[Appendix J3]
The game according to Appendix J1 or Appendix J2, wherein the third specific condition is that a game ball is inserted into the special second entry slot in a state where the third game is not executed. Machine.

Note: In the gaming machine according to J3, when the third game is executed in the second allowable state, the switching unit may be controlled to a state in which the entry of the gaming ball into the special second entrance is restricted. It is possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opportunity for the third game to be executed during the execution of the third game, and thus it is possible to prevent the third game from being started during the execution of the third game.

[Appendix J4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions J1 to J3, wherein the second predetermined condition is that a predetermined time has elapsed after the switching to the second allowable state.

Note: The gaming machine according to J4 is switched to the second restricted state after a predetermined time has elapsed after being switched to the second allowable state. Therefore, depending on the setting of the predetermined time, the probability of the game ball entering the special second entry port in the second allowable state can be adjusted. As a result, the game property that the game ball is surely entered into the special second entrance by launching the normal game ball in the second game, or the game ball into the special second entrance in the second game. It is possible to impart a game property in which a so-called puncture occurs, in which the jackpot game is not executed because the ball is not entered. Then, since the puncture occurrence rate can be adjusted by adjusting the ball entry probability, the playability can be adjusted by the puncture occurrence rate.

[Appendix J5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix J4, wherein the predetermined time is set to a time equal to or longer than a firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of a gaming ball.

[Appendix J6]
The gaming machine according to Appendix J5, wherein the predetermined time is set to 1 time or more and 30 times or less (for example, 0.6 seconds or more and 18 seconds or less) of the firing interval.

[Appendix J7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix J5, wherein the predetermined time is set to twice or more and 20 times or less (for example, 1.2 seconds or more and 12 seconds or less) of the firing interval.

[Appendix J8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix J5, wherein the predetermined time is set to 3 times or more and 10 times or less (for example, 1.8 seconds or more and 6 seconds or less) of the firing interval.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices J5 to J8, the predetermined time from the switching to the second allowable state to the switching to the second restricted state is equal to or longer than the firing interval of the gaming ball, for example, 1 to 30 times the firing interval. Is set to, preferably 2 times or more and 20 times or less of the firing interval, and more preferably 3 times or more and 10 times or less of the firing interval. As a result, by launching a normal game ball in the second game, the game ball is surely entered into the special second entrance, and as long as the normal launch is performed, puncture does not occur.

[Appendix J9]
Described in any of the appendices J1 to J4, wherein the probability of entering the special second ball entry port (384) in the second permissible state is a predetermined probability lower than 100% by a certain probability. Gaming machine.

[Appendix J10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix J9, wherein the predetermined probability is set to 1% or more and 95% or less.

[Appendix J11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix J9, wherein the predetermined probability is set to 20% or more and 90% or less.

[Appendix J12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix J9, wherein the predetermined probability is set to 50% or more and 80% or less.

In the gaming machine according to any of the appendices J9 to J12, the probability of entering the special second ball entrance in the second permissible state is a predetermined probability lower than 100% by a certain probability, for example, 1% or more and 95% or less. Is set to, preferably 20% or more and 90% or less, and more preferably 50% or more and 80% or less. As a result, it is possible to impart a game property in which a so-called puncture occurs, in which the third game is not executed because the game ball is not inserted into the special second entrance in the second game. Then, since the puncture occurrence rate can be adjusted by adjusting the ball entry probability, the playability can be adjusted by the puncture occurrence rate.

[Appendix K1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means (the third electric accessory means) based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is performed when the game ball enters the second entrance (384). The third game execution means (41) executed by controlling 391) and
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games,
The interval is a gaming machine characterized by including a plurality of intervals having different times.

Note: In the gaming machine according to K1, a plurality of times are set as intervals between the first switching games. Therefore, it is possible to impart various playability by using a plurality of intervals having different times.

[Appendix K2]
The interval is a first interval set to a time during which the third game can be completed by the start of the next first game when the third game requires a theoretical maximum time, and the first interval is larger than the first interval. The gaming machine according to Appendix K1, which includes a second interval set for a long time.

Note: In the gaming machine related to K2, the third game can be completed by the start of the next first game in the first interval, and the next second interval is set to be longer than the first interval. Since the third game can be completed by the start of one game, the third game can be completed by the start of the next first game in both the first interval and the second interval. As a result, even when a plurality of intervals having different times are set, for example, the interval between the first switching games ends during the execution of the third game, and the first game is executed during the execution of the third game. It becomes possible to prevent the execution of the first switching game from being started. As a result, in the first switching game, a situation in which the second specific condition is not satisfied (so-called puncture occurs) even though the game ball enters the first entrance, or the first switching game is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the third entrance, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

Further, since the second interval has a longer time than the first interval, the blank time until the next first game is started is longer than that of the second interval. Therefore, in the second interval, various effects (for example, a notification effect described later, a remaining time effect that clearly indicates the time until the first switching game, and a mini game) are used by using the blank time until the next first game is started. Since it is also possible to perform specific effects such as effects), the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K3]
Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area (317) set in the game board (31), it is determined whether or not to execute the first game, and it is determined that the first game is executed. In this case, the first game determining means (41) for determining the number of times the first switching game is executed (for example, 1 to 7 times) to be executed in the first game, and
The first switching game number suggesting means (51, 341) that suggests the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game determined by the first game determining means (41), and
The first game determined by the first game determining means (41) rather than the number of times the first switched game is executed in the first game suggested by the first switching game number suggesting means (51, 341). Notification effect execution means (51, 341) for executing a notification effect for notifying that the number of times the first switching game is executed in the game is large, and
Further prepare
The gaming machine according to Appendix K2, wherein the notification effect executing means (51, 341) executes the notification effect when the interval is the second interval.

Note: In the gaming machine according to K3, in the second interval, the number of executions of the first switching game in the determined first game is larger than the number of executions of the first switching game in the suggested first game. The announcement effect to announce is executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that when the notification effect is executed, the number of times the first switching game is actually executed is larger than the number of times the suggested first switching game is executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the notification effect is executed. Then, when the notification effect is executed, it can be recognized that the number of executions of the first switching game is larger than the number of executions recognized based on the suggested number of executions, so that the interest of the game is improved. Further, by executing the notification effect in the second interval, the second interval set to a longer time than the first interval can be effectively used.

[Appendix K4]
The notification effect executing means (51, 341) is said in the second interval started after the end of the first switching game of the number of executions suggested by the first switching game number suggesting means (51, 341). The gaming machine according to Appendix K3, which is characterized by executing a notification effect.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K4, the notification effect is executed in the second interval started after the end of the first switching game of the suggested number of executions. That is, the notification effect is executed at the interval between the suggested final apparent first switching game and the next first switching game unknown to the player. Therefore, when the final first switching game, the second game, and the third game are executed, the player expects that the notification effect is executed during the execution of the games. You can enjoy the progress of. Then, when the notification effect is executed, at least one first switching game is executed after the end of the third game, and at least one second game and a third game are executed with this first switching game as an opportunity. The fun of the game is improved because it is possible to understand that can be executed.

[Appendix K5]
The notification effect is an effect executed after the execution of the end suggestion effect suggesting that the first game has ended, and is a revival effect clearly indicating that the first game is continuing. The gaming machine according to Appendix K3 or Appendix K4, which is a feature.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K5, after the execution of the end suggestion effect suggesting that the first game is completed, the revival effect indicating that the first game is continuing is executed as the notification effect. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game while expecting that the revival effect is executed even in the situation where it is determined that the first game has been completed. Then, when the revival effect is executed, the first switching game is executed at least once, and at least one second game and the third game can be executed with the first switching game as an opportunity. Since it can be grasped, the interest of the game is improved. In particular, the game when the resurrection effect is executed by executing the resurrection effect that clearly indicates that the first game is continued after the execution of the end suggestion effect that suggests that the first game has ended. Since the joy of the person is increased, the interest of the game is further improved.

[Appendix K6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions K3 to K5, wherein the notification effect executing means (51, 341) executes the notification effect in the three games.

[Appendix K7]
The third game includes at least a third switching game and an ending executed after the end of the third switching game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix K6, wherein the notification effect execution means (51, 341) executes the notification effect at the ending.

By the way, since the second game is executed triggered by the first game and the third game is executed triggered by the second game, the player is more interested in the third game than in the first game and the second game. Tends to be lower. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to the appendix K6 and the appendix K7, the notification effect can be executed in the third game, for example, in the ending of the third game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the third game by executing the notification effect in the third game in which the player's interest tends to be low.

[Appendix K8]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions K2 to K7, wherein the time difference between the second interval and the first interval is set to 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less of the first interval. ..

[Appendix K9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K8, wherein the time difference between the second interval and the first interval is set to 0.25 times or more and 4 times or less of the first interval.

[Appendix K10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K9, wherein the time difference between the second interval and the first interval is set to 0.5 times or more and 3 times or less of the first interval.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices K8 to K10, the time difference between the second interval and the first interval is set to 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less, preferably 0.25 times or more and 4 times or less of the first interval. Is set to, and more preferably 0.5 times or more and 3 times or less. By setting the time difference between the second interval and the first interval in such a range, various things such as notification effect at the ending of the third game while ending the third game within the second interval. It becomes possible to execute the production.

[Appendix K11]
The ending includes a first ending and a second ending that is set at a longer time than the first ending.
The gaming machine according to Appendix K10, wherein the notification effect execution means (51, 341) executes the notification effect in the second ending.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K11, the notification effect is executed in the second ending set at a longer time than the first ending. Therefore, sufficient time can be secured to execute the notification effect at the ending of the third game.

[Appendix K12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K11, wherein the time difference between the second ending and the first ending is set to 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less of the first ending time.

[Appendix K13]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K12, wherein the time difference between the second ending and the first ending is set to 0.25 times or more and 4 times or less the first ending time.

[Appendix K14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K13, wherein the time difference between the second ending and the first ending is set to 0.5 times or more and 3 times or less of the first ending time.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices K12 to K14, the time difference between the second ending and the first ending is set to 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less of the first ending time, preferably 0. It is set to 25 times or more and 4 times or less, and more preferably 0.5 times or more and 3 times or less of the first ending time. By setting the time difference between the second ending and the first ending in such a range, it is possible to execute various effects such as a notification effect in the ending of the third game.

[Appendix K15]
The start timing of the notification effect is set to a timing at which a time of more than 0.8 times and 1.2 times or less of the time corresponding to the first ending has elapsed since the start of the second ending. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note K11 to Supplementary note K14.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K15, the start timing of the notification effect is the timing when more than 0.8 times and 1.2 times or less of the time corresponding to the first ending has elapsed since the second ending was started. .. By starting the notification effect at such a timing (by executing the revival effect), the timing at which the announcement effect is started is the timing when a time corresponding to a short time elapses, so that the player can use it. It is possible to predict the timing when the announcement effect is executed. Therefore, when the ending is started, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the revival effect is executed at the timing when the time corresponding to the first ending elapses.

[Appendix K16]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions K11 to K15, wherein a plurality of start timings of the notification effect are set.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K16, a plurality of start timings of the notification effect are set. As a result, it is difficult to predict when the revival effect will be executed. Therefore, by executing the announcement activity effect at an unexpected timing, unexpected playability is given and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K17]
When a plurality of start timings of the notification effect are set, the start timing is a time of more than 0.1 times and 0.8 times or less of the time corresponding to the first ending after the second ending is started. The gaming machine according to Appendix K16, wherein the gaming machine includes at least one of an elapsed timing and an elapsed time of more than 1.2 times and not more than twice the time corresponding to the first ending.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K17, for example, the start timing of the notification effect is the timing when a time of more than 0.1 times and 0.8 times or less of the time corresponding to the first ending has elapsed since the start of the second ending. By setting, that is, by starting the notification effect at a relatively early unexpected timing after the start of the second ending, unexpected playability is imparted. In addition, the start timing of the notification effect is set to the timing when a time of more than 1.2 times and not more than twice the time corresponding to the first ending has elapsed since the second ending was started, so that the second ending is set. By starting the notification effect at an unexpected timing that the player thinks that the notification effect will not be executed after a relatively long time has passed since the start of the game, an unexpected playability is given.

[Appendix K18]
When the notification effect is executed by the notification effect execution means (51, 341), an effect that clearly or suggests that the notification effect is executed is executed before the execution of the notification effect is started. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions K3 to K17.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K18, when the notification effect is executed, an effect that clearly or suggests that the notification effect is executed is executed before the execution of the notification effect is started. By executing this effect, the expectation that the announcement effect will be executed is raised, the degree of attention to the progress of the game after the effect is executed is increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K19]
The appendix K3 is characterized in that the notification effect executing means (51, 341) executes the notification effect between the end of the third game in the second interval and the start of the next first game. Or the gaming machine described in Appendix K4.

Note: In the gaming machine according to K19, the blank period of the second interval from the end of the third game to the start of the next first switching game can be effectively used. Further, since none of the first switching game, the third game, and the third game of the first game is executed in the blank period, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the blank period of the game by executing the notification effect. Become.

[Appendix K20]
The interval is a first interval set to a time during which the third game can be completed by the start of the next first game when the third game requires a theoretical maximum time, and the first interval is larger than the first interval. The gaming machine according to Appendix K1, which includes a third interval set for a short time.

[Appendix K21]
The third game execution means (41) is
When the specified condition is satisfied, the third game is terminated before a predetermined timing at which the third game can be executed, triggered by the next first opening / closing game.
When the specified condition is not satisfied, the third game is terminated at a timing exceeding the predetermined timing at which the third game cannot be executed, triggered by the next first switching game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix K20, wherein the specified condition is that the third interval is executed.

Note: In the gaming machines related to K20 and K21, when the third game is executed in the interval between the first switching games in the first switching games of a plurality of times, when the specified conditions are satisfied, the next first switching game is used as an opportunity. The third game is completed by a predetermined timing (for example, within the interval between openings) in which the third game can be executed, but when the specified conditions are not satisfied, the third game is not completed by the predetermined timing. The third game ends after the start of the 1 switching game. Then, when the third game is completed by a predetermined timing, the third game that is triggered by the next first switching game can be executed. On the other hand, when the third game ends at a timing exceeding a predetermined timing, the third game triggered by the next first switching game is not executed. When the third game is executed beyond a predetermined timing, for example, the second game is not executed because the entry of the game ball into the first entrance in the first switching game is invalidated. The third game is not executed because the third game is not executed or the entry of the game ball into the second entrance in the second game is invalidated. Therefore, depending on whether or not the specified condition is satisfied, a game property is imparted in which whether or not the third game that is triggered by the next first switching game can be executed is determined. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the next third game can be executed by paying attention to whether or not the specified condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the third game, which has a lower degree of attention than the first game and the second game, which give an opportunity for the third game to be executed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K22]
The third interval is characterized in that, when the third game requires the theoretical maximum time and is completed by hand, the third game is set to a time that cannot be completed by the start of the next first game. The gaming machine described in Appendix K21.

Note: In the gaming machine according to K22, when the third game is executed in the first interval, the third game triggered by the next first switching game can be executed by a predetermined timing (for example, within the open interval). When the third game is completed and the third game is executed in the third interval set to a time shorter than the first interval, the third game is not completed by the predetermined timing and the next third game is performed. Occurs a puncture that does not run. Therefore, the player pays attention to the type of interval, for example, by paying attention to whether it is the first interval or the third interval (by paying attention to whether the end timing of the interval is early or late). It becomes possible to judge whether or not the next third game can be executed. As a result, it is possible to focus on the third game, which has a lower degree of attention than the first game and the second game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K23]
The third game includes a plurality of third games in which the number of executions of the third switching game is different.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions K20 to K22, wherein the specified condition is that a specific third game among the plurality of third games is executed in the third interval.

[Appendix K24]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K23, wherein the specific third game is a third game in which the number of executions of the third switching game among the plurality of third games is a predetermined number of times or less.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix K23 and the appendix K24, when the third game executed in the interval is a specific third game, for example, when the number of executions of the third switching game is a predetermined number or less, the third game. The third game is completed by a predetermined timing (for example, within the open interval) in which the third game can be executed triggered by the next first switching game, and the third game other than the specific third game is executed in the interval. If this is the case, a puncture occurs in which the third game is not completed by the predetermined timing and the next third game is not executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether the type of the third game is a specific third game, that is, by paying attention to the number of times the third switching game is executed in the third game, so that the next third game Can be determined whether or not is feasible. As a result, it is possible to focus on the third game, which has a lower degree of attention than the first game and the second game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K25]
The plurality of third games include a predetermined third game in which the number of executions of the third switching game exceeds the predetermined number of times.
The description in Appendix K24, wherein the number of times the third switching game is executed in the specific third game is ½ or more of the number of times the third switching game is executed in the predetermined third game. Gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K25, the number of times the third switching game is executed in the specific third game is less than 1/2 of the number of times the third switching game is executed in the predetermined third game. On the other hand, the defined condition is that a specific third game is executed at the interval. Then, when the specified condition is satisfied by the execution of the specific third game, the specific game is executed, and the specific third game or the predetermined third game is executed with the next first game as an opportunity. As a result, the player can obtain the privilege of the specific third game for two times, or the specification of the specific third game and the privilege of the predetermined third game. On the other hand, if the specified conditions are not satisfied by the execution of the predetermined third game, the predetermined game is executed and the third game triggered by the next first game is not executed, so that the player has one predetermined first game. Only the benefits of 3 games can be obtained. That is, when the number of executions of the third switching game is small and the specific third game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed as compared with the predetermined third game, the number of executions of the third switching game is large and the specific third game is executed. Compared to the case where a predetermined third game, which is advantageous to the player, is executed, the jackpot game triggered by the next first game is considered to be advantageous to the player. That is, the third game, which is considered to be disadvantageous to the player in the interval, is given a playability that is advantageous to the player as a whole.

[Appendix K26]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions K20 to K25, wherein the third interval is set to 0.5 times or more and 0.95 times or less of the first interval.

[Appendix K27]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K26, wherein the third interval is set to 0.55 times or more and 0.9 times or less the third interval.

[Appendix K28]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K27, wherein the fourth interval is set to 0.6 times or more and 0.8 times or less the third interval.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices K26 to K28, the fourth interval is set to 0.5 times or more and 0.95 times or less, preferably 0.55 times or more and 0.9 times or less of the third interval, and more. It is preferably set to 0.6 times or more and 0.8 times or less. By setting the 4th interval in such a range, when the 3rd game ends in the theoretical maximum time, the 3rd game can be ended within the 3rd interval, while within the 4th interval. It is possible to make the third game unfinishable, and if the third game ends within the third interval, there is a blank period until the next first switching game is started, that is, the first switching game, the second. It is possible to shorten the blank period in which neither the game nor the third game is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to a long blank period.

[Appendix K29]
A first game determination means (41) that determines whether or not to execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball through a specific area (317) set in the game board (31).
When the first game, the second game, and the third game are not executed, the determination result of whether or not to execute the first game by the first game determination means (41) is notified. The fourth game execution means (41) for executing the four games (Public game) and
The right holding means (41) for holding the right to execute the fourth game, and
Further prepare
When the right to execute the fourth game is reserved by the right holding means (41), the fourth game executing means (41) has the fourth game in the interval when the fourth specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to the appendix K1, which is characterized by executing the above.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K29, the right to execute the fourth game is reserved for the fourth game in which the determination result of whether or not to execute the first game is notified at the interval when the fourth specific condition is satisfied. It is executed on condition that it is. As a result, various information can be provided to the player by effectively using the interval, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game during the period when the player's interest in the interval is low.

[Appendix K30]
The fourth specific condition is characterized in that the blank period during which the first switching game, the second game, and the third game of the first game are not executed in the interval is a certain time or more. The gaming machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K30, when the blank period of the interval is a certain time or more, the fourth game is executed in the interval. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the blank period of the interval and provide a determination result of whether or not to execute the first game with the reserved right when the right to execute the fourth game is reserved. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period.

[Appendix K31]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K30, wherein the fixed time is 10% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 5 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

[Appendix K32]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K31, wherein the fixed time is 20% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 10 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

[Appendix K33]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K32, wherein the fixed time is 30% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 15 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices K31 to K33, when the blank period of the interval is 10% or more and 100% or less of the interval, preferably 20% or more and 100% or less of the interval, more preferably 30. When the time is% or more and 100% or less, the fourth game is executed at the interval. When there is a blank period of the interval in such a range, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for the fourth game to be executed in the blank time, and it is possible to prevent the fourth game from being continued beyond the interval.

[Appendix K34]
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
In the third game executing means (41), the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determining means (41) for the fourth game executed in the interval is the first game. Is to be executed by adding the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41) to the number of unexecuted first switching games. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note K29 to Supplementary note K33.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K34, when the fourth game executed in the interval indicates a determination result for executing the first game, the number of times the first switching game is executed in the first game is the current number one. It is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in one game. Therefore, it becomes possible to continuously execute the first switching game a large number of times unexpectedly, and accordingly, the first switching game is executed a number of times (for example, 8 times or more) that is not executed in one first game. It can be done. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved by the fact that the state advantageous to the player may be continued beyond the profit state obtained in one first game.

[Appendix K35]
The symbol display means (341) in which the decorative symbol showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed.
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
When the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determining means (41) is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games, the symbol display control means (51) The gaming machine according to Appendix K34, wherein the symbol display means (341) is made to execute an addition effect that clearly or suggests that the number of executions of the first game has been added.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K35, when the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in the current first game, the number of times of the first switching game. Is clearly or suggested by the symbol display means. As a result, the player can recognize that the number of times of the first switching game has increased, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K36]
As the addition effect, the symbol display control means (51) explicitly or suggests the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41). The gaming machine according to the appendix K37, which is characterized by being executed by a machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K36, when the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in the current first game, the added first switching game is added. The number of games is clearly shown or suggested to the symbol display means as an addition effect. As a result, the player can recognize not only the increased number of times of the first switching game but also the increased number of times of the first switching game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K37]
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
In the third game executing means (41), the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determining means (41) for the fourth game executed in the interval is the first game. The right to execute the first game notified by the fourth game executed in the interval is granted until the profit state based on the first game executed earlier ends. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note K29 to Supplementary note K33, which is characterized by holding.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K37, when the fourth game executed in the interval indicates that the first game is executed, the right to execute the first game is given to the first game executed first. It is held until the end of the underlying profit status. Therefore, the next first game is immediately executed after the end of the profit state based on the first game. That is, after enjoying the benefit of the first game, the benefit of the next first game can be immediately enjoyed. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved as in the case where the state advantageous to the player continues beyond the profit state obtained in one first game.

[Appendix K38]
The symbol display means (341) in which the decorative symbol showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed.
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
When the right to execute the first game notified by the fourth game executed in the interval is reserved, the symbol display control means (51) gives the symbol display means (341) the first game. The gaming machine according to Appendix K37, characterized in that a right holding effect that clearly indicates or suggests that the right to execute the above is executed is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K38, when the right to execute the first game generated in the interval is reserved, it is clearly or suggested by the symbol display means that the right to execute the first game is reserved. As a result, the player can recognize that the first game is started again, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K39]
A first game determination means (41) that determines whether or not to execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball through a specific area (317) set in the game board (31).
In the fourth game (general game) showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41), the symbol display means (341) showing the determination result by the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol,
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
The symbol display control means (51) is specified by the symbol display means (341) in a blank period in which the first switching game, the second game, and the third game of the first game are not executed in the interval. The gaming machine according to the appendix K1, which is characterized in that the production of the above is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K39, a specific effect is executed in a blank period in which none of the first switching game, the second game, and the third game is executed. Here, since the first switching game, the second game, and the third game are not executed in the blank period, the game machine appears to be in progress even though the first game, which is advantageous to the player, is in progress. Then, no game is in progress. Therefore, there is a concern that the player will have time to spare until the blank period ends and the first switching game is started, which may reduce the interest of the game. On the other hand, by executing a specific effect in the blank period, it is possible to focus on the specific effect, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

[Appendix K40]
The specific effect is a unique effect performed only in the blank period, or a rare effect having a low appearance frequency in the first switching game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game. The gaming machine described in Appendix K39.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K40, the specific effect is a unique effect that is executed only in a blank period, or a rare effect that appears less frequently in the first switching game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game. As a result, in a blank period in which the interest of the game is likely to decline, a specific effect that is difficult to be executed outside the blank period or is executed only in the blank period is executed, so that it is possible to pay more attention to the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period.

[Appendix K41]
The unique effect is a game ball that allows a game ball to enter the first ball entrance (376) in the time until the next first switching game is started, or in the next first switching game. The gaming machine according to the appendix K40, which is a timer effect or a countdown effect indicating the time until the launch start timing of the machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K41, the unique effect as a specific effect is a timer effect or a countdown effect indicating the time until the start of the first switching game. By executing the timer effect or the countdown effect during the blank period, information that can grasp the launch start timing of the game ball is provided. Therefore, even if the player has stopped launching the game ball due to the blank period, the game ball enters the first entrance in the first switching game due to the delay in launching the game ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of punctures that are not balled. Further, by providing the information for grasping the launch start timing in the symbol display means in the blank period, the symbol display means can be focused on, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

[Appendix K42]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K40, wherein the unique effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the number of times of the first switching game that has not been executed in the first game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K42, the unique effect as a specific effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the number of unexecuted first switching games in the first game. By clearly indicating or suggesting the number of unexecuted first switching games in the blank period, information that can grasp or estimate the remaining number of first switching games is provided. Therefore, even if the number of times of the first switching game is not displayed at the start of the first game or the number of unexecuted first switching games is forgotten, the remaining number of times of the first switching game can be grasped or I can guess. Further, by providing the information that can grasp or estimate the remaining number of times of the first switching game in the symbol display means in the blank period, the symbol display means can be focused on, so that the decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period is suppressed. can.

[Appendix K43]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K40, wherein the unique effect is a player-participation type mini-game effect.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K43, the unique effect as a specific effect is a player-participation type mini-game effect. By executing the player participation type mini-game production in the blank period, it is possible to concentrate the player on the mini-game, so even if the blank period is long due to the occurrence of a flat tire or the like, the blank period It is possible to effectively prevent the player from having time to spare. As a result, the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed.

[Appendix K44]
The rare effect is the same as or similar to the definite effect that clearly indicates in the fourth game that the determination result by the first game determination means (41) executes the first game, or the first. 4. The gaming machine according to Appendix K40, which is characterized in that it is an effect for a rare character whose appearance frequency is low in a game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K44, the rare effect as a specific effect is the same as or similar to the final effect that clearly indicates that the first game in the fourth game is executed, or a rare character effect. .. By performing these effects as rare effects in the symbol display means in a blank period, an opportunity to visually recognize an effect that is normally rarely visible is given. Therefore, by paying attention to the symbol display unit in the blank period. The decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed.

[Appendix L1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means (the third electric accessory means) based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is performed when the game ball enters the second entrance (384). The third game execution means (41) executed by controlling 391) and
Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area (317) set in the game board (31), it is determined whether or not to execute the first game, and it is determined that the first game is executed. In this case, the first game determining means (41) for determining the number of times the first switching game is executed (for example, 1 to 7 times) to be executed in the first game, and
The first switching game number suggesting means (51, 341) that suggests the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game determined by the first game determining means (41), and
The first game determined by the first game determining means (41) rather than the number of times the first switched game is executed in the first game suggested by the first switching game number suggesting means (51, 341). Notification effect execution means (51, 341) for executing a notification effect for notifying that the number of times the first switching game is executed in the game is large, and
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the third game is executed at an interval between the first switching games.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L1, there is a notification effect to announce that the number of executions of the first switching game in the determined first game is larger than the number of executions of the first switching game in the suggested first game. Will be executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that when the notification effect is executed, the number of times the first switching game is actually executed is larger than the number of times the suggested first switching game is executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the notification effect is executed. Then, when the notification effect is executed, it can be recognized that the number of executions of the first switching game is larger than the number of executions recognized based on the suggested number of executions, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix L2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix L1, wherein the notification effect execution means (51, 341) executes the notification effect at the interval.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L2, the notification effect is executed at intervals. That is, until the suggested number of times of the first switching game is completed, in the second game and the third game, which are executed with each first game as an opportunity, the notification effect is expected to be executed. You can enjoy the progress. Then, when the notification effect is executed, the first switching game is executed one or more times more than the suggested number of times, and the second game and the third game are executed one or more times with this first switching game as an opportunity. Since it is possible to understand that the game can be executed, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix L3]
The notification effect executing means (51, 341) performs the notification effect at the interval started after the end of the first switching game of the number of executions suggested by the first switching game number suggesting means (51, 341). The gaming machine according to Appendix L2, which is characterized by being executed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L3, the notification effect is executed at the interval started after the end of the first switching game of the suggested number of times. That is, the notification effect is executed at the interval between the suggested final apparent first switching game and the next first switching game unknown to the player. Therefore, when the final first switching game, the second game, and the third game are executed, the player expects that the notification effect is executed during the execution of the games. You can enjoy the progress of. Then, when the notification effect is executed, at least one first switching game is executed after the end of the third game, and at least one second game and a third game are executed with this first switching game as an opportunity. The fun of the game is improved because it is possible to understand that can be executed.

[Appendix L4]
The notification effect is an effect executed after the execution of the end suggestion effect suggesting that the first game has ended, and is a revival effect clearly indicating that the first game is continuing. The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices L1 to L3, which is a feature.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L4, after the execution of the end suggestion effect suggesting that the first game is completed, the revival effect indicating that the first game is continuing is executed as the notification effect. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game while expecting that the revival effect is executed even in the situation where it is determined that the first game has been completed. Then, when the revival effect is executed, the first switching game is executed at least once, and at least one second game and the third game can be executed with the first switching game as an opportunity. Since it can be grasped, the interest of the game is improved. In particular, the game when the resurrection effect is executed by executing the resurrection effect that clearly indicates that the first game is continued after the execution of the end suggestion effect that suggests that the first game has ended. Since the joy of the person is increased, the interest of the game is further improved.

[Appendix L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions L1 to L4, wherein the notification effect executing means (51, 341) executes the notification effect in the three games.

[Appendix L6]
The third game includes at least a third switching game and an ending executed after the end of the third switching game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix L5, wherein the notification effect execution means (51, 341) executes the notification effect at the ending.

By the way, since the second game is executed triggered by the first game and the third game is executed triggered by the second game, the player is more interested in the third game than in the first game and the second game. Tends to be lower. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to the appendices L5 and L6, the notification effect can be executed in the third game, for example, in the ending of the third game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the third game by executing the notification effect in the third game in which the player's interest tends to be low.

[Appendix L7]
The ending includes a first ending and a second ending that is set at a longer time than the first ending.
The gaming machine according to Appendix L6, wherein the notification effect execution means (51, 341) executes the notification effect in the second ending.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L7, the notification effect is executed in the second ending set at a longer time than the first ending. Therefore, sufficient time can be secured to execute the notification effect at the ending of the third game.

[Appendix L8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix L7, wherein the time difference between the second ending and the first ending is set to 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less of the first ending time.

[Appendix L9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix L8, wherein the time difference between the second ending and the first ending is set to 0.25 times or more and 4 times or less of the first ending time.

[Appendix L10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix L9, wherein the time difference between the second ending and the first ending is set to 0.5 times or more and 3 times or less of the first ending time.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices L8 to L10, the time difference between the second ending and the first ending is set to 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less of the first ending time, preferably 0. It is set to 25 times or more and 4 times or less, and more preferably 0.5 times or more and 3 times or less of the first ending time. By setting the time difference between the second ending and the first ending in such a range, it is possible to execute various effects such as a notification effect in the ending of the third game.

[Appendix L11]
The start timing of the notification effect is set to a timing at which a time of more than 0.8 times and 1.2 times or less of the time corresponding to the first ending has elapsed since the start of the second ending. The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices L7 to L10.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L11, the start timing of the notification effect is the timing when more than 0.8 times and 1.2 times or less of the time corresponding to the first ending has elapsed since the second ending was started. .. By starting the notification effect at such a timing (by executing the revival effect), the timing at which the announcement effect is started is the timing when a time corresponding to a short time elapses, so that the player can use it. It is possible to predict the timing when the announcement effect is executed. Therefore, when the ending is started, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the revival effect is executed at the timing when the time corresponding to the first ending elapses.

[Appendix L12]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions L7 to L11, characterized in that a plurality of start timings of the notification effect are set.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L12, a plurality of start timings of the notification effect are set. As a result, it is difficult to predict when the revival effect will be executed. Therefore, by executing the announcement activity effect at an unexpected timing, unexpected playability is given and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix L13]
When a plurality of start timings of the notification effect are set, the start timing is a time of more than 0.1 times and 0.8 times or less of the time corresponding to the first ending after the second ending is started. The gaming machine according to the appendix L12, comprising at least one of an elapsed timing and an elapsed time of more than 1.2 times and not more than twice the time corresponding to the first ending.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L13, for example, the start timing of the notification effect is the timing when a time of more than 0.1 times and 0.8 times or less of the time corresponding to the first ending has elapsed since the start of the second ending. By setting, that is, by starting the notification effect at a relatively early unexpected timing after the start of the second ending, unexpected playability is imparted. Further, the start timing of the notification effect is set to the timing when a time of more than 0.2 times and not more than twice the time corresponding to the first ending has elapsed since the second ending was started, so that the second ending is set. By starting the notification effect at an unexpected timing that the player thinks that the notification effect will not be executed after a relatively long time has passed since the start of the game, an unexpected playability is given.

[Appendix L14]
When the notification effect is executed by the notification effect execution means (51, 341), an effect that clearly or suggests that the notification effect is executed is executed before the execution of the notification effect is started. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions L1 to L13.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L14, when the notification effect is executed, an effect that clearly or suggests that the notification effect is executed is executed before the execution of the notification effect is started. By executing this effect, the expectation that the announcement effect will be executed is raised, the degree of attention to the progress of the game after the effect is executed is increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix L15]
The appendix L2 is characterized in that the notification effect executing means (51, 341) executes the notification effect between the end of the third game in the second interval and the start of the next first game. The gaming machine described in any of the appendices L4.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L15, the blank period of the second interval from the end of the third game to the start of the next first switching game can be effectively used. Further, since none of the first switching game, the second game, and the third game of the first game is executed in the blank period, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the blank period of the game by executing the notification effect. Become.

[Appendix L16]
The symbol display means (341) in which the symbol is displayed in a variable manner and stopped, and
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
The symbol display control means (51) combines the decorative symbols that suggest the number of times the first switching game is executed in the first game determined by the first game determination means (41) with the symbol display means. The gaming machine according to Appendix L1, characterized in that the stop display is displayed on the effective line set in (341).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L16, when the determination result of whether or not to execute the first game is to execute the first game, in the fourth game showing the determination result, the first switching game in the first game The combination of decorative symbols suggesting the number of executions is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Thereby, the player can grasp or estimate the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game based on the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the fourth game. Therefore, in consideration of the number of times the first switching game is executed, which is recognized or estimated based on the combination of the stop display on the symbol display means in the fourth game, whether or not the first switching game is continued in the first game is a hobby. Because it can be enjoyed, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix L17]
When the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determination means (41) is that the symbol display control means (51) executes the first game, the first game Described in Appendix L16, wherein the combination of the decorative symbols indicating the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in the above is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol display means (341). Pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L17, when it is a determination result of executing the first game, the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in the first game is specified in the symbol display means in the fourth game. The combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the player can recognize the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game in the first game based on the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the fourth game. Therefore, when the first switching game of the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game recognized based on the combination of the stop display on the symbol display means in the fourth game is completed, the stop display is displayed on the symbol display means in the fourth game. You can enjoy the progress of various games such as the 4th game while expecting that the 1st switching game will be executed more times than the minimum expected number of times specified by the combination of the decorative symbols. Will be done.

[Appendix L18]
When the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determination means (41) is that the symbol display control means (51) executes the first game, the first game As a combination of the decorative symbols that clearly indicate the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in, a number corresponding to the minimum expected number of times is doublet on the effective line of the symbol display means (341). The gaming machine according to the appendix L17, which is characterized in that it is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L18, when it is a determination result of executing the first game, the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in the first game is specified in the symbol display means in the fourth game. As a combination of decorative patterns, the numbers corresponding to the minimum expected number of times are stopped and displayed. As described above, the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the fourth game has the number corresponding to the minimum number of doublets, which makes it easy to grasp the minimum expected number of times.

[Appendix L19]
When the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determination means (41) is that the symbol display control means (51) executes the first game, the first game As a combination of the decorative symbols that clearly indicates the minimum number of executions of the first switching game expected in, the combination of alphabets corresponding to the minimum number of times is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol display means (341). The gaming machine according to the appendix L17, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L19, when it is a determination result of executing the first game, the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in the first game is specified in the symbol display means in the fourth game. As a combination of decorative patterns, the combination of alphabets corresponding to the minimum expected number of times is stopped and displayed. In this way, when the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the fourth game is a combination of alphabets corresponding to the minimum expected number of times in the first switching game, the minimum expected number of times in the first switching game is compared with the number doublets. However, compared to the case where the minimum expected number of times is specified by complicated symbols or unfamiliar symbols, it is easier to grasp the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game because the alphabet is familiar. become. Also, in the case of a combination of alphabets, it is difficult to grasp the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game compared to the doublet of numbers, while the minimum expectation of the first switching game is compared with complicated symbols and unfamiliar symbols. Since it is easy to grasp the number of times, it is possible to give appropriate difficulty in grasping the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game. This also makes it possible to enjoy estimating the minimum expected number of times in the first switching game.

[Appendix L20]
The symbol display control means (51) combines the decorative symbols that clearly indicate the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in the first game with the effective line of the symbol display means (341). The minimum expectation that the symbol display means (341) clearly indicates or suggests the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in the first game, in addition to the decorative symbol, when the stop display is displayed on the top. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions L16 to L19, wherein the number-of-times image is displayed on the symbol display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L20, when it is a determination result of executing the first game, the combination of decorative symbols indicating the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the fourth game. At the same time, an image of the minimum expected number of times that clearly indicates or suggests the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game not only by the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the fourth game but also by the minimum expected number of times image. Therefore, even a player who does not know the correspondence between the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the fourth game and the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game can perform the first switching game based on the minimum expected number of times image. You can grasp the minimum expected number of times.

[Appendix L21]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices L16 to L20, wherein the selection rate is set lower as the first switching game is executed more frequently.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L21, the selection rate is set lower as the first switching game has a larger number of executions of the first switching game. On the other hand, as the number of times the first switching game is executed increases, the number of times the third game is executed during the execution of the first game increases, so that the privilege that the player can acquire may increase. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting to obtain a determination result in which the number of times the first switching game is executed is large.

[Appendix M1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
A third switching game (round game) in which a player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. The third electric accessory means (the third electric accessory means) based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including the above is performed when the game ball enters the second entrance (384). The third game execution means (41) executed by controlling 391) and
Equipped with
The third game execution means (41) is
When the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, the first switching game is performed in the interval between the first switching games. Perform 3 games,
When the specified condition is satisfied, the third game is terminated before a predetermined timing at which the third game can be executed, triggered by the next first opening / closing game.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specified condition is not satisfied, the third game is terminated at a timing exceeding the predetermined timing at which the third game cannot be executed, triggered by the next first switching game.

Note: In the gaming machine according to M1, when the third game is executed in the interval between the first switching games in the first switching game of a plurality of times, the next first switching game is triggered when the specified conditions are satisfied. The third game is completed by a predetermined timing (for example, within the interval between openings) in which the three games can be executed, while the first switch is performed without completing the third game by the predetermined timing when the specified conditions are not satisfied. The third game ends after the start of the game. Then, when the third game is completed by a predetermined timing, the third game that is triggered by the next first switching game can be executed. On the other hand, when the third game ends at a timing exceeding a predetermined timing, the third game triggered by the next first switching game is not executed. When the third game is executed beyond a predetermined timing, for example, the second game is not executed because the entry of the game ball into the first entrance in the first switching game is invalidated. The third game is not executed because the third game is not executed or the entry of the game ball into the second entrance in the second game is invalidated. Therefore, depending on whether or not the specified condition is satisfied, a game property is imparted in which whether or not the third game that is triggered by the next first switching game can be executed is determined. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the next third game can be executed by paying attention to whether or not the specified condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the third game, which has a lower degree of attention than the first game and the second game, which give an opportunity for the third game to be executed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix M2]
The interval includes a plurality of intervals having different times.
The gaming machine according to Appendix M1, wherein the specified condition is that the third game is executed at a specific interval among the plurality of intervals.

[Appendix M3]
The interval includes a third interval set to a time during which the third game can be completed by the start of the next first game when the third game ends in a theoretical maximum time, and the third interval. A fourth game that is set to a time shorter than the interval, and when the third game requires the theoretical maximum time and is completed by hand, the third game is set to a time that cannot be completed by the start of the next first game. Including intervals and
The gaming machine according to Appendix M2, wherein the specific interval is the third interval.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix M2 and the appendix M3, when the third game is executed at a specific interval, for example, the third interval, a predetermined timing at which the third game triggered by the next first switching game can be executed ( For example, when the third game is completed by (within the interval between open intervals) and the third game is executed in an interval other than a specific interval, for example, a fourth interval set to a time shorter than the third interval, the predetermined game is specified. A puncture occurs in which the third game is not completed by the timing and the next third game is not executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to the type of interval, for example, by paying attention to whether it is the third interval or the fourth interval (by paying attention to whether the end timing of the interval is early or late). It becomes possible to judge whether or not the next third game can be executed. As a result, it is possible to focus on the third game, which has a lower degree of attention than the first game and the second game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix M4]
The third game includes a plurality of third games in which the number of executions of the third switching game is different.
The gaming machine according to Appendix M1, wherein the specified condition is that a specific third game among the plurality of third games is executed at the interval.

[Appendix M5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M4, wherein the specific third game is a third game in which the number of executions of the third switching game among the plurality of third games is a predetermined number of times or less.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix M4 and the appendix M5, it is typical that the third game executed in the interval is a specific third game, for example, the third game in which the number of executions of the third switching game is a predetermined number or more. In the case of the third game in which the number of times the third switching game is executed is the largest, the third game triggered by the next first switching game can be executed by a predetermined timing (for example, within the interval between openings). When the third game ends and the third game other than the specific third game is executed at the interval, a puncture occurs in which the third game is not completed by the predetermined timing and the next third game is not executed. do. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether the type of the third game is a specific third game, that is, by paying attention to the number of times the third switching game is executed in the third game, so that the next third game Can be determined whether or not is feasible. As a result, it is possible to focus on the third game, which has a lower degree of attention than the first game and the second game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix M6]
The plurality of third games include a predetermined third game in which the number of executions of the third switching game exceeds the predetermined number of times.
The appendix M5, wherein the number of times the third switching game is executed in the specific third game is ½ or more of the number of times the third switching game is executed in the predetermined third game. Gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M6, the number of times the third switching game is executed in the specific third game is less than 1/2 of the number of times the third switching game is executed in the predetermined third game. On the other hand, the defined condition is that a specific third game is executed at the interval. Then, when the specified condition is satisfied by the execution of the specific third game, the specific game is executed, and the specific third game or the predetermined third game is executed with the next first game as an opportunity. As a result, the player can obtain the privilege of the specific third game for two times, or the specification of the specific third game and the privilege of the predetermined third game. On the other hand, if the specified conditions are not satisfied by the execution of the predetermined third game, the predetermined game is executed and the third game triggered by the next first game is not executed, so that the player has one predetermined first game. Only the benefits of 3 games can be obtained. That is, when the number of executions of the third switching game is small and the specific third game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed as compared with the predetermined third game, the number of executions of the third switching game is large and the specific third game is executed. Compared to the case where a predetermined third game, which is advantageous to the player, is executed, the jackpot game triggered by the next first game is considered to be advantageous to the player. That is, the third game, which is considered to be disadvantageous to the player in the interval, is given a playability that is advantageous to the player as a whole.

[Appendix M7]
The interval includes a plurality of intervals having different times.
The third game includes a plurality of third games in which the number of executions of the third switching game is different.
The gaming machine according to Appendix M1, wherein the specified condition is that a specific third game among the plurality of third games is executed at a specific interval among the plurality of intervals. ..

[Appendix M8]
The interval includes a third interval set to a time during which the third game can be completed by the start of the next first game when the third game ends in a theoretical maximum time, and the third interval. A fourth game that is set to a time shorter than the interval, and when the third game requires the theoretical maximum time and is completed by hand, the third game is set to a time that cannot be completed by the start of the next first game. Including intervals and
The gaming machine according to Appendix M7, wherein the specific interval is the third interval.

[Appendix M9]
The game according to Supplementary M7 or Supplementary M8, wherein the specific third game is a third game in which the number of executions of the third switching game among the plurality of third games is a predetermined number of times or less. Machine.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices M7 to M9, the third game executed in a specific interval such as the third interval set for a long time is the third game in which the number of executions of the third switching game is a predetermined number or less. (For example, in the case of a specific third game such as (for example, the third game in which the third switching game is executed most frequently)), a predetermined timing (for example,) in which the third game triggered by the next first switching game can be executed (for example). If the third game is completed by (within the interval between openings) and the interval is not a specific interval, or if the third game executed in the interval is a third game other than the specific third game, the above-mentioned predetermined A puncture occurs in which the third game is not completed by the timing and the next third game is not executed. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not the next third game can be executed by paying attention to the combination of the interval type and the third game type. As a result, it is possible to focus on the third game, which has a lower degree of attention than the first game and the second game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix M10]
The plurality of third games include a predetermined third game in which the number of executions of the third switching game exceeds the predetermined number of times.
The description in Appendix M9, wherein the number of times the third switching game is executed in the specific third game is ½ or more of the number of times the third switching game is executed in the predetermined third game. Gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M10, the number of times the third switching game is executed in the specific third game is less than 1/2 of the number of times the third switching game is executed in the predetermined third game. On the other hand, the defined condition is that a specific third game is executed at the interval. Then, when the specified condition is satisfied by the execution of the specific third game, the specific game is executed, and the specific third game or the predetermined third game is executed with the next first game as an opportunity. As a result, the player can obtain the privilege of the specific third game for two times, or the specification of the specific third game and the privilege of the predetermined third game. On the other hand, if the specified conditions are not satisfied by the execution of the predetermined third game, the predetermined game is executed and the third game triggered by the next first game is not executed, so that the player has one predetermined first game. Only the benefits of 3 games can be obtained. That is, when the number of executions of the third switching game is small and the specific third game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed as compared with the predetermined third game, the number of executions of the third switching game is large and the specific third game is executed. Compared to the case where a predetermined third game, which is advantageous to the player, is executed, the jackpot game triggered by the next first game is considered to be advantageous to the player. That is, the third game, which is considered to be disadvantageous to the player in the interval, is given a playability that is advantageous to the player as a whole.

[Appendix M11]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary M3 or Supplementary M8, wherein the fourth interval is set to 0.5 times or more and 0.95 times or less of the third interval.

[Appendix M12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M11, wherein the fourth interval is set to 0.55 times or more and 0.9 times or less the third interval.

[Appendix M13]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M12, wherein the fourth interval is set to 0.6 times or more and 0.8 times or less the third interval.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices M11 to M13, the fourth interval is set to 0.5 times or more and 0.95 times or less, preferably 0.55 times or more and 0.9 times or less of the third interval, and more. It is preferably set to 0.6 times or more and 0.8 times or less. By setting the 4th interval in such a range, when the 3rd game ends in the theoretical maximum time, the 3rd game can be ended within the 3rd interval, while within the 4th interval. It is possible to make the third game unfinishable, and if the third game ends within the third interval, there is a blank period until the next first switching game is started, that is, the first switching game, the second. It is possible to shorten the blank period in which neither the game nor the third game is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to a long blank period.

[Appendix M14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M1, wherein the specified condition is that the third game is completed within a predetermined time set to a time shorter than the theoretical maximum time of the third game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M14, when the third game is executed in the interval between the first switching games in the first switching games of a plurality of times, and the third game is completed by a predetermined timing, the next first game is performed. A third game triggered by the switching game can be executed. On the other hand, if the third game ends at a timing exceeding a predetermined timing, the third game triggered by the next first switching game is not executed. When the third game is executed beyond a predetermined timing, for example, the second game is not executed because the entry of the game ball into the first entrance in the first switching game is invalidated. The third game is not executed because the third game is not executed or the entry of the game ball into the second entrance in the second game is invalidated. That is, whether or not the third game can be completed by a predetermined timing depends on whether or not the right to execute the third game triggered by the next first switching game can be acquired. The playability to be played is given. Therefore, by paying attention to whether or not the third game can be completed by a predetermined timing, the first game and the second game, which give an opportunity to execute the third game, have a lower degree of attention. 3 Since it is possible to focus on the game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix M15]
In the third game, the third game executing means (41) enters the game ball into the third entrance (394) in a specific third switching game among the plurality of third switching games. Compared to the entry of the game ball into the third entrance (394) in the third switching game different from the specific third switching game among the plurality of third switching games. The gaming machine according to Appendix M14, characterized in that the third electric accessory means (391) is difficult to control.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M15, in the third game, the entry of the game ball into the third entrance in the specific third switching game becomes the third entrance in the other third switching game. It is said to be more difficult than entering a game ball. That is, in the third game, the time required for the specific third switching game is longer than the time required for the other third switching games. That is, the length of time required for the third game depends on the time required for the specific third switching game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the third game by paying attention to how quickly the specific third switching game can be ended, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix M16]
The third game execution means (41) is
In the other third switching game, the switching to the third allowable state is executed once,
In the specific third switching game, switching to the third allowable state set to a time shorter than the time for switching to the third allowable state in the other third switching game is executed a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to the appendix M15, which is characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M16, in the third game, the switching to the third allowable state is executed once in the third switching game other than the specific third switching game, and in the specific third switching game, the other Switching to the third permissible state, which is set to a time shorter than the time for switching to the third permissible state in the third switching game, is executed a plurality of times. In this way, in the specific third switching game, the switching to the third allowable state set in a short time is executed a plurality of times, so that the launch timing of the game ball, etc., can be obtained at the time required for the specific third switching game. It becomes possible to generate an appropriate variation in relation to. As a result, it becomes possible to generate an appropriate variation in the time required for the third game including the specific third switching game, and it becomes possible to generate an appropriate variation at the end timing of the third game. Therefore, attention is paid to whether or not the third game can be ended before a predetermined timing at which the third game triggered by the next first switching game can be executed, and in particular, the player is given a specific first. Since it is possible to pay attention to the entry status of the game ball into the third entrance in the three-switching game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix M17]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M16, wherein the third game executing means (41) regularly executes a plurality of switchings to the third allowable state in the specific third switching game.

[Appendix M18]
The third game executing means (41) regularly executes a plurality of switchings to the third allowable state in the specific third switching game with the same or substantially the same time in the third allowable state. The gaming machine according to the appendix M17, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M17 and the appendix M18, a plurality of switching to the third permissible state is regularly executed in the specific third switching game. Therefore, the player can leave the luck to decide whether or not the third game is completed by a predetermined timing by executing the specific third switching game while maintaining the launch timing of the current game ball. Further, by making an attempt to shorten the time required for a specific third game by adjusting the launch timing of the game ball, it is possible to finish the third game by a predetermined timing depending on the skill. As a result, in the third game in which a specific third switching game is executed, it is possible to enjoy the third game, which tends to be less noticeable due to the launch of the game ball according to the player's hobby and skill. The interest of is improved.

In addition, in the appendix M18, "substantially the same" is, for example, a range of 0.9 times or more and 1.1 times or less with respect to the average value (target value).

[Appendix M19]
The time of the third allowable state of each time in the specific third switching game is set to 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 0.06 seconds to 3 seconds) of the firing interval of the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices M16 to M18, which is a feature.

[Appendix M20]
The time of the third allowable state of each time in the specific third switching game is set to 0.2 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 0.12 seconds to 1.8 seconds) of the firing interval of the game ball. The gaming machine according to the appendix M19, characterized in that.

[Appendix M21]
The time of the third allowable state of each time in the specific third switching game is set to 0.5 times or more and twice or less (for example, 0.3 seconds to 1.2 seconds) the firing interval of the game ball. The gaming machine according to the appendix M20, which is characterized by the above.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices M19 to M21, the time of the third allowable state of each time in the specific third switching game is 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 0.06 seconds or more) of the firing interval of the game ball. 3 seconds), preferably 0.2 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 0.12 seconds to 1.8 seconds), and more preferably 0.5 times or more and 2 times or less (for example, 0.3 seconds). ~ 1.2 seconds) is set. By setting the time of the third allowable state of each time in the fixed third switching game in such a range, the third ball is entered in the specific third switching game in relation to the firing interval of the game ball and the like. It is possible to adjust the difficulty of entering the game ball when the mouth is opened, and it is possible to adjust the variation in the time required for the specific third switching game, and eventually the variation in the time required for the third game.

[Appendix M22]
The time of the third restricted state between the third allowable states in the specific third switching game is 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 0.06 seconds to 3 seconds) of the firing interval of the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note M16 to Supplementary note M21, which is characterized in that it is set.

[Appendix M23]
The time of the third restricted state between the third allowable states in the specific third switching game is 0.2 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 0.12 seconds to 1.8 seconds) of the firing interval of the gaming ball. ). The gaming machine according to the appendix M22.

[Appendix M24]
The time of the third restricted state between the third allowable states in the specific third switching game is 0.5 times or more and twice or less (for example, 0.3 seconds to 1.2 seconds) of the firing interval of the game ball. ). The gaming machine according to the appendix M23.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices M22 to M24, the time of the third restricted state between the third permissible states in the specific third switching game is 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 0) of the firing interval of the game ball. It is set to .06 seconds to 3 seconds), preferably 0.2 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 0.12 seconds to 1.8 seconds), and more preferably 0.5 times or more and 2 times or less (for example). It is set to 0.3 seconds to 1.2 seconds). That is, the time (interval) of the third restricted state between the third allowable states in the specific third switching game is set to be about the same as the time of the third allowable state of each time in the specific third switching game. .. By setting the time (interval) of each third restricted state between the third allowable states in the specific third switching game in such a range, the third of each time in the specific third switching game of each time is set. It is possible to adjust the difficulty of entering the game ball when the third entrance is opened in a specific third switching game, depending on the time of the allowable state and the firing interval of the game ball. It is possible to adjust the variation in the time required for the third switching game, and eventually the variation in the time required for the third game.

[Appendix M25]
The specific third switching game ends when either the maximum number of game balls entering the third entrance or the specified number of switching to the third allowable state is satisfied.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices M16 to M24, wherein the specified number of times is set to 0.2 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 2 times or more and 50 times or less) of the upper limit number. ..

[Appendix M26]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M25, wherein the specified number of times is set to a number of times of 0.3 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 3 times or more and 30 times or less) of the upper limit number.

[Appendix M27]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M26, wherein the specified number of times is set to a number of times of 0.5 times or more and twice or less (for example, 5 times or more and 20 times or less) of the upper limit number.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M25 to the appendix M27, the specified number of times of switching to the third allowable state as the end condition of the specific third switching game is the third entrance as the end condition of the specific third switching game. The number of times is set to 0.2 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 2 times or more and 50 times or less), preferably 0.3 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 2 times or more and 50 times or less) with respect to the upper limit of the number of times the game ball can enter the ball. For example, it is set to 3 times or more and 30 times or less), and more preferably 0.5 times or more and 2 times or less (for example, 5 times or more and 20 times or less). By setting a specified number of times as an end condition of a specific third switching game in such a range, the time, interval, and firing interval of the game ball in each third permissible state in each specific third switching game are set. In relation to the above, it is possible to adjust the difficulty of entering the game ball when the third entrance is opened in the specific third switching game, and the time required for the specific third switching game varies. As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in the time required for the third game.

[Appendix M28]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M16, wherein the third game executing means (41) irregularly executes a plurality of switchings to the third allowable state in the specific third switching game.

[Appendix M29]
In the specific third switching game, the third game executing means (41) switches to the third permissible state a plurality of times by switching to the third permissible state of a plurality of types having different times of the third permissible state. The gaming machine according to the appendix M28, which is characterized in that the switching of is performed irregularly.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M28 and the appendix M29, a plurality of switching to the third permissible state is irregularly executed in the specific third switching game. Therefore, the player can leave the luck to decide whether or not the third game is completed by a predetermined timing by executing the specific third switching game while maintaining the launch timing of the current game ball. Further, by making an attempt to shorten the time required for a specific third game by adjusting the launch timing of the game ball, it is possible to finish the third game by a predetermined timing depending on the skill. As a result, in the third game in which a specific third switching game is executed, it is possible to enjoy the third game, which tends to be less noticeable due to the launch of the game ball according to the player's hobby and skill. The interest of is improved.

[Appendix M30]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions M15 to M29, wherein the specific third switching game is the final third switching game to be executed last in the third game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M30, a specific third switching game in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the third entrance than the other third switching games is finally executed in the third game. It is set to the third switching game. That is, in the third game, at least the difficulty of entering the game ball into the third entrance in the final third switching game is increased, and at least the time required for the final third switching game varies. Therefore, the fate of whether or not the next third game can be executed is summarized in the final third switching game executed at the end of the third game. As a result, it is possible to proceed with the third game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the third entrance with a great expectation just before the end of the third game, so that the degree of attention is lowered. By the way, the fun of the third game is greatly improved.

[Appendix M31]
The third game includes a plurality of third games in which the number of executions of the third switching game is different.
The specific third switching game is set to the third game in which the number of executions of the third switching game is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times among the plurality of third games, and the third of the plurality of third games. 3. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions M15 to M30, wherein the number of executions of the switching game is not set to the third game, which is less than a predetermined number of times.

[Appendix M32]
The specific third switching game is set to the most third game among the plurality of third games, which has the largest number of executions of the third switching game, and the most third of the plurality of third games. The gaming machine according to Appendix M31, which is not set to a third game other than a game.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix M31 and the appendix M32, the specific third switching game in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the third entrance than the other third switching games is the third switching game more than a predetermined number of times. The third game in which the game is executed, for example, the third game with the largest number of executions of the third switching game is set. That is, a specific third switching game is set for the third game that is advantageous to the player whose execution number of the third switching game is guaranteed to be a predetermined number or more. On the other hand, the specific third switching game is not set to the third game in which the third switching game is executed less than a predetermined number of times, for example, the third game other than the third game having the largest number of executions of the third switching game. That is, the specific third switching game is not set for the third game in which the number of executions of the third switching game is less than a predetermined number of times and the third game is more disadvantageous to the player than the most third game or the like. Therefore, in the third game, which is advantageous to the player, whether or not the next third game is executed depends on the time required for the specific third switching game, so that it is possible to puncture depending on the end timing of the third game. On the other hand, in the third game, which is disadvantageous to the player whose number of executions of the third switching game is less than a predetermined number of times, a game property in which a puncture depending on the time required for the third game does not occur is given. That is, in the third game, which is disadvantageous to the player whose number of executions of the third switching game is less than the predetermined number of times, the possibility of executing the next third game is guaranteed, while the number of executions of the third switching game is more than the predetermined number of times. In the third game, which is advantageous to the player, the playability that the feasibility of the next third game is not guaranteed is given. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by the occurrence of a puncture depending on the end timing of the third game even in the case of the third game which is disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged.

[Appendix M33]
A first game determination means (41) that determines whether or not to execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball through a specific area (317) set in the game board (31).
When the first game, the second game, and the third game are not executed, the determination result of whether or not to execute the first game by the first game determination means (41) is notified. The fourth game execution means (41) for executing the four games (Public game) and
The right holding means (41) for holding the right to execute the fourth game, and
Further prepare
When the right to execute the fourth game is reserved by the right holding means (41), the fourth game executing means (41) has the fourth game in the interval when the fourth specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to the appendix M1, which is characterized by executing the above.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M33, the right to execute the fourth game is reserved for the fourth game in which the determination result of whether or not to execute the first game is notified at the interval when the fourth specific condition is satisfied. It is executed on condition that it is. As a result, various information can be provided to the player by effectively using the interval, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game during the period when the player's interest in the interval is low.

[Appendix M34]
The fourth specific condition is characterized in that the blank period during which the first switching game, the second game, and the third game of the first game are not executed in the interval is a certain time or more. The gaming machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M34, when the blank period of the interval is a certain time or more, the fourth game is executed in the interval. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the blank period of the interval and provide a determination result of whether or not to execute the first game with the reserved right when the right to execute the fourth game is reserved. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period.

[Appendix M35]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M34, wherein the fixed time is 10% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 5 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

[Appendix M36]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M35, wherein the fixed time is 20% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 10 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

[Appendix M37]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M36, wherein the fixed time is 30% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 15 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices M35 to M37, when the blank period of the interval is 10% or more and 100% or less of the interval, preferably 20% or more and 100% or less of the interval, more preferably 30. When the time is% or more and 100% or less, the fourth game is executed at the interval. When there is a blank period of the interval in such a range, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for the fourth game to be executed in the blank time, and it is possible to prevent the fourth game from being continued beyond the interval.

[Appendix M38]
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
In the third game executing means (41), the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determining means (41) for the fourth game executed in the interval is the first game. Is to be executed by adding the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41) to the number of unexecuted first switching games. The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices M33 to M37.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M38, when the fourth game executed in the interval indicates a determination result for executing the first game, the number of times the first switching game is executed in the first game is the current number one. It is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in one game. Therefore, it becomes possible to continuously execute the first switching game a large number of times unexpectedly, and accordingly, the first switching game is executed a number of times (for example, 8 times or more) that is not executed in one first game. It can be done. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved by the fact that the state advantageous to the player may be continued beyond the profit state obtained in one first game.

[Appendix M39]
The symbol display means (341) in which the decorative symbol showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed.
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
When the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determining means (41) is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games, the symbol display control means (51) The gaming machine according to the appendix M38, wherein the symbol display means (341) is made to execute an addition effect that clearly indicates or suggests that the number of executions of the first game has been added.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M39, when the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in the current first game, the number of times of the first switching game. Is clearly or suggested by the symbol display means. As a result, the player can recognize that the number of times of the first switching game has increased, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix M40]
As the addition effect, the symbol display control means (51) explicitly or suggests the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41). The gaming machine according to the appendix M39, which is characterized by being executed by a machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M40, when the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in the current first game, the added first switching game is added. The number of games is clearly shown or suggested to the symbol display means as an addition effect. As a result, the player can recognize not only the increased number of times of the first switching game but also the increased number of times of the first switching game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix M41]
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
In the third game executing means (41), the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determining means (41) for the fourth game executed in the interval is the first game. The right to execute the first game notified by the fourth game executed in the interval is granted until the profit state based on the first game executed earlier ends. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note M33 to Supplementary note M37, which is characterized by holding.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M41, when the fourth game executed in the interval indicates that the first game is executed, the right to execute the first game is given to the first game executed first. It is held until the end of the underlying profit status. Therefore, the next first game is immediately executed after the end of the profit state based on the first game. That is, after enjoying the benefit of the first game, the benefit of the next first game can be immediately enjoyed. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved as in the case where the state advantageous to the player continues beyond the profit state obtained in one first game.

[Appendix M42]
The symbol display means (341) in which the decorative symbol showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed.
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
When the right to execute the first game notified by the fourth game executed in the interval is reserved, the symbol display control means (51) gives the symbol display means (341) the first game. The gaming machine according to the appendix M41, characterized in that a right holding effect indicating or suggesting that the right to execute the above is reserved is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M42, when the right to execute the first game generated in the interval is reserved, it is clearly or suggested by the symbol display means that the right to execute the first game is reserved. As a result, the player can recognize that the first game is started again, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix M43]
A first game determination means (41) that determines whether or not to execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball through a specific area (317) set in the game board (31).
In the fourth game (general game) showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41), the symbol display means (341) showing the determination result by the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol,
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
The symbol display control means (51) is specified by the symbol display means (341) in a blank period in which the first switching game, the second game, and the third game of the first game are not executed in the interval. The gaming machine according to the appendix M1, which is characterized in that the production of the above is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M43, a specific effect is executed in a blank period in which none of the first switching game, the second game, and the third game is executed. Here, since the first switching game, the second game, and the third game are not executed in the blank period, the game machine appears to be in progress even though the first game, which is advantageous to the player, is in progress. Then, no game is in progress. Therefore, there is a concern that the player will have time to spare until the blank period ends and the first switching game is started, which may reduce the interest of the game. On the other hand, by executing a specific effect in the blank period, it is possible to focus on the specific effect, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

[Appendix M44]
The specific effect is a unique effect performed only in the blank period, or a rare effect having a low appearance frequency in the first switching game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game. The gaming machine according to the appendix M43.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M44, the specific effect is a unique effect that is executed only in the blank period, or a rare effect that appears less frequently in the first switching game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game. As a result, in a blank period in which the interest of the game is likely to decline, a specific effect that is difficult to be executed outside the blank period or is executed only in the blank period is executed, so that it is possible to pay more attention to the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period.

[Appendix M45]
The unique effect is a game ball that allows a game ball to enter the first ball entrance (376) in the time until the next first switching game is started, or in the next first switching game. The gaming machine according to the appendix M44, which is a timer effect or a countdown effect indicating the time until the launch start timing of the machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M45, the unique effect as a specific effect is a timer effect or a countdown effect indicating the time until the start of the first switching game. By executing the timer effect or the countdown effect during the blank period, information that can grasp the launch start timing of the game ball is provided. Therefore, even if the player has stopped launching the game ball due to the blank period, the game ball enters the first entrance in the first switching game due to the delay in launching the game ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of punctures that are not balled. Further, by providing the information for grasping the launch start timing in the symbol display means in the blank period, the symbol display means can be focused on, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

[Appendix M46]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M44, wherein the unique effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the number of times of the first switching game that has not been executed in the first game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M46, the unique effect as a specific effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the number of unexecuted first switching games in the first game. By clearly indicating or suggesting the number of unexecuted first switching games in the blank period, information that can grasp or estimate the remaining number of first switching games is provided. Therefore, even if the number of times of the first switching game is not displayed at the start of the first game or the number of unexecuted first switching games is forgotten, the remaining number of times of the first switching game can be grasped or I can guess. Further, by providing the information that can grasp or estimate the remaining number of times of the first switching game in the symbol display means in the blank period, the symbol display means can be focused on, so that the decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period is suppressed. can.

[Appendix M47]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M44, wherein the unique effect is a player-participation type mini-game effect.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M47, the unique effect as a specific effect is a player-participation type mini-game effect. By executing the player participation type mini-game production in the blank period, it is possible to concentrate the player on the mini-game, so even if the blank period is long due to the occurrence of a flat tire or the like, the blank period It is possible to effectively prevent the player from having time to spare. As a result, the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed.

[Appendix M48]
The rare effect is the same as or similar to the definite effect that clearly indicates in the fourth game that the determination result by the first game determination means (41) executes the first game, or the first. 4. The gaming machine according to the appendix M44, which is characterized in that it is an effect for a rare character whose appearance frequency is low in a game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M48, the rare effect as a specific effect is the same as or similar to the final effect that clearly indicates that the first game in the fourth game is executed, or a rare character effect. .. By performing these effects as rare effects in the symbol display means in a blank period, an opportunity to visually recognize an effect that is normally rarely visible is given. Therefore, by paying attention to the symbol display unit in the blank period. The decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed.

[Appendix N1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
One or a plurality of third switching games in which the player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including (round game) is entered into the second entrance (384) by the game ball, the third electric motor is used. A third game executing means (41) executed by controlling the accessory means (391), and
Equipped with
The third game execution means (41) is
When the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition, the first switching game is performed in the interval between the first switching games. Perform 3 games,
When the third game ends within a predetermined time set to a time shorter than the theoretical maximum time of the third game, a predetermined timing at which the third game can be executed triggered by the next first opening / closing game. Previously, the third game was completed,
When the third game ends beyond the predetermined time, the third game ends at a timing exceeding the predetermined timing at which the third game cannot be executed, triggered by the next first switching game. A gaming machine featuring.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N1, when the third game is executed in the interval between the first switching games in the first switching games of a plurality of times, when the third game is completed by a predetermined timing, the next first game is performed. A third game triggered by the switching game can be executed. On the other hand, if the third game ends at a timing exceeding a predetermined timing, the third game triggered by the next first switching game is not executed. When the third game is executed beyond a predetermined timing, for example, the second game is not executed because the entry of the game ball into the first entrance in the first switching game is invalidated. The third game is not executed because the third game is not executed or the entry of the game ball into the second entrance in the second game is invalidated. That is, whether or not the third game can be completed by a predetermined timing depends on whether or not the right to execute the third game triggered by the next first switching game can be acquired. The playability to be played is given. Therefore, by paying attention to whether or not the third game can be completed by a predetermined timing, the first game and the second game, which give an opportunity to execute the third game, have a lower degree of attention. 3 Since it is possible to focus on the game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix N2]
In the third game, the third game executing means (41) enters the game ball into the third entrance (394) in a specific third switching game among the plurality of third switching games. Compared to the entry of the game ball into the third entrance (394) in the third switching game different from the specific third switching game among the plurality of third switching games. The gaming machine according to Appendix N1, characterized in that the third electric accessory means (391) is difficult to control.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N2, in the third game, the entry of the game ball into the third entrance in the specific third switching game becomes the third entrance in the other third switching game. It is said to be more difficult than entering a game ball. That is, in the third game, the time required for the specific third switching game is longer than the time required for the other third switching games. That is, the length of time required for the third game depends on the time required for the specific third switching game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the third game by paying attention to how quickly the specific third switching game can be ended, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix N3]
The third game execution means (41) is
In the other third switching game, the switching to the third allowable state is executed once,
In the specific third switching game, switching to the third allowable state set to a time shorter than the time for switching to the third allowable state in the other third switching game is executed a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to the appendix N2, characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N3, in the third game, the switching to the third allowable state is executed once in the third switching game other than the specific third switching game, and in the specific third switching game, the other Switching to the third allowable state, which is set to a time shorter than the time for switching to the third allowable state in the third switching game, is executed a plurality of times. In this way, in the specific third switching game, the switching to the third allowable state set in a short time is executed a plurality of times, so that the launch timing of the game ball, etc., can be obtained at the time required for the specific third switching game. It becomes possible to generate an appropriate variation in relation to. As a result, it becomes possible to generate an appropriate variation in the time required for the third game including the specific third switching game, and it becomes possible to generate an appropriate variation at the end timing of the third game. Therefore, attention is paid to whether or not the third game can be ended before a predetermined timing at which the third game triggered by the next first switching game can be executed, and in particular, the player is given a specific first. Since it is possible to pay attention to the entry status of the game ball into the third entrance in the three-switching game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix N4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix N3, wherein the third game executing means (41) regularly executes a plurality of switchings to the third allowable state in the specific third switching game.

[Appendix N5]
The third game executing means (41) regularly executes a plurality of switchings to the third allowable state in the specific third switching game with the same or substantially the same time in the third allowable state. The gaming machine according to the appendix N4, characterized in that.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices N4 and N5, a plurality of switching to the third permissible state is regularly executed in the specific third switching game. Therefore, the player can leave the luck to decide whether or not the third game is completed by a predetermined timing by executing the specific third switching game while maintaining the launch timing of the current game ball. Further, by making an attempt to shorten the time required for a specific third game by adjusting the launch timing of the game ball, it is possible to finish the third game by a predetermined timing depending on the skill. As a result, in the third game in which a specific third switching game is executed, it is possible to enjoy the third game, which tends to be less noticeable due to the launch of the game ball according to the player's hobby and skill. The interest of is improved.

In addition, in Appendix N5, "substantially the same" is, for example, a range of 0.9 times or more and 1.1 times or less with respect to the average value (target value).

[Appendix N6]
The time of the third allowable state of each time in the specific third switching game is set to 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 0.06 seconds to 3 seconds) of the firing interval of the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions N3 to N5 as a feature.

[Appendix N7]
The time of the third allowable state of each time in the specific third switching game is set to 0.2 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 0.12 seconds to 1.8 seconds) of the firing interval of the game ball. The gaming machine according to the appendix N6, characterized in that.

[Appendix N8]
The time of the third allowable state of each time in the specific third switching game is set to 0.5 times or more and twice or less (for example, 0.3 seconds to 1.2 seconds) the firing interval of the game ball. The gaming machine according to the appendix N7, characterized in that.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices N6 to N8, the time of the third allowable state of each time in the specific third switching game is 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 0.06 seconds or more) of the firing interval of the game ball. 3 seconds), preferably 0.2 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 0.12 seconds to 1.8 seconds), and more preferably 0.5 times or more and 2 times or less (for example, 0.3 seconds). ~ 1.2 seconds) is set. By setting the time of the third allowable state of each time in the fixed third switching game in such a range, the third ball is entered in the specific third switching game in relation to the firing interval of the game ball and the like. It is possible to adjust the difficulty of entering the game ball when the mouth is opened, and it is possible to adjust the variation in the time required for the specific third switching game, and eventually the variation in the time required for the third game.

[Appendix N9]
The time of the third restricted state between the third allowable states in the specific third switching game is 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 0.06 seconds to 3 seconds) of the firing interval of the gaming ball. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions N3 to N8, which is characterized by being set.

[Appendix N10]
The time of the third restricted state between the third allowable states in the specific third switching game is 0.2 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 0.12 seconds to 1.8 seconds) of the firing interval of the gaming ball. ), The gaming machine according to Appendix N9.

[Appendix N11]
The time of the third restricted state between the third allowable states in the specific third switching game is 0.5 times or more and twice or less (for example, 0.3 seconds to 1.2 seconds) of the firing interval of the game ball. ). The gaming machine according to the appendix N10.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices N9 to N11, the time of the third restricted state between the third permissible states in the specific third switching game is 0.1 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 0) of the firing interval of the game ball. It is set to .06 seconds to 3 seconds), preferably 0.2 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 0.12 seconds to 1.8 seconds), and more preferably 0.5 times or more and 2 times or less (for example). It is set to 0.3 seconds to 1.2 seconds). That is, the time (interval) of the third restricted state between the third allowable states in the specific third switching game is set to be about the same as the time of the third allowable state of each time in the specific third switching game. .. By setting the time (interval) of each third restricted state between the third allowable states in the specific third switching game in such a range, the third of each time in the specific third switching game of each time is set. It is possible to adjust the difficulty of entering the game ball when the third entrance is opened in a specific third switching game, depending on the time of the allowable state and the firing interval of the game ball. It is possible to adjust the variation in the time required for the third switching game, and eventually the variation in the time required for the third game.

[Appendix N12]
The specific third switching game ends when either the maximum number of game balls entering the third entrance or the specified number of switching to the third allowable state is satisfied.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions N3 to N11, wherein the specified number of times is set to 0.2 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 2 times or more and 50 times or less) of the upper limit number. ..

[Appendix N13]
The gaming machine according to Appendix N12, wherein the specified number of times is set to a number of times of 0.3 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 3 times or more and 30 times or less) of the upper limit number.

[Appendix N14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix N13, wherein the specified number of times is set to 0.5 times or more and 2 times or less (for example, 5 times or more and 20 times or less) of the upper limit number.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N12 to the appendix N14, the specified number of times of switching to the third allowable state as the end condition of the specific third switching game is the third entrance as the end condition of the specific third switching game. The number of times is set to 0.2 times or more and 5 times or less (for example, 2 times or more and 50 times or less), preferably 0.3 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 2 times or more and 50 times or less) with respect to the upper limit of the number of times the game ball can enter the ball. For example, it is set to 3 times or more and 30 times or less), and more preferably 0.5 times or more and 2 times or less (for example, 5 times or more and 20 times or less). By setting a specified number of times as an end condition of a specific third switching game in such a range, the time, interval, and firing interval of the game ball in each third permissible state in each specific third switching game are set. In relation to the above, it is possible to adjust the difficulty of entering the game ball when the third entrance is opened in the specific third switching game, and the time required for the specific third switching game varies. As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in the time required for the third game.

[Appendix N15]
The gaming machine according to Appendix N3, wherein the third game executing means (41) irregularly executes a plurality of switchings to the third allowable state in the specific third switching game.

[Appendix N16]
In the specific third switching game, the third game executing means (41) switches to the third permissible state a plurality of times by switching to the third permissible state of a plurality of types having different times of the third permissible state. The gaming machine according to the appendix N15, which is characterized in that the switching of is performed irregularly.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices N15 and N16, a plurality of switching to the third permissible state is irregularly executed in the specific third switching game. Therefore, the player can leave the luck to decide whether or not the third game is completed by a predetermined timing by executing the specific third switching game while maintaining the launch timing of the current game ball. Further, by making an attempt to shorten the time required for a specific third game by adjusting the launch timing of the game ball, it is possible to finish the third game by a predetermined timing depending on the skill. As a result, in the third game in which a specific third switching game is executed, it is possible to enjoy the third game, which tends to be less noticeable due to the launch of the game ball according to the player's hobby and skill. The interest of is improved.

[Appendix N17]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions N2 to N16, wherein the specific third switching game is the final third switching game to be executed last in the third game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N17, a specific third switching game in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the third entrance than the other third switching games is finally executed in the third game. It is set to the third switching game. That is, in the third game, at least the difficulty of entering the game ball into the third entrance in the final third switching game is increased, and at least the time required for the final third switching game varies. Therefore, the fate of whether or not the next third game can be executed is summarized in the final third switching game executed at the end of the third game. As a result, it is possible to proceed with the third game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the third entrance with a great expectation just before the end of the third game, so that the degree of attention is lowered. By the way, the fun of the third game is greatly improved.

[Appendix N18]
The third game includes a plurality of third games in which the number of executions of the third switching game is different.
The specific third switching game is set to the third game in which the number of executions of the third switching game is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times among the plurality of third games, and the third of the plurality of third games. 3. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions N2 to N17, wherein the number of executions of the switching game is not set to the third game, which is less than a predetermined number of times.

[Appendix N19]
The specific third switching game is set to the most third game among the plurality of third games, which has the largest number of executions of the third switching game, and the most third of the plurality of third games. The gaming machine according to Appendix N18, which is not set to a third game other than a game.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices N18 and N19, the specific third switching game in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the third entrance than the other third switching games is the third switching game more than a predetermined number of times. The third game in which the game is executed, for example, the third game with the largest number of executions of the third switching game is set. That is, a specific third switching game is set for the third game that is advantageous to the player whose execution number of the third switching game is guaranteed to be a predetermined number or more. On the other hand, the specific third switching game is not set to the third game in which the third switching game is executed less than a predetermined number of times, for example, the third game other than the third game having the largest number of executions of the third switching game. That is, the specific third switching game is not set for the third game in which the number of executions of the third switching game is less than a predetermined number of times and the third game is more disadvantageous to the player than the most third game or the like. Therefore, in the third game, which is advantageous to the player, whether or not the next third game is executed depends on the time required for the specific third switching game, so that it is possible to puncture depending on the end timing of the third game. On the other hand, in the third game, which is disadvantageous to the player whose number of executions of the third switching game is less than a predetermined number of times, a game property in which a puncture depending on the time required for the third game does not occur is given. That is, in the third game, which is disadvantageous to the player whose number of executions of the third switching game is less than the predetermined number of times, the possibility of executing the next third game is guaranteed, while the number of executions of the third switching game is more than the predetermined number of times. In the third game, which is advantageous to the player, the playability that the feasibility of the next third game is not guaranteed is given. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by the occurrence of a puncture depending on the end timing of the third game even in the case of the third game which is disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged.

[Appendix N20]
A first game determination means (41) that determines whether or not to execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball through a specific area (317) set in the game board (31).
When the first game, the second game, and the third game are not executed, the determination result of whether or not to execute the first game by the first game determination means (41) is notified. The fourth game execution means (41) for executing the four games (Public game) and
The right holding means (41) for holding the right to execute the fourth game, and
Further prepare
When the right to execute the fourth game is reserved by the right holding means (41), the fourth game executing means (41) has the fourth game in the interval when the fourth specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to the appendix N1, which is characterized by executing the above.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N20, the right to execute the fourth game is reserved for the fourth game in which the determination result of whether or not to execute the first game is notified at the interval when the fourth specific condition is satisfied. It is executed on condition that it is. As a result, various information can be provided to the player by effectively using the interval, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game during the period when the player's interest in the interval is low.

[Appendix N21]
The fourth specific condition is characterized in that the blank period during which the first switching game, the second game, and the third game of the first game are not executed in the interval is a certain time or more. The gaming machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N21, when the blank period of the interval is a certain time or more, the fourth game is executed in the interval. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the blank period of the interval and provide a determination result of whether or not to execute the first game with the reserved right when the right to execute the fourth game is reserved. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period.

[Appendix N22]
The gaming machine according to Appendix N21, wherein the fixed time is 10% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 5 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

[Appendix N23]
The gaming machine according to Appendix N22, wherein the fixed time is 20% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 10 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

[Appendix N24]
The gaming machine according to Appendix N23, wherein the fixed time is 30% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 15 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices N22 to N24, when the blank period of the interval is 10% or more and 100% or less of the interval, preferably 20% or more and 100% or less of the interval, more preferably 30. When the time is% or more and 100% or less, the fourth game is executed at the interval. When there is a blank period of the interval in such a range, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for the fourth game to be executed in the blank time, and it is possible to prevent the fourth game from being continued beyond the interval.

[Appendix N25]
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
In the third game executing means (41), the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determining means (41) for the fourth game executed in the interval is the first game. Is to be executed by adding the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41) to the number of unexecuted first switching games. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions N20 to N24.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N25, when the fourth game executed in the interval indicates a determination result for executing the first game, the number of times the first switching game is executed in the first game is the current number one. It is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in one game. Therefore, it becomes possible to continuously execute the first switching game a large number of times unexpectedly, and accordingly, the first switching game is executed a number of times (for example, 8 times or more) that is not executed in one first game. It can be done. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved by the fact that the state advantageous to the player may be continued beyond the profit state obtained in one first game.

[Appendix N26]
The symbol display means (341) in which the decorative symbol showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed.
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
When the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determining means (41) is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games, the symbol display control means (51) The gaming machine according to Appendix N25, wherein the symbol display means (341) is made to execute an addition effect that clearly or suggests that the number of executions of the first game has been added.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N26, when the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in the current first game, the number of times of the first switching game. Is clearly or suggested by the symbol display means. As a result, the player can recognize that the number of times of the first switching game has increased, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix N27]
As the addition effect, the symbol display control means (51) explicitly or suggests the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41). The gaming machine according to the appendix N26, which is characterized by being executed by a machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N27, when the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in the current first game, the added first switching game is added. The number of games is clearly shown or suggested to the symbol display means as an addition effect. As a result, the player can recognize not only the increased number of times of the first switching game but also the increased number of times of the first switching game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix N28]
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
In the third game executing means (41), the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determining means (41) for the fourth game executed in the interval is the first game. The right to execute the first game notified by the fourth game executed in the interval is granted until the profit state based on the first game executed earlier ends. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions N20 to N24, which is characterized by being suspended.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N28, when the fourth game executed in the interval indicates that the first game is executed, the right to execute the first game is given to the first game executed first. It is held until the end of the underlying profit status. Therefore, the next first game is immediately executed after the end of the profit state based on the first game. That is, after enjoying the benefit of the previous first game, the benefit of the next first game can be immediately enjoyed. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved as in the case where the state advantageous to the player continues beyond the profit state obtained in one first game.

[Appendix N29]
The symbol display means (341) in which the decorative symbol showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed.
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
When the right to execute the first game notified by the fourth game executed in the interval is reserved, the symbol display control means (51) gives the symbol display means (341) the first game. The gaming machine according to the appendix N28, characterized in that a right holding effect that clearly indicates or suggests that the right to execute is executed is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N29, when the right to execute the first game generated in the interval is reserved, it is clearly or suggested by the symbol display means that the right to execute the first game is reserved. As a result, the player can recognize that the first game is started again, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix N30]
A first game determination means (41) that determines whether or not to execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball through a specific area (317) set in the game board (31).
In the fourth game (general game) showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41), the symbol display means (341) showing the determination result by the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol,
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
The symbol display control means (51) is specified by the symbol display means (341) in a blank period in which the first switching game, the second game, and the third game of the first game are not executed in the interval. The gaming machine according to the appendix N1, which is characterized in that the production of the above is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N30, a specific effect is executed in a blank period in which none of the first switching game, the second game, and the third game is executed. Here, since the first switching game, the second game, and the third game are not executed in the blank period, the game machine appears to be in progress even though the first game, which is advantageous to the player, is in progress. Then, no game is in progress. Therefore, there is a concern that the player will have time to spare until the blank period ends and the first switching game is started, which may reduce the interest of the game. On the other hand, by executing a specific effect in the blank period, it is possible to focus on the specific effect, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

[Appendix N31]
The specific effect is a unique effect performed only in the blank period, or a rare effect having a low appearance frequency in the first switching game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game. The gaming machine according to the appendix N30.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N31, the specific effect is a unique effect that is executed only in a blank period, or a rare effect that appears less frequently in the first switching game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game. As a result, in a blank period in which the interest of the game is likely to decline, a specific effect that is difficult to be executed outside the blank period or is executed only in the blank period is executed, so that it is possible to pay more attention to the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period.

[Appendix N32]
The unique effect is a game ball that allows a game ball to enter the first ball entrance (376) in the time until the next first switching game is started, or in the next first switching game. The gaming machine according to Appendix N31, which is a timer effect or a countdown effect indicating the time until the launch start timing of the machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N32, the unique effect as a specific effect is a timer effect or a countdown effect indicating the time until the start of the first switching game. By executing the timer effect or the countdown effect during the blank period, information that can grasp the launch start timing of the game ball is provided. Therefore, even if the player has stopped launching the game ball due to the blank period, the game ball enters the first entrance in the first switching game due to the delay in launching the game ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of punctures that are not balled. Further, by providing the information for grasping the launch start timing in the symbol display means in the blank period, the symbol display means can be focused on, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

[Appendix N33]
The gaming machine according to Appendix N31, wherein the unique effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the number of times of the first switching game that has not been executed in the first game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N33, the unique effect as a specific effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the number of unexecuted first switching games in the first game. By clearly indicating or suggesting the number of unexecuted first switching games in the blank period, information that can grasp or estimate the remaining number of first switching games is provided. Therefore, even if the number of times of the first switching game is not displayed at the start of the first game or the number of unexecuted first switching games is forgotten, the remaining number of times of the first switching game can be grasped or I can guess. Further, by providing the information that can grasp or estimate the remaining number of times of the first switching game in the symbol display means in the blank period, the symbol display means can be focused on, so that the decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period is suppressed. can.

[Appendix N34]
The gaming machine according to Appendix N31, wherein the unique effect is a player-participation type mini-game effect.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N34, the unique effect as a specific effect is a player-participation type mini-game effect. By executing the player participation type mini-game production in the blank period, it is possible to concentrate the player on the mini-game, so even if the blank period is long due to the occurrence of a flat tire or the like, the blank period It is possible to effectively prevent the player from having time to spare. As a result, the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed.

[Appendix N35]
The rare effect is the same as or similar to the definite effect that clearly indicates in the fourth game that the determination result by the first game determination means (41) executes the first game, or the first. 4. The gaming machine according to Appendix N31, which is characterized in that it is an effect for a rare character whose appearance frequency is low in a game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N35, the rare effect as a specific effect is the same as or similar to the final effect that clearly indicates that the first game in the fourth game is executed, or a rare character effect. .. By performing these effects as rare effects in the symbol display means in a blank period, an opportunity to visually recognize an effect that is normally rarely visible is given. Therefore, by paying attention to the symbol display unit in the blank period. The decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed.

[Appendix O1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
One or a plurality of third switching games in which the player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including (round game) is entered into the second entrance (384) by the game ball, the third electric motor is used. A third game executing means (41) executed by controlling the accessory means (391), and
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games,
The first predetermined condition is a gaming machine characterized in that a first permissible time for which the expected number of gaming balls to enter the first entrance is less than one has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O1, when the first allowable state is switched in the first switching game, the first allowable time for which the expected number of game balls to enter the first entrance is less than one is elapsed. 1 The allowable state is switched to the first restricted state. That is, the first permissible time, which is the first permissible state, is set to a time when the expected number of game balls to enter the first ball entry port is less than one. In this way, the first permissible time is the time when the expected number of balls to enter the first entrance is less than one, so that the game ball enters the first entrance in the first switching game. There are cases where the ball is played and cases where the ball is not entered. Then, when the game ball is inserted into the first entrance in the first switching game, the second game is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first entrance, and the second game is used as an opportunity. A third game can be performed. On the other hand, when the game ball is not inserted into the first entrance in the first switching game, the second game triggered by the first switching game is not executed, and a puncture occurs in which the third game is not executed. Therefore, since the first permissible time is the time when the expected number of game balls to enter the first ball entrance is less than one, it is possible to impart a playability in which a puncture may occur in the first switching game. become. As a result, the player can enjoy the first switching game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the first entrance in the first switching game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix O2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O1, wherein the expected number of balls to be entered in the first allowable time is set to 0.25 or more and less than one.

[Appendix O3]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary note O1 or Supplementary note O2, wherein the first permissible time is set to be less than the firing interval of the gaming ball (for example, less than 0.6 seconds).

[Appendix O4]
The first permissible time is characterized by being set to a time of 0.3 times or more and less than 1 time (for example, 0.18 seconds or more and less than 0.6 seconds) of the firing interval of the game ball (for example, 0.6 seconds). The gaming machine described in Appendix O3.

[Appendix O5]
The first allowable time is set to a time of 0.4 times or more and 0.9 times or less (for example, 0.24 seconds or more and 0.54 seconds or less) of the firing interval of the gaming ball (for example, 0.6 seconds). The gaming machine according to Appendix O4, which is characterized by the above.

[Appendix O6]
The first allowable time is set to a time of 0.5 times or more and 0.8 times or less (for example, 0.3 seconds or more and 0.48 seconds or less) of the firing interval of the game ball (for example, 0.6 seconds). The gaming machine according to Appendix O4, which is characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O2, the expected number of balls to be entered in the first allowable time is set to 0.25 or more and less than one. Further, in the gaming machines according to the appendices O3 to O6, the first permissible time is less than the firing interval of the gaming ball, for example, 0.3 times or more and less than 1 times the firing interval of the gaming ball (for example, 0.18 seconds or more and 0). It is set to (less than 0.6 seconds), preferably 0.4 times or more and 0.9 times or less (for example, 0.24 seconds or more and 0.54 seconds or less), and more preferably 0.5 times or more and 0.8 times or less. It is set to the following (for example, 0.3 seconds or more and 0.48 seconds or less). Therefore, when the opening timing of the first entry port in the first switching game and the launch timing of the game ball mesh with each other, the game ball is inserted into the first entry opening and enters the first entry opening. The second game may be executed with the entry of the game ball as a trigger, and the third game may be executed with the second game as a trigger. On the other hand, if the opening timing of the first entrance and the launch timing of the game ball do not mesh with each other in the first switching game, the second game is executed because the game ball is not inserted into the first entrance. A puncture occurs in which the third game is not executed. Therefore, depending on the engagement with the launch timing of the game ball, the game property that a puncture may occur in the first switching game is imparted. As a result, the player can enjoy the first switching game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the first entrance in the first switching game, so that the interest of the game is improved. Further, by adjusting the expected number of balls to enter in the first allowable time and the first allowable time, it is possible to adjust the puncture occurrence rate in the first switching game. This makes it possible to set the playability from a wide range from the playability in which a flat tire is likely to occur to the playability in which a flat tire is unlikely to occur.

[Appendix O7]
The first predetermined condition is that the first permissible time for which the expected number of balls to enter the first entrance is less than one has elapsed, or the game balls to the first entrance. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions O1 to O6, wherein the expected number of balls to be entered is one or more, and the second permissible time has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O7, the first permissible time for which the expected number of game balls to enter the first entrance is less than one has elapsed, or the game to the first entrance has passed. The second permissible time for which the expected number of balls to enter is one or more has elapsed. That is, in addition to the first permissible time in which the expected number of balls to enter is less than one, the second permissible time in which the expected number of balls to enter is one or more is further included as the time in the first permissible state. In the second allowable time, since the expected number of balls to enter is one or more, a puncture does not occur in the first switching game as long as an appropriate game ball is launched. Therefore, in the first game, the first permissible state of the first switching game is the first permissible state of the first permissible game, and the first permissible state of the first switching game is the first permissible state of the first switching game. The second permissible time includes two types of the first switching game in which a puncture does not occur as long as an appropriate game ball is launched. As a result, the occurrence rate of punctures as a whole in the first switching game in the first game is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged.

Further, in addition to the first allowable time in which the expected number of balls is less than one, the second allowable time in which the expected number of balls is one or more is further included as the time in the first allowable state. The puncture occurrence rate differs depending on the ratio of the first switching game in which the first permissible state is the first permissible time. Therefore, the number of executions of the third game expected in the first game is also different. As a result, the privilege (game ball) expected to be acquired by executing the first game is not only the number of times the first switching game is executed in the first game, but also the first permissible state is the first permissible time. The ratio of the first switching game and the first permissible state depend on the occurrence rate of puncture in the first switching game in the first permissible time. As a result, the privilege (game ball) expected to be acquired by executing the first game is given a game property in which the privilege (game ball) is changed by a plurality of factors, and the player is given the first permissible state as the first permissible time. Not only whether or not a puncture occurs in one switching game, but also the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game and the ratio of the first switching game in which the first permissible state is the first permissible time, etc. Because you can enjoy the progress of the game, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix O8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O7, wherein the second allowable time is set to a time equal to or longer than a firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of a gaming ball.

[Appendix O9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O8, wherein the second permissible time is set to 1 time or more and 30 times or less (for example, 0.6 seconds or more and 18 seconds or less) of the firing interval of the game ball.

[Appendix O10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O9, wherein the second permissible time is set to be twice or more and 10 times or less (for example, 1.2 seconds or more and 6 seconds or less) the firing interval of the gaming ball.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices O8 to O10, the second permissible time for which the expected number of balls to enter is one or more is a time equal to or longer than the firing interval of the gaming balls (for example, 0.6 seconds), for example, one time the firing interval of the gaming balls. It is set to 30 times or more (for example, 0.6 seconds or more and 18 seconds or less), and preferably 2 times or more and 10 times or less (for example, 1.2 seconds or more and 6 seconds or less). As a result, it is possible to surely prevent the occurrence of a flat tire in the first switching game in which the expected number of balls to be entered is one or more, which is the second allowable time, and it is possible to surely obtain the privilege originally obtained by the player.

[Appendix O11]
The first game is any one of Supplementary O7 to Supplementary O10, wherein the first permissible state in at least one first switching game of the first switching game is the second permissible time. The described gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix O11, the first permissible state in at least one switching game of the first switching game is the second permissible time in which the expected number of balls to enter is one or more. Then, in the case of the first switching game in which the first permissible state is the second permissible time, puncture does not occur as long as an appropriate game ball is launched. That is, as the first game, the first switching game in which a puncture does not occur is executed at least once as long as an appropriate game ball is launched. This guarantees the possibility that at least one third game will be executed in one first game, and prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the third game is not executed at all in the first game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an unnecessary disadvantage, and to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

[Appendix O12]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary note O11, wherein the first game is at least the first permissible state in the first switching game to be executed first, and the second permissible state is the second permissible time.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix O12, at least the time of the first allowable state of the first switching game to be executed first is the second allowable time in which a puncture does not occur as long as an appropriate game ball is launched. That is, in the first switching game that is executed first in the first game, puncture does not occur as long as an appropriate game ball is launched. As a result, the player can acquire a privilege (game ball) by executing the third game executed with the first first switching game as a trigger, so that when a puncture occurs in the second and subsequent first switching games. It is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation of the game and prevent the decrease in the interest in the game.

[Appendix O13]
A first game determination means (41) that determines whether or not to execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball through a specific area (317) set in the game board (31).
When the first game, the second game, and the third game are not executed, the determination result of whether or not to execute the first game by the first game determination means (41) is notified. The fourth game execution means (41) for executing the four games (Public game) and
The right holding means (41) for holding the right to execute the fourth game, and
Further prepare
When the right to execute the fourth game is reserved by the right holding means (41), the fourth game executing means (41) has the fourth game in the interval when the fourth specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Appendix O1, which is characterized by executing the above.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O13, the right to execute the fourth game is reserved for the fourth game in which the determination result of whether or not to execute the first game is notified at the interval when the fourth specific condition is satisfied. It is executed on condition that it is. As a result, various information can be provided to the player by effectively using the interval, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game during the period when the player's interest in the interval is low.

[Appendix O14]
The fourth specific condition is characterized in that the blank period during which the first switching game, the second game, and the third game of the first game are not executed in the interval is a certain time or more. The gaming machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix O14, when the blank period of the interval is a certain time or more, the fourth game is executed in the interval. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the blank period of the interval and provide a determination result of whether or not to execute the first game with the reserved right when the right to execute the fourth game is reserved. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period.

[Appendix O15]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O14, wherein the fixed time is 10% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 5 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

[Appendix O16]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O15, wherein the fixed time is 20% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 10 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

[Appendix O17]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O16, wherein the fixed time is 30% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 15 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices O15 to O17, when the blank period of the interval is 10% or more and 100% or less of the interval, preferably 20% or more and 100% or less of the interval, more preferably 30 When the time is% or more and 100% or less, the fourth game is executed at the interval. When there is a blank period of the interval in such a range, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for the fourth game to be executed in the blank time, and it is possible to prevent the fourth game from being continued beyond the interval.

[Appendix O18]
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
In the third game executing means (41), the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determining means (41) for the fourth game executed in the interval is the first game. Is to be executed by adding the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41) to the number of unexecuted first switching games. The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices O13 to O17, which is a feature.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O18, when the fourth game executed in the interval indicates a determination result for executing the first game, the number of times the first switching game is executed in the first game is the current number one. It is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in one game. Therefore, it becomes possible to continuously execute the first switching game a large number of times unexpectedly, and accordingly, the first switching game is executed a number of times (for example, 8 times or more) that is not executed in one first game. It can be done. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved by the fact that the state advantageous to the player may be continued beyond the profit state obtained in one first game.

[Appendix O19]
The symbol display means (341) in which the decorative symbol showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed.
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
When the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determining means (41) is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games, the symbol display control means (51) The gaming machine according to Appendix O18, wherein the symbol display means (341) is made to execute an addition effect that clearly indicates or suggests that the number of executions of the first game has been added.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O19, when the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in the current first game, the number of times of the first switching game. Is clearly or suggested by the symbol display means. As a result, the player can recognize that the number of times of the first switching game has increased, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix O20]
As the addition effect, the symbol display control means (51) explicitly or suggests the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41). The gaming machine according to the appendix O19, which is characterized by being executed by the machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O20, when the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in the current first game, the added first switching game is added. The number of games is clearly shown or suggested to the symbol display means as an addition effect. As a result, the player can recognize not only the increased number of times of the first switching game but also the increased number of times of the first switching game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix O21]
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
In the third game executing means (41), the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determining means (41) for the fourth game executed in the interval is the first game. The right to execute the first game notified by the fourth game executed in the interval is granted until the profit state based on the first game executed earlier ends. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note O13 to Supplementary note O17, which is characterized by holding.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O21, when the fourth game executed in the interval indicates that the first game is executed, the right to execute the first game is given to the first game executed first. It is held until the end of the underlying profit status. Therefore, the next first game is immediately executed after the end of the profit state based on the first game. That is, after enjoying the benefit of the first game, the benefit of the next first game can be immediately enjoyed. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved as in the case where the state advantageous to the player continues beyond the profit state obtained in one first game.

[Appendix O22]
The symbol display means (341) in which the decorative symbol showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed.
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
When the right to execute the first game notified by the fourth game executed in the interval is reserved, the symbol display control means (51) gives the symbol display means (341) the first game. The gaming machine according to Appendix O21, characterized in that a right holding effect that clearly indicates or suggests that the right to execute is executed is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix O22, when the right to execute the first game generated in the interval is reserved, it is clearly or suggested by the symbol display means that the right to execute the first game is reserved. As a result, the player can recognize that the first game is started again, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix O23]
A first game determination means (41) that determines whether or not to execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball through a specific area (317) set in the game board (31).
In the fourth game (general game) showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41), the symbol display means (341) showing the determination result by the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol,
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
The symbol display control means (51) is specified by the symbol display means (341) in a blank period in which the first switching game, the second game, and the third game of the first game are not executed in the interval. The gaming machine according to Appendix O1, which is characterized in that the production of the above is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix O23, a specific effect is executed in a blank period in which none of the first switching game, the second game, and the third game is executed. Here, since the first switching game, the second game, and the third game are not executed in the blank period, the game machine appears to be in progress even though the first game, which is advantageous to the player, is in progress. Then, no game is in progress. Therefore, there is a concern that the player will have time to spare until the blank period ends and the first switching game is started, which may reduce the interest of the game. On the other hand, by executing a specific effect in the blank period, it is possible to focus on the specific effect, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

[Appendix O24]
The specific effect is a unique effect performed only in the blank period, or a rare effect having a low appearance frequency in the first switching game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game. The gaming machine described in Appendix O23.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix O24, the specific effect is a unique effect that is executed only in the blank period, or a rare effect that appears less frequently in the first switching game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game. As a result, in a blank period in which the interest of the game is likely to decline, a specific effect that is difficult to be executed outside the blank period or is executed only in the blank period is executed, so that it is possible to pay more attention to the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period.

[Appendix O25]
The unique effect is a game ball that allows a game ball to enter the first ball entrance (376) in the time until the next first switching game is started, or in the next first switching game. The gaming machine according to Appendix O24, which is a timer effect or a countdown effect indicating the time until the launch start timing of the machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix O25, the unique effect as a specific effect is a timer effect or a countdown effect indicating the time until the start of the first switching game. By executing the timer effect or the countdown effect during the blank period, information that can grasp the launch start timing of the game ball is provided. Therefore, even if the player has stopped launching the game ball due to the blank period, the game ball enters the first entrance in the first switching game due to the delay in launching the game ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of punctures that are not balled. Further, by providing the information for grasping the launch start timing in the symbol display means in the blank period, the symbol display means can be focused on, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

[Appendix O26]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O24, wherein the unique effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the number of times of the first switching game that has not been executed in the first game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O26, the unique effect as a specific effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the number of unexecuted first switching games in the first game. By clearly indicating or suggesting the number of unexecuted first switching games in the blank period, information that can grasp or estimate the remaining number of first switching games is provided. Therefore, even if the number of times of the first switching game is not displayed at the start of the first game or the number of unexecuted first switching games is forgotten, the remaining number of times of the first switching game can be grasped or I can guess. Further, by providing the information that can grasp or estimate the remaining number of times of the first switching game in the symbol display means in the blank period, the symbol display means can be focused on, so that the decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period is suppressed. can.

[Appendix O27]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O24, wherein the unique effect is a player-participation type mini-game effect.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix O27, the unique effect as a specific effect is a player-participation type mini-game effect. By executing the player participation type mini-game production in the blank period, it is possible to concentrate the player on the mini-game, so even if the blank period is long due to the occurrence of a flat tire or the like, the blank period It is possible to effectively prevent the player from having time to spare. As a result, the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed.

[Appendix O28]
The rare effect is the same as or similar to the definite effect that clearly indicates in the fourth game that the determination result by the first game determination means (41) executes the first game, or the first. 4. The gaming machine according to Appendix O24, which is characterized by producing a rare character that appears infrequently in a game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O28, the rare effect as a specific effect is the same as or similar to the final effect that clearly indicates that the first game in the fourth game is executed, or a rare character effect. .. By performing these effects as rare effects in the symbol display means in a blank period, an opportunity to visually recognize an effect that is normally rarely visible is given. Therefore, by paying attention to the symbol display unit in the blank period. The decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed.

[Appendix P1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
One or a plurality of third switching games in which the player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including (round game) is entered into the second entrance (384) by the game ball, the third electric motor is used. A third game executing means (41) executed by controlling the accessory means (391), and
A first game determination means (41) that determines whether or not to execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball through a specific area (317) set in the game board (31).
When the first game, the second game, and the third game are not executed, the determination result of whether or not to execute the first game by the first game determination means (41) is notified. The fourth game execution means (41) for executing the four games (Public game) and
The right holding means (41) for holding the right to execute the fourth game, and
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games,
When the right to execute the fourth game is reserved by the right holding means (41), the fourth game executing means (41) has the fourth game in the interval when the fourth specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by running.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P1, the right to execute the fourth game is reserved for the fourth game in which the determination result of whether or not to execute the first game is notified at the interval when the fourth specific condition is satisfied. It is executed on condition that it is. As a result, various information can be provided to the player by effectively using the interval, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game during the period when the player's interest in the interval is low.

[Appendix P2]
The fourth specific condition is characterized in that the blank period during which the first switching game, the second game, and the third game of the first game are not executed in the interval is a certain time or more. The gaming machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note P2, when the blank period of the interval is a certain time or more, the fourth game is executed in the interval. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the blank period of the interval and provide a determination result of whether or not to execute the first game with the reserved right when the right to execute the fourth game is reserved. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period.

[Appendix P3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix P2, wherein the fixed time is 10% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 5 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

[Appendix P4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix P3, wherein the fixed time is 20% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 10 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

[Appendix P5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix P4, wherein the fixed time is 30% or more and 100% or less of the interval (for example, 15 seconds or more and 300 seconds or less).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices P3 to P5, when the blank period of the interval is 10% or more and 100% or less of the interval, preferably 20% or more and 100% or less of the interval, more preferably 30. When the time is% or more and 100% or less, the fourth game is executed at the interval. When there is a blank period of the interval in such a range, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for the fourth game to be executed in the blank time, and it is possible to prevent the fourth game from being continued beyond the interval.

[Appendix P6]
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
In the third game executing means (41), the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determining means (41) for the fourth game executed in the interval is the first game. Is to be executed by adding the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41) to the number of unexecuted first switching games. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions P1 to P5 as a feature.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note P6, when the fourth game executed in the interval indicates a determination result for executing the first game, the number of times the first switching game is executed in the first game is the current number one. It is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in one game. Therefore, it becomes possible to continuously execute the first switching game a large number of times unexpectedly, and accordingly, the first switching game is executed a number of times (for example, 8 times or more) that is not executed in one first game. It can be done. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved by the fact that the state advantageous to the player may be continued beyond the profit state obtained in one first game.

[Appendix P7]
The symbol display means (341) in which the decorative symbol showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed.
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
When the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determining means (41) is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games, the symbol display control means (51) The gaming machine according to Appendix P6, wherein the symbol display means (341) is made to execute an addition effect that clearly or suggests that the number of executions of the first game has been added.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P7, when the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in the current first game, the number of times of the first switching game. Is clearly or suggested by the symbol display means. As a result, the player can recognize that the number of times of the first switching game has increased, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix P8]
As the addition effect, the symbol display control means (51) explicitly or suggests the number of executions of the first switching game determined by the first game determination means (41). The gaming machine according to the appendix P7, which is characterized by being executed by the machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P8, when the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game is added to the number of unexecuted first switching games in the current first game, the added first switching game is added. The number of games is clearly shown or suggested to the symbol display means as an addition effect. As a result, the player can recognize not only the increased number of times of the first switching game but also the increased number of times of the first switching game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix P9]
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
In the third game executing means (41), the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determining means (41) for the fourth game executed in the interval is the first game. The right to execute the first game notified by the fourth game executed in the interval is granted until the profit state based on the first game executed earlier ends. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions P1 to P5, characterized in that it is on hold.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P9, when the fourth game executed in the interval indicates that the first game is executed, the right to execute the first game is given to the first game executed first. It is held until the end of the underlying profit status. Therefore, the next first game is immediately executed after the end of the profit state based on the first game. That is, after enjoying the benefit of the first game, the benefit of the next first game can be immediately enjoyed. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved as in the case where the state advantageous to the player continues beyond the profit state obtained in one first game.

[Appendix P10]
The symbol display means (341) in which the decorative symbol showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41) is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed.
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
When the right to execute the first game notified by the fourth game executed in the interval is reserved, the symbol display control means (51) gives the symbol display means (341) the first game. The gaming machine according to Appendix P9, wherein the right holding effect that clearly indicates or suggests that the right to execute is executed is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P10, when the right to execute the first game generated in the interval is reserved, it is clearly or suggested by the symbol display means that the right to execute the first game is reserved. As a result, the player can recognize that the first game is started again, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix P11]
In the fourth game (general game) showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41), the symbol display means (341) showing the determination result by the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol,
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Further prepare
The symbol display control means (51) is specified by the symbol display means (341) in a blank period in which the first switching game, the second game, and the third game of the first game are not executed in the interval. The gaming machine according to the appendix P1, which is characterized in that the production of the above is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note P11, a specific effect is executed in a blank period in which none of the first switching game, the second game, and the third game is executed. Here, since the first switching game, the second game, and the third game are not executed in the blank period, the game machine appears to be in progress even though the first game, which is advantageous to the player, is in progress. Then, no game is in progress. Therefore, there is a concern that the player will have time to spare until the blank period ends and the first switching game is started, which may reduce the interest of the game. On the other hand, by executing a specific effect in the blank period, it is possible to focus on the specific effect, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

[Appendix P12]
The specific effect is a unique effect performed only in the blank period, or a rare effect having a low appearance frequency in the first switching game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game. The gaming machine according to the appendix P11.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P12, the specific effect is a unique effect that is executed only in the blank period, or a rare effect that appears less frequently in the first switching game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game. As a result, in a blank period in which the interest of the game is likely to decline, a specific effect that is difficult to be executed outside the blank period or is executed only in the blank period is executed, so that it is possible to pay more attention to the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period.

[Appendix P13]
The unique effect is a game ball that allows a game ball to enter the first ball entrance (376) in the time until the next first switching game is started, or in the next first switching game. The gaming machine according to Appendix P12, which is a timer effect or a countdown effect indicating the time until the launch start timing of the machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P13, the unique effect as a specific effect is a timer effect or a countdown effect indicating the time until the start of the first switching game. By executing the timer effect or the countdown effect during the blank period, information that can grasp the launch start timing of the game ball is provided. Therefore, even if the player has stopped launching the game ball due to the blank period, the game ball enters the first entrance in the first switching game due to the delay in launching the game ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of punctures that are not balled. Further, by providing the information that can grasp the launch start timing in the symbol display means in the blank period, the symbol display means can be focused on, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

[Appendix P14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix P12, wherein the unique effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the number of times of the first switching game that has not been executed in the first game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P14, the unique effect as a specific effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the number of unexecuted first switching games in the first game. By clearly indicating or suggesting the number of unexecuted first switching games in the blank period, information that can grasp or estimate the remaining number of first switching games is provided. Therefore, even if the number of times of the first switching game is not displayed at the start of the first game or the number of unexecuted first switching games is forgotten, the remaining number of times of the first switching game can be grasped or I can guess. Further, by providing the information that can grasp or estimate the remaining number of times of the first switching game in the symbol display means in the blank period, the symbol display means can be focused on, so that the decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period is suppressed. can.

[Appendix P15]
The gaming machine according to Appendix P12, wherein the unique effect is a player-participation type mini-game effect.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P15, the unique effect as a specific effect is a player-participation type mini-game effect. By executing the player participation type mini-game production in the blank period, it is possible to concentrate the player on the mini-game, so even if the blank period is long due to the occurrence of a flat tire or the like, the blank period It is possible to effectively prevent the player from having time to spare. As a result, the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed.

[Appendix P16]
The rare effect is the same as or similar to the definite effect that clearly indicates in the fourth game that the determination result by the first game determination means (41) executes the first game, or the first. 4. The gaming machine according to Appendix P12, which is characterized in that it is an effect for a rare character whose appearance frequency is low in a game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P16, the rare effect as a specific effect is the same as or similar to the final effect that clearly indicates that the first game in the fourth game is executed, or a rare character effect. .. By performing these effects as rare effects in the symbol display means in a blank period, an opportunity to visually recognize an effect that is normally rarely visible is given. Therefore, by paying attention to the symbol display unit in the blank period. The decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed.

[Appendix Q1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
One or a plurality of third switching games in which the player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including (round game) is entered into the second entrance (384) by the game ball, the third electric motor is used. A third game executing means (41) executed by controlling the accessory means (391), and
A first game determination means (41) that determines whether or not to execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball through a specific area (317) set in the game board (31).
In the fourth game (general game) showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41), the symbol display means (341) showing the determination result by the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol,
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games,
The symbol display control means (51) is specified by the symbol display means (341) in a blank period in which the first switching game, the second game, and the third game of the first game are not executed in the interval. A game machine characterized by executing the production of.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note Q1, a specific effect is executed in a blank period in which none of the first switching game, the second game, and the third game is executed. Here, since the first switching game, the second game, and the third game are not executed in the blank period, the game machine appears to be in progress even though the first game, which is advantageous to the player, is in progress. Then, no game is in progress. Therefore, there is a concern that the player will have time to spare until the blank period ends and the first switching game is started, which may reduce the interest of the game. On the other hand, by executing a specific effect in the blank period, it is possible to focus on the specific effect, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

[Appendix Q2]
The specific effect is a unique effect performed only in the blank period, or a rare effect having a low appearance frequency in the first switching game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game. The gaming machine described in Appendix Q1.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix Q2, the specific effect is a unique effect that is executed only in the blank period, or a rare effect that appears less frequently in the first switching game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game. As a result, in a blank period in which the interest of the game is likely to decline, a specific effect that is difficult to be executed outside the blank period or is executed only in the blank period is executed, so that it is possible to pay more attention to the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period.

[Appendix Q3]
The unique effect is a game ball that allows a game ball to enter the first ball entrance (376) in the time until the next first switching game is started, or in the next first switching game. The gaming machine according to Appendix Q2, which is a timer effect or a countdown effect indicating the time until the launch start timing of the machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix Q3, the unique effect as a specific effect is a timer effect or a countdown effect indicating the time until the start of the first switching game. By executing the timer effect or the countdown effect during the blank period, information that can grasp the launch start timing of the game ball is provided. Therefore, even if the player has stopped launching the game ball due to the blank period, the game ball enters the first entrance in the first switching game due to the delay in launching the game ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of punctures that are not balled. Further, by providing the information for grasping the launch start timing in the symbol display means in the blank period, the symbol display means can be focused on, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period.

[Appendix Q4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix Q2, wherein the unique effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the number of times of the first switching game that has not been executed in the first game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix Q4, the unique effect as a specific effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the number of unexecuted first switching games in the first game. By clearly indicating or suggesting the number of unexecuted first switching games in the blank period, information that can grasp or estimate the remaining number of first switching games is provided. Therefore, even if the number of times of the first switching game is not displayed at the start of the first game or the number of unexecuted first switching games is forgotten, the remaining number of times of the first switching game can be grasped or I can guess. Further, by providing the information that can grasp or estimate the remaining number of times of the first switching game in the symbol display means in the blank period, the symbol display means can be focused on, so that the decrease in the interest of the game in the blank period is suppressed. can.

[Appendix Q5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix Q2, wherein the unique effect is a player-participation type mini-game effect.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix Q5, the unique effect as a specific effect is a player-participation type mini-game effect. By executing the player participation type mini-game production in the blank period, it is possible to concentrate the player on the mini-game, so even if the blank period is long due to the occurrence of a flat tire or the like, the blank period It is possible to effectively prevent the player from having time to spare. As a result, the decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed.

[Appendix Q6]
The rare effect is the same as or similar to the definite effect that clearly indicates in the fourth game that the determination result by the first game determination means (41) executes the first game, or the first. 4 The gaming machine according to Appendix Q2, which is characterized in that it is an effect for a rare character whose appearance frequency is low in a game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix Q6, the rare effect as a specific effect is the same as or similar to the final effect that clearly indicates that the first game in the fourth game is executed, or a rare character effect. .. By performing these effects as rare effects in the symbol display means in a blank period, an opportunity to visually recognize an effect that is normally rarely visible is given. Therefore, by paying attention to the symbol display unit in the blank period. The decline in the interest of the game during the blank period is suppressed.

[Appendix R1]
The first entrance (376), which allows the entry of game balls, and
The first restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is restricted and the first allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry port (376) is permitted. 1st electric accessory means (371) to switch between
The first switching game (electric function opening / closing game) in which the first restricted state is switched to the first permissible state and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the first restricted state is switched is executed one or more times. A first game executing means (41) that executes a game (a game per normal figure) by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means (371) based on the establishment of the first specific condition.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port (384) different from the first entry opening (376).
A second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is restricted, and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry port (384) is permitted. 2nd electric accessory means (381) to switch between
The first game (small hit game) including the second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second permissible state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the second restricted state is switched to the second restricted state. A second execution is performed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means (381) based on the establishment of the second specific condition that can be established when the game ball enters the entrance (376). Game execution means (41) and
A third ball entry port (394), which is different from the first ball entry port (376) and the second ball entry port (384), is capable of entering a game ball.
A third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is restricted, and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entry port (394) is permitted. 3rd electric accessory means (391) to switch between
One or a plurality of third switching games in which the player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of the third specific condition, which is established when the third game (big hit game) including (round game) is entered into the second entrance (384) by the game ball, the third electric motor is used. A third game executing means (41) executed by controlling the accessory means (391), and
A first game determination means (41) that determines whether or not to execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball through a specific area (317) set in the game board (31).
In the fourth game (general game) showing the determination result in the first game determination means (41), the symbol display means (341) in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed.
The symbol display control means (51) that controls the display content of the symbol display means (341), and the symbol display control means (51).
Equipped with
The third game executing means (41) is a case where the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means (41) based on the establishment of the first specific condition. The third game is executed at the interval between the first switching games,
The first game determining means (41) determines the number of executions (for example, 1 to 7 times) of the first switching game to be executed in the first game when it is determined to execute the first game. ,
The symbol display control means (51) combines the decorative symbols that suggest the number of times the first switching game is executed in the first game determined by the first game determination means (41) with the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is stopped and displayed on the effective line set in (341).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix R1, when the determination result of whether or not to execute the first game is to execute the first game, in the fourth game showing the determination result, the first switching game in the first game The combination of decorative symbols suggesting the number of executions is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Thereby, the player can grasp or estimate the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game based on the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the fourth game. Therefore, in consideration of the number of times the first switching game is executed, which is recognized or estimated based on the combination of the stop display on the symbol display means in the fourth game, whether or not the first switching game is continued in the first game is a hobby. Because it can be enjoyed, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix R2]
When the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determination means (41) is that the symbol display control means (51) executes the first game, the first game Described in Appendix R1, characterized in that the combination of the decorative symbols indicating the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in the above is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol display means (341). Pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix R2, when it is a determination result of executing the first game, the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in the first game is specified in the symbol display means in the fourth game. The combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the player can recognize the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game in the first game based on the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the fourth game. Therefore, when the first switching game of the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game recognized based on the combination of the stop display on the symbol display means in the fourth game is completed, the stop display is displayed on the symbol display means in the fourth game. You can enjoy the progress of various games such as the 4th game while expecting that the 1st switching game will be executed more times than the minimum expected number of times specified by the combination of the decorative symbols. Will be done.

[Appendix R3]
When the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determination means (41) is that the symbol display control means (51) executes the first game, the first game As a combination of the decorative symbols that clearly indicate the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in, a number corresponding to the minimum expected number of times is doublet on the effective line of the symbol display means (341). The gaming machine according to Appendix R2, which is characterized in that it is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix R3, when it is a determination result of executing the first game, the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in the first game is specified in the symbol display means in the fourth game. As a combination of decorative patterns, the numbers corresponding to the minimum expected number of times are stopped and displayed. As described above, the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the fourth game has the number corresponding to the minimum number of doublets, which makes it easy to grasp the minimum expected number of times.

[Appendix R4]
When the determination result of whether or not the first game is executed by the first game determination means (41) is that the symbol display control means (51) executes the first game, the first game As a combination of the decorative symbols that clearly indicates the minimum number of executions of the first switching game expected in, the combination of alphabets corresponding to the minimum number of times is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol display means (341). The gaming machine according to the appendix R2, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix R4, when it is a determination result of executing the first game, the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in the first game is specified in the symbol display means in the fourth game. As a combination of decorative patterns, the combination of alphabets corresponding to the minimum expected number of times is stopped and displayed. In this way, when the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the fourth game is a combination of alphabets corresponding to the minimum expected number of times in the first switching game, the minimum expected number of times in the first switching game is compared with the number doublets. However, compared to the case where the minimum expected number of times is specified by complicated symbols or unfamiliar symbols, it is easier to grasp the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game because the alphabet is familiar. become. Also, in the case of a combination of alphabets, it is difficult to grasp the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game compared to the doublet of numbers, while the minimum expectation of the first switching game is compared with complicated symbols and unfamiliar symbols. Since it is easy to grasp the number of times, it is possible to give appropriate difficulty in grasping the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game. This also makes it possible to enjoy estimating the minimum expected number of times in the first switching game.

[Appendix R5]
The symbol display control means (51) combines the decorative symbols that clearly indicate the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in the first game with the effective line of the symbol display means (341). The minimum expectation that the symbol display means (341) clearly indicates or suggests the minimum expected number of executions of the first switching game expected in the first game, in addition to the decorative symbol, when the stop display is displayed on the top. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions R1 to R4, wherein the number-of-times image is displayed on the symbol display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix R5, when it is a determination result of executing the first game, the combination of decorative symbols indicating the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the fourth game. At the same time, an image of the minimum expected number of times that clearly indicates or suggests the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game not only by the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the fourth game but also by the minimum expected number of times image. Therefore, even a player who does not know the correspondence between the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the fourth game and the minimum expected number of times of the first switching game can perform the first switching game based on the minimum expected number of times image. You can grasp the minimum expected number of times.

[Appendix R6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions R1 to R5, wherein the selection rate is set lower as the first game has a larger number of executions of the first switching game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix R6, the selection rate is set lower as the first switching game has a larger number of executions of the first switching game. On the other hand, as the number of times the first switching game is executed increases, the number of times the third game is executed during the execution of the first game increases, so that the privilege that the player can acquire may increase. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting to obtain a determination result in which the number of times the first switching game is executed is large.

10: Game machine 313: General winning opening 341: Symbol display unit 35: Specified passage 351: Electric service winning opening 352: V winning opening 353: Variable winning opening 354: Out opening 36: Main display unit 361 : Ordinary symbol display unit 362: Normal symbol game hold number display unit 363: Special symbol display unit 37: Electric service winning device 371: Electric service winning door 372: Electric service winning unit 373: Guide unit 374: Recessed portion 375: Upper opening 376 : Electric service winning port 37a: Electric service winning sensor 38: V winning device 381: V winning door 382: V winning unit 383: Upper opening 384: V winning port 385: Normal winning port 386: Switching unit 38a: V winning sensor 38b : Normal winning sensor 39: Variable winning device 391: Variable winning door 392: Variable winning section 393: Upper opening 394: Variable winning opening 39a: Variable winning sensor 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

The first entrance where a game ball can enter, and
A first electric function that switches between a first restricted state in which the entry of a game ball into the first entry port is restricted and a first allowable state in which entry of a game ball into the first entry opening is permitted. Means and
The first specific game in which the first switching game of switching from the first restricted state to the first permissible state and switching to the first restricted state when the first predetermined condition is satisfied is executed one or more times. A first game executing means executed by controlling the operation of the first electric accessory means based on the satisfaction of the condition, and
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a second entry port different from the first entry opening,
A second electric function that switches between a second restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry slot is restricted and a second allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry slot is permitted. Means and
A second game including a second switching game in which the second restricted state is switched to the second allowable state and the second predetermined condition is switched to the second restricted state is transferred to the first entrance. A second game executing means executed by controlling the operation of the second electric accessory means based on the establishment of a second specific condition that can be established triggered by the entry of the game ball.
It is possible to enter a game ball, and a third entry port different from the first entry opening and the second entry opening,
A third electric function that switches between a third restricted state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entrance is restricted and a third allowable state in which the entry of the game ball into the third entrance is permitted. Means and
A third including a third switching game in which the player can be given a privilege by switching from the third restricted state to the third allowable state and switching to the third restricted state when the third predetermined condition is satisfied. A third game execution means for executing a game by controlling the third electric accessory means based on the establishment of a third specific condition that is established when the game ball enters the second entrance. When,
Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area set on the game board, it is determined whether or not to execute the first game, and when it is determined that the first game is to be executed, the first game is executed. A first game determining means for determining the number of times the first switching game is executed in a game, and
A first switching game number suggesting means that suggests the number of times the first switching game is executed in the first game, which is determined by the first game determining means,
The first switching game in the first game determined by the first game determining means rather than the number of executions of the first switching game in the first game suggested by the first switching game number suggesting means. A notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect that announces that the number of times of execution is large,
Equipped with
When the first switching game is executed a plurality of times as the first game by the first game executing means based on the establishment of the first specific condition, the third game executing means is between the first switching games. A gaming machine characterized in that the third game is executed at the interval of.

Images